Siemens HiPath 3000 V3.0 or later Gigaset M1 Professional Service manual

HiPath 3000 V5.0
HiPath 5000 V5.0
Service Manual
ESHB.50.045.05.02.01
02/05
*1PP31003-H3550-S403-4-7620*
1P P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620
The information provided in this document contains merely general descriptions or
characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as
described or which may change as a result of further development of the products.
An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly
agreed in the terms of contract. The trademarks used are owned by Siemens AG or
their respective owners.
The device conforms to the EU directive 1999/5/EG, as attested by the CE
mark.
This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certified
environmental management system (ISO 14001). This process ensures
that energy consumption and the use of primary raw materials are kept to
a minimum, thus reducing waste production.
 Siemens AG 2005
Siemens Communications,
Hofmannstraße 51, D-81359 München, Germany
Reference No.: P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620
Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved.
●
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
Contents
0
1 Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Structure of this Electronic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Electrical Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.4.1 Safety Information: Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4.2 Safety Information: Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.4.3 Safety information: Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.4.4 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.4.5 What To Do in an Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.4.6 Reporting Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.4.7 Safety Information for Australia (For Australia Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5 Privacy and Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.6 Information on the Intranet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
2 System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2.2 Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3000 Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.2.1 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.2.2 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.2.3 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2.4 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.2.5 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.2.6 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2.7 Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.3 System Environment of the HiPath 3000 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.3.1 HiPath 3800 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.3.2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2.3.3 HiPath 3550 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.2.3.4 HiPath 3350 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.2.3.5 HiPath 3500 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.2.3.6 HiPath 3300 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.3 HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.4 System-Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000, HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.5 Technical Specifications for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.6 Interface-to-Interface Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.7 Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000/5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.8 Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.8.1 CE Compliance (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
0-1
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
2.8.2 Compliance with US and Canadian Standards (For U.S. and Canada Only) . . .
2.8.2.1 FCC Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.1.1 FCC Rules, Part 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.1.2 FCC Rules, Part 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.2 Industry Canada Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.2.1 REN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.2.2 Equipment Attachment Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3 SAFETY International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.1 Electrical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.2 Mechanical Operating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-27
2-30
2-30
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-32
3 Boards for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Central Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.2.1 CBCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.2.2 CBRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.2.3 CBCPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.2.4 CBSAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.2.5 CMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.2.6 CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.2.7 CR8N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.2.8 CUC and CUCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3.2.9 CUP and CUPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.2.10 DBSAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.2.11 IMODN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.2.12 LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.13 LIMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.2.14 LUNA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
3.2.15 MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.2.16 PSUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
3.2.17 UPSC-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.2.18 UPSC-DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
3.2.19 UPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.3 Peripheral Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.3.1 DIU2U (For U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
3.3.2 DIUN2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3.3.3 HXGM3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3.3.4 HXGS3, HXGR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
3.3.5 IVML8, IVML24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3.3.6 IVMNL, IVMN8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
3.3.7 IVMP8 (not for U.S.), IVMP8R (not for U.S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
3.3.8 IVMS8, IVMS8R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
3.3.9 PBXXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
3.3.10 SLA8N (not for U.S.), SLA16N, SLA24N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
0-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
3.3.11 SLC16 (Not for U.S.), SLC16N (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.12 SLCN (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.13 SLMA, SLMA8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.14 SLMO2, SLMO8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.15 SLMO8 (Not for U.S.), SLMO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.16 SLU8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.17 SLU8R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.18 STLS2 (Not for U.S.), STLS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.19 STLS4R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.20 STLSX2, STLSX4, STLSX4R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.21 STMD3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.22 STMD8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.23 STMI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.24 TIEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.25 TLA2 (Not for U.S.), TLA4 (Not for U.S.), TLA8 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.26 TLA4R (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.27 TM2LP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.28 TMAMF (for selected countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.29 TMC16 (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.30 TMCAS (for selected countries only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.31 TMDID (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.32 TMDID8 (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.33 TMEW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.34 TMGL4 (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.35 TMGL4R (for U.S. only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.36 TMGL8 (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.37 TML8W (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.38 TMQ4 (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.39 TMST1 (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.40 TMS2 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.41 TST1 (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.42 TS2 (Not for U.S.), TS2R (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.43 4SLA (Not for U.S.), 8SLA, 16SLA (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.44 8SLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 ALUM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 AMOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 ANI4 (for selected countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 ANI4R (for selected countries only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Announcement and Music Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 EVM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.7 EXMNA (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.8 GEE8 (not for U.S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.9 GEE12 (nor for U.S.), GEE16 (not for U.S.), GEE50 (not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . .
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-139
3-156
3-163
3-173
3-183
3-189
3-190
3-191
3-198
3-200
3-205
3-211
3-221
3-227
3-242
3-244
3-246
3-253
3-257
3-262
3-272
3-277
3-280
3-284
3-286
3-288
3-290
3-293
3-295
3-298
3-305
3-307
3-312
3-315
3-317
3-317
3-321
3-323
3-327
3-329
3-332
3-334
3-336
3-337
0-3
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.4.12
3.4.13
3.4.14
3.4.15
3.4.16
3.4.17
3.4.18
3.4.19
HOPE (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPAL and OPALR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFT1 (Not for U.S.), PFT4 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STBG4 (For France Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRB, STRBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V24/1 (not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V.24 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V.24 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-339
3-341
3-343
3-346
3-350
3-355
3-356
3-361
3-363
3-364
4 Installing HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Installing HiPath 3800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.3 Installing HiPath 3800 (Standalone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.3.1 Selecting the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.3.1.1 For U.S. only: AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.3.2 Unpacking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.3.3 Setting up the System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.3.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.3.3.2 Setting Up a Single Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.3.3.3 Stacking Two Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.3.3.4 Setting Up a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.3.4 Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.3.4.1 Not for U.S.: Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.3.4.2 For U.S. Only: Grounding the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.2.3.5 Checking the Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.4 Installing HiPath 3800 (19-Inch Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2.4.1 Selecting the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2.4.1.1 For U.S. only: AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.2.4.2 Unpacking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.2.4.3 Mounting System Cabinets in the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.2.4.3.1 Mounting a System Cabinet using Support and Angle Brackets. . . . . . . 4-25
4.2.4.4 Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.2.4.5 Checking the Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.2.5 Installing Boards (Configuration Notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5.1 Board Slots in the Basic and Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.5.2 Inserting or Removing Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.2.5.3 Mounting Connector Panels (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.2.5.4 Installing the SIVAPAC-SIPAC Board Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.2.5.5 Initializing the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.2.5.6 Distribution of the PCM Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.2.5.7 Static Traffic Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
0-4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
4.2.6 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.2.6.1 Backplane of the Basic Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.2.6.2 Expansion Cabinet Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.2.6.3 Connecting Cables Between the Basic and Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.2.6.4 Connecting Peripherals to the SIVAPAC Connector on the Backplane . . . 4-56
4.2.6.5 Connecting Peripherals to the Connector Panels with RJ45 Jacks . . . . . . . 4-59
4.2.6.6 For U.S. only: Connecting Peripherals to the Connector Panels with
CHAMP Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.2.6.7 Connecting Peripherals to the Connector Panels with
SIPAC 1 SU Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.2.7 Using an External Main Distribution Frame or External Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.2.7.1 Using an External Main Distribution Frame MDFU-E S30805-U5283-X . . . 4-65
4.2.7.1.1 Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (MDFU-E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.2.7.1.2 Laying the Line Network and Jumpers on the MDFU-E. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.2.7.2 Inserting the External Patch Panel S30807K6143-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.2.7.2.1 Installing the Patch Panel in a 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.2.7.2.2 Connecting the Line Network to the External Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.2.7.3 Inserting External S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.2.7.3.1 Installing the S0 Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.2.7.3.2 Connecting Lines to the External S0 Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.2.7.4 For U.S. only: Connecting Network Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.2.8 Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBSAP . . . . . . 4-79
4.2.9 Connecting Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.2.10 Making Trunk and Networking Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.2.11 Performing a Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.3 Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.3.1 Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
4.3.2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4.3.3 Installing HiPath 3750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4.3.3.1 Selecting the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.3.3.1.1 For U.S. only: AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
4.3.3.2 Unpacking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4.3.3.3 Install MDFU or MDFU-E (not for USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
4.3.3.4 Setting up the System Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4.3.3.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
4.3.3.4.2 Removing the Cabinet Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
4.3.3.4.3 Setting Up a Single Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.3.3.4.4 Mounting a One-Cabinet System on the Wall (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . 4-93
4.3.3.4.5 Stacking Two Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
4.3.3.4.6 For U.S. only: Mounting Two Cabinets Stacked on the Wall . . . . . . . . 4-98
4.3.3.4.7 Setting Up a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4.3.3.4.8 Setting Up a Stacked Three-Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
4.3.3.4.9 For U.S. only: Installing the Seismic Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4.3.3.5 Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
0-5
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
4.3.3.5.1 Not for U.S.: Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.5.2 For U.S. only: Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.6 Checking the Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.7 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.7.1 Backplanes on the “8-Slot” Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.7.2 Connection between the MDFU or MDFU-E and Backplane . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.8 Laying the Line Network and Setting Jumpers on the MDFU or
MDFU-E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3.8.1 For U.S. only: Connecting Network Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Installing HiPath 3700 (19-Inch Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.1 Selecting the Installation Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.1.1 For U.S. only: AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.2 Unpacking the Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.3 Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.3.1 Removing the Cabinet Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.3.2 Mounting the System Cabinet with Angle Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.4 Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.5 Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.6 Checking the Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.7 Connecting the Cable to the Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.7.1 Backplanes on the “8-Slot” Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.7.2 Connecting the Patch Panel and Backplane (in the
19-Inch Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4.8 Connecting the Line Network to the Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBCPR . . . . .
4.3.6 Configuration notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.6.1 Inserting or Removing Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.7 Connecting Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.8 Making trunk connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.9 Performing a Visual Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300. . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Installing HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.1 Selecting the Installation Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.1.1 For U.S. only: AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.2 Unpacking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.3 Not for U.S.: Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (HiPath 3550 only) . . .
4.4.3.4 Removing the System Housing Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.5 Attaching the System to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.6 Grounding the System and the Main Distribution Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.7 Installing the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.8 Laying the Line Network and Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.9 Attaching Ferrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-6
4-106
4-109
4-111
4-112
4-112
4-117
4-122
4-126
4-127
4-128
4-128
4-128
4-129
4-129
4-131
4-133
4-134
4-136
4-137
4-137
4-142
4-150
4-151
4-152
4-160
4-161
4-161
4-162
4-163
4-163
4-164
4-165
4-165
4-167
4-168
4-168
4-170
4-172
4-173
4-175
4-176
4-179
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
4.4.3.10 Configuration notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.11 Connecting Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.12 Making trunk connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3.13 Performing a Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Installing HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-Inch Housing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.1 Installation Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.2 Selecting the Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.2.1 For U.S. only: AC outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.3 Unpacking the Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.4 Not for U.S.: Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall . . . . .
4.4.4.5 Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.6 Grounding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.7 Installing the Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.8 Connecting Cables and the Line Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.9 Configuration notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.10 Connecting Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.11 Making trunk connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4.12 Performing a Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-181
4-185
4-185
4-185
4-186
4-186
4-187
4-187
4-188
4-189
4-190
4-192
4-193
4-194
4-195
4-198
4-198
4-198
5 Starting Up HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Starting Up HiPath 3800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2 Supplying the System with Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2.1 Assigning Station Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Carrying Out a System Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.4 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.5 Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.6 Customer-Specific Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.7 Performing a System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3 Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3.1 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3.2 Supplying the System with Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3.2.1 Assigning Station Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.3.3 Carrying Out a System Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3.4 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type . . . . . 5-15
5.3.5 Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.3.6 Customer-Specific Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.7 Performing a System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.4 Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.4.1 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.4.2 Supplying the System With Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.4.2.1 Assigning Station Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.4.3 Carrying Out a System Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4.4 Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type . . . . . 5-23
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
0-7
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
5.4.5 Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.4.6 Customer-Specific Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.4.7 Performing a System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
6 HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3 Software Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.4 Notes on Open Numbering in a HiPath 3000/5000 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.5 Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.5.1 Prerequisites for a Single-PC Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.6 HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.6.1 Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.6.2 Integrating the HiPath 5000 Server in the Customer LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.6.3 HiPath 5000 Installing Standard Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.6.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.6.3.2 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.6.3.3 Starting the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.6.4 Installing HiPath ComScendo Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.6.4.1 Checking the Installation of the HiPath ComScendo Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.6.5 Installing HiPath Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.6.6 Installing the TAPI Service Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.6.7 Installing the HiPath Inventory Server Separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.8 Verifying Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.6.8.1 Verifying the Start and Function of HiPath 5000 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.6.8.2 Checking Entries in the Event Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.7 Modifying HiPath 5000 Components (Retro-Fitting, Updating, Deleting) . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.8 Performing Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.9 Optimizing Operating System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.10 Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6.10.1 Configuring HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.10.2 Configuring HiPath 5000 Server as a Central Administration Unit in an
IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.10.2.1 Creating a Central Customer Database for IP Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.10.2.2 Adding Individual Nodes for IP Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.11 HiPath Manager PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6.12 GetAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.12.1 Parameters for Call Data Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.13 Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
7 Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Starting HiPath 3800 as a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-8
7-1
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
7.3.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.2 Procedure for Installation and Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-8
7-8
7-8
8 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.3 Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.1 Products and Components subject to Mandatory Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.2 Grace Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3.3 License Failure Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3.4 Performing Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4 Licensing Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4.1 HiPath 3000 as a Standalone System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4.2 Networked HiPath 3000 Systems without HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.4.3 Networked HiPath 3000 Systems with HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.4 Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.4.5 Combining Standalone Systems (HiPath 3000) to Form a Network with
HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8.4.6 Removing a Standalone System from a Network with HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.4.7 Replacing License-sensitive Hardware (Changing the MAC Address) . . . . . . . 8-23
8.5 Licensing optiClient Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.5.1 optiClient Attendant V7.0 Connected to HiPath 3000 V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.5.2 optiClient Attendant V7.0 Connected to HiPath 3000 < V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.5.3 Upgrading optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 As Part of an Upgrade to
HiPath 3000 V5.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.5.4 Upgrade optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 on HiPath 3000 < V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.5.5 Changing Licenses on an optiClient Attendant V7.0 As Part of an
Upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
8.6 Protection Against License Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
9 Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Expanding HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.1 Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.2 Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.3 Connecting a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2.4 ECR with HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 (not for U.S. and Canada) . .
9-1
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-4
9-6
9-8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
0-9
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
9.2.4.1 ECR Control, Display, and Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.2.4.2 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.2.4.3 Installation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.2.4.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.2.4.4.1 Installing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
9.2.4.5 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries and EPSU2-R . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.2.4.5.1 Connecting a Fan (if needed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.2.5 Connecting Special Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.5.1 Entrance Telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.2.5.1.1 Information on Third-Party Entrance Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
9.2.5.2 Connecting Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
9.3 Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.3.1 Hardware Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
9.3.2 Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
10 Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 optiPoint 500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2.1 optiPoint 500 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.2.1.1 optiPoint 500 entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.2.1.2 optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.2.1.3 optiPoint 500 basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2.1.4 optiPoint 500 standard, optiPoint 500 standard SL (For U.S. Only) . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.1.5 optiPoint 500 advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.2.1.6 Connection Requirements for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.2.1.7 Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.2.1.8 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.2.1.9 USB 1.1 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10.2.2 optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.2.2.1 optiPoint Key Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.2.2.2 optiPoint BLF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.2.2.3 Programming Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10.2.2.4 Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.2.3 optiPoint 500 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.2.3.1 optiPoint Analog Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
10.2.3.2 optiPoint ISDN Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10.2.3.3 optiPoint Phone Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10.2.3.4 optiPoint Acoustic Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.2.3.5 optiPoint Recorder Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10.2.3.6 Possible optiPoint Adapter Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.2.3.7 Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10.2.4 Maximum Configuration for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices and
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10.3 optiPoint 600 office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10.4 optiLog 4me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
0-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
10.5 optiset E Privacy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6 IP Telephony (Voice over IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1 optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.1 optiPoint 410 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.1.1 optiPoint 410 entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.1.2 optiPoint 410 economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.1.3 optiPoint 410 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.1.4 optiPoint 410 advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.2 optiPoint 420 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.2.1 optiPoint 420 economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.2.2 optiPoint 420 economy plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.2.3 optiPoint 420 standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.2.4 optiPoint 420 advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.3 Connection and Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.3.1 Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.4 optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 Add-On Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.4.1 optiPoint SLK Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.4.2 optiPoint 410 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.4.3 Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.1.5 Use of optiPoint 500 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.2 optiClient 130 V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.3 HiPath AP 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4 HG 1500: Determining the Number of HG 1500 Boards Required . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.1 Static Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.2 Dynamic Configuration Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.2.1 Gateway channels (DSP channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.2.2 MOH Channels (G.711, G.723, G.729) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.2.3 IP Networking Channels (PBX Networking Channels). . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.2.4 DMC (Direct Media Connection) Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.2.5 ISDN Routing/PPP Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.2.6 Fax / Modem Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.3 Determining the Number of HG 1500 Boards Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.4 Sample Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.4.1 Calculation Example 1: 32 IP Networking Connections to
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.4.2 Calculation Example 2: 96 IP workpoint clients and 16
IP networking connections to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.4.3 Calculation Example 3: 200 IP Workpoint Clients and Internet
Access to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.4.4 Calculation Example 4: IP Networking Connections and Voice over
PPP (ISDN Routing) to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.4.5 Calculation Example 5: Virtual Private Network VPN . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.6.4.4.6 Calculation Example 6: Connecting teleworkers via VPN . . . . . . . . .
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-37
10-38
10-40
10-41
10-41
10-43
10-45
10-47
10-49
10-49
10-51
10-53
10-55
10-57
10-58
10-60
10-60
10-61
10-63
10-63
10-64
10-65
10-66
10-66
10-68
10-68
10-69
10-70
10-70
10-71
10-71
10-72
10-75
10-75
10-76
10-77
10-79
10-80
10-82
0-11
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
10.6.4.4.7 Calculation Example 7: Virtual Private Network VPN with
Customer Specifications: 1000 Kbps Bandwidth for Data Transfer,
Remaining Bandwidth for Voice Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
10.6.4.5 Notes on the Maintenance of Gateway Channels HiPath 3000/5000
V5.0 or later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
10.7 optiPoint Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
10.7.1 External AC Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
10.7.1.1 Local Power Supply for optiset E, optiPoint 500 and
optiPoint 600 office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
10.7.1.2 AC Adapter for optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
10.7.2 Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
10.8 Attendant console versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
10.8.1 optiPoint Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
10.8.2 optiClient Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
10.9 Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
10.9.1 Gigaset S1 professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
10.9.2 Gigaset SL1 professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
10.9.3 Gigaset M1 professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100
10.9.4 Gigaset active M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
10.9.5 Gigaset active EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
10.9.6 Logging Mobile Telephones On To the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
10.9.6.1 Opening the HiPath 3000 Login Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
10.9.6.2 Logging On the Mobile Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-105
10.9.6.3 Checking the Login Status of the Mobile Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
10.9.6.4 Replacing, Locking, and Logging Off a Mobile Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
10.10 Analog Telephones for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-107
10.11 ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
11 HiPath Cordless Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.4 Technical Data for Base Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.5 Power-Related Capacity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.6 Multi-SLC and System-Wide Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.7 Planning Notes for Networked HiPath 3000 Systems Featuring Network-Wide
Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
12 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Service and Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Backing Up the Customer Database (CDB Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1.1 Customer Data Backup Without HiPath Software Manager . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1.1.1 Automatic Customer Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1.1.2 Manual Customer Data Backup with HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-12
12-1
12-1
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-3
12-5
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
12.2.1.2 Customer Data Backup with HiPath Software Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.1.3 CDB Treatment When Replacing Central HiPath 3000 Hardware . . . . . . . 12-6
12.2.2 Effects of Hardware Changes on Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.2.2.1 Inserting and Removing HiPath 3000 Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.2.2.2 Exchanging Workpoint Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.2.3 Relocate/Transfer Application Processor Software (APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.2.3.1 APS Replacement/Transfer for HiPath 3000 Systems Without
HiPath Software Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.2.3.1.1 Transferring an APS of HiPath 3000 by Replacing the MMC . . . . . . 12-11
12.2.3.1.2 APS transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.2.3.2 APS Transfer for HiPath 3000 Systems With HiPath Software
Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.2.4 Upgrading HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.2.5 Determining System Information and Installed Software Components
(HiPath Inventory Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
12.2.6 Backing Up System Components (Backup Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.2.7 HiPath User Management (not yet released) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.3 Guided Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.3.1 Diagnosis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.3.1.1 Recording HiPath 3000 Board Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.3.1.1.1 Central Control Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.3.1.1.2 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12.3.1.1.3 Peripheral Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12.3.1.2 Recording HiPath 3000 Trunk Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.3.1.3 Recording Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12.3.1.4 Recording the Status of the HiPath 3000 V.24 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
12.3.1.5 Trace Options for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
12.3.1.6 HiPath Manager PCM Trace Monitor for HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.3.1.6.1 HiPath Manager PCM Trace Monitor Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
12.3.1.6.2 Starting and Exiting the Trace Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.3.1.6.3 The Screen Layout of the Trace Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
12.3.1.6.4 General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
12.3.1.6.5 Exporting Trace Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12.3.1.7 Eventlog for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
12.3.1.8 Testing Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
12.3.1.9 Event Viewer for HiPath 5000 (Eventlog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
12.3.1.10 HiPath 5000State Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
12.3.1.11 HiPath Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44
12.3.1.12 Licensing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
12.3.1.12.1 Analysis Using Customer License Manager (CLM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
12.3.1.12.2 Analysis Using Customer License Agent (CLA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
12.3.1.13 Analysis Using HiPath Software Manager and HiPath Inventory
Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46
12.3.2 HiPath 3000 Error Messages (Entries in the Eventlog for HiPath 3000) . . . . 12-48
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
0-13
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
12.3.3 HiPath 5000 Error Messages (Event Viewer Entries for HiPath 5000) . . . . . .
12.4 Correcting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Automatic Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 Manager E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.3 Manual Error Correction With HiPath 3000 Manager E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 Remote Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.1 HiPath 3000 Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.2 HiPath 5000 Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.3 Remote System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.3.1 Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 with HiPath 3000 Manager E . . .
12.5.3.2 DTMF Remote Administration of HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.4 Remote Correction of System Software (APS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.5 Remote Error Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.6 Controlled Release of a Remote Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.7 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.7.1 Remote System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.7.2 Remote Administration of Plus Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.7.3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.1 Access Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.1.1 Logon With User Name and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.1.2 Pre-Determined User Groups and Their Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.1.3 System Access Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.1.4 Customer Data Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2 Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2.1 Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2.1.1 Format Identification and Command Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2.2 Issuing and Saving Log Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-57
12-70
12-70
12-70
12-71
12-72
12-73
12-74
12-74
12-74
12-75
12-75
12-76
12-77
12-77
12-77
12-77
12-78
12-79
12-79
12-79
12-82
12-84
12-85
12-86
12-86
12-86
12-89
13 IP Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 IP Network Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 General Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.2 H.323 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.3 Standards Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.4 QoS - Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 Network analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13-1
13-2
13-2
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-6
A System Programming Codes (Expert Mode Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B Codes for Activating/Deactivating Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C IP Protocols and Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.1 HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2 HiPath 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3 HiPath ComScendo Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.4 HiPath FM Managed Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-14
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-5
C-7
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
HG 1500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
optiClient 130 V5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
optiPoint 400, optiPoint 410, optiPoint 420, optiPoint 600 office. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
HiPath AP 1120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Middleware for Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
D Identifying System Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 HiPath 3800 Board Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.2 HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 Board Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.3 HiPath 3550 Board Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D.4 HiPath 3350 Board Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D.5 HiPath 3500 Board Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.6 HiPath 3300 Board Power Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D.7 Workpoint Clients, Key Modules and Adapter Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D.8 Checking Whether the Output of a Power Supply Unit is Sufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D.9 Identifying the Primary System Power Requirement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W-1
Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y-1
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-1
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
0-15
hp3hp5shTOC.fm
Contents
0-16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Overview
1
Important Information
1.1
Overview
Service Manual, HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0: P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
(ESHB.50.045.05.02.01)
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
Structure of this Electronic Service Manual, page 1-2
Electrical Environment, page 1-4
Safety Information, page 1-5
●
Safety Information: Dangers
●
Safety Information: Warnings
●
Safety information: Cautions
●
General Information
●
What To Do in an Emergency
●
Reporting Accidents
●
Safety Information for Australia (For Australia Only)
Privacy and Data Security, page 1-14
Information on the Intranet, page 1-15
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-1
inform.fm
Important Information
Structure of this Electronic Service Manual
1.2
Structure of this Electronic Service Manual
Content and target group
This Electronic Service Manual (sSHB) provides information about the different systems of HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and later. The specifications contained therein only provide accompanying information and do not replace training.
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel are permitted to work on the system.
The information provided in this document contains merely general descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which
may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the relevant characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. The trademarks used are owned by Siemens AG or their respective owners.
Main topics of this manual
●
Chapter 2, “System Data” provides information on the current HiPath 3000/5000 version
and associated systems (characteristics, construction, system environment, capacity limits, technical data).
●
Chapter 3, “Boards for HiPath 3000” describes all of the boards used for HiPath 3000.
The hardware information (such as connection cables and NT connections) is presented
for each board.
●
The actions necessary for the standard installation (part of a standard system) of the different HiPath 3000 systems are described in Chapter 4, “Installing HiPath 3000”.
●
The procedures for the startup of the individual HiPath 3000/5000 components are described in Chapter 5, “Starting Up HiPath 3000”, Chapter 6, “HiPath 5000 Startup and
Administration” and Chapter 7, “Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway”.
●
Chapter 8, “Licensing” provides information about the HiPath License Management.
●
Information on supplementary equipment and expansions and on the procedure for upgrading HiPath 3000 systems are part of Chapter 9, “Expanding and Upgrading HiPath
3000”.
●
Chapter 10, “Workpoint Clients” contains the description of the workpoint clients supported.
●
Basic information about the operation of the HiPath Cordless Office are part of Chapter 11,
“HiPath Cordless Office”.
●
Chapter 12, “Service” describes the optional service and maintenance tasks and provides support for error detection and troubleshooting.
1-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Structure of this Electronic Service Manual
●
Introductory information on the subject of IP can be found in Chapter 13, “IP Fundamentals”.
●
The following appendices contain lists with programming codes, IP protocols, port numbers: Appendix A, “System Programming Codes (Expert Mode Codes)”, Appendix B,
“Codes for Activating/Deactivating Features” and Appendix C, “IP Protocols and
Port Numbers Used with HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0”.
●
Appendix D, “Identifying System Power Requirements” provides information about the
resource requirements of the boards and components of the HiPath 3000 systems.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-3
inform.fm
Important Information
Electrical Environment
1.3
Electrical Environment
HiPath telecommunication systems are approved for connection to TN-S power supply systems, but can also be connected to a TN-C-S power supply system in which the PEN conductor
is divided into a ground and a neutral wire. TN-S and TN-C-S systems are defined in the IEC
364-3 standard.
The device conforms to the EU directive 1999/5/EG, as attested by the CE
mark.
This device has been manufactured in accordance with our certified environmental management system (ISO 14001). This process ensures that energy consumption and the use of primary raw materials are kept to a minimum, thus reducing waste production.
1-4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
1.4
Safety Information
The following information is intended for authorized service personnel. Only authorized service
personnel are permitted to install and maintain the system.
Observe all safety regulations and read the warnings, cautions, and notes posted on the equipment. Familiarize yourself with emergency numbers.
Always consult a supervisor before starting work in conditions where the necessary safety precautions do not appear to be in place (such as in humid conditions or situations where there is
a risk of gas explosions).
Safety symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to indicate potential hazards:
7
Danger
This symbol warns that a situation may cause death or serious injury.
7
Warning
This symbol indicates hazards which may lead to serious injury.
7
Caution
This symbol indicates a risk of damage to hardware or software.
>
This symbol identifies useful information.
Additional symbols identifying sources of potential hazard
The following symbols are not generally used in the manual. They explain symbols that may
appear on equipment.
1
5
3
0
6
Electricity
Weight
Heat
Fire
Chemicals
4
ESD*
2
Laser
* electrostatically sensitive devices
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-5
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
1.4.1
Safety Information: Dangers
Grounding
Never operate systems that require a ground wire connection without a ground wire connected.
Connect the system to the ground wire correctly before starting up and connecting the stations.
Connecting an external battery pack, external batteries
Only use licensed battery packs and batteries.
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems
Potentially hazardous circuits are accessible in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19" systems.
These systems should therefore only be operated with closed housing.
Dangerous voltages
Voltages above 30 Vac (alternating current) or 60 Vdc (direct current) are dangerous.
Damage
●
Replace the power cable immediately if it shows any signs of damage.
●
Replace any damaged safety equipment (covers, labels and protective cables) immediately.
Accessories
Use only original accessories or components approved for the system. Failure to observe these
instructions may damage the equipment or even violate safety and EMC regulations.
System shutdown during maintenance work
Procedures to be observed are described in the relevant chapters.
1-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
Working on electrical circuits
●
Work on low-voltage electrical networks (100 to 240 Vac) must only be carried out by qualified personnel or authorized electrical engineers.
●
Do not work alone. Work with another person who knows the locations of the power-off
switches.
●
Never touch live wires that are not properly insulated.
●
Ensure that a machine cannot be powered on from another source or controlled from a different circuit breaker or disconnecting switch.
●
Before starting any work, check whether the corresponding circuits are still on power. Never take it for granted that all circuits have reliably been disconnected from the power supply
when a fuse or a main switch has been switched off.
●
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never install telephone wiring
during an electrical storm.
●
Expect leakage current from the telecommunications network.
●
When performing work on an open system, ensure that it is never left unsupervised.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-7
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
1.4.2
Safety Information: Warnings
Replacing the lithium battery
There is a risk of explosion if a lithium battery is not correctly replaced. It must only be replaced
by an identical battery or one recommended by the manufacturer.
Replacing the batteries (DC power supply)
Procedures to be observed are described in the relevant chapters.
Protective clothing and equipment
●
Do not wear loose clothing; tie back your hair while working on machines.
●
Never wear rings, watches, and other jewelry or even clothing with metal coating or rivets
when working with electrical circuits and components. These could cause injury and short
circuits.
●
Wear eye protection when you are working in any conditions that might be hazardous to
your eyes.
●
Always wear a hard hat where there is a risk of injury from falling objects.
General safety
●
The surface of a mirror is conductive. Do not touch powered circuits with a mirror. To do so
can cause personal injury and machine damage.
●
Disconnect all power before working near power supplies unless otherwise instructed by a
maintenance procedure.
●
Do not attempt to lift objects that you think are too heavy for you.
●
Never look directly at a laser beam.
1-8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
1.4.3
Safety information: Cautions
Voltage checks and measurements
●
Check the nominal voltage set for the equipment (operating instructions and type plate).
●
High voltages capable of causing shock are used in this equipment. Be extremely careful
when measuring high voltages and when servicing cards, panels, and boards while the
system is powered on.
Damage
Only use tools and equipment which are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment with visible
damage.
Protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD)
To protect electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD):
●
Wear a wristband before carrying out any work on PC boards and modules.
●
Transport PC boards only in electrostatic packaging.
●
Always place PC boards on a grounded surface before working on them.
●
Only use grounded soldering irons.
Laying cables
Lay cables so as to prevent any risk of them being damaged or causing accidents, such as tripping.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-9
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
1.4.4
General Information
Connecting lines
●
All cables and lines leaving a system cabinet must be shielded between the connection
point in the cabinet and, at the very least, the point at which they leave the cabinet.
Use a clip and pressure screw to contact all braided shields to the cabinet outlet. This also
applies to continuously connected service equipment.
●
Connect all cables to the specified connection points only.
Location of safety equipment
When the installation or maintenance is completed, replace all safety equipment in the correct
location.
Checking tools
Check your tools regularly. Only use intact tools.
Closing the housing cover
After maintenance and testing work has been completed, close all housing covers.
Condensation
Condensation may form if equipment is brought onto the operating premises from a cold environment. Wait until the temperature of the equipment has adjusted to the ambient temperature
and is completely dry before starting it up.
Wall mounting
Some walls (such as plasterboard walls) have a reduced load-bearing capacity. Before starting
wall mounting, check the load-bearing capacity of the walls.
Fire protection and EMC requirements
To ensure the legal fire protection and EMC requirements, operate the HiPath systems only
when closed. You may open the system only briefly for assembly and maintenance work.
1-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
Flammable materials
●
Do not store combustible gases or flammable materials in cabinets near the equipment installation site.
●
Do not store documents, descriptions, operating instructions, and similar flammable materials in the cabinet.
Workplace hazards
●
Ensure that the workplace is well lit.
●
A neat workplace helps reduce the risk of accidents.
Battery disposal
Batteries are also included with the telephones and the equipment. Do not
dispose of old or defective batteries along with normal household trash. Instead, drop them off at special sites intended for battery disposal. Observe
country-specific regulations.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-11
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
1.4.5
What To Do in an Emergency
Actions in emergencies
●
Remain calm in the event of an accident.
●
Disconnect the power before touching the victim.
●
If you do not know how to disconnect the power, use a nonconducting object, such as a
wooden broom handle, to push or pull the victim away from electrical contact.
First aid
●
Be familiar with first aid for electrical shock. Familiarity with the various resuscitation methods required for breathing/heartbeat restoration and burn treatment are essential in emergencies of this kind.
●
Administer resuscitation immediately if the person is not breathing (mouth-to-mouth or
mouth-to-nose).
●
If you are trained and certified, administer cardiac compression if the heart is not beating.
Calling for help
Immediately call an ambulance or the emergency doctor. Give details of the accident in the following order:
●
Where did the accident happen?
●
What happened?
●
How many people were injured?
●
What type of injuries were sustained?
●
Be prepared to assist the emergency services with any supplementary information they
may require.
1.4.6
Reporting Accidents
●
Report all accidents, "near accidents", and possible hazards to your manager to ensure
their causes are resolved as soon as possible.
●
Report any electric shock, no matter how minor.
1-12
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Safety Information
1.4.7
Safety Information for Australia (For Australia Only)
●
Music on Hold and paging devices must be connected to the HiPath 3000 system via an
ACA approved Line Isolation Unit.
●
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 must be installed near the mains socket outlet, which is powering the system. The mains socket shall be readily accessible. Integrity of the main socket
must be assured.
●
HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 may only be installed and maintained by authorized service
personnel.
●
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 must be earthed with a separate bonding earth, if the systems are powered by a UPS.
●
CE (customer equipment) does not continue to support emergency dialing after loss of
mains power, if battery back up and power fail switchover to emergency analogue phones
is not available.
●
HiPath 3000/5000 must always be programmed to allow the dialing of emergency numbers
(for example 000).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-13
inform.fm
Important Information
Privacy and Data Security
1.5
Privacy and Data Security
Handling personal data
This telephone system uses and processes personal data (as in call detail recording, telephone displays and customer data records).
In Germany, the processing and use of such data is subject to various regulations, including
those of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz, BDSG). Observe all applicable laws in other countries.
The objective of privacy legislation is to prevent infringements of an individual’s right to privacy
based on the use or misuse of personal data.
By protecting data against misuse during all stages of processing, privacy legislation also protects the material interests of the individual and of third parties.
Guidelines applicable to Siemens AG employees
Employees of Siemens AG are bound to safeguard trade secrets and personal data under the
terms of the company’s work rules.
In order to ensure that the statutory requirements during service – whether on-site or remote –
are consistently met, you should always observe the following regulations. This safeguards the
interests of the customer and offers added personal protection.
Guidelines governing the handling of data
A conscientious and responsible approach helps protect data and ensure privacy:
●
Ensure that only authorized persons have access to customer data.
●
Use the password features of the system with no exceptions. Never give passwords to an
unauthorized person orally or in writing.
●
Ensure that no unauthorized person can ever process (store, modify, transmit, disable or
delete) or use customer data.
●
Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to data media (such as backup diskettes or log printouts). Access should also be prevented during service calls as well as
when storing and transporting data.
●
Ensure that data media which are no longer required are completely destroyed. Ensure
that documents are not generally available.
●
Work closely with your customer contact; this promotes trust and reduces your workload.
1-14
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inform.fm
Important Information
Information on the Intranet
1.6
Information on the Intranet
Up-to-the-minute information on important topics is available on the Siemens intranet. Here is
a selection:
Table 1-1
Information on the Intranet
Contents
Languages
URL
Product Overview
Product descriptions
German
English
http://opus1.mchh.siemens.de:8080/
TopNet
Electronic Documentation on Com
ESY Products
Selection and download of the following:
●
Operating manuals
●
Administrator documentation
●
Service documentation
●
Sales documentation
German
English
French
Italian
Dutch
Portuguese
Spanish
https://netinfo2.icn.siemens.de/
edoku3/search_de.htm
List of “Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)” in the VD portal
Questions and answers for HiPath
customer scenarios: Keyword
“Solutions_Products_Services”
German
http://vd-infochannel.icn.siemens.de/
cfdocs/faq/start.cfm
Knowledge Management for Oper- English
ational Support and Services
KMOSS
Platform for the provision of service
information (successor to the Service Information System, SIS):
●
Tips & Tricks
●
Service information sorted according to products
https://kmoss.icn.siemens.de/livelink/
livelink.exe
TAC Advisor
English
Technical Assistance Center for enterprise and network partners:
●
Downloads
●
Software Maintenance Releases
(SMR)
●
Configuration notes and alerts
http://tac.fld.rolm.com/
Setting up tracing for the Feature German
server
English
Configuration notes and procedures
https://kmoss.icn.siemens.de/livelink/
livelink.exe/view/INF-02-000326
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
1-15
inform.fm
Important Information
Information on the Intranet
1-16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
Overview
2
System Data
2.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
HiPath 3000, page 2-2
●
Introduction, page 2-2 (electrical environment, systems)
●
Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3000 Systems, page 2-3:
– Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3800
– Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3750
– Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3550
– Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3350
– Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3700
– Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3500
– Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3300
●
System Environment of the HiPath 3000 Systems, page 2-12:
– HiPath 3800 System Environment
– HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 System Environment
– HiPath 3550 System Environment
– HiPath 3350 System Environment
– HiPath 3500 System Environment
– HiPath 3300 System Environment
HiPath 5000, page 2-18
System-Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000, HiPath 5000, page 2-21
Technical Specifications for HiPath 3000, page 2-23
Interface-to-Interface Ranges, page 2-24
Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000/5000, page 2-25
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000, page 2-26
●
CE Compliance (Not for U.S.), page 2-26
●
Compliance with US and Canadian Standards (For U.S. and Canada Only), page 2-26
●
SAFETY International, page 2-31
Environmental Conditions, page 2-32
●
Electrical Operating Conditions, page 2-32
●
Mechanical Operating Conditions, page 2-32
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-1
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2
HiPath 3000
2.2.1
Introduction
Electrical environment
HiPath 3000 is intended for use in dwellings, businesses, and industry. When the system is operated in an industrial environment, additional measures may be necessary for ensuring immunity from electromagnetic radiation (refer to Section 2.9).
HiPath 3000 systems
This service manual contains information on all HiPath 3000 systems. Information on marketing
individual models in different countries can be obtained at the responsible locations.
●
System for standalone installation and for installation in 19-inch cabinets:
–
●
●
HiPath 3800
Systems for standalone installation (HiPath 3750 only) and wall mounting:
–
HiPath 3750
–
HiPath 3550
–
HiPath 3350
Systems for installation in 19-inch cabinets
–
HiPath 3700
–
HiPath 3500
–
HiPath 3300
Information on the capacity limits of the different HiPath 3000 systems is provided in Table 2-7.
2-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.2
Design and Dimensions of the HiPath 3000 Systems
2.2.2.1
Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3800
Two configurations
Depending on the requirements, HiPath 3800 can be used as:
●
a single-cabinet system (basic cabinet BC)
●
a two-cabinet system (BC + expansion cabinet EC)
Design
The basic cabinet BC has nine slots and the expansion cabinet EC has thirteen slots for peripheral boards. The common control board CBSAP has a fixed slot (slot 6, only in the BC).
Depending on your requirements, up to three LUNA2 power supply units can be used in the
basic cabinet BC and up to four in the expansion cabinet EC.
Peripheral devices can be connected to the HiPath 3800 in a number of different ways:
●
SIVAPAC connectors are available on the backplane for connecting the external main distribution frame MDFU-E using CABLUs (prefabricated cabling units) or to connect external
patch panels.
●
Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for connecting the peripheral device directly. The connector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane.
●
For U.S. only: connector panels with CHAMP jack for connecting the peripheral device directly. The connector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane.
●
Connector panels with SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting the external main distribution frame MDFU-E or external patch panels using CABLUs. The connector panels are
clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane.
The type of connection used will be decided in consultation with the customer on conclusion of
the agreement. The cabinets will be delivered accordingly with or without clipped-on connector
panels.
Two installation options
HiPath 3800 is suitable for installation both as a standalone system and in a 19-inch cabinet.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-3
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
Dimensions
approx. 440 mm
approx. 980 mm
EC
Figure 2-1
2-4
BC
approx. 430 mm
HiPath 3800 Dimensions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.2.2
Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3750
Three configurations
Depending on the requirements, HiPath 3750 can be used as:
●
a single-cabinet system (BC)
●
a two-cabinet system (BC + EC1)
●
A three-cabinet system (BC + EC1 + EC2)
Design
The HiPath 3750 uses “8-slot” cabinets, where expansion cabinet 1 (EC1) and expansion cabinet 2 (EC2) are identical in design.
The BC has seven slots available for peripheral boards and each expansion cabinet has eight
slots. The UPSM power supply (in all cabinets) and the CPCPR central control board (only in
the BC) have fixed positions.
Up to two cabinets can be stacked.
A main distribution frame unit is needed to complete the communication system.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-5
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
Dimensions
MDFU
MDFU-E
MDFU
EC2
approx. 980 mm
MDFU
EC1
approx.
approx. 670 mm
approx. 328 mm
Depth of the MDFU or MDFU-E: 126 mm
Depth of system cabinet: 390 mm
approx.
BC
Cable duct
Figure 2-2
2-6
HiPath 3750 Dimensions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.2.3
Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3550
Design
The housing intended for wall mounting (Figure 2-3) HiPath 3550 contains one shelf with six
slot levels. The slot levels (shown in Figure 4-103), numbered in ascending order from the attachment side, have the following assignments:
●
Slot levels 1-3: peripheral boards (two slots per level).
●
Slot level 4: CBCC control board only
●
Slot level 5: SIPAC slot (for HiPath 3750 boards).
●
Slot level 6: Optional boards (up to 5 modules)
The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack.
The connection cables to the peripherals (telephones, trunk connections etc.) can be connected directly. Use an external MDFU in certain situations (CMI).
Dimensions
Mounting surface
460 mm
450 mm
200 mm
Figure 2-3
HiPath 3550 Dimensions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-7
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.2.4
Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3350
Design
The housing intended for wall mounting (Figure 2-4)HiPath 3350 contains one shelf with
three slot levels. The slot levels (shown in Figure 4-106), numbered in ascending order
from the attachment side, have the following assignments:
●
Slot level 1: peripheral boards (two slots)
●
Slot level 2: CBCC control board only
●
Slot level 3: Optional boards (up to 5 modules)
The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack.
The HiPath 3350 does not need an external main distribution frame. The connection cables
to the peripherals (telephones, trunk connections etc.) are directly connected to the
boards.
Dimensions
Mounting surface
460 mm
450 mm
128 mm
Figure 2-4
2-8
HiPath 3350 Dimensions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.2.5
Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3700
Three configurations
Depending on the requirements, HiPath 3700 can be used as:
●
a single-cabinet system (BC)
●
a two-cabinet system (BC + EC1)
●
a three-cabinet system (BC + EC1 + EC2), only when the 19-inch cabinets are next to one
another and are accessible from the back.
A special mounting set enables installation in 19-inch cabinets.
Design
The HiPath 3700 uses “8-slot” cabinets. The BC has seven slots and the expansion cabinet has
eight slots available for peripheral boards. The UPSM power supply (in all cabinets) and the
CPCPR central control board (only in the BC) have fixed positions.
Dimensions
approx. 410 mm
EC2
Figure 2-5
BC
approx. 980 mm
EC1
Depth of the system cabinet:
approx. 390 mm
Necessary height units per cabinet for
19-inch cabinet assembly: 11
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
HiPath 3700 Dimensions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-9
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.2.6
Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3500
Design
The housing intended for use with 19-inch cabinets (Figure 2-6) HiPath 3500 contains four slot
levels with the following assignments (represented in Figure 4-111):
●
Slot levels 1-3: slide-in shelves for peripheral boards (2 boards can be plugged in on each
level)
●
Slot level 4: slide-in shelf for CBRC control board
●
Slot level 5: Optional boards (up to 3 modules)
The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack.
The connection to peripherals (telephones, trunks, and others) is set up using MW8 jacks on
the boards front cover.
Dimensions
440 mm
155 mm
380 mm
Necessary height units for 19-inch cabinet assembly: 4
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
Figure 2-6
2-10
HiPath 3500 Dimensions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.2.7
Design and Dimensions of HiPath 3300
Design
The housing intended for use with 19-inch cabinets (Figure 2-7)HiPath 3300 contains three
slots with the following assignments (represented in Figure 4-112):
●
Slot level 1: slide-in shelves for two peripheral boards
●
Slot level 2: slide-in shelf for CBRC control board
●
Slot level 3: Optional boards (up to 3 modules)
The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack.
The connection to peripherals (telephones, trunks, and others) is set up using MW8 jacks on
the board’s front cover.
Dimensions
440 mm
88 mm
380 mm
Necessary height units for 19-inch cabinet assembly: 2
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
Figure 2-7
HiPath 3300 Dimensions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-11
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.3
System Environment of the HiPath 3000 Systems
2.2.3.1
HiPath 3800 System Environment
Table 2-1
Boards for HiPath 3800
HiPath 3800
Subscriber Line Modules
ROW
U.S.
Central Boards
Options
ROW
U.S.
Trunk Boards
ROW
U.S.
IVMN8
CBSAP
IVMNL
CMS
DIUN2
PBXXX
DBSAP
STMD3
IMODN
STMI2
SLMA
LIMS
TM2LP
SLMA8
LUNA2
TMC16
SLMO2
MMC
TMDID
SLMO8
MPPI
STMD3
PDMX1
SLCN
STMI2
DIU2U
TMEW2
PFT1/PFT4
REALS
1
used on the STMI2 board.
2-12
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.3.2
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 System Environment
Table 2-2
Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 systems
Subscriber Line Modules
ROW
U.S.
Central Boards
Options
ROW
U.S.
Trunk Boards
ROW
U.S.
HXGM3
CBCPR
HXGM3
IVML8
CMS
STMD8
IVML24
CR8N
SLA8N
TMDID8
IMODN
TIEL
SLA16N
LIM
TML8W
TMGL8
SLA24N
MMC
TMS2
TMST1
UPSM
TMAMF1
SLC16
TMCAS2
SLC16N
SLMO8
GEE8
SLMO24
STMD8
MPPI
PDM1
PFT1/PFT4
REAL
1
2
for Brazil, India, Malaysia, Singapore and ATEA countries only
for selected countries only
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-13
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.3.3
HiPath 3550 System Environment
Table 2-3
Boards for HiPath 3550
HiPath 3550
Subscriber Line Modules
ROW
U.S.
Central Boards
Options
ROW
U.S.
HXGS3
IVMS8
Trunk Boards
ROW
CBCC
U.S.
HXGS3
CMA
STLS2
SLA8N
CMS
STLS4
SLA16N
CUC
STLSX2
SLA24N
IMODN
STLSX4
SLC16
LIM
TLA2
TMGL4
SLC16N
MMC
TLA4
TMQ4
UPSC-D
TLA8
TST1
SLMO24
TMAMF1
SLU8
ALUM4
TMCAS2
STLS4
ANI42
TS2
STLSX2
EVM
STLSX4
EXM
STLS2
4SLA
GEE12
8SLA
16SLA
EXMNA
GEE16
GEE50
UAM
MPPI
OPAL
PDM1
3
STBG4
STRB
V24/1
1
2
3
for Brazil, India, Malaysia, Singapore and ATEA countries only
for selected countries only
For France only
2-14
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.3.4
Table 2-4
HiPath 3350 System Environment
Boards for HiPath 3350
HiPath 3350
Subscriber Line Modules
ROW
U.S.
Central Boards
Options
ROW
U.S.
HXGS3
IVMP8
Trunk Boards
ROW
CBCC
U.S.
HXGS3
CMA
STLS2
IVMS8
CMS
STLS4
SLU8
CUP
STLSX2
IMODN
STLSX4
STLS2
STLS4
LIM
TLA2
TMGL4
STLSX2
MMC
TLA4
TMQ4
STLSX4
PSUP
TLA8
4SLA
UPSC-D
8SLA
16SLA
ALUM4
ANI41
EVM
EXM
GEE12
EXMNA
GEE16
GEE50
UAM
MPPI
OPAL
PDM1
STBG42
STRB
V24/1
1
2
for selected countries only
For France only
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-15
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.3.5
Table 2-5
HiPath 3500 System Environment
Boards for HiPath 3500
HiPath 3500
Subscriber Line Modules
ROW
U.S.
Central Boards
Options
ROW
HXGR3
IVMS8R
U.S.
Trunk Boards
ROW
U.S.
CBRC
HXGR3
CMA
STLS4R
SLU8R
CMS
STLSX4R
STLS4R
CUCR
TS2R
TMGL4R
STLSX4R
IMODN
TLA4R
TST1
8SLAR
LIM
MMC
UPSC-DR
ANI4R1
EVM
EXMR
MPPI
OPALR
PDM1
STRBR
UAMR
1
for selected countries only
2-16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 3000
2.2.3.6
HiPath 3300 System Environment
Table 2-6
Boards for HiPath 3300
HiPath 3300
Subscriber Line Modules
ROW
U.S.
Central Boards
Options
ROW
HXGR3
IVMP8R
U.S.
Trunk Boards
ROW
U.S.
CBRC
CMA
HXGR3
STLS4R
IVMS8R
CMS
SLU8R
CUPR
STLS4R
IMODN
STLSX4R
LIM
8SLAR
MMC
STLSX4R
TLA4R
TMGL4R
UPSC-DR
ANI4R1
EVM
EXMR
MPPI
OPALR
PDM1
STRBR
UAMR
1
for selected countries only
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-17
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 5000
2.3
HiPath 5000
HiPath 5000 is operated as a central administration unit in an IP network of HiPath 3000 systems. By creating a "Single System Image", all relevant nodes can be centrally administered.
HiPath 5000 is the platform for providing applications at a central point and enables them to be
used by all stations in the IP network.
The HiPath ComScendo Service also supports the use of an integrated gatekeeper as well as
features for IP workpoint clients from HiPath ComScendo. Up to 1000 registered IP workpoint
clients and up to 250 CorNet IP lines (CorNet NQ protocol tunneled in H.323 via Annex M1) are
supported in this process.
The HiPath ComScendo Service is virtually a complete HiPath 3000 node that is only configured as software on a PC. Apart from TDM-specific features (e.g. the connection of UP0/E stations, trunks and special stations such as door openers, etc.), all V5.0 features are available.
The HiPath ComScendo Service is administered over HiPath 3000 Manager E, while the
HG 1500 resources (see Page 10-38) are administered over Web-based Management (WBM).
Cross-platform use of HiPath ComScendo features (IP networking), for example in conjunction
with HiPath 4000, is implemented via CorNet-IP (CorNet-NQ protocol tunnelled in H.323 via annex M1). HG 1500 in HiPath 3000 and HG3550 V2.0 in HiPath 4000 are prerequisites for
IP networking over CorNet IP.
Parts of the following setup for HiPath 5000 are optional and can be installed both on the HiPath
5000 server and on a separate PC.
●
Feature Server (central administration service in a HiPath 3000/5000 network)
●
Presence Manager (service for LED signaling of call processing station statuses and network-wide DSS keys)
●
HiPath ComScendo Service (gatekeeper and HiPath ComScendo features for IP workpoint
clients)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E (MS Windows-based tool for the administration of all service and
customer-specific data by Service)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager C (MS Windows-based tool for the administration of customer-specific data by the customer)
●
HiPath Software Manager (Web-based tool for upgrades (Upgrade Manager for HiPath
ComScendo Service and HG 1500) and backups (Backup Manager for HiPath ComScendo Service, HG 1500 and databases))
●
Inventory Manager (service for detecting software components installed and system information in a HiPath 3000/5000 network)
●
Customer License Agent CLA (service for analyzing and decrypting a HiPath License Management license file)
2-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 5000
●
Central License Manager CLM (CLA front-end for reading in licenses in online and offline
mode)
●
Personal Call Manager PCM (Web-based application for the configuration and administration of personal call forwarding operations)
●
HiPath FM Desktop V3.0 (Java-based application for error signaling)
●
GetAccount (application that prepares generated call data records for further processing.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-19
sysdat.fm
System Data
HiPath 5000
HiPath ComScendo Service with integrated
gatekeeper and HiPath
ComScendo features
Central resourcing of applications
(possibly installed on a separate
PC), such as:
●
HiPath Xpressions
●
HiPath ProCenter Office
●
Personal Call Manager PCM
●
HiPath Fault Management
●
...
Central administration unit with:
●
Feature Server
●
Presence Manager
●
HiPath Software Manager
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E
●
Inventory Manager
●
...
HiPath 5000
HiPath 3500
optiPoint 410 ...
optiPoint 600 office
HiPath Cordless
Office
IP Network
optiClient 130
V5.0
optiClient
Attendant
optiPoint 500 ...
optiset E ...
PSTN
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3750
Figure 2-8
2-20
HiPath 5000 Multi-Node IP System
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
System-Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000, HiPath 5000
2.4
System-Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000, HiPath 5000
The maximum capacity limits are calculated based on the following assumptions:
●
HiPath 3800: 2 board slots are reserved for trunks.
●
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700: 3 board slots are reserved for trunks.
●
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500: Two S0 interfaces on the central board + 1 board slot are reserved for trunks.
●
HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300: Two S0 interfaces on the central board are reserved for trunks.
●
Traffic capacity: 0.15 Erlang
Capacity limits which deviate from these may be specified for sales purposes.
Table 10-3 contains the maximum system-specific configurations for UP0/E workpoint clients
and the corresponding key modules and adapters.
Table 2-7
HiPath 3000/5000 - System-Specific Capacity Limits (Maximum Configuration)
HiPath
38001
HiPath
3750
HiPath
3700
HiPath
3550
Total Number of TDM and IP Stations2
500
250/5003
1924
1925
966
967
–
IP stations (system clients, H.323
clients)
500
250/5003
1928
1928
968 9
968 10
1000
Total number of TDM stations2
384
250/3843
9611
7711 12
5713
4114
–
384
250/384
15
2
17
18
384
250/3843
Analog stations
TDM Stations
Stations/Workpoint Clients
System
UP0/E stations
96
44
36
20
–
7219
4820
2421
2422
–
11
11
24
24
–
116
Cordless stations
250
250
64/3225 26
32
16
16
–
64
64
16/7
7
3
3
–
250
90/2503
60
60
16
16
–
Total number of analog trunks and
network trunks
120
3
90/120
60
60
16
8
–
Total number of digital trunk Bchannels and digital network line B
channels (S0, S2M)
180
90/1803
60
60
16
16
–
CorNet-IP network trunks
128
90/1283
60
60
16
16
250
Total Number of Lines
HG 1500 boards
Gateway channels to the system
116
16
HiPath
ComScendo
service
Additional stations via adapter
(phone adapter/analog adapter/ISDN adapter)
Base Stations for HiPath Cordless Office
Lines
3 23
HiPath HiPath HiPath
3500
3350
3300
48
29
8
8
3
3
128
128
48
48
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
24
27
24
27
1 (2 ) 1 (2 )
16
16
–
–
2-21
sysdat.fm
System Data
System-Specific Capacity Limits for HiPath 3000, HiPath 5000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Testing is not required on stations and lines up to the maximum configuration. Testing using the project planning tool is
mandatory for configurations which include UCD/ACD, more than one SLCN, or groups of more than 10 stations (intranet:
http://intranet.mch4.siemens.de/syseng/perfeng/tools/hpt/index.htm).
Only configurations that do not exceed this limit will be supported.
Depending on the system configuration and performance, the specified capacity limits may not always be achieved. To
ensure that the dynamic capacity limit of HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 is not exceeded, the configuration can be tested
using the project planning tool (intranet: http://intranet.mch4.siemens.de/syseng/perfeng/tools/hpt/index.htm). Testing is
not required for configurations of up to 250 stations and 90 lines. Testing using the project planning tool is mandatory for
configurations which include UCD/ACD, more than one SLC16/SLC16N, or groups of more than 10 stations.
Up to 96 of the 192 stations can be TDM stations.
Up to 61 of the 192 stations can be TDM stations (4xa/b + 1xUP0/E + 7xBS/32xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board + 3xSLU8R or 3x8SLAR).
Up to 41 of the 96 stations can be TDM stations (4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central
board + 1x16SLA).
Up to 33 of the 96 stations can be TDM stations (4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central
board + 1xSLU8R or 1x8SLAR).
These are administrative capacity limits.
Due to the power consumption of HG 1500, a UPSC-D must be used.
Due to the power consumption of HG 1500, a UPSC-DR must be used.
If the total number of UP0/E stations, analog stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than
72, an external EPSU2 power supply unit must be used.
4xa/b + 1xUP0/E + 7xBS/32xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board + 5xSLU8R or 5x8SLAR.
4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board + 2x16SLA.
4xa/b + 5xUP0/E + 3xBS/16xHiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board + 2xSLU8R or 2x8SLAR.
Testing using the project planning tool is not required for configurations of up to 384 analog stations, no other station types,
and 90 lines. Configurations that contain UCD/ACD or more than one SLC16/SLC16N or groups with more than ten stations should always be checked using the project planning tool (intranet: http://intranet.mch4.siemens.de/syseng/perfeng/
tools/hpt/index.htm).
4xa/b at the central board + 5x8SLAR.
4xa/b at the central board + 2x16SLA.
4xa/b at the central board + 2x8SLAR.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8 + 1xSLMO24.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8R.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8R.
The total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is limited to 384.
If the total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 24, a UPSC-D/
UPSC-DR must be used.
Due to the 5-V power supply unit, one SLC16/SLC16N and a maximum of two HG 1500 V3.0 boards can be used.
64 HiPath Cordless Office stations at the SLC16/SLC16N or 32 HiPath Cordless Office stations at the central board.
Two HG 1500 boards can be installed if PDM1 is not being used.
2-22
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
Technical Specifications for HiPath 3000
2.5
Technical Specifications for HiPath 3000
Table 2-8
Technical Specifications
Maximum
System Values
HiPath
3800
HiPath
3750
HiPath
3550
HiPath
3350
HiPath
3700
HiPath
3500
HiPath
3300
Ringer Equivalence Number
(type plate)
Basic cabi- 5.4/2.7 A 2.6 A /
1.3 A / 5.4/2.7 A 2.6 A /
1.3 A /
net =
/ 115 –
115 –
115 –
/ 115 –
115 –
115 –
6A/
230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC
110 VAC,
3A/
230 VAC
Expansion
cabinet =
8A/
110 VAC,
4A/
230 VAC
Line frequency
50 – 60 Hz
Dimensions
(height x width x
depth in mm)
490 x 440
x 430
490 x
410 x
390
450 x
460 x
200
450 x
460 x
128
490 x
410 x
390
155 x
440 x
380
88 x 440
x 380
Height units for
19-inch cabinet
assembly
11
–
–
–
11
4
2
8 kg
(17.62
lb.)
6 kg
(13.22
lb.)
22 kg
(48.46
lb.)
8 kg
(17.62
lb.)
6 kg
(13.22
lb.)
Weight
Basic cabi- 22 kg
(48.46
net =
lb.)
16.5 kg
Expansion (per fully
cabinet = equipped
cabinet)
15.0 kg
(transport
weight, including backplane and
cabinet feet)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
(per fully
equipped
cabinet)
Expansion cabinet rack ECR
(not for U.S. and Canada):
●
6.5 kg (14.32 lb.) without
batteries
●
17.5 kg (38.54 lb.) with
batteries
2-23
sysdat.fm
System Data
Interface-to-Interface Ranges
2.6
Interface-to-Interface Ranges
Telephone interface-to-interface ranges
Table 2-9
Telephone Interface-to-Interface Ranges (with J-Y (ST) 2x2x0.6, 0.6 mm
diameter)
Telephone Interfaces
Range in m
Loop Resistance in
Ohms
ISDN-S0 point-to-point
< 600
156
ISDN S0 extended bus connection
< 400
104
ISDN S0 bus connection1
< 80
21
for the HiPath 3800 board
STMD3 (Q2217)
< 120
for all other S0 boards
ISDN-S0 wall outlet to terminal
< 10
–
Analog users
< 2000
520
UP0/E exchange to host (master)
< 1000
230
UP0/E host to client (master/slave)
< 100
23
1
Board-specific
Trunk connection and CorNet N/CorNet NQ ranges
The table below provides the maximum cable lengths for direct trunk connection and direct CorNet N/CorNet NQ wiring. The values apply to ideal conditions, which means there can be no
joints, etc. The real conditions must be measured on-site.
Table 2-10
Interface
S0
S2M
2-24
Cable Lengths for Trunk Connection and Direct CorNet N/CorNet NQ Wiring
Cable
Diameter
Attenuation
per km
Max. Cable
Length
ICCS cable
J-2Y(ST)Y4x2x0.51 LG ICCS
Data5
0.51 mm
7.5 dB
at 96 kHz
800 m
Installation cable
J-2Y(ST)Y 10x2x0.6 ST III BD
0.6 mm
6.0 dB
at 96 kHz
1000 m
A-2Y0F(L)2Y 10x2x0.6 (full PE
insulation, filled)
0.6 mm
17 dB
at 1 MHz
350 m
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000/5000
2.7
Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000/5000
HiPath 3000/5000 provides one default numbering plan for users.
Table 2-11
Default Numbering for HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0
Type of numbering
Default station numbers
HiPath 3800 HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350
HiPath
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 ComScendo service
User station numbers
100 - 749
100 - 749
100 - 287
500 - 687
11 - 30
51 - 70
1000 - 1999
User direct inward dialing numbers
100 - 749
100 - 749
100 - 287
500 - 687
11 - 30
51 - 70
1000 - 1999
801 - 816
7801 - 7920
Trunk station number
Seizure codes
(external codes)
7801 - 7920 7801 - 7920 7801 - 7920
0 = ROW
9 = U.S.
0 = ROW
9 = U.S.
0 = ROW
9 = U.S.
0 = ROW
9 = U.S.
0 = ROW
9 = U.S.
80 - 84
850 - 859
80 - 84
850 - 859
80 - 84
850 - 859
82 - 88
8000 - 8062
USBS station number
internal & direct inward
dialing
891
891
891
891
–
IMOD station number
internal & direct inward
dialing
890
890
890
890
–
Digital modem
internal & direct inward
dialing
879
879
879
879
–
350 - 499
31 - 50
3500 - 4499
Group station numbers
internal & direct inward
dialing
350 - 499
350 - 499
8600 - 8749 8600 - 8749
Internal attendant code
number
(intercept position)
9 = ROW
0 = U.S.
9 = ROW
0 = U.S.
9 = ROW
0 = U.S.
9 = ROW
0 = U.S.
9 = ROW
0 = U.S.
Attendant code extension (intercept position)
0 = ROW
– = USA
0 = ROW
– = USA
0 = ROW
– = USA
0 = ROW
– = USA
0 = ROW
– = USA
Substitution for “*”
75
75
75
75
75
Substitution for “#”
76
76
76
76
76
*xxx
#xxx
*xxx
#xxx
*xxx
#xxx
*xxx
#xxx
–
Service codes
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-25
sysdat.fm
System Data
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000
2.8
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000
2.8.1
CE Compliance (Not for U.S.)
The systems conform to the following guidelines and standards:
Guideline
Standard
R&TTE Directive 99/5/EEC
●
●
●
●
●
2.8.2
EN 60950-1: 2001 (Safety)
EN61000-6-2 (EMC Immunity Industrial)
EN55024 (EMC Immunity Residential)
ETS 300 329 (DECT Emission/Immunity)
TBR 06, ETS 301489-1/6 (DECT Air Interface)
Compliance with US and Canadian Standards (For U.S. and
Canada Only)
Table 2-12
Compliance with US and Canadian Standards (For U.S. and Canada Only)
Category
HiPath 3800
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350
Product security
UL 60950-1 First Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2
No. 60950-1-03
UL 60950-1 First Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2
No. 60950-1-03
UL 60950-1 First Edition
CAN/CSA C22.2
No. 60950-1-03
FCC Part 15
subpart J
Class A
Class A
FCC Part 68
registration
Information not available.
AY3USA-33046-MF-E
AY3USA-33047-KF-E
AY3USA–25214–MF–E
AY3USA–25215–KF–E
267 9147A
267 8782A
1.2
0.4
Industry Cana- Information not availda CS–03 certiable.
fication
Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN)
2-26
Information not available.
Class A
Class B
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000
2.8.2.1
FCC Compliance
2.8.2.1.1
FCC Rules, Part 15
Each Siemens system discussed in this section, except the HiPath 3350, has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy. If installation and operation are not in line with the instructions in the manual, this can lead to disruptions in radio communication. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The HiPath 3350 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If installation
and handling are incorrect, this can lead to disruptions in radio communication However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase the distance between the equipment and receiver.
●
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
●
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
2.8.2.1.2
FCC Rules, Part 68
Each Siemens system discussed in this section complies with FCC Rules, Part 68. A label on
the outside back of the cabinet identifies the FCC registration number, the ringer equivalence
number (REN), and other information. If requested, this information must be given to the telephone company.
Disruption of the Network and T1
For networked systems using 1.544 Megabits per second (Mbps) T1 service, notify the telecommunication company when the equipment is disconnected from the network. If any Siemens system discussed in this section disrupts the telephone network, the telecommunication
company can discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, the telecommunication company
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-27
sysdat.fm
System Data
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000
will notify you in advance. If this is not possible, you will receive notification at the earliest possible opportunity. In this context you will also be informed that you can lodge a complaint with
the FCC.
Telephone Company Facility Changes
The telecommunication company is entitled to adapt its own equipment, devices, operating procedures and processes as necessary; such modifications may impair the operation of your
equipment. If they do, you should be notified in advance so you can maintain uninterrupted telephone service.
Nonlive Voice Equipment
Nonlive voice equipment such as music-on-hold devices and recorded announcements for systems must be approved by Siemens and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations of Subpart C of the FCC Rules, Part 68; or it must be connected through protective circuitry that is approved by Siemens and registered in accordance with the rules and regulations
in Subpart C of the FCC Rules, Part 68.
REN
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that can
be connected to a telephone line so that all the devices ring when that telephone number is
called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to a line should
not exceed five. Contact the local telecommunication company to determine the maximum REN
for your calling area.
Newly Established Network Area and Exchange Codes
The off-net routing feature, also known as the least-cost routing (LCR) software feature, which
allows user access to the public switched network, must be configured to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as soon as they are placed in service.
Failure to reconfigure the customer premises equipment to recognize the new codes as they
are established restricts the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to
the network and to these codes.
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Telephones for emergency use and telephones installed in common areas such as lobbies,
hospital rooms, elevators, and hotel rooms must have handsets that are compatible with magnetically coupled hearing aids. Persons who are not in common areas also must be provided
with hearing-aid compatible handsets, if needed.
For the hearing impaired, all Siemens digital telephones manufactured after August 16, 1989,
are hearing aid compatible and comply with FCC Rules, Part 68, Section 68.316.
2-28
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000
Preprogrammed Dialer Features
When you program emergency numbers or make test calls to emergency numbers using Siemens products with preprogrammed dialer features, stay on the line and briefly explain to the
dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up. Perform these activities in off-peak hours,
such as early morning or late evening.
Connecting Off-Premises Station Facilities
Customers who intend to connect off-premises station (OPS) facilities must inform the telecommunication company of the OPS class for which the equipment is registered and the connection
desired.
Direct Inward Dialing Answer Supervision
Customers operating any Siemens system discussed in this section without providing proper
answer supervision are in violation of Part 68 of the FCC rules.
●
●
Each Siemens system discussed in this section returns proper answer supervision to the
public switched telephone network (PSTN) when DID calls are:
–
Answered by the called station.
–
Answered by the attendant.
–
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer.
Each Siemens system discussed in this section returns proper answer supervision on all
DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions are when:
–
A call is unanswered
–
A busy tone is received
–
A reorder tone is received
Equal Access Requirements
Call aggregators, such as hotels, hospitals, airports, colleges and universities, and so on, must
provide the end user with equal access to the carriers of the user’s choice. The current equal
access codes (also known as carrier access codes [CACs]) are 10xxx and 101xxxx, and 800/
888 and 950, where xxx or xxxx represents the carrier identification code.
To select the carrier of choice for a call, the user dials the equal access code before dialing the
called party number. Equal access is also obtained by dialing the 800/888 or 950 number of the
carrier of choice.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-29
sysdat.fm
System Data
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000
Each Siemens system discussed in this section is capable of providing user access to interstate
providers of operator services through the use of equal access codes. Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities are a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer Services
Improvement Act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules.
Electrical Safety Advisory
While each Siemens system discussed in this section is fully compliant with FCC Rules and
Regulations, it is recommended that an alternating current (AC) surge protector of the form and
capability suitable for the model of the system purchased be installed in the AC outlet to which
the system is connected. Consult your sales partner to determine the surge protector requirements for your system.
2.8.2.2
Industry Canada Compliance
The following paragraphs describe requirements for and present information based on the Industry Canada standards.
2.8.2.2.1
REN
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) defines how many devices can be connected to a telephone line at the same time. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not
exceed five.
2.8.2.2.2
Equipment Attachment Limitations
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as described in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement documents. However, the Department offers no assurances that the devices will operate to the customer’s complete satisfaction at all times.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to
the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed
using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance
with these conditions may not prevent degradation of performance in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
2-30
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
sysdat.fm
System Data
Technical Specifications and Compliance to HiPath 3000
7
2.8.3
DANGER
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact
the electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
SAFETY International
IEC 60950-1, first edition 2001, modified
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
2-31
sysdat.fm
System Data
Environmental Conditions
2.9
Environmental Conditions
2.9.1
Electrical Operating Conditions
●
Operating limits
Room temperature: + 5 ...+ 40 °C (41 ... 104 °F)
absolute humidity: 2 - 25 g H2O/m3
Relative humidity: 5 - 80%
●
System ventilation is by convection only. Automatic ventilation is required when using the
HG 1500 in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350.
7
2.9.2
Caution
Avoid exposing the system to direct sunlight and heaters (excessive heat may damage the system).
Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used. Do not start
up the system until it has thoroughly dried.
Mechanical Operating Conditions
The systems are intended for stationary use.
2-32
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
3
Boards for HiPath 3000
7
Caution
The system must be powered down and de-energized before removing or inserting
all boards in the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 and before
removing or inserting the central boards of the HiPath 3800, HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
7
DANGER (for U.S. only)
To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, the following boards require
secondary protection when their lines leave the building where the main distribution
frame is housed:
●
CBCC / CBRC
●
DIU2U**
●
SLA16N / SLA24N
●
SLMA / SLMA8
●
TIEL*
●
TMC16
●
TMDID / TMDID8
●
TMEW2
●
TMGL4 / TMGL4R / TMGL8
●
TMST1**
●
TM2LP
●
TST1**
●
8SLA
* If not connected to facility provider terminal equipment.
** When this module is connected to the public network, secondary protection must
be provided by the CSU.
3.1
Overview
Functional overview of all boards used
Table 3-1
HiPath 3000 - Functional Overview of All Boards Used
Board
Part number
Model
Central boards
CBCC
S30810-Q2935-A301
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
CBCPR
S30810-Q2936-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
CBRC
S30810-Q2935-Z301
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-1
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-1
Board
HiPath 3000 - Functional Overview of All Boards Used
Part number
Model
CBSAP
S30810-Q2314-X
HiPath 3800
CMA
S30807-Q6931-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/
HiPath 3300
CMS
S30807-Q6928-X
HiPath 3000
CR8N
S30810-Q2513-X100
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
CUC
S30777-Q750-X
HiPath 3550
CUCR
S30777-Q750-Z
HiPath 3500
CUP
S30777-Q751-X
HiPath 3350
CUPR
S30777-Q751-Z
HiPath 3300
DBSAP
S30807-Q6722-X
HiPath 3800
IMODN
S30807-Q6932-X100
HiPath 3000
LIM
S30807-Q6930-X
HiPath 3000
LIMS
S30807-Q6721-X
HiPath 3800
LUNA2
S30122-K7686-L1
S30122-K7686-M1
HiPath 3800
MMC
S30122-X8002-X10
HiPath 3000
PSUP
S30122-K5658-M
HiPath 3350
UPSC-D
S30122-K5660-M300
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
UPSC-DR
S30122-K7373-M900
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
UPSM
S30122-K5950-A100
S30122-K5950-S100
S30122-K5959-S121 (for RSA
only)
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
3-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-1
Board
HiPath 3000 - Functional Overview of All Boards Used
Part number
Model
Peripheral boards
Note: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boards must
be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.
DIU2U
S30810-Q2216-X
HiPath 3800 (for U.S. only)
DIUN2
S30810-Q2196-X
HiPath 3800
HXGM3
S30810-Q2942-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
HXGR3
S30810-K2943-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
HXGS3
S30810-Q2943-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
IVML8
S30122-X7380-X100
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
IVML24
S30122-X7380-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
IVMN8
S30122-H7688-X100
HiPath 3800
IVMNL
S30122-H7688-X
HiPath 3800
IVMP8
S30122-Q7379-X100
HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
IVMP8R
S30122-K7379-Z100
HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
IVMS8
S30122-Q7379-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
IVMS8R
S30122-K7379-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
PBXXX
S30810-Q6401-X
HiPath 3800
SLA8N
S30810-Q2929-X200
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700
(not for U.S.)
SLA16N
S30810-Q2929-X100
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700
SLA24N
S30810-Q2929-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700
SLC16
S30810-Q2922-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700
(not for U.S.)
SLC16N
S30810-Q2193-X100
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700
(not for U.S.)
SLCN
S30810-Q2193-X300
HiPath 3800 (not for U.S.)
SLMA
S30810-Q2191-C300
HiPath 3800
SLMA8
S30810-Q2191-C100
HiPath 3800
SLMO2
S30810-Q2168-X10
HiPath 3800
SLMO8
S30810-Q2168-X100
HiPath 3800
SLMO8
S30810-Q2901-X100
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (not for U.S.)
SLMO24
S30810-Q2901-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-3
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-1
Board
HiPath 3000 - Functional Overview of All Boards Used
Part number
Model
SLU8
S30817-Q922-A301
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
SLU8R
S30817-K922-Z301
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3300
STLS2
S30817-Q924-B313
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
STLS4
S30817-Q924-A313
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
STLS4R
S30817-K924-Z313
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
STLSX2
S30810-Q2944-X100
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
STLSX4
S30810-Q2944-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
STLSX4R
S30810-K2944-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
STMD3
S30810-Q2217-X10
S30810-Q2217-X110
HiPath 3800
STMD8
S30810-Q2558-X200
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
STMI2
S30810-Q2316-X100
HiPath 3800
TIEL
S30810-Q2520-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
TLA2
S30817-Q923-Bxxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
TLA4
S30817-Q923-Axxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
TLA8
S30817-Q926-Axxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
TLA4R
S30817-Q923-Zxxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
TM2LP
S30810-Q2159-Xxxx
HiPath 3800
TMAMF
S30810-Q2587-A200
S30810-Q2587-A400
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
(for selected countries only)
TMC16
S30810-Q2485-X
HiPath 3800 (for U.S. only)
TMCAS
S30810-Q2938-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath 3700
(for selected countries only)
TMDID
S30810-Q2452-X
HiPath 3800 (for U.S. only)
TMDID8
S30810-Q2507-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (for U.S. only)
TMEW2
S30810-Q2292-X100
HiPath 3800
TMGL4
S30810-Q2918-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for U.S. only)
TMGL4R
S30810-K2918-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 (for U.S. only)
TMGL8
S30810-Q2703-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (for U.S. only)
TML8W
S30817-Q626-Axxx/Bxxx
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (not for U.S.)
3-4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-1
Board
HiPath 3000 - Functional Overview of All Boards Used
Part number
Model
TMQ4
S30810-Q2917-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for U.S. only)
TMST1
S30810-Q2920-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (for U.S. only)
TMS2
S30810-Q2915-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (not for U.S.)
TST1
S30810-Q2919-X
S30810-K2919-Z
HiPath 3550 (for U.S. only)
HiPath 3500 (for U.S. only)
TS2
S30810-Q2913-X300
HiPath 3550
TS2R
S30810-K2913-Z300
HiPath 3500
4SLA
S30810-Q2923-X200
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
8SLA
S30810-Q2923-X100
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
8SLAR
S30810-K2925-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
16SLA
S30810-Q2923-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-5
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-1
Board
HiPath 3000 - Functional Overview of All Boards Used
Part number
Model
Options
ALUM4
S30817-Q935-A
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
ANI4
S30807-Q6917-Axxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for selected
countries only)
ANI4R
S30807-Q6917-Z103
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 (for selected
countries only)
EVM
S30807-Q6945-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/
HiPath 3300
EXM
S30817-Q902-B401
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
EXMR
S30122-K7403-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
EXMNA
S30817-Q6923-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for U.S. only)
GEE8
S30817-Q664-xxxx
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 (not for U.S.)
GEE12
S30817-Q951-Axxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
GEE16
S30817-Q951-Axxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
GEE50
S30817-Q951-Axxx
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
HOPE
S30122-Q7078-X
S30122-Q7079-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (for U.S. only)
MPPI
S30122-K5380-X200
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
MPPI
S30122-K7275-B
HiPath 3000
OPAL
C39195-A7001-B130
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
OPALR
C39195-A7001-B142
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
PDM1
PDM1
S30807-Q5692-X100
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350/HiPath 3500/
HiPath 3300
PDMX
S30807-Q5697-X200
HiPath 3800
PFT1/PFT4
S30777-Q539-X
S30777-Q540-X
HiPath 3800/HiPath 3750 (not for U.S.)
REAL
S30807-Q5913-X
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
REALS
S30807-Q6629-X
HiPath 3800
STBG4
S30817-Q934-A
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (France only)
STRB
S30817-Q932-A
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350
STRBR
S30817-Q932-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300
3-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-1
Board
HiPath 3000 - Functional Overview of All Boards Used
Part number
Model
UAM
S30122-X7217-X
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
UAMR
S30122-X7402-Z
HiPath 3500/HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
V24/1
S30807-Q6916-X100
HiPath 3550/HiPath 3350 (not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-7
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Overview of all board models used
Table 3-2
Board
HiPath 3800
AMOM
CBSAP
CMS
DBSAP
DIU2U
DIUN2
IMODN
IVMN8
IVMNL
LIMS
LUNA2
MMC
MPPI
PBXXX
PDMX
PFT1/PFT4
REALS
SLCN
SLMA
SLMA8
SLMO2
SLMO8
STMD3
STMI2
TM2LP
TMC16
TMDID
3-8
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Part number
Function
S30807-K5480-Xxxx
Opto-electronic converter
S30810-Q2314-X
S30807-Q6928-X
S30807-Q6722-X
S30810-Q2216-X
S30810-Q2196-X
S30807-Q6932-X100
S30122-H7688-X100
S30122-H7688-X
S30807-Q6721-X
S30122-K7686-L1
S30122-K7686-M1
S30122-X8002-X10
S30122-K7275-B
S30810-Q6401-X
Central board
Central board
Central board
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board
Central board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Central board
Central board
S30807-Q5697-X200
S30777-Q539-X
S30777-Q540-X
S30807-Q6629-X
S30810-Q2193-X300
S30810-Q2191-C300
S30810-Q2191-C100
S30810-Q2168-X10
S30810-Q2168-X100
S30810-Q2217-X10
S30810-Q2217-X110
S30810-Q2316-X100
S30810-Q2159-Xxxx
S30810-Q2485-X
S30810-Q2452-X
Option
Option (not for U.S.)
Central board
Option
Peripheral board
Option
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
Board
TMEW2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Part number
S30810-Q2292-X100
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Function
Peripheral board
3-9
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
Part number
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
CBCPR
CMS
CR8N
GEE8
HXGM3
IMODN
IVML8
IVML24
LIM
MMC
MPPI
PDM1
PFT1/PFT4
REAL
SLA8N
SLA16N
SLA24N
SLC16
SLC16N
SLMO8
SLMO24
STMD8
TIEL
TMAMF
S30810-Q2936-X
S30807-Q6928-X
S30810-Q2513-X100
S30817-Q664-xxxx
S30810-Q2942-X
S30807-Q6932-X100
S30122-X7380-X100
S30122-X7380-X
S30807-Q6930-X
S30122-X8002-X10
S30122-K7275-B
S30807-Q5692-X100
S30777-Q539-X
S30777-Q540-X
S30807-Q5913-X
S30810-Q2929-X200
S30810-Q2929-X100
S30810-Q2929-X
S30810-Q2922-X
S30810-Q2193-X100
S30810-Q2901-X100
S30810-Q2901-X
S30810-Q2558-X200
S30810-Q2520-X
S30810-Q2587-A200
TMCAS
S30810-Q2938-X
TMDID8
TMGL8
TML8W
TMST1
S30810-Q2507-X
S30810-Q2703-X
S30817-Q626-Axxx/Bxxx
S30810-Q2920-X
3-10
Function
Central board
Central board
Central board
Option (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Central board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Central board
Central board
Option
Option
Option (not for U.S.)
Option
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board (for selected countries
only)
Peripheral board (for selected countries
only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
TMS2
Part number
S30810-Q2915-X
Function
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
UPSM
S30122-K5950-A100
S30122-K5950-S100
S30122-K5959-S121 (for RSA
only)
Central board
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-11
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
Part number
Function
HiPath 3550
Note: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boards must
be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.
ALUM4
S30817-Q935-A
Option
ANI4
CBCC
CMA
CMS
CUC
EVM
EXM
EXMNA
GEE12
GEE16
GEE50
HOPE
HXGS3
IMODN
IVMS8
LIM
MMC
MPPI
OPAL
PDM1
SLA8N
SLA16N
SLA24N
SLC16
SLC16N
SLMO24
3-12
S30807-Q6917-Axxx
S30810-Q2935-A301
S30807-Q6931-X
S30807-Q6928-X
S30777-Q750-X
S30807-Q6945-X
S30817-Q902-B401
S30817-Q6923-X
S30817-Q951-Axxx
S30817-Q951-Axxx
S30817-Q951-Axxx
S30122-Q7078-X
S30122-Q7079-X
S30810-Q2943-X
S30807-Q6932-X100
S30122-Q7379-X
S30807-Q6930-X
S30122-X8002-X10
S30122-K5380-X200 (not for
U.S.)
S30122-K7275-B
C39195-A7001-B130
S30807-Q5692-X100
S30810-Q2929-X200
S30810-Q2929-X100
S30810-Q2929-X
S30810-Q2922-X
S30810-Q2193-X100
S30810-Q2901-X
Option (for selected countries only)
Central board
Central board
Central board
Central board
Option
Option
Option (for U.S. only)
Option (not for U.S.)
Option (not for U.S.)
Option (not for U.S.)
Option (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board
Central board
Peripheral board
Central board
Central board
Option
Cable
Option
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
SLU8
Part number
S30817-Q922-A301
Function
Peripheral board
STBG4
STLS2
STLS4
STLSX2
STLSX4
STRB
TLA2
TLA4
TLA8
TMAMF
S30817-Q934-A
S30817-Q924-B313
S30817-Q924-A313
S30810-Q2944-X100
S30810-Q2944-X
S30817-Q932-A
S30817-Q923-Bxxx
S30817-Q923-Axxx
S30817-Q926-Axxx
S30810-Q2587-A400
TMCAS
S30810-Q2938-X
TMGL4
TMQ4
TST1
TS2
UAM
UPSC-D
V24/1
4SLA
8SLA
16SLA
S30810-Q2918-X
S30810-Q2917-X
S30810-Q2919-X
S30810-Q2913-X300
S30122-X7217-X
S30122-K5660-M300
S30807-Q6916-X100
S30810-Q2923-X200
S30810-Q2923-X100
S30810-Q2923-X
Option (France only)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Option
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (for selected countries
only)
Peripheral board (for selected countries
only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Option (not for U.S.)
Central board
Option (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-13
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
Part number
Function
HiPath 3350
Note: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boards must
be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.
ALUM4
S30817-Q935-A
Option
ANI4
CBCC
CMA
CMS
CUP
EVM
EXM
EXMNA
GEE12
GEE16
GEE50
HOPE
HXGS3
IMODN
IVMP8
IVMS8
LIM
MMC
MPPI
OPAL
PDM1
PSUP
SLU8
STBG4
STLS2
STLS4
3-14
S30807-Q6917-Axxx
S30810-Q2935-A301
S30807-Q6931-X
S30807-Q6928-X
S30777-Q751-X
S30807-Q6945-X
S30817-Q902-B401
S30817-Q6923-X
S30817-Q951-Axxx
S30817-Q951-Axxx
S30817-Q951-Axxx
S30122-Q7078-X
S30122-Q7079-X
S30810-Q2943-X
S30807-Q6932-X100
S30122-Q7379-X100
S30122-Q7379-X
S30807-Q6930-X
S30122-X8002-X10
S30122-K5380-X200 (not for
U.S.)
S30122-K7275-B
C39195-A7001-B130
S30807-Q5692-X100
S30122-K5658-M
S30817-Q922-A301
S30817-Q934-A
S30817-Q924-B313
S30817-Q924-A313
Option (for selected countries only)
Central board
Central board
Central board
Central board
Option
Option
Option (for U.S. only)
Option (not for U.S.)
Option (not for U.S.)
Option (not for U.S.)
Option (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board
Central board
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Central board
Central board
Option
Cable
Option
Central board
Peripheral board
Option (France only)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
STLSX2
Part number
S30810-Q2944-X100
Function
Peripheral board
STLSX4
STRB
TLA2
TLA4
TLA8
TMGL4
TMQ4
UAM
UPSC-D
V24/1
4SLA
8SLA
16SLA
S30810-Q2944-X
S30817-Q932-A
S30817-Q923-Bxxx
S30817-Q923-Axxx
S30817-Q926-Axxx
S30810-Q2918-X
S30810-Q2917-X
S30122-X7217-X
S30122-K5660-M300
S30807-Q6916-X100
S30810-Q2923-X200
S30810-Q2923-X100
S30810-Q2923-X
Peripheral board
Option
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Option (not for U.S.)
Central board
Option (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-15
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
Part number
Function
HiPath 3500
Note: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boards must
be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.
ANI4R
S30807-Q6917-Z103
Option (for selected countries only)
CBRC
CMA
CMS
CUCR
EVM
EXMR
HXGR3
IMODN
IVMS8R
LIM
MMC
MPPI
OPALR
PDM1
S30810-Q2935-Z301
S30807-Q6931-X
S30807-Q6928-X
S30777-Q750-Z
S30807-Q6945-X
S30122-K7403-Z
S30810-K2943-Z
S30807-Q6932-X100
S30122-K7379-Z
S30807-Q6930-X
S30122-X8002-X10
S30122-K7275-B
C39195-A7001-B142
S30807-Q5692-X100
Central board
Central board
Central board
Central board
Option
Option
Peripheral board
Central board
Peripheral board
Central board
Central board
Option
Cable
Option
SLU8R
STLS4R
STLSX4R
STRBR
TLA4R
TMGL4R
TST1
TS2R
UAMR
UPSC-DR
8SLAR
S30817-K922-Z301
S30817-K924-Z313
S30810-K2944-Z
S30817-Q932-Z
S30817-Q923-Zxxx
S30810-K2918-Z
S30810-K2919-Z
S30810-K2913-Z300
S30122-X7402-Z
S30122-K7373-M900
S30810-K2925-Z
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Option
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Option (not for U.S.)
Central board
Peripheral board
3-16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Overview
Table 3-2
HiPath 3000 - Overview of All Boards Models Used
Board
Part number
Function
HiPath 3300
Note: The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boards must
be firmly inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.
ANI4R
S30807-Q6917-Z103
Option (for selected countries only)
CBRC
CMA
CMS
CUPR
EVM
EXMR
HXGR3
IMODN
IVMP8R
IVMS8R
LIM
MMC
MPPI
OPALR
S30810-Q2935-Z301
S30807-Q6931-X
S30807-Q6928-X
S30777-Q751-Z
S30807-Q6945-X
S30122-K7403-Z
S30810-K2943-Z
S30807-Q6932-X100
S30122-K7379-Z100
S30122-K7379-Z
S30807-Q6930-X
S30122-X8002-X10
S30122-K7275-B
C39195-A7001-B142
Central board
Central board
Central board
Central board
Option
Option
Peripheral board
Central board
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board
Central board
Central board
Option
Cable
PDM1
SLU8R
STLS4R
STLSX4R
STRBR
TLA4R
TMGL4R
UAMR
UPSC-DR
8SLAR
S30807-Q5692-X100
S30817-K922-Z301
S30817-K924-Z313
S30810-K2944-Z
S30817-Q932-Z
S30817-Q923-Zxxx
S30810-K2918-Z
S30122-X7402-Z
S30122-K7373-M900
S30810-K2925-Z
Option
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Option
Peripheral board (not for U.S.)
Peripheral board (for U.S. only)
Option (not for U.S.)
Central board
Peripheral board
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-17
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2
Central Boards
7
Caution
The system must be powered down and de-energized before removing or inserting
all boards in the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 and before
removing or inserting the central boards of the HiPath 3800, HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
3.2.1
CBCC
Introduction
The CBCC board (Central Board with Coldfire Com, S30810-Q2935-A301) performs all central
control and switching functions for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (see Figure 3-1).
>
The CBCC central control board must be upgraded for HiPath 3000 V5.0. The “old”
CBCC board S30810-Q2935-A201 is not supported.
For Deutsche Telekom AG only: The CBCP board S30810-Q2935-B201 is not supported by HiPath 3000 V5.0 and must be replaced by a CBCC board S30810Q2935-A301.
Subboards
The following subboards can be used depending on the application:
●
Clock module CMA or CMS (optional)
●
MMC multimedia card
●
IMODN integrated modem card new (optional)
●
LIM LAN interface module (optional)
●
MPPI music on hold (optional)
●
EVM entry voice mail (optional)
Outputs, interfaces
●
Eight digital UP0/E subscriber lines
For example, UP0/E workpoint clients or BS3/1 base stations for HiPath Cordless Office can
be connected here.
●
Four analog T/R subscriber lines
For U.S. only: These interfaces do not support the connection of external extensions via
OPS (Off-Premises Station) signaling.
3-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
For Australia only: The T/R interfaces supply a ring voltage of 35 Veff. Depending on the
terminals connected, we cannot exclude the possibility of errors occurring during ringing
state.
●
Two digital S0 interfaces (CO (default) or station)
●
Backplane (CUC or CUP) connection via slots 1 (X11), 2 (X5) and 3 (X6)
●
Music on hold: MPPI, EXM
>
Please note that only one MPPI module may be connected. In other words, you
can connect either MPPI S30122-K5380-X200 via X4 or MPPI S30122-K7275B via X19/X20.
●
Options bus (O bus)
●
Two V.24 interfaces. The second interface is implemented via the V24/1 option.
Switches and indicators
●
●
Reset/reload switch
–
Switch pressed < 5 s = Reset activated
–
Switch pressed > 5 s = Reload activated (RUN LED out indicates that a reload is in
progress)
RUN LED
LED status meaning is explained in the following table.
Table 3-3
CBCC - LED Status Meaning
RUN LED
Off
No power
On
Reset switch pressed briefly
Off
Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds (LED is extinguished to acknowledge that a reload has begun)
On
System boot
Off
for 0.1 s
1
Meaning
Load operation: APS in SDRAM, loadware, and card data
Flashing
0.5 s on/0.5 s off
Normal operating state (zero load)1
Flashing
0.1 s on/0.1 s off
MMC removed or defective
The flashing rhythm depends on the load. The higher the system load the slower the flashing rhythm.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-19
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Figure
X8 O bus
2
X11
2
X6
X7
CMA
X20
X14
X16
2
IMODN
MPPI
CMS
2
X15
V24/1
2
X5
X13
X17
X19
X27
X12
X32
LIM
EVM
X1
1
X2
MMC
X30/31
X18
1
X4
2
8 x UP0/E
2 x S0,
RJ45
jacks
Reset/reload
switch
X3
1
4 x T/R
MPPI or EXM
RUN LED
V.24 interface, 9-pin SUB-D plug
LAN connector, 8-pin RJ45 jack
Figure 3-1
>
3-20
CBCC Board (S30810-Q2935-A301)
Disconnecting the battery buffer by unplugging the X27 jumper is necessary only for
testing (module test at the factory). Disconnection does not necessarily delete the
customer database (CDB). To delete the CDB, use the reset switch.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
X1 to X4 contact assignments
Table 3-4
CBCC - X1 to X4 Contact Assignments
Contact Connector X1
Connector X2 Connector X3
UP0/E
Connector X4
T/R
MPPI or EXM
1
UP0/E port 1b
UP0/E port 5b
T/R port 1a
GND
2
UP0/E port 1a
UP0/E port 5a
T/R port 1b
Not used
3
UP0/E port 2b
UP0/E port 6b
T/R port 2a
Not used
4
UP0/E port 2a
UP0/E port 6a
T/R port 2b
EXMCLK (512 kHz data cycle)
5
UP0/E port 3b
UP0/E port 7b
T/R port 3a
EXMDIR (8 kHz frame cycle)
6
UP0/E port 3a
UP0/E port 7a
T/R port 3b
EXMRES (high-active reset)
7
UP0/E port 4b
UP0/E port 8b
T/R port 4a
EXMD (data line)
8
UP0/E port 4a
UP0/E port 8a
T/R port 4b
EXMDET (detect signal)
9
–
–
–
+5 V
10
–
–
–
Not used
S0 interface assignment
Table 3-5
CBCC - S0 Interface Assignment (RJ45 Jacks)
Contact
S0
X30
X31
1
–
–
2
–
–
3
S0 port 1, transmit +
S0 port 2, transmit +
4
S0 port 1, receive +
S0 port 2, receive +
5
S0 port 1, receive –
S0 port 2, receive –
6
S0 port 1, transmit –
S0 port 2, transmit –
7
–
–
8
–
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-21
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
V.24 interface assignment
Table 3-6
CBCC - V.24 Interface Assignment (SUB-D Plug)
X18, pin
Signal
Description
1
–
2
RxD A
Receive data, channel A
3
TxD A
Transmit data, channel A
4
–
5
0V
6
–
7
RTS A
Request to send, channel A
8
CTS A
Clear to send, channel A
9
–
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
LAN connector assignment
Table 3-7
3-22
CBCC - LAN Connector Assignment (RJ45 Jack) via LIM
Pin
Signal
Description
1
Tx +
Transmit +
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
Rx +
Receive +
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Default numbering plan when using CBCC in HiPath 3550
Table 3-8
Default Numbering Plan When Using CBCC in HiPath 3550
Station
Int. call no.
DID no.
Port
UP0/E host
(master)
100
100
UP0/E 1
101
101
UP0/E 2
102
102
UP0/E 3
103
103
UP0/E 4
104
104
UP0/E 5
105
105
UP0/E 6
106
106
UP0/E 7
107
107
UP0/E 8
500
500
UP0/E 1
501
501
UP0/E 2
502
502
UP0/E 3
503
503
UP0/E 4
504
504
UP0/E 5
505
505
UP0/E 6
506
506
UP0/E 7
507
507
UP0/E 8
108
108
T/R 1
109
109
T/R 2
110
110
T/R 3
111
111
T/R 3
112
112
EVM-1
113
113
EVM-2
UP0/E client
(slave)
T/R
EVM
Line
Code
Port
S0
CO PP
7801
S0 1-1
7802
S0 1-2
7803
S0 2-1
7804
S0 2-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-23
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Default numbering plan when using CBCC in HiPath 3350
Table 3-9
Default Numbering Plan When Using CBCC in HiPath 3350
Station
Int. call no.
DID no.
Port
UP0/E host
(master)
11
11
UP0/E 1
12
12
UP0/E 2
13
13
UP0/E 3
14
14
UP0/E 4
15
15
UP0/E 5
16
16
UP0/E 6
17
17
UP0/E 7
18
18
UP0/E 8
51
51
UP0/E 1
52
52
UP0/E 2
53
53
UP0/E 3
54
54
UP0/E 4
55
55
UP0/E 5
56
56
UP0/E 6
57
57
UP0/E 7
58
58
UP0/E 8
19
19
T/R 1
20
20
T/R 2
21
21
T/R 3
22
22
T/R 3
23
23
EVM-1
24
24
EVM-2
UP0/E client
(slave)
T/R
EVM
3-24
Line
Code
Port
S0
CO PP
801
S0 1-1
802
S0 1-2
803
S0 2-1
804
S0 2-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.2
CBRC
Introduction
The CBRC board (Central Board Rack Com, S30810-Q2935-Z301) performs all central control
and switching functions for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (see Figure 3-2).
>
The CBRC central control board must be upgraded for HiPath 3000 V5.0. The “old”
CBRC board S30810-K2935-Z is not supported.
Subboards
The following subboards can be used depending on the application:
●
Clock module CMA or CMS (optional)
●
MMC multimedia card
●
IMODN integrated modem card new (optional)
●
LIM LAN interface module (optional)
●
MPPI music on hold (optional)
●
EVM entry voice mail (optional)
Outputs, interfaces
●
Eight digital UP0/E subscriber lines
For example, UP0/E workpoint clients or BS3/1 base stations for HiPath Cordless Office can
be connected here.
●
Four analog T/R subscriber lines
For U.S. only: These interfaces do not support the connection of external extensions via
OPS (Off-Premises Station) signaling.
For Australia only: The T/R interfaces supply a ring voltage of 35 Veff. Depending on the
terminals connected, we cannot exclude the possibility of errors occurring during ringing
state.
●
Two digital S0 interfaces (CO (default) or station)
●
Backplane (CUCR or CUPR) connection via slots 1 (X11), 2 (X5) and 3 (X6)
●
Music on hold: MPPI, EXMR
●
Options bus (O bus)
●
V.24 interface
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-25
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Switches and indicators
●
●
Reset/reload switch
–
Switch pressed < 5 s = Reset activated
–
Switch pressed > 5 s = Reload activated (RUN LED out indicates that a reload is in
progress)
RUN LED
LED status meaning is explained in the following table.
Table 3-10
CBRC - LED Status Meaning
RUN LED
Off
No power
On
Reset switch pressed briefly
Off
Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds (LED is extinguished to acknowledge that a reload has begun)
On
System boot
Off
for 0.1 s
1
3-26
Meaning
Load operation: APS in SDRAM, loadware, and card data
Flashing
0.5 s on/0.5 s off
Normal operating state (zero load)1
Flashing
0.1 s on/0.1 s off
MMC removed or defective
The flashing rhythm depends on the load. The higher the system load the slower the flashing rhythm.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Figure
2
X5
2
X11
X6
X8 O bus
X20
CMA
X14
X15
MPPI/
EXMR
X16
IMODN
X19
2
CMS
X13
X17
X27
X12
X32
LIM
EVM
X1
X9
8 x UP0/E
2 x S0 ,
RJ45
jacks
1
MMC
1
X18
Reset/reload
switch
RUN LED
X3
4 x T/R
V.24 interface, 9-pin
SUB-D plug
LAN connector, 8-pin RJ45 jack
Figure 3-2
>
CBRC Board (S30810-Q2935-Z301)
Disconnecting the battery buffer by unplugging the X27 jumper is necessary only for
testing (module test at the factory). Disconnection does not necessarily delete the
customer database (CDB). To delete the CDB, use the reset switch.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-27
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
X1 and X3 contact assignments
Table 3-11
Contact
CBRC - X1 and X3 Contact Assignments
Connector X1
Connector X3
UP0/E
T/R
14
UP0/E port 1a
T/R port 1a
15
UP0/E port 1b
T/R port 1b
24
UP0/E port 2a
T/R port 2a
25
UP0/E port 2b
T/R port 2b
34
UP0/E port 3a
T/R port 3a
35
UP0/E port 3b
T/R port 3b
44
UP0/E port 4a
T/R port 4a
45
UP0/E port 4b
T/R port 4b
54
UP0/E port 5a
–
55
UP0/E port 5b
–
64
UP0/E port 6a
–
65
UP0/E port 6b
–
74
UP0/E port 7a
–
75
UP0/E port 7b
–
84
UP0/E port 8a
–
85
UP0/E port 8b
–
S0 interface assignment
Table 3-12
CBRC - S0 Interface Assignment (RJ45 Jacks)
X9
Pin
S0 port 1
X9
Pin
S0 port 2
11
–
21
–
12
–
22
–
13
S0 port 1, transmit +
23
S0 port 2, transmit +
14
S0 port 1, receive +
24
S0 port 2, receive +
15
S0 port 1, receive –
25
S0 port 2, receive –
16
S0 port 1, transmit –
26
S0 port 2, transmit –
17
–
27
–
18
–
28
–
3-28
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
V.24 interface assignment
Table 3-13
CBRC - V.24 Interface Assignment (SUB-D Plug)
X18, pin
Signal
Description
1
–
2
RxD A
Receive data, channel A
3
TxD A
Transmit data, channel A
4
–
5
0V
6
–
7
RTS A
Request to send, channel A
8
CTS A
Clear to send, channel A
9
–
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
LAN connector assignment
Table 3-14
CBRC - LAN Connector Assignment (RJ45 Jack) via LIM
Pin
Signal
Description
1
Tx +
Transmit +
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
Rx +
Receive +
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-29
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Default numbering plan when using CBRC in HiPath 3500
Table 3-15
Default Numbering Plan When Using CBRC in HiPath 3500
Station
Int. call no.
DID no.
Port
UP0/E host
(master)
100
100
UP0/E 1
101
101
UP0/E 2
102
102
UP0/E 3
103
103
UP0/E 4
104
104
UP0/E 5
105
105
UP0/E 6
106
106
UP0/E 7
107
107
UP0/E 8
500
500
UP0/E 1
501
501
UP0/E 2
502
502
UP0/E 3
503
503
UP0/E 4
504
504
UP0/E 5
505
505
UP0/E 6
506
506
UP0/E 7
507
507
UP0/E 8
108
108
T/R 1
109
109
T/R 2
110
110
T/R 3
111
111
T/R 3
112
112
EVM-1
113
113
EVM-2
UP0/E client
(slave)
T/R
EVM
3-30
Line
Code
Port
S0
CO PP
7801
S0 1-1
7802
S0 1-2
7803
S0 2-1
7804
S0 2-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Default numbering plan when using CBRC in HiPath 3300
Table 3-16
Default Numbering Plan When Using CBRC in HiPath 3300
Station
Int. call no.
DID no.
Port
UP0/E host
(master)
11
11
UP0/E 1
12
12
UP0/E 2
13
13
UP0/E 3
14
14
UP0/E 4
15
15
UP0/E 5
16
16
UP0/E 6
17
17
UP0/E 7
18
18
UP0/E 8
51
51
UP0/E 1
52
52
UP0/E 2
53
53
UP0/E 3
54
54
UP0/E 4
55
55
UP0/E 5
56
56
UP0/E 6
57
57
UP0/E 7
58
58
UP0/E 8
19
19
T/R 1
20
20
T/R 2
21
21
T/R 3
22
22
T/R 3
23
23
EVM-1
24
24
EVM-2
UP0/E client
(slave)
T/R
EVM
Line
Code
Port
S0
CO PP
801
S0 1-1
802
S0 1-2
803
S0 2-1
804
S0 2-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-31
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.3
CBCPR
Introduction
The CBCPR board (shown in Figure 3-3) performs all central control and switching functions
for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
>
Disconnecting the battery buffer by unplugging the X27 jumper is necessary only for
testing (module test at the factory). Disconnection does not necessarily delete the
customer database (CDB). To delete the CDB, use the reset switch.
Subboards
The following subboards can be used depending on the application:
●
CMS clock module (optional)
●
MMC multimedia card
●
IMODN integrated modem card new (optional)
●
LIM LAN interface module (optional)
Section 3.2.12 contains information on how to make the LAN connection.
●
MPPI music on hold (optional)
V.24 interfaces
●
To connect a service PC, you can access the first V.24 interface (9-pin SUB-D plug) on the
CBCPR from the front of the basic cabinet (after removing the cover). (See Figure 3-3.)
●
You can access the second V.24 interface (25-pin SUB-D plug) via the backplane of the
basic cabinet (X7).
Switches and indicators
●
●
Reset/reload switch
–
Switch pressed < 5 s = Reset activated
–
Switch pressed > 5 s = Reload activated (RUN LED out indicates that a reload is in
progress)
RUN LED
Signals the current status of the CBCPR board (see Table 12-2).
3-32
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Diagram of the CBCPR board
CMA
1
X13
CMS
1
Reset/reload
switch
RUN LED
X14
X27
Batt.
MMC
LAN connector,
8-pin RJ45
jack
V.24 interface,
9-pin SUB-D
plug (service PC or
application)
IMODN
1
LIM
X15
X12
X18
1
MPPI
X19
1
X17
X20
1
1
X16
1
Figure 3-3
CBCPR Board (S30810-Q2936-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-33
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
V.24 interface assignment
Table 3-17
CBCPR - V.24 Interface Assignment (SUB-D Plug)
X18, pin
Signal
Description
1
–
2
RxD A
Receive data, channel A
3
TxD A
Transmit data, channel A
4
–
5
0V
6
–
7
RTS A
Request to send, channel A
8
CTS A
Clear to send, channel A
9
–
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
LAN connector assignment
Table 3-18
3-34
CBCPR - LAN Connector Assignment (RJ45 Jack)
Pin
Signal
Description
1
Tx +
Transmit +
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
Rx +
Receive +
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.4
CBSAP
Introduction
The CBSAP board (Central Board Synergy Access Platform) performs all central control and
switching functions for HiPath 3800 (see Figure 3-4).
Subboards
The following subboards can be used depending on the application:
●
CMS clock module (optional)
●
MMC multimedia card
●
IMODN integrated modem card new (optional)
●
LIMS LAN interface module (optional)
Contains two Ethernet (10/100BaseT) LAN connectors (8-pin RJ45 jacks):
●
–
LAN1 (administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and CTI functions)
–
LAN2 (not assigned)
MPPI music on hold (optional)
V.24 interfaces (9-pin SUB-D plug)
●
Service (X50) = for connecting the service PC
●
Application (X51) = for connecting a printer or application
Switches and indicators
●
●
Reset/reload switch:
–
Switch pressed < 5 s = Reset activated
–
Switch pressed > 5 s = Reload activated (Fail LED (red) out indicates that a reload is
in progress).
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
–
Run (green) = signals the current status of the CBSAP board (see Table 12-2)
–
Fail (red) = error encountered
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-35
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
●
Two LEDs for displaying the LAN interface status:
–
LED1:
– Green = 100 Mbps online (link)
– Yellow = 10 Mbps online (link)
– Flashing = active
–
LED2 (green):
– On = full-duplex (FDX)
– Off = half-duplex
Diagram of CBSAP board
MMC
IMODN
LIMS
CMS
MPPI
Figure 3-4
3-36
CBSAP Board (S30810-Q2314-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
Run (green, flashing: 0.5 s on/0.5 s off) = error-free operation
●
Fail (red) = error encountered
Reset/reload switch
Slide-in shelf for MMC
V.24 interfaces (9-pin SUB-D plug):
●
Service (X50) = for connecting the service PC
●
Application (X51) = for connecting a printer or application
Two Ethernet (10/100BaseT) LAN connectors (8-pin RJ45 jacks) via
LIMS:
●
LAN2 (not assigned)
●
LAN1 (administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and CTI functions)
The LAN interface status is indicated by two LEDs:
●
LED1:
– Green = 100 Mbps online (link)
– Yellow = 10 Mbps online (link)
– Flashing = active
●
LED2 (green):
– On = full-duplex (FDX)
– Off = half-duplex
Figure 3-5
CBSAP - Front Panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-37
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
V.24 interface assignment
Table 3-19
CBSAP - V.24 Interface Assignment (SUB-D Plug)
X50/X51, Pin
Signal
Description
1
DCD
Data carrier detect (not used)
2
RxD
Receive data
3
TxD
Transmit data
4
DTR
Data terminal ready (not used)
5
0V
Ground
6
DSR
Data send ready (not used)
7
RTS
Request to send
8
CTS
Clear to send
9
RI
Ring indicator (not used)
LAN connector assignment via LIMS
Table 3-20
3-38
CBSAP - LAN Connector Assignment (RJ45 Jack)
Pin
Signal
Description
1
Tx +
Transmit +
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
Rx +
Receive +
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.5
7
CMA
Caution
Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the CMA subboard.
The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so you
should always mount them (see Figure 3-6).
Otherwise you may damage the board.
Spacing bolts
Figure 3-6
CMA with Spacing Bolts
Introduction
The Clock Module ADPCM CMA (S30807-Q6931-X) is an optional subboard for the CBCC and
CBRC central control boards. The CMA module is needed for special HiPath Cordless Office
configurations.
All clock module small (CMS) functions are available when you insert a CMA module.
Please refer to Page 3-40 for recommendations on CMA module implementation.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-39
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.6
7
CMS
Caution
Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the CMS subboard.
The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so you
should always mount them (see Figure 3-6).
Otherwise you may damage the board.
Introduction
The Clock Module Small CMS (S30807-Q6928-X) is an optional subboard for the HiPath 3000
central control boards and guarantees greater clock accuracy.
Recommendations for CMA and CMS utilization
Table 3-21 provides recommendations for the implementation of CMA and CMS subboards
based on
●
the type of network (ISDN S0, ISDN S2M or Ethernet/IP (10/100 BaseT))
●
the trunk connection available (no trunk/analog trunk, ISDN S0 or ISDN S2M) and consequently, the possible provision of a digital reference clock
●
HiPath Cordless Office
Trunk connection:
●
●
●
No trunk or analog trunk
HiPath 3000
ISDN S0
ISDN S2M
Master
System
●
●
HiPath 3000
System 1
3-40
ISDN S0
ISDN S2M
●
HiPath 3000
●
Slave
System(s)
●
Figure 3-7
Trunk connection:
Networked via:
Ethernet/IP
(10/100
BaseT)
●
No trunk or analog trunk
ISDN S0
ISDN S2M
HiPath 3000
System(s)
1+n
Networking Options for HiPath 3000 Systems
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Table 3-21
Recommendations for CMA and CMS Utilization
Trunk Reference
connecclock
tion
HiPath Cordless
Office
No
Yes
Trunk
connection
Reference
clock
HiPath Cordless
Office
No
Yes
Networking via ISDN S0 lines:
MASTER system
SLAVE system(s)
CMS or CMA
(see
Table 11-1)
No trunk
or analog
trunk
Via
ISDN S0
networking line
–
CMA2
ISDN S0
(not always active)
Via
CMS1 CMS or CMA
(see
ISDN S0
Table 11-1)
trunk connection
(if active)
ISDN S0
(not always active)
Via
ISDN S0
networking line
–
CMA2
ISDN S0
(always
active)
Via
CMS1
ISDN S0
trunk connection
CMA2
ISDN S0
(always
active)
Via
ISDN S0
trunk connection
–
CMA2
ISDN
S2M
Via
CMS1
ISDN S2M
trunk connection
CMA2
ISDN S2M
Via
ISDN S2M
trunk connection
–
CMA2
No trunk
or analog
trunk
–
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-41
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Table 3-21
Recommendations for CMA and CMS Utilization
Trunk Reference
connecclock
tion
HiPath Cordless
Office
No
Yes
Trunk
connection
Reference
clock
HiPath Cordless
Office
No
Yes
Networking via ISDN S2M lines:
MASTER system
SLAVE system(s)
CMS or CMA
(see
Table 11-1)
No trunk
or analog
trunk
Via
ISDN S2M
networking line
–
CMA2
ISDN S0
(not always active)
Via
CMS1 CMS or CMA
(see
ISDN S0
trunk conTable 11-1)
nection
(if active)
ISDN S0
(not always active)
Via
ISDN S2M
networking line
–
CMA2
ISDN S0
(always
active)
Via
CMS1
ISDN S0
trunk connection
CMA2
ISDN S0
(always
active)
Via
ISDN S0
trunk connection
–
CMA2
ISDN
S2M
CMS1
Via
ISDN S2M
trunk connection
CMA2
ISDN S2M
Via
ISDN S2M
trunk connection
–
CMA2
No trunk
or analog
trunk
3-42
–
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Table 3-21
Recommendations for CMA and CMS Utilization
Trunk Reference
connecclock
tion
HiPath Cordless
Office
No
Yes
Trunk
connection
Reference
clock
HiPath Cordless
Office
No
Yes
Networking via Ethernet/IP (10/100 BaseT) lines:
System 1
No trunk
or analog
trunk
System(s) n+1
No trunk
or analog
trunk
ISDN S0
(not always active)
Via
CMS3 CMS or CMA
ISDN S0
(see
trunk conTable 11-1)
nection
(if active)
ISDN S0
(not always active)
Via
CMS3 CMS or CMA
ISDN S0
(see
trunk conTable 11-1)
nection
(if active)
ISDN S0
(always
active)
Via
ISDN S0
trunk connection
–
CMA2
ISDN S0
(always
active)
Via
ISDN S0
trunk connection
–
CMA2
ISDN
S2M
Via
ISDN S2M
trunk connection
–
CMA2
ISDN S2M
Via
ISDN S2M
trunk connection
–
CMA2
2
3
–
CMS3 CMS or CMA
(see
Table 11-1)
CMS or CMA
(see
Table 11-1)
1
–
CMS3
CMS is not necessary if the reference clock supplied by the CO is always available via the networking lines (not a transparent clock).
CMA is not necessary if ADPCM conversion is not needed for HiPath Cordless Office (see Table 11-1).
CMS is not necessary but is recommended for the following reasons: Although an Ethernet link is an asynchronous connection, buffer overflow/underflow can cause transmission errors. To avoid this, the clock difference between the master
and the slave systems should be as small as possible so that the receive and send buffer can be read and addressed at
the same speed on both sides. The more accurate the clock source in the relevant systems, the fewer the faults.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-43
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.7
CR8N
Introduction
The CR8N (Code Receiver) board is an optional plug-in module and can be used in any slot in
all HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 cabinets.
The CR8N board is required when:
●
A high outgoing traffic load and a large number of analog subscribers exist.
●
A Hicom Phonemail system with more than six ports and the automatic attendant function
is connected.
●
An external automatic attendant is being used as a virtual attendant and the system has a
large number of analog trunks.
In these cases, the six code receivers (for tone dialing on analog telephones) that are already
present in the system on the CBCPR are not sufficient. Adding a CR8N board provides another
eight code receivers and eight code transmitters. Up to two CR8Ns can be installed in each system. A CR8N board and a CR8 board (S30810-Q2513-X) cannot be used in the same system
simultaneously.
You can also install or remove a CR8N board during operation. If you remove it while the system
is in the operating state, you risk interrupting DTMF signal processing. It is always recommended that you remove or install the board only while the system is switched off.
Note the following recommendations for using the CR8N board if a Hicom Phonemail system,
voice mail system, or automatic attendant is connected:
●
Up to 8 ports: No CR8N board required.
●
9 to 24 ports: One CR8N board required.
●
Over 24 ports: Two CR8N boards required.
These are general recommendations only. In some cases, a CR8N board may already be required for six ports under extreme load conditions.
3-44
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Switches and LEDs
H1 (red)
LEDs
H2 (green)
Figure 3-8
CR8N (S30810-Q2513-X100)
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-22
CR8N - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is Wait
in progress.
If the status does not change, the loadware Replace board.
did not load correctly. Board is faulty.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
On
On
Board test unsuccessful, board is defective. Replace board.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (temporary transition).
Off
Flashing Board operational.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-45
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.8
CUC and CUCR
The backplane comes in two versions:
●
CUC (Connection Unit Com) S30777-Q750-X (Figure 3-9) - for use in HiPath 3550 (wall
housing)
●
CUCR (Connection Unit Com Rack) S30777-Q750-Z (Figure 3-10) - for use in HiPath 3500
(19-inch housing)
CUC connector designations and slot assignments (S30777-Q750-X)
Reserved
Slot 2 (8 x UP0/E)
Slot 6 (X40)
Slot 1 (2 x S0)
CUC
Slot 8 (X60)
Slot 4 (X20)
Figure 3-9
HiPath 3750 board
Slot 10 (X10)
Slot 3 (4 x T/R)
Slot 7 (X50)
Slot 9 (X70)
PSU/UPS (X1)
Slot 5 (X30)
CBCC
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
CUC Backplane (S30777-Q750-X)
CUCR connector designations and slot assignments (S30777-Q750-Z)
Slot 2 (8 x UP0/E)
Slot 6 (X40)
Slot 1 (2 x S0)
CUCR
Slot 8 (X60)
Slot 4 (X20)
Figure 3-10
3-46
Slot 3 (4 x T/R)
Slot 7 (X50)
Slot 9 (X70)
PSU/UPS (X1)
Slot 5 (X30)
CBRC
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
Peripheral board
CUCR Backplane (S30777-Q750-Z)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.9
CUP and CUPR
The backplane comes in two versions:
●
CUP (Connection Unit Point) S30777-Q751-X (Figure 3-11) - for use in HiPath 3350 (wall
housing)
●
CUPR (Connection Unit Point Rack) S30777-Q751-Z (Figure 3-12) - for use in HiPath 3300
(19-inch housing)
CUP connector designations and slot assignments (S30777-Q751-X)
Slot 2 (8 x UP0/E)
Slot 4 (X20)
Slot 1 (2 x S0)
Slot 3 (4 x T/R)
CBCC
PSU/UPS (X1)
Slot 5 (X30)
Peripheral board
CUP
Figure 3-11
CUP Backplane (S30777-Q751-X)
CUPR connector designations and slot assignments (S30777-Q751-Z)
Slot 2 (8 x UP0/E)
Slot 4 (X20)
Slot 1 (2 x S0)
Slot 3 (4 x T/R)
CBRC
PSU/UPS (X1)
Slot 5 (X30)
Peripheral board
CUPR
Figure 3-12
CUPR Backplane (S30777-Q751-Z)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-47
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.10
DBSAP
A prerequisite for expanding HiPath 3800 to a two-cabinet system is that the DBSAP (Driver
Board for Synergy Access Platform) board is mounted on the backplane of the expansion cabinet.
DBSAP ensures that the expansion cabinet receives HDLC, PCM and clock signals from the
basic cabinet. In addition, an ID signal is created which indicates the availability of an expansion cabinet to the CBSAP.
Front
With 68-pin DB68 mini-jack for connecting the connection cable to the basic cabinet
Figure 3-13
>
3-48
Back
With four jacks for plugging into the
backplane of the expansion cabinet
DBSAP (S30807-Q6722-X)
The cable (C39195-Z7611-A10) is used as the connection cable between basic cabinet (X201 jack) and expansion cabinet (DBSAP board). To ensure smooth operation, use only shielded cables with a maximum length of 1 m.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
DBSAP
Figure 3-14
DBSAP on the Backplane of the Expansion Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-49
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.11
7
IMODN
Caution
Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the IMODN subboard.
The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so you
should always mount them (see Figure 3-6).
Otherwise you may damage the board.
Introduction
The Integrated Modem Card New (IMODN - S30807-Q6932-X100) is an optional subboard for
HiPath 3000 central control boards.
It permits the use of remote service (analog mode up to 33.6 Kbps) over analog trunks without
an external modem.
IMODN is the compatible successor of IMODC. Functional differences between both modules
only exist in the higher transmission speed of the IMODN.
Loadable loadware
To avoid exchanging the IMODN subboard during a software upgrade, IMODN loadware is automatically updated in V4.0 SMR-08 and later.
Updating the IMODN loadware takes approx. 10 minutes beginning with the idle system status.
The red LED on the IMODN lights up repeatedly during the loading procedure. IMODN is ready
as soon as the green LED starts to flash.
If the IMODN loadware is not updated when the system is reset, the green LED starts to flash
approx. 10 seconds after the reset. The green LED continues to flash after the system boot.
3-50
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.12
LIM
Caution
The LAN interface module must not be plugged in or out when the system is energized.
Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the LIM subboard.
The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so you
should always mount them (see Figure 3-6).
Otherwise you may damage the board.
7
Introduction
The LAN Interface Module (LIM - S30807-Q6930-X) is an optional plug-in card for all HiPath
3000 central control boards apart from CBSAP (HiPath 3800).
The board provides an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mbps) LAN connection via an 8-pin RJ45 jack.
The LIM module can be used for administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and for CTI functions (TAPI 120 V2.0). However, bear in mind that the number of BHCAs (Busy Hour Call Attempts = number of connection attempts during busy traffic hours) is restricted to 400 at a maximum of six TAPI ports. The use of "power dialers" is not approved.
You cannot operate the LIM module and a HG 1500 board simultaneously in a HiPath 3000.
RJ45 jack assignment
Table 3-23
LIM - RJ45 Jack Assignment
Pin
Signal
Description
1
Tx +
Transmit +
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
Rx +
Receive +
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-51
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
LAN connection in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
Make the LAN connection using the adapter cable and a standard patch cable, which is to be
stripped and fastened to the grill on the backplane as shown in Figure 3-15.
CBCPR
Standard patch cable (see Figure 3-17)
LIM
X12
For shielding reasons, the stripped part of the cable must be fastened to the grill of the HiPath
3750/HiPath 3700 backplane with cable straps.
X18
to LAN
Adapter cable
(C39195-Z7213-A1)
(see Figure 3-16)
approx. 300 mm
Stripped length
approx. 60 mm
Figure 3-15
LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Procedure for LAN Connection
Figure 3-16
LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Adapter Cable (C39195-Z7213-A1)
3-52
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Figure 3-17
LIM in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Attachment of the Patch Cable to the
Backplane Grill
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-53
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.13
7
LIMS
Caution
The LIMS module must not be plugged in or out when the system is energized.
Introduction
The LAN Interface Module for SAPP LIMS (S30807-Q6721-X) is an optional plug-in card for
the CBSAP central control board in HiPath 3800.
The board provides two Ethernet (10/100BaseT) LAN connectors via two 8-pin RJ45 jacks:
●
LAN1 (administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and CTI functions)
●
LAN2 (not assigned)
The LIMS module can be used for administration via HiPath 3000 Manager E and for CTI functions (TAPI 120 V2.0). However, bear in mind that the number of BHCAs (Busy Hour Call Attempts = number of connection attempts during busy traffic hours) is restricted to 400 at a maximum of six TAPI ports. The use of "power dialers" is not approved.
You cannot operate the LIMS module and an STMI2 board simultaneously in a HiPath 3800.
Figure 3-18
3-54
CBSAP with LIMS Module Plugged In
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
RJ45 jack assignment
Table 3-24
LIMS - RJ45 Jack Assignment
Pin
Signal
Description
1
Tx +
Transmit +
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
Rx +
Receive +
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-55
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.14
LUNA2
Introduction
LUNA2 (Line-powered Unit for Network-based Architecture No. 2) is used as the central power
supply in HiPath 3800. Depending on the system configuration up to three LUNA2 modules can
be used in the basic cabinet and up to four LUNA2 modules can be used in the expansion cabinet.
When expanding the HiPath 3800 to a two-cabinet system, two LUNA2 modules in the basic
cabinet and three LUNA2 modules in the expansion cabinet are enough to supply the maximum
configuration in Table 2-7. For information on how to calculate the number of LUNA2 modules
required, see Page 3-62.
You can use a third LUNA2 in the basic cabinet and a fourth in the expansion cabinet to
●
ensure error-free operation if one LUNA2 module fails (redundant LUNA2).
●
load a connected battery pack or a battery cabinet.
LUNA2 supports power supply and battery management functions. No other components are
required if it is operated as a power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergency operation
after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power supply functions, you must also connect a battery pack per system cabinet or a BSG 48/38 battery cabinet (including battery charger).
LUNA2 is used in all countries.
Licensed batteries
S30122-K5950-Y200: Battery pack 4 x 12 V/7 Ah
This is the only battery pack approved for operation with LUNA2.
Part numbers
●
LUNA2: S30122-K7686-L1, S30122-K7686-M1
For production-related reasons, two different LUNA2 modules with the same functions are
used. Technically identical, the two models have minor mechanical differences and are fully
compatible with each other.
●
Battery pack 4 x 12 V/7 Ah: S30122-K5950-Y200
(the connection cable for LUNA2 is part of the battery pack)
●
Battery cabinet BSG 48/38: S30122-K5950-F300 (Page 3-63)
–
Battery cable for BSG 48/38: S39195-A7985-B10
(A battery cable is required for each system cabinet to be connected.)
–
Battery 12 V/38 Ah: S30122-X5950-F320
(Four batteries necessary for each BSG 48/38.)
3-56
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Technical specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 110 VAC - 240 VAC
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Output voltage (battery charging voltage, if a LUNA2 is used as a battery charger): –
54.7 VDC; –53.5 VDC (for gell cell batteries, currently not released)
●
Output current (battery charge current, if a LUNA2 is used as a battery charger): up to 2 A
●
Bridging times
Table 3-25 lists the maximum possible bridging times (emergency battery operation in case
of power failure) with battery pack S30122-K5950-Y200 ((48 V/7 Ah) and battery housing
BSG 48/38 (S30122-K5950-F300).
Table 3-25
System
LUNA2 - Bridging Times with Battery Pack 48 V/7 Ah and Upright Battery
Housing BSG 48/38
Power supply unit
Load levels
Maximum bridging time
HiPath 3800 2 x LUNA2 per system cabinet as 60 % nominal
PSU
load
1 x LUNA2 per system cabinet as
battery charger
1 x battery pack 48 V/7 Ah per system cabinet
25 min
HiPath 3800 5 x LUNA2 per system
60 % nominal
1 x BSG 48/38 upright battery
load
housing per system
(LUNA2 is not required as a battery
charger as the BSG 48/38 battery
cabinet features a built-in charger.)
1 h 30 min
Measurement conditions:
●
All measurements were performed at a room temperature of approximately 22 °C
(71.6 °F).
●
The batteries were new and fully charged when measurement started.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-57
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Front view of LUNA2 with indicators and switches
LED for displaying the operating status
ON/OFF switch for secondary operating voltages (system supply voltages)
LUNA2 can only be plugged in or out when
the system is switched off (switch = DC-OFF)
Switches for setting the operating mode
Removal tab
You can use a screwdriver here to remove the
LUNA2 from the shelf.
Figure 3-19
●
LUNA2 Front Panel
LED for displaying the operating status:
– Illuminated = LUNA2 is operating as power supply unit
– Flashing = LUNA2 is operating as a battery charger
– Off = At least one secondary operating voltage is outside the tolerance zone. In this
case
a) the voltage feed for LUNA2 may not be sufficient (an additional LUNA2 module is
required. For information on how to calculate the number of LUNA2 modules required,
see Page 3-62).
b) LUNA2 may be defective (the board must be replaced).
3-58
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
●
ON/OFF switch for secondary operating voltages (system supply voltages)
7
●
Caution
The switches for deactivating the secondary operating voltage (system supply
voltage) must be set to "DC-OFF" on all LUNA2s during maintenance work that
requires the system to be de-energized (for example, central board replacement). The system is only in de-energized state if the switches on ALL
LUNA2s are set to “DC-OFF” position.
The system is only restarted if all LUNA2 switches are returned to the “DC-ON”
position.
Switches for setting the operating mode (the operating mode must be set before the outer
panel is mounted):
– Mode 1: For use as power supply (LED illuminated)
– Mode 2a: For use as battery charger (LED flashing) with a charging voltage of
54.7 Vdc
– Mode 2b: For use as battery charger (LED flashing) with a charging voltage of
53.5 Vdc
>
Mode 1 should always be set for the power supply units plugged in at LUNA2
slots 1, 2 and 3 (expansion cabinet only).
The following applies to the power supply unit plugged in at the LUNA2 slot
marked “4”:
●
Set to mode 1 if this module is to be used for LUNA2 redundancy.
●
Set to mode 2a or 2b if this LUNA2 module is to be used as a battery charger.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-59
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Slots
Push the LUNA2 power supply unit into the slots provided in the lower part of the system cabinet shelf until you hear a click (see Figure 4-18).
The power supply unit slots must be covered with the outer panel shown in Figure 3-20 (basic
cabinet) and in Figure 3-21 (expansion cabinet) before the system is started up.
Figure 3-20
3-60
LUNA2 Slots in the Basic Cabinet (With Outer Panel Mounted)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Figure 3-21
LUNA2 Slots in the Expansion Cabinet (With Outer Panel Mounted)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-61
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Calculating the number of LUNA2 modules required
The number of LUNA2 modules required in relation to the number and type of peripheral
boards installed can be calculated using the following table.
Table 3-26
Determining the Number of LUNA2 Modules Required Per Cabinet
Basic cabinet
Expansion cabinet
Number of peripheral
boards per cabinet
STMI2, SLMA and/or
SLCN available
Number of
LUNA2s required
per cabinet
<5
No
1
<5
Yes
2
5
No
2
5
Yes
2
<5
No
1
<5
Yes
2
5
No
2
5
Yes
3
10
No
3
10
Yes
3
Examples for a one-cabinet system:
a) Basic cabinet with CBSAP and peripheral boards (without STMI2, SLMA or SLCN)
●
A single LUNA2 can supply a CBSAP and up to four peripheral boards.
●
A second LUNA2 is required for five or more peripheral boards.
●
A third LUNA2 can be used as a battery charger or as a redundant LUNA2.
b) Basic cabinet with CBSAP and peripheral boards (with STMI2, SLMA and/or SLCN)
3-62
●
Two LUNA2s are always required to supply a CBSAP, peripheral boards and
STMI2, SLMA and/or SLCN.
●
A third LUNA2 can be used as a battery charger or as a redundant LUNA2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
BSG 48/38
You can use a BSG 48/38 battery cabinet instead of the battery pack to extend the bridging time
in the event of a power failure. The BSG 48/38 battery cabinet (S30122-K5950-F300) consists
of
●
an upright housing
●
a charging rectifier
●
a battery set (38 Ah/48 V)
The battery cabinet is designed for direct connection to the HiPath 3800 communication system. The DC power cable (S39195-A7985-B10) provided lets you connect any system cabinet
to the battery cabinet (do not connect to extension cables). Figure 3-23 is a schematic display
of the connections between the battery cabinet BSG 48/38 and HiPath 3800.
>
For detailed information about safety precautions as well as using and connecting
the battery cabinet, refer to the installation and startup instructions that came with
the cabinet.
DC output 2:
–48-V special
outputs
+–
+–
BSG 48/38
DC output 1:
–48 V to HiPath
3800
AC input
230 V
Figure 3-22
1
2
3
Rear View of the BSG 48/38 Battery Cabinet (S30122-K5950-F300)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-63
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
HiPath 3800
Basic cabinet
DC connection cable
BSG 48/38
with batt.set
(38 Ah/48 V)
AC input
DC
Output 1,
–48 V
X210
100 - 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
X211
Expansion cabinet
1
2
DC connection cable
3
X210
100 - 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
X211
100 - 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
X210
DC port
X211
AC power
Note: For reasons of clarity, the system cabinets are shown separately and without grounding.
Figure 3-23
3-64
Connections Between the BSG 48/38 Battery Cabinet and HiPath 3800
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.15
MMC
Introduction
The Multi Media Card (MMC) is a plug-in memory card for the central control boards and contains the CDB backup and the relevant version-specific application processor software (APS).
Please note that the MMC may only be replaced by a multimedia card approved by Siemens
AG. Cards that have not been approved may have a different internal structure which can affect
temporal access and certain features (for example, CDB backup and APS transfer).
HiPath 3300
with CBRC
HiPath 3300
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
with CBCC
HiPath 3700
Application in HiPath 3000
HiPath 3350
Application
in
countries
HiPath 3550
Part number
HiPath 3750
MMC
Multimedia Card Models and Applications
HiPath 3800
Table 3-27
HiPath 3000 Version 3.0
MMC16
(16 MB)
S30122-X7424-X
(= empty basic MMC)
ROW
P30370-P1031-A816
X X X
X
X
P30370-P1032-A816
X X X
X
X
X
P30370-P1033-A816
X
X
X
X
X
HiPath 3000 Version 4.0
MMC16
(16 MB)
S30122-X7424-X
(= empty basic MMC)
ROW
X X X
P50038-P1009-A816
X
P50038-P1011-A816
S30122-X8002-X10
(= empty basic MMC)
ROW
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
X
X X X
X
X X
X
X X
X
P50038-P1010-A864
P50038-P1011-A864
X X X
X
P50038-P1010-A816
MMC64
(64 MB)
X
X
X
3-65
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
HiPath 3300
with CBRC
HiPath 3300
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
with CBCC
HiPath 3700
Application in HiPath 3000
HiPath 3350
Application
in
countries
HiPath 3550
Part number
HiPath 3750
MMC
Multimedia Card Models and Applications
HiPath 3800
Table 3-27
HiPath 3000 Version 5.0
MMC64
(64 MB)
S30122-X8002-X10
(= empty basic MMC)
P50038-P1053-A816
P50038-P1054-A816
3-66
ROW
X X X X
X
X X X
X
X
X X X
X
X
X X X
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.16
PSUP
Introduction
The power supply PSUP S30122-K5658-M (Figure 3-24) is used in HiPath 3350 (wall housing).
The device plugs into a special slot and is secured by screws. It connects to the power outlet
using a modular power cord.
A monitoring LED indicates the presence of the 5-V output voltage.
Technical specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 VAC - 240 VAC
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 VAC, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Power consumption: 70 W
7
Caution
System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power
plug.
PSUP interfaces (S30122-K5658-M)
25 Hz
50 Hz
20 Hz
1
To CUP
X1
Slide switch for setting ring frequency
for following country settings:
●
25 Hz = Germany + international
●
50 Hz = France
●
20 Hz = U.S.
50
Power plug
Figure 3-24
PSUP Interface (S30122-K5658-M)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-67
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.17
UPSC-D
Introduction
The UPSC-D S30122-K5660-M300 board (Figure 3-25) is used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath
3350 (wall housing).
This module supports power supply and battery management functions. No other components
are required if it is operated as an AC power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergency
operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power supply functions, you must
also connect a battery pack.
7
Warning
The UPSC-D power supply unit is only released for permanent AC power supply.
Permanent operation at a direct-current system is not allowed.
A DC power supply unit is only connected to bridge an AC power failure (emergency
battery operation).
If a 48-V direct-current system is being used instead of a battery pack for DC power
supply, connection must be performed as for a battery pack. The 48-V direct-current
system must not exceed the limit of 60 V in operating mode, during loading, and
when an error occurs. The direct-current system must not be connected to the
UPSC-D if this cannot be guaranteed.
If the power supplied by the UPSC-D is insufficient, an external EPSU2 power supply can be
installed to provide additional power. For this, the EPSU2’s DC connection needs to be connected to the special -48 VDC input on the UPSC-D. The UPSC-D’s internal -48-V output is deactivated when the external power supply is connected.
Licensed battery pack
S30122-K5928-X (48 V (4 x 12 V)/1.2 Ah battery pack)
This is the only battery pack released for connection to UPSC-D.
7
3-68
Danger
Do not use 24-V batteries (S30122-K5403-X) in conjunction with UPSC-D as an explosive gas (hydrogen + oxygen) escapes when the battery is overloaded.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Technical specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 VAC - 240 VAC
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 VAC, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Battery charger: 4 x 12 V (40.8 V-55.2 V)
●
Power consumption: 180 W
●
Bridging times
Table 3-28 lists the maximum possible bridging times (emergency battery operation in case
of power failure) with battery pack S30122-K5928-X (48 V/1.2 Ah), depending on the system.
Table 3-28
System
UPSC-D - Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122-K5928-X (48 V/
1.2 Ah)
Power supply unit
Load levels
Maximum bridging time
HiPath 3350 UPSC-D
Normal output load = 5 V: 3 A;
–48 V: 0.5 A; ringing approx. 2 VA
19 min
HiPath 3550 UPSC-D
Normal output load 100 % = 5 V: 8 A;
–48 V: 1.1 A; ringing approx. 4 VA
6 min
HiPath 3550 UPSC-D
Normal output load 60 % = 5 V: 4.8 A;
–48 V: 0.66 A; ringing approx. 2 VA
15 min
HiPath 3550 UPSC-D with Normal output load 100 % = 5 V: 8 A;
EPSU2
–48 V: 2.5 A (external via EPSU2);
ringing approx. 4 VA
17 min
Measurement conditions:
●
All measurements were performed at a room temperature of approximately 23 °C
(73.4°F).
●
The batteries were fully charged when the measurement was started.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-69
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Diagram of UPSC-D
LED, yellow
UPSC-D (S30122-K5660-M300)
LED,
green
25 Hz
20 Hz
50 Hz
Figure 3-25
1
To
CUC/
CUP
LED, yellow
X1
50
2
SU
ck
pa
3-70
Slide switch for activating/deactivating
the battery voltage (battery pack):
●
up = off, battery voltage deactivated
(battery backup off)
●
down = on, battery voltage activated
(battery backup on)
lug
rp
we
Po
EP
ry
tte
Ba
Figure 3-26
Slide switch for setting the ring frequency
UPSC-D (S30122-K5660-M300)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Switches and indicators
7
Caution
System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug.
If using an uninterruptible power supply, switch off the battery voltage first.
●
LED, green: +5-V output voltage is available.
●
LED, yellow: –48-V output voltage is supplied by the external EPSU2 power supply.
●
Slide switch for setting the ring frequency:
– 25 Hz (Germany + international market)
– 20 Hz (U.S.)
– 50 Hz (France)
●
Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage (battery pack):
–
up = off, battery voltage deactivated (battery backup off)
–
down = on, battery voltage activated (battery backup on)
Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage (battery
pack)
LED, green: +5-V output voltage is
available
Slide switch for setting the ring frequency
Figure 3-27
UPSC-D - Switches and LEDs
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-71
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Connectors
Connector for battery pack
Connector for EPSU2
Power plug
Figure 3-28
3-72
UPSC-D - Connectors
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.18
UPSC-DR
Introduction
The UPSC-DR S30122-K7373-M900 board (Figure 3-29) is used in HiPath 3500 and HiPath
3300 (19-inch housing).
This module supports power supply and battery management functions. No other components
are required if it is operated as an AC power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergency
operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power supply functions, you must
also connect a battery pack (see Section 9.2.4).
7
Warning
The UPSC-DR power supply unit is only released for permanent AC power supply.
Permanent operation at a direct-current system is not allowed.
A DC power supply unit is only connected to bridge an AC power failure (emergency
battery operation).
If a 48-V direct-current system is being used instead of a battery pack for DC power
supply, connection must be performed as for a battery pack. The 48-V direct-current
system must not exceed the limit of 60 V in operating mode, during loading, and
when an error occurs. The direct-current system must not be connected to the
UPSC-DR if this cannot be guaranteed!
7
Danger
The UPSC-DR board is not insulated.
Consequently, a system using a UPSC-DR may only be operated with a closed
housing.
Before opening the housing, make sure that the system is de-energized as follows:
●
by disconnecting the battery voltage and line voltage at any connected ECR
(see Section 9.2.4.1, “ECR Control, Display, and Connecting Elements”).
●
by disconnecting the line cord attached to any connected batteries (installed in
the ECR) (see Section 9.2.4.4, “Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries”).
●
by disconnecting the line cord attached to any connected EPSU2-R (installed in
the ECR) (see Section 9.2.4.5, “Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries
and EPSU2-R”).
●
by disconnecting the power plug.
If the power supplied by the UPSC-DR is insufficient, an external EPSU2-R power supply can
be installed to provide additional power. To do this, connect the DC port on the EPSU2-R to the
special –48-Vdc input on the UPSC-DR. The UPSC-DR’s internal -48 V output is deactivated
when the external power supply is connected.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-73
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Licensed batteries
4 x V39113-W5123-E891 (4 x 12 V/7 Ah batteries)
These are the only batteries released for connection to UPSC-DR and installation in ECRs.
7
Danger
Do not use 24-V batteries (S30122-K5403-X) in conjunction with UPSC-DR as an
explosive gas (hydrogen + oxygen) escapes when the battery is overloaded.
Technical specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 VAC - 240 VAC
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 VAC, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Battery charger: 4 x 12 V (40.8 V-55.2 V)
●
Power consumption: 180 W
●
Bridging times
Table 3-29 lists the maximum possible bridging times (emergency battery operation in case
of power failure) with four batteries V39113-W5123-E891 (4 x 12 V/7 Ah batteries), depending on the system.
Table 3-29
System
3-74
UPSC-DR - Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113-W5123-E891 (4 x
12 V/7 Ah Batteries)
Power supply unit
Load levels
Maximum bridging time
HiPath 3300 UPSC-DR
Normal output load = 5 V: 3 A;
–48 V: 0.5 A; ringing approx. 2 VA
7h 30min
HiPath 3500 UPSC-DR
Normal output load 100 % = 5 V: 8 A;
–48 V: 1.1 A; ringing approx. 4 VA
1h 30min
HiPath 3500 UPSC-DR
Normal output load 60 % = 5 V: 4.8 A;
–48 V: 0.66 A; ringing approx. 2 VA
2h 20min
HiPath 3500 UPSC-DR with Normal output load 100 % = 5 V: 8 A;
EPSU2-R
–48 V: 3 A (external via EPSU2-R);
ringing approx. 4 VA
1h 30min
HiPath 3500 UPSC-DR with Normal output load 60 % = 5 V: 4.8 A;
EPSU2-R
–48 V: 1.8 A (external via EPSU2-R);
ringing approx. 2 VA
2h 40min
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Table 3-29
UPSC-DR - Bridging Times with four Batteries V39113-W5123-E891 (4 x
12 V/7 Ah Batteries)
System
Power supply unit
Load levels
Maximum bridging time
Measurement conditions:
●
All measurements were performed at a room temperature of approximately 23 °C
(73.4 °F).
●
The batteries were fully charged when the measurement was started.
Diagram of UPSC-DR
LED, green
LED, yellow
Figure 3-29
UPSC-DR (S30122-K7373-M900)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-75
boards.fm
25 Hz
20 Hz
50 Hz
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Slide switch for setting the ring frequency
LED,
green
Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage (batteries):
●
up = off, battery voltage deactivated
(battery backup off)
●
down = on, battery voltage activated
(battery backup on)
1
To
CUCR/CUPR
X1
LED, yellow
50
Caution
The screw marked “
” performs the
ground connection between UPSC-DR
and the 19-inch housing and must always be installed.
Battery connector assignment:
+48 VBatt
–48 VBatt
–48 V from EPSU2-R
+48 V from EPSU2-R
Connector for batteries
and EPSU2-R (installed
in the ECR)
AC outlet
19-inch housing for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300
Figure 3-30
3-76
UPSC-DR (S30122-K7373-M900)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Switches and indicators
7
Caution
System voltage can only be switched on or off by plugging in or out the power plug.
If using an uninterruptible power supply, switch off the battery voltage first.
●
LED, green: +5-V output voltage is available.
●
LED, yellow: –48-V output voltage is supplied by the external EPSU2-R power supply.
●
Slide switch for setting the ring frequency:
– 25 Hz (Germany + international market)
– 20 Hz (U.S.)
– 50 Hz (France)
●
Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage (batteries):
–
up = off, battery voltage deactivated (battery backup off)
–
down = on, battery voltage activated (battery backup on)
Slide switch for activating and deactivating the battery voltage (batteries)
LED, green: +5-V output voltage is
available
Slide switch for setting the ring frequency
Figure 3-31
UPSC-DR - Switches and LEDs
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-77
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Connectors
Connector for batteries and
EPSU2-R (installed in the ECR)
Figure 3-32
3-78
Power plug
UPSC-DR - Connectors
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
3.2.19
UPSM
Introduction
Each cabinet in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 requires one UPSM (Uninterruptible Power Supply Modular). This board supports power supply and battery management functions. No other
components are required if operated as an AC power supply. To maintain short-term battery
emergency operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power supply functions, you must also connect a battery pack per system cabinet or a BSG 48/38 battery cabinet
(including battery charger) to the UPSM.
7
Warning
The UPSM power supply is only released for permanent AC power supply. Permanent operation at a direct-current system is not allowed.
A DC power supply unit is only connected to bridge an AC power failure (emergency
battery operation).
If a 48-V direct-current system is being used instead of a battery pack for DC power
supply, connection must be performed as for a battery pack. The 48-V direct-current
system must not exceed the limit of 60 V in operating mode, during loading, and
when an error occurs. The direct-current system must not be connected to the
UPSM if this cannot be guaranteed!
>
Each connection must have a ferrite bead provided between the UPSM and battery
pack, battery cabinet or 48-V direct-current system. Insert the ferrite bead (Würth
742 7113 or C39022-Z7000-C7) with two windings into the connection cable at the
UPSM output.
You do not need a ferrite assembly when using the BSG 48/38 battery cabinet in version 2 or later as the ferrite beads were integrated in the battery cabinet.
UPSM/PSUI mixed mode is only permitted in a system if the UPSM is operated without additional 48 V DC connection, that is in 110/220 V AC mode only.
Due to battery connection differences, mixed mode is not permitted in systems with uninterruptible power supply USVI. UPSM must not be implemented in these systems.
The UPSM is used in all countries. The ring frequency of the modular ring generator can be
parameterized to suit country-specific requirements. For production-related reasons there are
two different UPSM models. Technically identical, the two models have minor mechanical differences and are fully compatible with each other.
The only exception is the UPSM model S30122-K5950-S121 which supplies a ring voltage of
60 Veff and is only implemented in the Republic of South Africa (RSA).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-79
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
>
For U.S. only:
The UPSM can be installed in the following cabinets:
●
BC
●
Expansion cabinet 1: S30777-U709-X
●
Expansion cabinet 2: S30777-U709-X100
The UPSM can also be installed on new backplanes with re-oriented CHAMP connectors. Uninterruptible power supply functions in the form of a UPSM are not used
in the U.S.
7
Caution
When mounting the UPSM on the cabinet frame, be careful to prevent screws from
falling into the power supply unit through the ring generator opening.
If a screw falls inside the UPSM, remove the screw before starting up the unit.
LEDs and switches
An LED lights up to indicate that the UPSM is in operation. The UPSM must be replaced when
defective (LED does not light up).
7
Caution
The switches for deactivating the secondary operating voltage (system supply voltage) must be set to “Off” on all UPSMs during maintenance work that requires the
system to be de-energized (for example, central board replacement).
Part numbers
●
UPSM: S30122-K5950-S100 (Figure 3-33), S30122-K5950-A100 (Figure 3-34), S30122K5959-S121 (for RSA only)
●
Battery pack 4 x 12 V/7 Ah: S30122-K5950-Y200
(The connection cable for the UPSM is part of the battery pack.)
●
Battery cabinet BSG 48/38: S30122-K5950-F300 (Page 3-84)
–
Battery cable for BSG 48/38: S30122-X5950-F310
(One battery cable is required for each system cabinet (UPSM) to be connected.)
–
Battery 12 V/38 Ah: S30122-X5950-F320
(Four batteries necessary for each BSG 48/38.)
3-80
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Technical Specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 VAC - 240 VAC
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Max. input current consumption: 5.4 A - 2.7 A
●
Max. power consumption: around 430 W
●
Output voltage (battery charging voltage): 42.5 - 55.2 VDC
●
Output current (battery charge current):
(sufficient for battery set rating) = 7 Ah)
●
Bridging times
Table 3-30 lists the maximum possible bridging times (emergency battery operation in case
of power failure) with battery pack S30122-K5950-Y200 (48 V/7 Ah).
Table 3-30
System
0.8 A
UPSM - Bridging Times with Battery Pack S30122-K5950-Y200 (48 V/
7 Ah)
Power supply
unit
Load levels
Maximum
bridging time
HiPath 3750 UPSM
HiPath 3700
100 % nominal load
1h
HiPath 3750 UPSM
HiPath 3700
60 % nominal load
1h 40min
Measurement conditions:
●
All measurements were performed at a room temperature of approximately 22 °C
(71.6 °F).
●
The cut-off voltage is 1.7 V per cell
●
The batteries were new and fully charged when measurement started.
The battery recharging time is approx. 8.5 h.
Specifications of the modular ring generator
●
Rated output voltages: 75 Vact (60 Veff in UPSM model for RSA)
●
Output frequencies: 20/25/50 Hz
●
Output power
– continuous: 4.0 VA
– peak: 8.0 VA temporary (3 min. load/15 min. break)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-81
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Front and rear views of the UPSM (S30122-K5950-S100)
Modular
ring generator
REAR
VIEW
Connector socket
for system supply voltages
LED
OFF
ON
ON/OFF switch for
secondary operating
voltages (system
supply voltages)
FRONT
VIEW
Warning:
High Voltage
Overload protection for battery mode
Connector for battery pack or
battery cabinet
Only plug in or unplug the
connector when in de-energized state (switch = OFF).
AC outlet
Modular ring generator
Ring frequency selector:
20 Hz
25 Hz
50 Hz
Connector for battery pack or battery
cabinet
Assignment:
Ground (0 V)
–48 V
UPSMres 1)
UPSMres 1)
1) Contact (max. 100 mA) closes when battery mode is activated. A relay connected in series can be used for signaling
purposes, for example.
Figure 3-33
3-82
Front and Rear Views of the UPSM (S30122-K5950-S100)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
Front and rear views of the UPSM (S30122-K5950-A100)
REAR
VIEW
FRONT
VIEW
LED
OFF
ON
ON/OFF switch for
secondary operating
voltages (system supply voltages)
Modular ring generator
Connector for system supply
voltages
Overload protection for battery
mode
Warning:
High Voltage
Connector for battery pack or
battery cabinet
Only plug in or unplug the
connector when in de-energized state (switch = OFF).
AC outlet
Modular ring generator
Ring frequency selector:
1
2
DIP switches
(for example 25 Hz)
DIP switch settings
1
2
3
4
Frequency
On Off Off
20 Hz
3
Off On Off
25 Hz
4
Off Off On
50 Hz
(S4 = used for factory testing)
Off
On
Figure 3-34
Front and Rear Views of the UPSM (S30122-K5950-A100)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-83
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
BSG 48/38
You can use a BSG 48/38 battery cabinet instead of a battery pack to extend the bridging time
in the event of a power failure. The BSG 48/38 battery cabinet (S30122-K5950-F300) consists
of
●
an upright housing
●
a charging rectifier
●
a battery set (38 Ah/48 V)
The battery cabinet is designed for direct connection to the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 communication system. The DC power cable (S30122-X5950-F310) provided lets you connect any
UPSM to the battery cabinet (do not connect to extension cables). A schematic diagram shows
the connections between the BSG 48/38 battery cabinet and the communication system (UPSM) Figure 3-36.
>
For detailed information about safety precautions as well as using and connecting
the battery cabinet, refer to the installation and startup instructions that came with
the cabinet.
DC output 2:
–48-V special
outputs
+–
+–
BSG 48/38
AC input
230 V
Figure 3-35
3-84
DC output 1:
–48 V to HiPath
3750 and HiPath
3700
1
2
3
Rear View of the BSG 48/38 Battery Cabinet (S30122-K5950-F300)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
UPSM
Boards for HiPath 3000
Central Boards
DC connection cable
DC
Output 1,
–48 V
DC connection cable
UPSM
1
AC power
Expansion cabinet 1
USVI (battery box)
2
3
100 - 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
AC power
DC connection cable
UPSM
AC input
USVI (battery box)
100 - 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
BSG 48/38
with batt.set
(38 Ah/48 V)
BC
Expansion cabinet 2
USVI (battery box)
100 - 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
100 - 240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
AC power
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
to BSG 48/38
DC connection cable
(S30122-X5950-F310)
(For reasons of clarity, the cabinets
are shown separately and without
grounding.)
to UPSM
Lamp wire connector (UPSMres)
Contact (max. 100 mA) closes when battery mode is activated. A relay connected in series can be used for signaling purposes, for example.
Figure 3-36
Connections between the BSG 48/38 Battery Cabinet and UPSM (HiPath
3750, HiPath 3700)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-85
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3
Peripheral Boards
7
Caution
The system must be powered down and de-energized before removing or inserting
all boards in the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 and before
removing or inserting the central boards of the HiPath 3800, HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
Note
The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 peripheral boards must be firmly
inserted into their slots; otherwise contact problems can cause board failure.
3.3.1
DIU2U (For U.S. Only)
Introduction
The DIU2U (Digital Interface Unit 2 Universal) trunk module connects two digital trunks to HiPath 3800 and in this way provides two primary rate interfaces (PRI) ISDN via T1 interfaces.
Connection types
●
Fiber optic cable
The fiber optic cable is only connected via the front panel. The opto-electronic converter
AMOM must be used to connect a fiber optic cable to the 15-pin Sub-D jacks on the front
panel.
●
Copper cable
The copper cable is connected to T1-CSU (Customer Service Unit) or DSU (Data Service
Unit) via the adapter cable (C39195-A7269-B625) shown in Figure 3-37.
3-86
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Figure 3-37
DIU2U Adapter Cable C39195-A7269-B625 (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-87
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (green)
●
LED (red)
Interface 1
Interface 2
Figure 3-38
3-88
DIU2U (for U.S. only) - Front Panel (S30810-Q2216-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-31
DIU2U (For U.S. Only) - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Action
Flashing At least one channel is activated.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-89
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.2
DIUN2
Introduction
The DIUN2 (Digital Interface Unit ISDN) provides 2 x 30 B channels (voice channels) for HiPath
3800. These are used
●
for the S2M trunk connection (via NT).
●
for S2M networking via S2M lines.
>
3-90
In HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and later, the B channels in the DIUN2 board are subject
to license. Information on licensing can be found in Chapter 8.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
LED (green)
●
LED (red)
●
Interface 1
Interface 2
Figure 3-39
DIUN2 - Front Panel (S30810-Q2196-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-91
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-32
DIUN2 - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Flashing At least one channel is activated.
Connection types
●
Fiber optic cable
The fiber optic cable is only connected via the front panel. The opto-electronic converter
AMOM must be used to connect a fiber optic cable to the 15-pin Sub-D jacks on the front
panel.
●
Copper cable
The copper cable is only connected via the 15-pin Sub-D jacks on the front panel.
3-92
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Jack assignment
Table 3-33
DIUN2 - 15-Pin Sub-D Jack Assignment
Pin
Signal
Signal description
Route
1
TTIP0
a-wire 120 ohms/75 ohms
Output
4
LWLO0_FRONT
Fiber optic (data output)
Output
5
GND
Ground return path for the +5V power supply
Input/output
6
SCAN_IN0
Adapter test
Input
7
SCAN_IN0
Adapter test
Input
8
RTIP0
a-wire 120 ohms/75 ohms
Input
9
TRING0
b-wire 120 ohms/75 ohms
Output
10
+5 V
+5-V power supply
Output
11
LWLI0_FRONT
Fibre optic (data input)
Input
12
GND
Ground return path for the +5V power supply
Input/output
14
+5 V
+5-V power supply
Output
15
RRING0
b-wire 120 ohms/75 ohms
Input
No other pins used.
Assigning the system cable S30267-Z167-Axxx
Table 3-34
DIUN2 - Assigning the System Cable S30267-Z167-Axxx
Pin
Function
Color code
8
a-wire (T), receive
ora/wht
15
b-wire (R), receive
wht/ora
1
a-wire (T), transmit
blu/wht
9
b-wire (R), transmit
wht/blu
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-93
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.3
HXGM3
Introduction
HXGM3 is a VoIP gateway board (VoIP - Voice over IP) which provides the functionality of
HG 1500 in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700:
●
Connection of a local LAN to the HiPath 3000 and connection with external LANs via the
ISDN and DSL interfaces of HiPath 3000.
●
Support for the conventional functions of an ISDN and DSL router with the additional functionality of a media gateway for the transfer of voice, fax and data.
●
Forwarding of calls between IP-supported networks (LAN, intranet, Internet) and circuitswitched networks (ISDN, PSTN).
Configuration is performed via Web-based management (WBM) which enables the administration of HG 1500 without any special software requirements.
>
A combination of up to eight HXGM3 boards can be used per system, but the following restrictions must be observed:
●
A maximum of four HXGM3 boards may be inserted per HiPath 3750 or HiPath
3700 cabinet.
●
To allow for future channel expansion with extension modules, the slot between
two HXGM3 boards should remain free.
●
It is not possible to operate an HXGM3 and an LIM module simultaneously in a
HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700.
For information on configuration, refer to the HG 1500 Administration Manual.
For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500, see
Section 10.6.4.
Board versions
Table 3-35
Board
HXGM3
HXGM3 Board Versions
Part number
S30810-Q2942-X
Services
Voice and Data
DSPs
B channels
DSP channels
2
16
Eight simultaneous Voice over IP connections are possible per DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
3-94
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Extension modules
The HXGM3 board has three HGA (HiPath Gateway Accelerator) slots, which can be used to
connect the extension modules.
Table 3-36
HXGM3 Extension Modules
Extension module
Part number
PDM1
S30807(PMC DSP modules) Q5692-X100
Figure 3-40
Function
Used for expansion
for an additional eight
DSP channels.
Notes
●
●
Up to two PDM1 modules
per HXGM3.
Installed at HGA slots 0
and 2 only.
HXGM3 (S30810-Q2942-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-95
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Interfaces/connectors
The HXGM3 board provides the following connectors:
●
X10: 9-pin Sub-D plug for V.24 interface
●
Backplane: The LAN adapter connector C39228-A7195-A10 (see Figure 3-42) is inserted
directly on the backplane connector SU Xx8 or SU Xx9 for a LAN connection. The LAN cable is connected via the RJ45 socket of the adapter.
For U.S. only: The LAN connection is made using a special adapter cable (CHAMP in accordance with RJ45) (see Figure 3-43).
Both LAN interfaces allow access to the Ethernet standard (IEEE 802.3) with 10 Mbps or
100 Mbps with automatic configuration. Manual configuration is also possible.
HGA slot 2
Backplane
LED H0 (red)
LED H1 (green)
HGA slot 0
V.24 interface X10
HGA slot 1
LAN connections
via LAN adapter
connector:
LAN 2 (SU Xx8)
LAN 1 (SU Xx9)
Figure 3-41
3-96
HXGM3 - Interfaces
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-37
HXGM3 - LED Concept
LED
Meaning
H1 - green
H0 - red
Off
Board is active but there are no active calls.
On
At least one call is active.
On
Error
Flashing
Start (after a restart)
V.24 interface
The V.24 cable (C30267-Z355-A25) is used for connecting the service PC.
The following settings must be chosen for a terminal or PC connected to the V.24 interface:
Transmission rate
19,200
Data bits
8
Parity bit
None
Stop bits
1
Data flow control
None
It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC.
Table 3-38
Pin
HXGM3 - Assignment of V.24 Interface X10
Signal
I/O
2
RxD
I
3
TxD
O
4
DTR
O
5
0V
6
DSR
I
7
RTS
O
8
CTS
I
Remark
1
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
Ground
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
9
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-97
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LAN adapter connector
SIPAC 1 SU
jack (Backplane Xx8
or Xx9)
RJ45 jack
(to the LAN)
Figure 3-42
HXGM3 LAN Adapter Connector for Backplane
Table 3-39
HXGM3 LAN Adapter Connector Assignment
SIPAC 1 SU jack
RJ45 jack
Signal
B1
1
TDP (Transmit Data +)
C2
2
TDN (Transmit Data –)
B3
4
TT1 (Transmit Termination 1)
C4
5
TT2 (Transmit Termination 2)
B5
3
RDP (Receive Data +)
C6
6
RDN (Receive Data –)
B7
7
RT1 (Receive Termination 1)
C8
8
RT2 (Receive Termination 2)
Signals TT1/2 and RT1/2 are not needed for transmitting data. They represent a signal termination of 100 ohms (so-called Bob Smith termination) for the two unused wire pairs in a 4-pair
twisted pair cable.
3-98
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LAN adapter cable (for U.S. only)
The LAN connection is made with a special shielded adapter cable (CHAMP after the RJ45).
RJ45 socket: LAN 1
(10/100 BaseT)
CHAMP (backplane)
RJ45 socket: LAN 2
(10 BaseT)
Figure 3-43
HXGM3 LAN Adapter Cable for Backplane (for U.S. only)
Table 3-40
HXGM3 - LAN Adapter Cable Assignment (for U.S. only)
CHAMP connector
RJ45 jack
Signal
34
1
TDP (Transmit Data +)
35
2
TDN (Transmit Data –)
36
4
TT1 (Transmit Termination 1)
37
5
TT2 (Transmit Termination 2)
38
3
RDP (Receive Data +)
39
6
RDN (Receive Data –)
40
7
RT1 (Receive Termination 1)
41
8
RT2 (Receive Termination 2)
42
1
TDP (Transmit Data +)
43
2
TDN (Transmit Data –)
44
4
TT1 (Transmit Termination 1)
45
5
TT2 (Transmit Termination 2)
46
3
RDP (Receive Data +)
47
6
RDN (Receive Data –)
48
7
RT1 (Receive Termination 1)
49
8
RT2 (Receive Termination 2)
25, 50
Housing
LAN connection
LAN 2
LAN 1
Shield
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-99
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.4
HXGS3, HXGR3
Introduction
HXGS3 and HXGR3 are VoIP gateway boards (VoIP - Voice over IP), which provide the functionality of HG 1500 in HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350 (HXGS3) and HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
(HXGR3):
●
Connection of a local LAN to the HiPath 3000 and connection with external LANs via the
ISDN and DSL interfaces of HiPath 3000.
●
Support for the conventional functions of an ISDN and DSL router with the additional functionality of a media gateway for the transfer of voice, fax and data.
●
Forwarding of calls between IP-supported networks (LAN, intranet, Internet) and circuitswitched networks (ISDN, PSTN).
Configuration is performed via Web-based management (WBM) which enables the administration of HG 1500 without any special software requirements.
>
Up to three boards can be used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500. To support this
maximum configuration, slot 10 (board in HiPath 3750 format) must remain free.
A maximum of one board is permitted in HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300. Two
HG 1500 boards can be installed if PDM1 is not being used.
When using an HXGS3 in HiPath 3350, the lower supply unit PSUP must be replaced with UPSC-D.
It is not possible to operate an HXGS3 or HXGR3 and an LIM module simultaneously
in one system.
For information on configuration, refer to the HG 1500 Administration Manual.
7
Caution
When using an HXGS3 board in a HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350, fan kit C39165A7021-D3 must be installed for thermal reasons (see Page 3-106).
For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500, see
Section 10.6.4.
3-100
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Board versions
Table 3-41
HXGS3/HXGR3 Board Versions
Board
Part number
Services
DSPs
B channels
DSP channels
HXGS3
S30810-Q2943-X
Voice and Data
1
8
HXGR3
S30810-K2943-Z
Voice and Data
1
8
Eight simultaneous Voice over IP connections are possible per DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
>
When using the extension module PDM1, the number of DSP channels for HXGS3
and HXGR3 boards can be expanded by eight per board.
Extension modules
The HXGS3 and HXGR3 boards each have two HGA (HiPath Gateway Accelerator) slots,
which can be used to connect extension modules.
Table 3-42
Extension
module
PDM1
(PMC DSP
modules)
HXGS3/HXGR3 - Extension Modules
Part number
S30807-Q5692X100
Function
Used for expansion for an additional eight DSP channels.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Notes
Maximum of one
PDM1 module possible.
3-101
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Figure 3-44
HXGS3 (S30810-Q2943-X)
Figure 3-45
HXGR3 (S30810-K2943-Z)
3-102
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Interfaces/connectors
The HXGS3 and HXGR3 boards provide the following connectors:
●
X1: 50-pin connector (edge connector) to the system
●
X2: 8-pin RJ45 jack for LAN interface 1
●
X3: 8-pin RJ45 jack for LAN interface 2
Both LAN interfaces allow access to the Ethernet standard (IEEE 802.3) with 10 Mbps or
100 Mbps with automatic configuration. Manual configuration is also possible.
●
X4: 9-pin Sub-D plug for V.24 interface
LAN connectors:
LAN 1 (X2)
50
HGA slot 1
HGA slot 0
LAN 2 (X3)
X1
To
CUC/
CUCR or
CUP/
CUPR
2
V.24 interface X4
Figure 3-46
HXGS3/HXGR3 - Interfaces
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-103
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LAN interfaces
Table 3-43
HXGS3/HXGR3 - LAN Interface Assignment
Pin on
HXGS3/HXGR3
(X2 and X3)
Pin of RJ45 connector
Signal
1
1
TDP (Transmit Data +)
3
2
TDN (Transmit Data –)
4
3
RDP (Receive Data +)
–
4
TT1 (Transmit Termination 1)
–
5
TT2 (Transmit Termination 2)
6
6
RDN (Receive Data –)
–
7
RT1 (Receive Termination 1)
–
8
RT2 (Receive Termination 2)
Signals TT1/2 and RT1/2 are not needed for transmitting data. They represent a signal termination of 100 ohms (so-called Bob Smith termination) for the two unused wire pairs in a 4-pair
twisted pair cable.
3-104
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
V.24 interface
The V.24 cable (C30267-Z355-A25) is used for connecting the service PC.
The following settings must be chosen for a terminal or PC connected to the V.24 interface:
Transmission rate
19,200
Data bits
8
Parity bit
None
Stop bits
1
Data flow control
None
It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC.
Table 3-44
Pin
HXGS3/HXGR3 - Assignment of V.24 Interface X10
Signal
I/O
2
RxD
I
3
TxD
O
4
DTR
O
5
0V
6
DSR
I
7
RTS
O
8
CTS
I
Remark
1
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
Ground
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
9
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-105
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Installing the fan kit for HXGS3 in HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350
7
Caution
When an HXGS3 board is used in a HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350, one fan kit
C39165-A7021-D3 must be installed for thermal reasons.
When installing and connecting the fan kit, proceed as follows:
Step
Activity
1.
Disconnect system from power supply.
Caution
System voltage can only be switched off by taking out the power plug. Switch off
the battery voltage first for an uninterruptible power supply.
2.
Open the system.
Warning
Grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only.
The shielding plate on the inside of the cover may have sharp edges which can
cause cuts (see Section 4.4.3.4, “Removing the System Housing Cover”).
3.
Place fan kit [A] on the system shelf [B] as shown in Figure 3-47.
4.
Push the two supplied securing clips over positions [C] illustrated in Figure 3-48
to attach the fan kit to the shelf.
5.
Insert the connector of the fan kit cable into the port provided for it on an HXGS3
board as illustrated in Figure 3-49.
6.
Close the system.
Warning
Grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only.
7.
Start the system by plugging in the power plug. In the case of an uninterruptible
power supply, the battery must then be switched on.
3-106
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
[A]
[B]
Figure 3-47
HXGS3 - Installation of the Fan Kit in HiPath 3550
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-107
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
[C]
Figure 3-48
HXGS3 - Securing Clips for Fan Kit
[D]
Figure 3-49
3-108
HXGS3 - Connection of the Fan Kit
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.5
IVML8, IVML24
Introduction
The IVML8 and IVML24 (Integrated Voice Mail Large) boards allow you to use the HiPath
Xpressions Compact integrated voice mail functionality in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 V1.2
or later. Music on Hold can be used in V4.0 SMR-7 or later and announcements in V5.0 or later.
In addition, the boards have an Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface which can be used for HiPath
Xpressions Compact administration (fast APS transfer, backup and restore activities).
>
A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 is permitted for each HiPath 3750 and HiPath
3700. This board may only be inserted into the slot beside the power supply in the
basic cabinet or in the expansion cabinets. Furthermore, the ferrite bead (C39022Z7000-C7) included with the board must be mounted on the CABLU of the board that
is inserted to the immediate left of the IVML8 or IVML.
The rules provided under “Distribution of the PCM segments” on page 4-156 for population with boards must be observed to ensure the non-blocking operation of the
system.
For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact, startup and administration, see the
manual for the product (see Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).
>
HiPath Xpressions Compact supports a central voice mail functionality in a HiPath
3000/5000 network. All stations can use the central voice mail server.
HiPath Xpressions Compact cannot be used as a central announcement device in a
network.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-109
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Packing protection covering
You must remove the red packing protection covering (cardboard block), shown in the following
picture, before starting up the board.
If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time, for example, for servicing, you must
reattach the packing protection covering.
Figure 3-50
3-110
IVML8 and IVML24 - Packing Protection Covering
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Switches and LEDs
Lockout switch
(position = free, factory default)
LED (green)
LED (yellow)
Figure 3-51
IVML8, IVML24 (S30122-X7380-X100, -X)
Lockout switch settings
●
Up = free (default)
●
Down = locked: existing connections remain active, new connections are locked.
–
The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively
locked.
–
The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered (via lockout switch or software) but at least one call is still active.
To reset the board to the default state, activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of
board startup.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-111
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-45
LED
Yellow
IVML8 and IVML24 - LED Statuses
LED
Green
Meaning
Action
During Startup and Initialization
Off
Off
1 Boot procedure (lasts approx. 8 - 12 s)
On
On
2 LED test (lasts approx. 10 s)
On
Off
3 Lockout switch state signaling by yellow
LED (lasts approx. 5 s):
●
blocked = On
●
free = Off
Flashing
(500/
500 ms)
Off
4 Hard disk test, start of the application (depending on hard disk status, lasts approx.
3 - 8 minutes)
Off
On
5a Standby mode after successful boot
On
Off
5b Board locked or board error occurred
Off
If necessary, check
whether the board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or
lockout switch.
Check whether board
was deactivated using
HiPath 3000 Manager E
or lockout switch.
During Operation
Off
Off
On
Idle (no call)
Flashing At least one active port (call)
(500/
500 ms)
Flashing Flashing Lockout switch activated during a call
(500/
(500/
500 ms) 500 ms)
On
3-112
Off
Board locked or board error occurred
Check whether board
was deactivated using
HiPath 3000 Manager E
or lockout switch.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LAN adapter
The Ethernet LAN interface is accessed via the LAN adapter shown in Figure 3-52 (part no.
C39228-A7195-A10), which is connected on the backplane’s (Xx9) SIPAC 1 SU connector.
Only shielded cables may be used for the LAN connector (RJ45 jack).
SIPAC 1 SU
jack (Xx9
backplane)
RJ45
jack
(LAN)
Figure 3-52
LAN Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - RJ45)
Table 3-46
LAN Adapter Assignment (SIPAC 1 SU - RJ45)
1
SIPAC 1 SU jack
RJ45 jack
Signal
B1
1
TDP (Transmit Data +)
C2
2
TDN (Transmit Data –)
B3
4
TT1 (Transmit Termination 1)1
C4
5
TT2 (Transmit Termination 2)1
B5
3
RDP (Receive Data +)
C6
6
RDN (Receive Data –)
B7
7
RT1 (Receive Termination 1)1
C8
8
RT2 (Receive Termination 2)1
Not used in 4-wire cable
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-113
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.6
IVMNL, IVMN8
Introduction
The IVMNL and IVMNL8 (Integrated Voice Mail New Large) boards allow you to use the HiPath
Xpressions Compact integrated voice mail functionality in HiPath 3800:
●
IVMNL (S30122-H7688-X) = 24 ports
●
IVMN8 (S30122-H7688-X100) = 8 ports
The boards can also be used for Music on Hold and announcements.
For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact, startup and administration, see the
manual for the product (see Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).
>
HiPath Xpressions Compact supports a central voice mail functionality in a HiPath
3000/5000 network. All stations can use the central voice mail server.
HiPath Xpressions Compact cannot be used as a central announcement device in a
network.
The Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface in the front panel of the boards allows HiPath Xpressions
Compact administration (fast APS transfer, backup, and restore activities).
>
Only one IVMNL or IVMN8 may be installed per HiPath 3800 system.
7
Caution
For thermal reasons the IVMNL board may only be installed in the basic cabinet.
3-114
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Packing protection covering
You must remove the red packing protection covering (cardboard block), shown in the following
picture, before starting up the board.
If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time, for example, for servicing, you must
reattach the packing protection covering.
Figure 3-53
IVMNL/IVMN8 - Packing Protection Covering
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-115
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (green)
●
LED (yellow)
Lockout switch
Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (8-pin RJ45 jack)
Figure 3-54
3-116
IVMNL/IVMN8 - Front Panel (S30122-H7688-X -X100)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Lockout switch settings
●
Pressed = free (default)
●
Not pressed = locked: existing connections remain active, new connections are locked.
–
The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively
locked.
–
The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered (via lockout switch or software) but at least one call is still active.
To reset the board to the default state, activate the lockout switch four times (off-on-off-on) during the LED test. This action cancels the LED test and both LEDs flash for approximately
five seconds in confirmation.
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-47
LED
Red
IVMNL/IVMN8 - LED Statuses
Green
LED
Meaning
Action
During Startup and Initialization
Off
Off
1 Boot procedure (lasts approx. 8 12 s)
On
On
2 LED test (lasts approx. 10 s)
On
Off
3 Lockout switch state signaling by
red LED (lasts approx. 5 s):
●
blocked = On
●
free = Off
Flashing
(500/
500 ms)
Off
4 Hard disk test, start of the application (depending on hard disk status, lasts approx. 3 - 8 minutes)
Off
On
5a Standby mode after successful
boot
On
Off
5b Board locked or board error occurred
Off
Possibly check if board was deactivated using HiPath 3000
Manager E or lockout switch.
Check whether board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch.
During Operation
Off
Off
On
Idle (no call)
Flashing At least one active port (call)
(500/
500 ms)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-117
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-47
LED
Red
IVMNL/IVMN8 - LED Statuses
Green
LED
Meaning
Action
Flashing Flashing Lockout switch activated during a call
(500/
(500/
500 ms) 500 ms)
On
Off
Board locked or board error occurred Check whether board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch.
RJ45 jack assignment
Table 3-48
IVMNL/IVMN8 - RJ45 Jack Assignment
Pin
Signal
1
Tx +
Transmit +
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
Rx +
Receive +
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
3-118
Description
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.7
IVMP8 (not for U.S.), IVMP8R (not for U.S)
Introduction
The following boards are used for the integrated voice mail functionality in HiPath Xpressions
Compact in V1.2 and later:
●
IVMP8 (Integrated Voice Mail Point) S30122-Q7379-X100 - for HiPath 3350 (wall housing)
●
IVMP8R (Integrated Voice Mail Point Rack) S30122-K7379-Z100 - for HiPath 3300 (19inch housing)
Music on Hold can be used in V4.0 SMR-7 or later and announcements in V5.0 or later.
In addition, the boards have an Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface which can be used for HiPath
Xpressions Compact administration (fast APS transfer, backup and restore activities).
>
Only one IVMP8 or IVMP8R may be installed per system.
Slot 5 can only be used for the IVMP8 board in the HiPath 3350 (wall housing).
For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact, startup and administration, see the
manual for the product (see Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).
>
HiPath Xpressions Compact supports a central voice mail functionality in a HiPath
3000/5000 network. All stations can use the central voice mail server.
HiPath Xpressions Compact cannot be used as a central announcement device in a
network.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-119
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Packing protection covering
You must remove the red packing protection covering (cardboard block), shown in the following
picture, before starting up the board.
If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time, for example, for servicing, you must
reattach the packing protection covering.
Figure 3-55
3-120
IVMP8 and IVMP8R (not for U.S.) - Packing Protection Covering
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Switches and LEDs
2
X4
50
10
X3 = LAN
connector,
8-pin RJ45
jack
Lockout switch
LED (green)
LED (yellow)
X1
X1 = connection to
CUP/
CUPR
X3
2
X2
2
10
Figure 3-56
IVMP8, IVMP8R (S30122-Q7379-X100, -K7379-Z100) (not for U.S.)
Lockout switch settings
●
Pressed = free (default)
●
Not pressed = locked: existing connections remain active, new connections are locked.
–
The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively
locked.
–
The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered (via lockout switch or software) but at least one call is still active.
To reset the board to the default state, activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of
board startup.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-121
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Assignment of the RJ45 jack X3
The Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface is accessed via the 8-pin RJ45 jack X3. The signals are
output simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2.
Table 3-49
IVMP8 and IVMP8R (not for U.S) - Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 (LAN Connector)
RJ45 Jack X3
Pin
Signal
1
Tx +
Transmit +
1
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
3
Rx +
Receive +
7
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
3-122
Description
Printed Circuit Connector X2
Pin
9
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-50
LED
Yellow
IVMP8 and IVMP8R (not for U.S.) - LED Statuses
LED
Green
Meaning
Action
During Startup and Initialization
Off
Off
1 Boot procedure (lasts approx. 8 12 s)
On
On
2 LED test (lasts approx. 10 s)
On
Off
3 Lockout switch state signaling by
yellow LED (lasts approx. 5 s):
●
blocked = On
●
free = Off
Flashing
(500/
500 ms)
Off
4 Hard disk test, start of the application (depending on hard disk status,
lasts approx. 3 - 8 minutes)
Off
On
5a Standby mode after successful boot
On
Off
5b Board locked or board error occurred
Off
Possibly check if board was deactivated using HiPath 3000
Manager E or lockout switch.
Check whether board was deactivated using HiPath 3000
Manager E or lockout switch.
During Operation
Off
Off
On
Idle (no call)
Flashing At least one active port (call)
(500/
500 ms)
Flashing Flashing Lockout switch activated during a call
(500/
(500/
500 ms) 500 ms)
On
Off
Board locked or board error occurred
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Check whether board was deactivated using HiPath 3000
Manager E or lockout switch.
3-123
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.8
IVMS8, IVMS8R
Introduction
The following boards are used for the integrated voice mail functionality in HiPath Xpressions
Compact in V1.2 and later:
●
IVMS8 (Integrated Voice Mail Small) S30122-Q7379-X - for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350
(wall housing)
●
IVMS8R (Integrated Voice Mail Small Rack) S30122-K7379-Z - for HiPath 3500 and HiPath
3300 (19-inch housing)
Music on Hold can be used in V4.0 SMR-7 or later and announcements in V5.0 or later.
In addition, the boards have an Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface which can be used for HiPath
Xpressions Compact administration (fast APS transfer, backup and restore activities).
>
Only one IVMS8 or IVMS8R may be installed per system.
For thermal reasons, the IVMS8 board may only be used in slots 5, 7 and 9 (lower
slots) in the HiPath 3550 (wall housing).
Slot 5 can only be used for the IVMS8 board in the HiPath 3350 (wall housing).
For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact, startup and administration, see the
manual for the product (see Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).
>
3-124
HiPath Xpressions Compact supports a central voice mail functionality in a HiPath
3000/5000 network. All stations can use the central voice mail server.
HiPath Xpressions Compact cannot be used as a central announcement device in a
network.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Packing protection covering
You must remove the red packing protection covering (cardboard block), shown in the following
picture, before starting up the board.
If it is necessary to transport the board again at a later time, for example, for servicing, you must
reattach the packing protection covering.
Figure 3-57
IVMS8 and IVMS8R - Packing Protection Covering
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-125
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Switches and LEDs
2
X4
50
10
X3 = LAN
connector,
8-pin RJ45
jack
Lockout switch
LED (green)
LED (yellow)
X1
X3
2
X2
X1 = connection to
CUC/
CUCR/
CUP/
CUPR
2
10
Figure 3-58
IVMS8 and IVMS8R (S30122-Q7379-X, -K7379-Z)
Lockout switch settings
●
Pressed = free (default)
●
Not pressed = locked: existing connections remain active, new connections are locked.
–
The yellow LED lights up when all connections are ended and the board is effectively
locked.
–
The yellow LED flashes when a lockout request is entered (via lockout switch or software) but at least one call is still active.
To reset the board to the default state, activate the lockout switch twice within the first 10 s of
board startup.
3-126
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Front view of IVMS8R
X3 = LAN connector, 8-pin RJ45
jack
LED (yellow)
LED (green)
Lockout switch
Figure 3-59
IVMS8R - Front View (S30122-K7379-Z)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-127
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Assignment of the RJ45 jack X3
The Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface is accessed via the 8-pin RJ45 jack X3. The signals are
output simultaneously at the printed circuit connector X2.
Table 3-51
IVMS8 and IVMS8R - Assignment of the RJ45 Jack X3 (LAN Connector)
RJ45 Jack X3
Pin
Signal
1
Tx +
Transmit +
1
2
Tx –
Transmit –
3
3
Rx +
Receive +
7
4
–
Not used
5
–
Not used
6
Rx –
Receive –
7
–
Not used
8
–
Not used
3-128
Description
Printed Circuit Connector X2
Pin
9
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-52
LED
Yellow
IVMS8 and IVMS8R - LED Statuses
LED
Green
Meaning
Action
During Startup and Initialization
Off
Off
1 Boot procedure (lasts approx. 8 12 s)
On
On
2 LED test (lasts approx. 10 s)
On
Off
3 Lockout switch state signaling by
yellow LED (lasts approx. 5 s):
●
blocked = On
●
free = Off
Flashing
(500/
500 ms)
Off
4 Hard disk test, start of the application (depending on hard disk status, lasts approx. 3 - 8 minutes)
Off
On
5a Standby mode after successful
boot
On
Off
5b Board locked or board error occurred
Off
Possibly check if board was deactivated using HiPath 3000
Manager E or lockout switch.
Check whether board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch.
During Operation
Off
Off
On
Idle (no call)
Flashing At least one active port (call)
(500/
500 ms)
Flashing Flashing Lockout switch activated during a call
(500/
(500/
500 ms) 500 ms)
On
Off
Board locked or board error occurred
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Check whether board was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E or lockout switch.
3-129
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.9
PBXXX
Introduction
The PBXXX (Peripheral Board XXX) module can be used in HiPath 3800 to support countryspecific CAS protocols.
The board converts the Euro-ISDN protocol on an S2M link into the Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) protocol. The board functions only in conjunction with a DIUN2. PBXXX must always be plugged in to the left, next to DIUN2.
Because the PBXXX card is not recognized by the hardware, offline configuration is required
with HiPath 3000 Manager E. DIUN2 + PBXXX should be specified as the module to be configured. After configuration, the module data can be seen in HiPath 3000 Manager E. However,
this is only visible in the software configuration, as the PBXXX card was only configured on the
software side.
Note: The offline configuration of the PBXXX serves solely to visualize the card with HiPath
3000 Manager E.
Front panel
Seven-segment display
Figure 3-60
>
3-130
PBXXX (S30810-Q6401-X) Front Panel
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Seven-segment display
The board statuses listed in the following table are displayed.
Table 3-53
PBXXX:- Seven Segment Display
Display
Meaning
Waiting for the PBXXX software download
Starting the PBXXX software download
PBXXX software download
Writing the PBXXX software/extender software to the flash memory
Loading the PBXXX software/extender software from the flash memory
Waiting for ECGM command (10 s)
Error while writing the software to flash memory
No software in the flash memory, waiting for reload
Flash memory erased (changing display)
PBXXX card active, Link 1 and Link 2 not active
Link 1 active, Link 2 not active
Link 1 not active, Link 2 active
Link 1 active, Link 2 active
Boot procedure
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-131
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.10
SLA8N (not for U.S.), SLA16N, SLA24N
Introduction
The peripheral boards
●
SLA8N (Subscriber Line Analog) with eight analog T/R interfaces (not for U.S.)
●
SLA16N (16 analog interfaces)
●
SLA24N (24 analog interfaces)
can be used in HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700.
Switches and LEDs
H1 (green)
LEDs
H2 (red)
Lockout switch S1
(position = free, factory default)
Figure 3-61
SLA8N (not for U.S.), SLA16N, SLA24N (S30810-Q2929-X200, -X100, -X)
The operating mode (short or long line with the appropriate flash times) can be set up for each
subscriber line interface with HiPath 3000 Manager E (the menu Settings: Set up station –>
Station –> Parameters –> Flags).
3-132
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-54
SLA8N (Not For U.S.), SLA16N, SLA24N - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully complet- Replace board.
ed. Board is faulty.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing At least one station is activated.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-133
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
Table 3-55
Color
group
SLA8N, SLA16N, SLA24N Assignment Cable 1 (SU Xx8) (Not for U.S.)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-134
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
SLA8N,
SLA16N,
SLA24N
BP: Xx8
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU/
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
9a
4
9b
5
10a
4
10b
5
11a
4
11b
5
12a
4
12b
5
13a
4
13b
5
14a
4
14b
5
15a
4
15b
5
16a
4
16b
5
Notes
Not
used
in
SLA8N
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-56
Color
group
SLA8N, SLA16N, SLA24N - Assignment Cable 2 (SU Xx9) (Not for U.S.)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
SU
connector
SLA8N,
SLA16N,
SLA24N
BP: Xx9
wht/blu
wht/ora
wht/grn
wht/brn
wht/gry
red/blu
red/ora
red/grn
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
18b
5
19a
4
19b
5
20a
4
20b
5
21a
4
21b
5
22a
4
22b
5
23a
4
23b
5
24a
4
24b
5
Free
grn/red
ora/blk
4
Free
ora/red
blk/ora
18a
Free
blu/red
blu/blk
5
Free
gry/wht
blk/blu
17b
Free
brn/wht
gry/red
4
Free
grn/wht
red/gry
17a
Notes
Free
ora/wht
brn/red
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
Free
blu/wht
red/brn
MDFU/
MDFU-E
11
17a
31
17b
02
18a
22
18b
13
19a
33
19b
04
20a
24
20b
15
21a
35
21b
06
22a
26
22b
17
23a
37
23b
08
24a
28
24b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
not
used
in
SLA8N,
SLA16N
3-135
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-57
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3-136
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLA16N, SLA24N - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (For U.S. Only)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU connector
BP: Xx8
SLA16N,
SLA24N
BP: Xx9
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
CHAMP jack, MDF
1
1a
26
1b
2
2a
27
2b
3
3a
28
3b
4
4a
29
4b
5
5a
30
5b
6
6a
31
6b
7
7a
32
7b
8
8a
33
8b
9
9a
34
9b
10
10a
35
10b
11
11a
36
11b
12
12a
37
12b
13
13a
38
13b
14
14a
39
14b
15
15a
40
15b
16
16a
41
16b
Notes
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-57
#
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLA16N, SLA24N - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (For U.S. Only)
b-Wire
(Ring)
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU connector
BP: Xx8
BP: Xx9
SLA16N,
SLA24N
11
17a
31
17b
02
18a
22
18b
13
19a
33
19b
04
20a
24
20b
15
21a
35
21b
06
22a
26
22b
17
23a
37
23b
08
24a
28
24b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
CHAMP jack, MDF
9
9a
34
9b
10
10a
35
10b
11
11a
36
11b
12
12a
37
12b
13
13a
38
13b
14
14a
39
14b
15
15a
40
15b
16
16a
41
16b
Notes
Not
used
in
SLA16N
3-137
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Technical connection conditions
●
Maximum supply current: approximately 34 mA; maximum supply voltage: approximately
40 Vdc
●
Ring voltage against negative supply voltage (a-wire (tip)/RING): two telephones maximum
●
Range, see Section 2.6
●
Loop current detection > 10 mA
●
Ground button detection > 20 mA
●
The transmission method can be configured country-specifically by entering the country
code.
3-138
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.11
SLC16 (Not for U.S.), SLC16N (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
The SLC16 (Subscriber Line Module Cordless) and SLC16N boards connect base stations for
HiPath Cordless Office to
●
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 (max. four SLC16s or SLC16Ns per system).
●
HiPath 3550 (max. one SLC16 or SLC16N per system).
The new board SLC16N is an optimized version of SLC16. Both boards have the same scope
and are fully compatible from a technical perspective. SLC16 and SLC16N boards can be used
in mixed mode within a single system. SLC16N can be used in specific SMRs of V1.2 and V3.0.
Details on this can be found in the relevant sales release.
Chapter 11 contains basic information on the options available for the use of HiPath Cordless
Office.
>
For initial installation of the HiPath Cordless Office, the HiPath cordless system number (DECT ID) must be ordered together with the SLC16/SLC16N board.
Replacement boards are always delivered without a HiPath cordless system number.
Installing the SLC16 or SLC16N and entering the HiPath cordless system number
releases 16 mobile units for use (PIN numbers are assigned). These mobile units
can then be logged on to the system. Any additional mobile units to be used must
first be released (see Section 10.9.6).
Base stations must be clocked with a high degree of accuracy for HiPath Cordless Office. Install
the plug-in CMS subboard on the CBCPR board (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700) or the plug-in
CMA or CMS subboard on the CBCC board (for HiPath 3550) to ensure clock accuracy (see
Table 11-1).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-139
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Switches and LEDs
H1 (green)
LEDs
H2 (red)
Lockout switch S1
(position = free,
factory default)
Figure 3-62
SLC16 (S30810-Q2922-X) (Not for U.S.)
LED (green)
LED (red)
Lockout switch
(Not pressed = free,
factory default)
Figure 3-63
>
3-140
SLC16N (S30810-Q2193-X100) (Not for U.S.)
Activate the lockout switch (SLC16 = flip switch down. SLC16N = Press switch), all
idle cordless phones are blocked. Active mobile telephones are not locked until their
release keys are pressed.
Before unplugging the SLC16 or SLC16N board, always activate the lockout switch
and wait until green LED stops flashing. This precaution ensures that none of the
mobile telephones are active.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-58
SLC16, SLC16N (Not for U.S.) - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
On
Action
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
On
Board disabled.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Check whether board
was deactivated using
the lockout switch.
3-141
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
Table 3-59
Color
group
SLC16, SLC16N (Not for U.S.) - Cable Assignment
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-142
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
SLC16
SLC16N
BP: Xx8
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
Access 1
Access 2
Access 3
Access 4
Access 5
Access 6
Access 7
Access 8
Access 9
Access 10
Access 11
Access 12
Access 13
Access 14
Access 15
Access 16
MDFU/
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
9a
4
9b
5
10a
4
10b
5
11a
4
11b
5
12a
4
12b
5
13a
4
13b
5
14a
4
14b
5
15a
4
15b
5
16a
4
16b
5
Notes
BS 1:
UP0/E port 1
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
BS x:
UP0/E port x
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
SLC16 and SLC16N system configuration
For information on the maximum possible system configuration of HiPath Cordless Office with
the SLC16 and SLC16N boards see Table 11-1.
SLC16 and SLC16N board distribution in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 cabinets
You can install up to four SLC16 or SLC16N boards in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. Please
note the following when distributing the boards in the individual cabinets:
●
Basic cabinet (BC)
Up to two SLC16s or SLC16Ns can be installed in the basic cabinet. Sixteen BS3/1s or
eight BS2/2s and BS3/3s can also be connected.
●
Expansion cabinets EC1 and EC2
The four SLC16s or SLC16Ns can be installed in a single expansion cabinet. And up to
sixteen BS3/1s or eight BS2/2s and BS3/3s can be connected per SLC16 or SLC16N.
To avoid overloading the power supply when operating four SLC16s or SLC16Ns in a single
expansion cabinet, you must not install any other peripheral boards in this cabinet.
>
To guarantee uninterrupted operation of HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, the SLC16
or SLC16N should not be installed with a second SLC16 or SLC16N, an SLMO24 or
a TS2 on a PCM segment. This condition must always be observed.
For information on PCM segment distribution, see Page 4-156.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-143
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Supplying power to base stations
Power is supplied to the base stations primarily via the internal PSU in the system in question.
●
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
The internal system power supply unit provides sufficient power to the configurations mentioned in Table 3-60.
For distances of up to 1000 m (at 2x0.6 mm) between the SLC16 or SLC16N and base station, the BS2/2 and BS3/3 must each be connected via two UP0/E interfaces. Only one UP0/
E interface is required for BS3/1 base stations.
Table 3-60
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 - Maximum Number of SLA24N and SLMO24
User Groups (Depending on the Number of Base Stations Connected at
SLC16 or SLC16N (Not for U.S.)
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
BC
Expansion cabinet
3-144
Number of
SLC16
SLC16N
Number of base stations
Number of
SLA24N
SLMO24
BS3/1
BS4
connected via
1xUP0/E
BS2/2
BS3/3
BS4
connected via
2xUP0/E
0
0
0
7
1
16
8
5
2
32
16
3
0
0
0
8
1
16
8
6
2
32
16
4
3
48
24
2
4
64
32
0
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
●
HiPath 3550
Subject to certain prerequisites, the system-internal PSU UPSC-D provides sufficient power for the operation of sixteen BS3/1s (one UP0/E each) or eight BS2/2s and BS3/3s (two
UP0/E each). These prerequisites depend on the
–
Line length and line type between SLC16 or SLC16N and base station.
The following specifications are based on line lengths of up to 1000 m and a line type
2x0.6 mm per UP0/E.
–
Number and type of corded telephones connected to the system.
Table 3-61 through Table 3-63 show which telephone configurations work without additional power supply.
Table 3-61
HiPath 3550 - Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the
Number of BS3/1 Base Stations Connected to SLC16 or SLC16N (Not for
U.S.)
Number
of BS3/1s and BS4s
connected via 1xUP0/E
to
SLC16 or SLC16N
Maximum number of corded telephones
analog telephones
0
1 - 10
11 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones
1
66
61
57
53
48
44
2
63
59
54
50
46
41
3
60
56
52
47
43
39
4
58
53
49
45
40
36
5
55
51
47
42
38
33
6
53
48
44
40
35
31
7
50
46
41
37
33
28
8
47
43
39
34
30
26
9
45
40
36
32
27
23
10
42
38
33
29
25
20
11
40
35
31
27
22
18
12
37
33
28
24
20
15
13
34
30
26
21
17
13
14
32
27
23
19
14
10
15
29
25
20
16
12
7
16
27
22
18
13
9
5
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-145
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-62
HiPath 3550 - Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the
Number of BS2/2 Base Stations Connected to SLC16 or SLC16N (Not for
U.S.)
Number
of BS2/2s
on
SLC16 or SLC16N
Maximum number of corded telephones
analog telephones
0
1 - 10
11 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones
1
63
59
54
50
46
41
2
58
53
49
45
40
36
3
53
48
44
40
35
31
4
47
43
39
34
30
26
5
42
38
33
29
25
20
6
37
33
28
24
20
15
7
32
27
23
19
14
10
8
27
22
18
13
9
5
Table 3-63
HiPath 3550 - Maximum Number of Corded Telephones Depending on the
Number of BS3/3 Base Stations Connected to SLC16 or SLC16N (Not for
U.S.)
Number
of BS3/3s and BS4s
connected via 2xUP0/E
to
SLC16 or SLC16N
3-146
Maximum number of corded telephones
analog telephones
0
1 - 10
11 - 20
21 - 30
31 - 40
41 - 50
optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones
1
64
60
56
51
47
42
2
60
56
52
47
43
39
3
57
52
48
43
39
35
4
53
48
44
40
35
31
5
49
44
40
36
31
27
6
45
40
36
32
27
23
7
41
37
32
28
23
19
8
37
33
28
24
20
15
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Options for supplying power to the base stations
>
For information on connecting the base stations, refer to the HiPath Cordless Office
service manual.
Each base station must be connected to the SLC16 or SLC16N via the main distribution frame
(MDFU or MDFU-E).
Always route the UP0/E interfaces on the SLC16 or SLC16N via a splitting strip to ensure that
surges due to lightning will be arrested. To do so, insert the polarized surge protectors (supplied) in the plugging locations on the splitting strip from above.
The following options are available for supplying power to the base stations:
●
Power supply via one UP0/E interface (Page 3-148)
●
Power supply via two UP0/E interfaces (Page 3-149)
●
Power supply via three UP0/E interfaces (Page 3-150), for BS3/3 only
If the power supplied by the UPSC-D (HiPath 3550) is insufficient, additional power can be supplied by installing the external power supply EPSU2 (Page 3-150).
Signal propagation times differ due to the varying distances between the base stations, the system, and the connection cables used (refer to the HiPath Cordless Office service manual). The
SLC16 and SLC16N boards automatically balance these propagation times.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-147
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Base station power supply via one UP0/E interface
Connect the base station to a free interface on SLC16 or SLC16N as shown in Figure 3-64. Be
careful not to exceed the maximum connection cable lengths (1000 m for 2x0.6 mm).
HiPath 3750,
HiPath 3550,
HiPath 3700
BS3/1 for indoors
SLC16/
SLC16N
1
2
CABLU
Splitting
strip
UP0/E
a
b
1
MDFU, MDFU-E
Figure 3-64
3-148
Base Station Power Supply via One UP0/E Interface (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Base station power supply via two UP0/E interfaces
Connect the base station to two free interfaces on SLC16 or SLC16N as shown in Figure 3-65.
Be careful not to exceed the maximum connection cable lengths (1000 m for 2x0.6 mm).
Using two UP0/E interfaces increases the traffic capacity in BS2/2 and BS3/3 base stations.
HiPath 3750,
HiPath 3550,
HiPath 3700
BS2/2 or BS3/3
for indoors
SLC16/
SLC16N
2
3
4
5
CABLU
Splitting
strip
UP0/E1
UP0/E2
a
b
1
MDFU, MDFU-E
Figure 3-65
Base Station Power Supply via Two UP0/E Interfaces (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-149
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
BS3/3 power supply via three UP0/E interfaces
Connect the BS3/3 base station to three free interfaces on the SLC16 or SLC16N as shown in
Figure 3-66. Be careful not to exceed the maximum connection cable lengths (1000 m for
2x0.6 mm).
Using three UP0/E interfaces increases the traffic capacity in the BS3/3 base station.
HiPath 3750,
HiPath 3550,
HiPath 3700
BS3/3 for indoors
SLC16/
SLC16N
2
3
4
5
6
7
CABLU
Splitting
strip
UP0/E1
UP0/E2
UP0/E3
a
b
1
MDFU, MDFU-E
Figure 3-66
BS3/3 Power Supply via Three UP0/E Interfaces (Not for U.S.)
Additional UPSC-D power supply via EPSU2
If the power supplied by the UPSC-D (HiPath 3550) is insufficient, additional power can be supplied by installing the external power supply EPSU2. To do this, connect the DC port on the
EPSU2 to the special DC input on the UPSC-D.
As described on the preceding pages, the base stations must be connected to one (BS3/1) or
two (BS2/2 and BS3/3) or three (BS3/3) free UP0/E interfaces on SLC16 or SLC16N.
If you need an additional external power supply for the 19-inch housing in HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300, you should use the EPSU2-R power supply. This is installed in the ECR expansion
cabinet rack (see Section 9.2.4).
Section 11.5, “Power-Related Capacity Limits” shows which telephone configurations manage
without an additional power supply and which configurations require an additional one.
3-150
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
EPSU2 external power supply
The EPSU2 AC/DC converter is an external power supply unit for use when the UPSC-D is unable to provide sufficient power for the base stations and telephones at the HiPath 3550.
The external power supply EPSU2 comes in two versions:
●
S30122-K7221-X1 - This version is always supplied with four built-in batteries. These batteries guarantee approx. 30 minutes of bridging time in the event of a power failure.
●
S30122-K7221-X2 - This version is supplied without batteries. To use this model’s uninterruptible power supply function, four batteries must be ordered separately and installed.
>
The new EPSU2 model S30122-K7221-X2 is designed to replace S30122K7221-X1.
Differences between the two models are indicated at the appropriate point in the
following description.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-151
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
DC port for UPSC-D
Note polarity.
Housing cover
Battery fuse
LED 1
Mounting
screws
LED 2
AC port for 100 – 240 Vac
Figure 3-67
3-152
EPSU2 - Indicators and Ports
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-64
EPSU2 - Explanation of Indicators and Ports
LED 1
LED 2
(DC output)
(AC input)
Description
On
On
DC output and AC input voltages are OK.
Off
On
No DC voltage at output
(for example DC load short-circuited).
On
Off
No AC voltage at input
(power outage, circuit-breaker panel receiving battery power).
Off
Off
No AC input voltage (power outage) and batteries are empty, or
the battery fuse is defective or was removed (for example by turning it to the left).
Ports
Description
Battery fuse
Melting fuse 5 x 20 mm, 2.5 A/slow-blowing
AC port (input)
IEC 320/16 (grounding power cable/IEC)
DC port (output)
Screw terminal connections for insulated lines (0.5 – 2.5 mm2),
56 V, 140 W
●
EPSU2 S30122-K7221-X1 = 2-wire power cable to UPSC-D,
pre-installed, soldered ends. Note polarity.
●
EPSU2 S30122-K7221-X2 = 2-wire power cable to UPSC-D,
with Phoenix terminal block.
EPSU2 technical specifications
Table 3-65
EPSU2 - Technical Specifications
EPSU2
S30122-K7221-X1
Scope of delivery
●
●
●
●
AC power cable
●
●
EPSU2 AC/DC converter
with four UPS batteries
loaded
Operating instructions
AC connecting cable (protective grounding plug,
IEC-320 socket)
DC cable to UPSC-D
(length = 2 m)
EPSU2
S30122-K7221-X2
●
●
●
●
EPSU2 AC/DC converter
without batteries
Operating instructions
AC connecting cable (protective grounding plug,
IEC-320 socket)
DC cable to UPSC-D
(length = 2 m)
C39195-Z7001-C17 Euro angled
C39195-Z7001-C20 GBR angled
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-153
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-65
EPSU2 - Technical Specifications
EPSU2
S30122-K7221-X1
AC power
EPSU2
S30122-K7221-X2
100 - 240 V AC
Frequency range
47 to 63 Hz
Connected output
200 W
Output power consumption/
nominal output
140 W
Mains/nominal voltage
54.2 V
UPS batteries
Battery operation:
●
Permitted batteries
Manufacturer/type number
●
Number of batteries
●
Size (Ah)
●
Nominal voltage
●
Overload protection
Nominal current
Overload protection
Ambient temperature
V39113-W5123-E891
Four batteries are supplied
built-in.
●
●
●
●
●
V39113-W5123-E891
Batteries are not included in
the scope of supply and must
be ordered separately.
CSB/EVX-1270, Hitachi/HP6.5-12, Yuasa/NP6-12, Varta/
Noack 43720303, Sonnenschein/0719143200, Panasonic/
LCR12-7P
4 units, 12 V each
7 Ah
48 V (fully charged 54 V, discharge to 44 V)
Melting fuse 5 x 20 mm, 2.5 A/slow-blowing
2.5 A
Electronic current limiting circuit
In buildings, +5 to +45 °C (41 to 113 °F)
Humidity
95%, non-condensing
Cooling
Natural convection
Protection
IP 21 (DIN 40050)
Housing dimensions (W x D
x H in mm)
250 x 114 x 317
Weight
approx. 14.1 kg (incl. batteries) approx. 4.1 kg (without batteries)
Symbol
CE
Personal safety, insulation
Grounding, shielding
3-154
EN60950 and IEC950
Protection class 1, output is floating against ground
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Installation notes
●
The EPSU2 AC/DC converter is designed for installation indoors only.
●
The unit is suitable only for mounting on the wall (vertically, with AC port on bottom).
●
Always install the units in a dry, dust-free area where there is no danger of vibrations.
●
Always make sure there is sufficient air circulation around the units. Do not block the ventilation holes.
●
When selecting the location, keep in mind the necessary lengths of the following cables:
– AC cable (grounding plug, IEC 320 socket)
– DC cable to UPSC-D, length = 2 m
Procedure: EPSU2 wall-mounting
Step
Activity
1.
Drill two holes for anchors (5 mm in diameter) in the wall, as shown in Figure 3-68.
Depending on the wall materials, you may have to use a different kind of attachment, such as wood screws for timber walls.
2.
Insert the anchors and insert two screws (3.5 mm in diameter), leaving 5 mm projecting from the wall.
3.
Mount the EPSU2 onto the screws and tighten them all the way.
115 mm
102 mm
33 mm
317 mm
Figure 3-68
EPSU2 - Holes for Mounting on the Wall
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-155
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.12
SLCN (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
The SLCN (Subscriber Line Module Cordless New) board is used in HiPath 3800 and connects
base stations to HiPath Cordless Office. There are 16 UP0/E ports available for this.
You can install up to four SLCN boards in one system.
Chapter 11 contains basic information on the options available for operating HiPath Cordless
Office.
Base stations must be clocked with a high degree of accuracy for HiPath Cordless Office. For
this, the subboard CMS must be plugged into the CBSAP board (see Table 11-1).
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (red)
●
LED (green)
Figure 3-69
>
3-156
SLCN (S30810-Q2193-X300) - LEDs on the Front Panel
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-66
SLCN:LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Action
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-67
●
For connecting to the connector panels using RJ45 jacks: Table 3-68
●
For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors: Table 3-69
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-157
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-67
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3-158
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLCN - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SIVAPAC connector
SLCN
1
1a
23
1b
3
2a
4
2b
5
3a
6
3b
7
4a
8
4b
9
5a
10
5b
11
6a
12
6b
13
7a
14
7b
15
8a
16
8b
17
9a
18
9b
19
10a
20
10b
24
11a
25
11b
26
12a
27
12b
29
13a
30
13b
31
14a
32
14b
34
15a
35
15b
37
16a
38
16b
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Notes
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
5a
5b
6a
6b
7a
7b
8a
8b
9a
9b
10a
10b
11a
11b
12a
12b
13a
13b
14a
14b
15a
15b
16a
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-68
SLCN - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pin
SLCN
4
1a
5
1b
4
2a
5
2b
4
3a
5
3b
4
4a
5
4b
4
5a
5
5b
4
6a
5
6b
4
7a
5
7b
4
8a
5
8b
4
9a
5
9b
4
10a
5
10b
4
11a
5
11b
4
12a
5
12b
4
13a
5
13b
4
14a
5
14b
4
15a
5
15b
4
16a
5
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Notes
3-159
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-68
SLCN - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3-160
Pin
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
SLCN
Notes
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-69
Color
group
SLCN - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors (Cable for
Ports 1 - 16)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
SLCN
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
9a
4
9b
5
10a
4
10b
5
11a
4
11b
5
12a
4
12b
5
13a
4
13b
5
14a
4
14b
5
15a
4
15b
5
16a
4
16b
5
Notes
3-161
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
System configuration using SLCN
For information on the maximum possible system configuration of HiPath Cordless Office with
the SLCN boards see Table 11-1.
SLCN board distribution in HiPath 3800 cabinets
You can install up to four SLCN boards in HiPath 3800. A system cabinet can be fitted with all
four SLCN boards.
>
To guarantee uninterrupted operation of the HiPath 3800, not more than two SLCN
boards should be plugged in to a PCM segment. This condition must always be observed. For information on PCM segment distribution, see Section 4.2.5.6.
One board slot should be kept free between two SCLN boards to prevent overheating.
Supplying power to base stations
Power is supplied to the base stations primarily via the internal PSU in the system in question.
If the correct number of LUNA2 modules was calculated, the system’s internal power supply
unit provides sufficient power to supply the HiPath Cordless Office system configuration specified in Table 11-1.
3-162
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.13
SLMA, SLMA8
Introduction
The SLMA and SLMA8 (Subscriber Line Module Analog) boards provide analog T/R interfaces
for use in HiPath 3800:
●
SLMA (S30810-Q2191-C300) = 24 analog T/R interfaces
●
SLMA8 (S30810-Q2191-C100) = eight analog T/R interfaces
The boards generate their own ring voltages and do not require an external ring generator.
>
For Australia only: The ring voltage is 35 Veff. Depending on the terminals connected, we cannot exclude the possibility of errors occurring during ringing state.
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (red)
●
LED (green)
Figure 3-70
>
SLMA/SLMA8 - LEDs on the Front Panel
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-163
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-70
SLMA/SLMA8 - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-71
●
For connecting to the connector panels using RJ45 jacks: Table 3-72
●
For U.S. only: For connecting to the connector panels with CHAMP jack: Table 3-73
●
For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors: Table 3-74 and
Table 3-75
3-164
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-71
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLMA/SLMA8 - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SIVAPAC connector
SLMA, SLMA8
1
1a
23
1b
3
2a
4
2b
5
3a
6
3b
7
4a
8
4b
9
5a
10
5b
11
6a
12
6b
13
7a
14
7b
15
8a
16
8b
17
9a
18
9b
19
10a
20
10b
24
11a
25
11b
26
12a
27
12b
29
13a
30
13b
31
14a
32
14b
34
15a
35
15b
37
16a
38
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Notes
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
5a
5b
6a
6b
7a
7b
8a
8b
9a
9b
10a
10b
11a
11b
12a
12b
13a
13b
Not
used
in
SLMA8
14a
14b
15a
15b
16a
16b
3-165
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-71
Pair
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3-166
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLMA/SLMA8 - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
yel/ora
ora/yel
yel/grn
grn/yel
yel/brn
brn/yel
yel/gry
gry/yel
vio/blu
blu/vio
vio/ora
ora/vio
vio/grn
grn/vio
vio/brn
brn/vio
SIVAPAC connector
SLMA, SLMA8
43
17a
44
17b
45
18a
46
18b
47
19a
48
19b
49
20a
50
20b
51
21a
52
21b
53
22a
54
22b
55
23a
56
23b
57
24a
58
24b
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
MDFU-E
Notes
17a
17b
18a
18b
19a
19b
20a
20b
21a
21b
Not
used
in
SLMA8
22a
22b
23a
23b
24a
24b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-72
SLMA/SLMA8 - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pin
SLMA, SLMA8
4
1a
5
1b
4
2a
5
2b
4
3a
5
3b
4
4a
5
4b
4
5a
5
5b
4
6a
5
6b
4
7a
5
7b
4
8a
5
8b
4
9a
5
9b
4
10a
5
10b
4
11a
5
11b
4
12a
5
12b
4
13a
5
13b
4
14a
5
14b
4
15a
5
15b
4
16a
5
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Notes
Not used for
SLMA8
3-167
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-72
SLMA/SLMA8 - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3-168
Pin
SLMA, SLMA8
4
17a
5
17b
4
18a
5
18b
4
19a
5
19b
4
20a
5
20b
4
21a
5
21b
4
22a
5
22b
4
23a
5
23b
4
24a
5
24b
Notes
Not used for
SLMA8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-73
SLMA/SLMA8 - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack (For U.S.
Only)
CHAMP jack
SLMA, SLMA8
1
1a
1 Ring
26
1b
1 TIP
2
2a
2 Ring
27
2b
2 TIP
3
3a
3 Ring
28
3b
3 TIP
4
4a
4 Ring
29
4b
4 TIP
5
5a
5 Ring
30
5b
5 TIP
6
6a
6 Ring
31
6b
6 TIP
7
7a
7 Ring
32
7b
7 TIP
8
8a
8 Ring
33
8b
8 TIP
9
9a
9 Ring
34
9b
9 TIP
10
10a
10 Ring
35
10b
10 TIP
11
11a
11 Ring
36
11b
11 TIP
12
12a
12 Ring
37
12b
12 TIP
13
13a
13 Ring
38
13b
13 TIP
14
14a
14 Ring
39
14b
14 TIP
15
15a
15 Ring
40
15b
15 TIP
16
16a
16 Ring
41
16b
16 TIP
Notes
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Not
used
in
SLMA8
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-169
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-73
SLMA/SLMA8 - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack (For U.S.
Only)
CHAMP jack
3-170
SLMA, SLMA8
17
17a
17 Ring
42
17b
17 TIP
18
18a
18 Ring
43
18b
18 TIP
19
19a
19 Ring
44
19b
19 TIP
20
20a
20 Ring
45
20b
20 TIP
21
21a
21 Ring
46
21b
21 TIP
22
22a
22 Ring
47
22b
22 TIP
23
23a
23 Ring
48
23b
23 TIP
24
24a
24 Ring
49
24b
24 TIP
Notes
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Not
used
in
SLMA8
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-74
Color
group
SLMA, SLMA8 - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors
(Cable for Ports 1 - 16)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
SLMA, SLMA8
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
9a
4
9b
5
10a
4
10b
5
11a
4
11b
5
12a
4
12b
5
13a
4
13b
5
14a
4
14b
5
15a
4
15b
5
16a
4
16b
5
Notes
Not
used
in
SLMA8
3-171
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-75
Color
group
SLMA, SLMA8 - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors
(Cable for Ports 17 - 24)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-172
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
SU
connector
SLMA, SLMA8
wht/blu
wht/ora
wht/grn
wht/brn
wht/gry
red/blu
red/ora
red/grn
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
18b
5
19a
4
19b
5
20a
4
20b
5
21a
4
21b
5
22a
4
22b
5
23a
4
23b
5
24a
4
24b
5
Free
grn/red
ora/blk
4
Free
ora/red
blk/ora
18a
Free
blu/red
blu/blk
5
Free
gry/wht
blk/blu
17b
Free
brn/wht
gry/red
4
Free
grn/wht
red/gry
17a
Notes
Free
ora/wht
brn/red
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
Free
blu/wht
red/brn
MDFU-E
11
17a
31
17b
02
18a
22
18b
13
19a
33
19b
04
20a
24
20b
15
21a
35
21b
06
22a
26
22b
17
23a
37
23b
08
24a
28
24b
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
Not
used
in
SLMA8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.14
SLMO2, SLMO8
Introduction
The SLMO2 and SLMO8 boards (Subscriber Line Module Optiset) provide UP0/E interfaces for
use in HiPath 3800:
●
SLMO2 (S30810-Q2168-X10) = 24 UP0/E interfaces
●
SLMO8 (S30810-Q2168-X100) = eight UP0/E interfaces
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (red)
●
LED (green)
Figure 3-71
>
SLMO2/SLMO8 - LEDs on the Front Panel
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-173
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-76
SLMO2 and SLMO8 - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-77
●
For connecting to the connector panels using RJ45 jacks: Table 3-78
●
For U.S. only: For connecting to the connector panels with CHAMP jack: Table 3-79
●
For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors: Table 3-80 and
Table 3-81
3-174
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-77
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLMO2/SLMO8 - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SIVAPAC connector
SLMO2, SLMO8
1
1a
23
1b
3
2a
4
2b
5
3a
6
3b
7
4a
8
4b
9
5a
10
5b
11
6a
12
6b
13
7a
14
7b
15
8a
16
8b
17
9a
18
9b
19
10a
20
10b
24
11a
25
11b
26
12a
27
12b
29
13a
30
13b
31
14a
32
14b
34
15a
35
15b
37
16a
38
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Notes
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
5a
5b
6a
6b
7a
7b
8a
8b
9a
9b
10a
10b
11a
11b
12a
12b
13a
13b
Not
used
in
SLMO8
14a
14b
15a
15b
16a
16b
3-175
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-77
Pair
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3-176
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLMO2/SLMO8 - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
yel/ora
ora/yel
yel/grn
grn/yel
yel/brn
brn/yel
yel/gry
gry/yel
vio/blu
blu/vio
vio/ora
ora/vio
vio/grn
grn/vio
vio/brn
brn/vio
SIVAPAC connector
SLMO2, SLMO8
43
17a
44
17b
45
18a
46
18b
47
19a
48
19b
49
20a
50
20b
51
21a
52
21b
53
22a
54
22b
55
23a
56
23b
57
24a
58
24b
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
MDFU-E
Notes
17a
17b
18a
18b
19a
19b
20a
20b
21a
21b
Not
used
in
SLMO8
22a
22b
23a
23b
24a
24b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-78
SLMO2/SLMO8 - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pin
SLMO2, SLMO8
4
1a
5
1b
4
2a
5
2b
4
3a
5
3b
4
4a
5
4b
4
5a
5
5b
4
6a
5
6b
4
7a
5
7b
4
8a
5
8b
4
9a
5
9b
4
10a
5
10b
4
11a
5
11b
4
12a
5
12b
4
13a
5
13b
4
14a
5
14b
4
15a
5
15b
4
16a
5
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Notes
Not used for
SLMO8
3-177
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-78
SLMO2/SLMO8 - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3-178
Pin
SLMO2, SLMO8
4
17a
5
17b
4
18a
5
18b
4
19a
5
19b
4
20a
5
20b
4
21a
5
21b
4
22a
5
22b
4
23a
5
23b
4
24a
5
24b
Notes
Not used for
SLMO8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-79
SLMO2/SLMO8 - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack (For U.S.
Only)
CHAMP jack
SLMO2, SLMO8
1
1a
1 Ring
26
1b
1 TIP
2
2a
2 Ring
27
2b
2 TIP
3
3a
3 Ring
28
3b
3 TIP
4
4a
4 Ring
29
4b
4 TIP
5
5a
5 Ring
30
5b
5 TIP
6
6a
Ring
31
6b
6 TIP
7
7a
7 Ring
32
7b
7 TIP
8
8a
8 Ring
33
8b
8 TIP
9
9a
9 Ring
34
9b
9 TIP
10
10a
10 Ring
35
10b
10 TIP
11
11a
11 Ring
36
11b
11 TIP
12
12a
12 Ring
37
12b
12 TIP
13
13a
13 Ring
38
13b
13 TIP
14
14a
14 Ring
39
14b
14 TIP
15
15a
15 Ring
40
15b
15 TIP
16
16a
16 Ring
41
16b
16 TIP
Notes
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Not used for
SLMO8
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-179
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-79
SLMO2/SLMO8 - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack (For U.S.
Only)
CHAMP jack
3-180
SLMO2, SLMO8
17
17a
17 Ring
42
17b
17 TIP
18
18a
18 Ring
43
18b
18 TIP
19
19a
19 Ring
44
19b
19 TIP
20
20a
20 Ring
45
20b
20 TIP
21
21a
21 Ring
46
21b
21 TIP
22
22a
22 Ring
47
22b
22 TIP
23
23a
23 Ring
48
23b
23 TIP
24
24a
24 Ring
49
24b
24 TIP
Notes
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Not used for
SLMO8
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-80
Color
group
SLMO2/SLMO8 - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors
(Cable for Ports 1 - 16)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
SLMO2, SLMO8
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
9a
4
9b
5
10a
4
10b
5
11a
4
11b
5
12a
4
12b
5
13a
4
13b
5
14a
4
14b
5
15a
4
15b
5
16a
4
16b
5
Notes
Not
used
in
SLMO8
3-181
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-81
Color
group
SLMA, SLMA8 - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors
(Cable for Ports 17 - 24)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-182
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
SU
connector
SLMA, SLMA8
wht/blu
wht/ora
wht/grn
wht/brn
wht/gry
red/blu
red/ora
red/grn
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
18b
5
19a
4
19b
5
20a
4
20b
5
21a
4
21b
5
22a
4
22b
5
23a
4
23b
5
24a
4
24b
5
Free
grn/red
ora/blk
4
Free
ora/red
blk/ora
18a
Free
blu/red
blu/blk
5
Free
gry/wht
blk/blu
17b
Free
brn/wht
gry/red
4
Free
grn/wht
red/gry
17a
Notes
Free
ora/wht
brn/red
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
Free
blu/wht
red/brn
MDFU-E
11
17a
31
17b
02
18a
22
18b
13
19a
33
19b
04
20a
24
20b
15
21a
35
21b
06
22a
26
22b
17
23a
37
23b
08
24a
28
24b
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
Not
used
in
SLMO8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.15
SLMO8 (Not for U.S.), SLMO24
Introduction
The SLMO8 and SLMO24 (Subscriber Line Module Cost Optimized UP0/E) boards provide 8
and 24 connections for connecting optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700.
Switches and LEDs
Lockout switch S1
(position = free,
factory default)
H1 (green)
LEDs
H2 (red)
Figure 3-72
SLMO8 (Not for U.S.), SLMO24 (S30810-Q2901-X100, S30810-Q2901-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-183
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-82
SLMO8 (Not for U.S.) and SLMO24 - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
3-184
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
Table 3-83
Color
group
SLMO8 (Not for U.S.), SLMO24 - Cable 1 Assignment (SU Xx8)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
SLMO8,
SLMO24
BP: Xx8
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Access 1
Access 2
Access 3
Access 4
Access 5
Access 6
Access 7
Access 8
Access 9
Access 10
Access 11
Access 12
Access 13
Access 14
Access 15
Access 16
MDFU/
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
9a
4
9b
5
10a
4
10b
5
11a
4
11b
5
12a
4
12b
5
13a
4
13b
5
14a
4
14b
5
15a
4
15b
5
16a
4
16b
5
Notes
Not
used
in
SLMO8
3-185
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-84
Color
group
SLMO8 (Not for U.S.), SLMO24 - Cable 2 Assignment (SU Xx9)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-186
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
SU
connector
SLMO8,
SLMO24
BP: Xx9
wht/blu
wht/ora
wht/grn
wht/brn
wht/gry
red/blu
red/ora
red/grn
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
18b
5
19a
4
19b
5
20a
4
20b
5
21a
4
21b
5
22a
4
22b
5
23a
4
23b
5
24a
4
24b
5
Free
grn/red
ora/blk
4
Free
ora/red
blk/ora
18a
Free
blu/red
blu/blk
5
Free
gry/wht
blk/blu
17b
Free
brn/wht
gry/red
4
Free
grn/wht
red/gry
17a
Notes
Free
ora/wht
brn/red
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
Free
blu/wht
red/brn
MDFU/
MDFU-E
11
17a
31
17b
02
18a
22
18b
13
19a
33
19b
04
20a
24
20b
15
21a
35
21b
06
22a
26
22b
17
23a
37
23b
08
24a
28
24b
Access 17
Access 18
Access 19
Access 20
Access 21
Access 22
Access 23
Access 24
Not
used
in
SLMO8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-85
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLMO24 - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (For U.S. Only)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU connector
BP: Xx8
SLMO24
BP: Xx9
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
CHAMP jack, MDF
1
1a
26
1b
2
2a
27
2b
3
3a
28
3b
4
4a
29
4b
5
5a
30
5b
6
6a
31
6b
7
7a
32
7b
8
8a
33
8b
9
9a
34
9b
10
10a
35
10b
11
11a
36
11b
12
12a
37
12b
13
13a
38
13b
14
14a
39
14b
15
15a
40
15b
16
16a
41
16b
Notes
3-187
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-85
#
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3-188
a-Wire
(Tip)
SLMO24 - Assignment (SU Xx8, Xx9) (For U.S. Only)
b-Wire
(Ring)
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU connector
BP: Xx8
BP: Xx9
SLMO24
11
17a
31
17b
02
18a
22
18b
13
19a
33
19b
04
20a
24
20b
15
21a
35
21b
06
22a
26
22b
17
23a
37
23b
08
24a
28
24b
Port 17
Port 18
Port 19
Port 20
Port 21
Port 22
Port 23
Port 24
CHAMP jack, MDF
9
9a
34
9b
10
10a
35
10b
11
11a
36
11b
12
12a
37
12b
13
13a
38
13b
14
14a
39
14b
15
15a
40
15b
16
16a
41
16b
Notes
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.16
SLU8
Introduction
The SLU8 board for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing) with 8 digital subscriber line
interfaces allows up to 16 digital telephones to be connected in host-client operation (masterslave operation).
Interfaces
50
1
UP0/E ports
1-4
X2
8
SLU8
1
UP0/E ports
5-8
Figure 3-73
7
To
X1
CUP/
CUC
X3
8
2
SLU8 Interfaces (S30817-Q922-A301)
Caution
After deactivating the power supply, you must wait a short while before plugging the
SLU8 in or out. If you do not wait before doing so, the CBCC/CBCP may be damaged.
Table 3-86
Contact
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SLU8 Contact Assignments
X2 (UPo/E ports 1-4)
a1
b1
a2
b2
a3
b3
a4
b4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
X3 (UP0/E ports 5-8)
a5
b5
a6
b6
a7
b7
a8
b8
3-189
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.17
SLU8R
Introduction
The SLU8R (Subscriber Line UP0/E Rack) boards provide eight ports for connecting optiset E
and optiPoint 500 telephones to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing).
Interfaces
UP0/E1
50
11
X1
UP0/E ports
1–8
(8-pin MW8
jacks)
X2
2
To
CUPR
CUCR
88
UP0/E8
Figure 3-74
SLU8R Interfaces (S30817-K922-Z301)
Table 3-87
SLU8R Contact Assignments
MW8
jack
X2, pin
UP0/E ports
1-4
MW8
jack
X2, pin
UP0/E ports
5-8
1
14
a1
5
54
a5
15
b1
55
b5
24
a2
64
a6
25
b2
65
b6
34
a3
74
a7
35
b3
75
b7
44
a4
84
a8
45
b4
85
b8
2
3
4
3-190
6
7
8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.18
STLS2 (Not for U.S.), STLS4
Introduction
The STLS4 board for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing) has four S0 ports that can
operate as trunk interfaces or as subscriber line interfaces (see Page 3-193).
The STLS2 is an underequipped variant with two S0 ports.
Interfaces
>
The board does not supply terminals with power. Power must be supplied locally using a local plug-in power supply or a bus power supply unit, for example.
50
S0 ports
Mini-Western
1
2
Not in
STLS2
3
STLS2/STLS4
To
CUP
CUC
X1
X2
4
2
654321
2 = SX +
3 = SR +
4 = SR 5 = SX -
SX = Signal transmit
SR = signal receive
Figure 3-75
STLS2 (Not for U.S.), STLS4 Interfaces (S30817-Q924-B313, -A313)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-191
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Interface Assignments (for U.S. only)
Table 3-88
STLS4 Module Interface Assignments (For U.S. Only)
Pin
Port
2
1
Pin
Port
Signal transmit
2
3
3
Signal receive
3
Signal receive
4
Signal receive
4
Signal receive
5
Signal transmit
5
Signal transmit
Signal transmit
2
3
Signal receive
3
Signal receive
4
Signal receive
4
Signal receive
5
Signal transmit
5
Signal transmit
2
2
Assignment
4
Assignment
Signal transmit
Signal transmit
Note: The STLS4 module supports the trunk side in Europe, so the transmit and receive signals
must be reversed before the first device on the S0 bus. In contrast, the optiset E ISDN adapter
uses a straight-through connection because it is always a station-only device. For information,
see Figure 3-79.
The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply.
The system assigns the MSN only after the S0 port is configured on the "Euro bus" (not for U.S.)
and can be read out via the administration (Assistant T: Code 20 4 3 S0 Bus MSN).
3-192
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Connecting ISDN (S0) interfaces (not for U.S.)
You can use the MW jacks on the STLS boards to connect between one and four ISDN S0 buses. The interfaces on the STLS boards are freely configurable.
●
EURO CO point-to-point
●
EURO CO point-to-multipoint
●
EURO bus
●
CorNet N/CorNet NQ slave
●
Using HiPath 3000 Manager E, you can also set up configurations for networking and dedicated lines
Use the S0 interface S01 for connection to the public telecommunications network (ISDN trunk).
You can also connect S0 interfaces S02 to S04 to the ISDN trunk or to ISDN terminals (ISDN
telephone, group 4 fax device, PC, dialing aid) via an S0 bus.
The connection (networking) to HiPath 3000 and HiPath 4000 (CorNet NQ) can also be set up
via S0 interfaces S01 to S04.
S0 connection options:
●
Point-to-point (PP) (default)
●
Point-to-multipoint (PMP)
Connecting an ISDN trunk (not for U.S.)
Insert the connection cable supplied in jacks S01 to S04. Insert the other end in the NT of the
carrier.
Networking connection (HiPath 4000/CorNet NQ (not for U.S.)
Insert the connection cable supplied in jacks S01 to S04. Connect the other end with the HiPath
4000 port.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-193
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Connecting ISDN terminals (not for U.S.)
Depending on the system, you can set up a maximum of four internal S0 buses (S01 to S04). A
maximum of eight ISDN terminals can be addressed on each S0 bus.
The system does not assign the MSN until the S0 port is configured on the “Euro bus”; the MSN
can be read out via administration.
When you set up an S0 bus, it is assigned an MSN. This MSN is the first free station number in
the system. The S0 station is immediately available under this MSN, without an outgoing seizure.
>
If no MSN is entered in the terminal, a default MSN is automatically assigned after
you change the S0 port to "Euro bus" in system administration.
Configuring an S0 bus with a Mini-Western jack (not for U.S.)
S0 telephones cannot be directly connected to an STLS board’s Mini-Western jack via the cable
supplied. You must first install a jack with cross-connected cables (see Figure 3-77).
Assignment of MW jack pins 1- 8:
8-pin
8
7
6
5
4
3
SR SX SX SR
4-pin
2
6-pin
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
Always establish contact on the
center four pins.
4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
Figure 3-76
3-194
Sample Pin Assignments in MW Jacks (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
System
S01 to S04
To switch from external to internal S0 operation, you must
cross the SR and SX wires before the first jack.
230 V∼
Mini-Western
through-jack
(MW8 = 8-pin)
SR.1 Receive 5
SX.1 Transmit 3
SX.2 Transmit 6
SR.2 Receive 4
SX SR SR SX
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
twisted
pair
* = Not crossed in TA-S0
*
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1st Mini-Western jack
(MW8 = 8-pin)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2nd to 8th Mini-Western jack
(MW8 = 8-pin)
UAE
connector
6
5
Additional
power supply 4
3
The connector cord of the
ISDN telephone may not exceed
10 m in length.
100 Ω/0.25 W
Terminating resistor in last jack
Maximum ranges:
1
System
2
3
8
Short bus: 150 m (492 ft.)
Long bus: 150 m (492 ft.)
Figure 3-77
20m
Wiring and Ranges for S0 Bus Jacks (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-195
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Connecting ISDN Terminals to HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (for U.S. only)
●
●
S0 Bus With MW8 jack, connecting S01 to S04:
–
Connect the provided, silver-satin connector cord to each port on the STLS4 Module.
Connect the other end to a mounted MW jack, reversing the transmit and receive wires
as shown in Figure 3-79.
–
Contact is always established using the center pins of MW jacks. Figure 3-78 shows
the pin assignments for jacks of different sizes.
–
The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply.
–
Plug the ISDN terminal (connecting cord) into the MW jack. Connecting an ISDN S0
telephone requires a local power supply (e.g. manufactured by Sedlbauer).
Pin Assignment of MW Jacks
8-pin MW8
8
7
6-pin MW6
6
5
4
3
SR SX SX SR
4-pin MW4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
3-196
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
SX = Signal transmit
SR = signal receive
4
Figure 3-78
2
With MW cables, contact is always established in the center of the connector.
MWxx Jack Pin Assignment (For U.S. Only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S 0 Bus wiring from STLS4 port or optiset E ISDN adapter (for U.S. only)
STLS port in system
optiset E
ISDN adapter
Through jack connected to
silver satin colored MW6
connector cable (6-pin)
SX
6
SR SR
5
4
3
123
456
789
0
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHIMNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
SX
2
→
↵←
↑↓
1
SX
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
SX
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Surface-mounted MW8 jack
(8-pin)
Cross the transmit and receive
wires from the STLS port (not
required in S0 bus from ISDN
adapter).
Device jack 1
(8-pin MW8)
8
SR SR
1
Device jacks 1 to 7 ’
(8-pin MW8)
Device jack 2
(8-pin MW8)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Last device jack
(8-pin MW8)
100 ohms, 0.25 W
Terminating resistor in last jack
Figure 3-79
S0 Bus Wiring from STLS4 Port or optiset E ISDN Adapter (For U.S. Only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-197
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.19
STLS4R
Introduction
The STLS4R (Subscriber And Trunk Line S0 RACK) board provides four S0 basic rate accesses for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing). These are operated either as external
trunk interfaces in TE (terminal equipment) mode or as internal S0 buses (PMP bus) in NT (network terminator) mode with cross-connected RX-TX lines.
>
The board does not supply terminals with power; In this case, power must be supplied locally using a local plug-in power supply or a bus power supply unit, for example.
Interfaces
S0 port 1
11
4 S0 ports
(MW8
(RJ49)
jacks)
50
X2
S0 port 4
STLS4R
X1
To
CUPR
CUCR
48
2
8
Figure 3-80
3-198
...
1
3 = SX +
4 = SR +
5 = SR –
6 = SX –
SX = Signal transmit
SR = signal receive
STLS4R Interfaces (S30817-K924-Z313)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-89
STLS4R Contact Assignments
S0 Ports 1-4
MW8 (RJ49) Jack
X2, pin
1
13
S0 port 1 transmit+
14
S0 port 1 receive+
15
S0 port 1 receive–
16
S0 port 1 transmit–
23
S0 port 2 transmit+
24
S0 port 2 receive+
25
S0 port 2 receive–
26
S0 port 2 transmit–
33
S0 port 3 transmit+
34
S0 port 3 receive+
35
S0 port 3 receive–
36
S0 port 3 transmit–
43
S0 port 4 transmit+
44
S0 port 4 receive+
45
S0 port 4 receive–
46
S0 port 4 transmit–
2
3
4
>
Refer to Page 3-193 for information on connecting ISDN lines and telephones.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-199
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.20
STLSX2, STLSX4, STLSX4R
Introduction
The following boards provide S0 basic connections:
●
STLSX4 (Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC-SX) S30810-Q2944-X = four S0 basic rate
accesses for use in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350.
●
STLSX2 S30810-Q2944-X100 = two S0 basic rate accesses for use in HiPath 3550 and
HiPath 3350.
●
STLSX4R (Subscriber Trunk Line S0 with ISAC-SX Rack) S30810-K2944-Z = four S0 basic
rate accesses for use in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300.
These are operated either as external trunk interfaces in TE (terminal equipment) mode or as
internal S0 buses (PMP bus) in NT (network terminator) mode with cross-connected RX-TX
lines.
Interfaces
>
3-200
The board does not supply terminals with power. Power must be supplied locally for
telephones, for example, via a plug-in power supply unit.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S0 port 1
50
11
4 S0 ports
(MW8 (RJ45)jacks)
X2
X1
S0 port 4
CUPR/CUCR
(for STLSX4R)
48
2
S0 ports 3 and 4 are
not assigned in
STLSX2.
8
...
CUP/CUC
(for STLSX2/
STLSX4)
1
MW8 (RJ45) jack assignment:
3 = Transmit +
4 = Receive +
5 = Receive –
6 = Transmit –
Figure 3-81
STLSX2/STLSX4/STLSX4R - Interfaces
S0 interface assignment
Table 3-90
1
STLSX2/STLSX4/STLSX4R - S0 Interface Assignment
X2
Pin
S0 port 1
X2
Pin
S0 port 2
X2
Pin
S0 port 31
X2
Pin
S0 port 41
11
–
21
–
31
–
41
–
12
–
22
–
32
–
42
–
13
Transmit +
23
Transmit +
33
Transmit +
43
Transmit +
14
Receive +
24
Receive +
34
Receive +
44
Receive +
15
Receive –
25
Receive –
35
Receive –
45
Receive –
16
Transmit –
26
Transmit –
36
Transmit –
46
Transmit –
17
–
27
–
37
–
47
–
18
–
28
–
38
–
48
–
Not for STLSX2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-201
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Configuring S0 interfaces
Depending on how the interfaces are applied, use HiPath 3000 Manager E to define the relevant protocols for the trunks to be connected. Please note the additional information contained
in the protocol templates when selecting a suitable S0 protocol:
●
CO = Interfaces to the public CO
●
Bus = Interfaces to an internal station
●
Master = Interfaces for a master system network
●
Slave = Interfaces for a slave system network
●
H150/H118 or H300 = Defines the CorNet protocol:
●
–
H150/H118 = Optimized for interconnection with HiPath 3000
This option should also be selected in connection with HiPath ProCenter Office HPCO.
–
H300 = Optimized for interconnection with HiPath 4000
Direct or fixed connection: defines the type of connection for a network and controls the
supply of clock pulses:
–
Direct = Communication systems are connected to one another by means of a direct
cable connection. The master system supplies the reference clock pulse for the networked system.
–
Fixed connection = Communication systems are connected over lines leased from a
network provider (with clock pulse supply). The master system receives the reference
clock pulse from the network.
A slave system always receives the clock pulse from the master system regardless of
whether the connection is direct or fixed.
Use the S0 interface S0 1 for connection to the public telecommunications network. You can
also connect S0 interfaces S0 2 to S0 4 to the ISDN trunk or to ISDN terminals (ISDN telephone,
group 4 fax device, PC, dialing aid) via an S0 bus.
3-202
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Connecting ISDN telephones
Depending on the system, you can set up a maximum of four internal S0 buses (S0 1 to S0 4).
A maximum of eight ISDN terminals can be addressed on each S0 bus.
The system does not assign the MSN until the S0 port is configured on the “Euro bus”; the MSN
can be read out via administration.
When you set up an S0 bus, it is assigned an MSN. This MSN is the first free station number in
the system. The S0 station is immediately available under this MSN, without an outgoing seizure.
>
If no MSN is entered in the terminal, a default MSN is automatically assigned after
you change the S0 port to "Euro bus" in system administration.
Configuring an S0 bus with a Mini-Western jack
S0 telephones cannot be directly connected to an STLSX board’s Mini-Western jack via the cable supplied. You must first install a jack with cross-connected cables (see Figure 3-77).
Assignment of MW jack pins 1- 8:
8-pin
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
6-pin
1
6
SR SX SX SR
4-pin
5
4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
Always establish contact on the
center four pins.
4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
Figure 3-82
Pin Assignments in MW Jacks
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-203
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
System
S01 to S04
To switch from external to internal S0 operation, you must
cross the SR and SX wires before the first jack.
230 V∼
Mini-Western
through-jack
(MW8 = 8-pin)
SR.1 Receive 5
SX.1 Transmit 3
SX.2 Transmit 6
SR.2 Receive 4
SX SR SR SX
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
twisted
pair
* = Not crossed in TA-S0
*
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1st Mini-Western jack
(MW8 = 8-pin)
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2nd to 8th Mini-Western jack
(MW8 = 8-pin)
UAE
connector
Additional
power supply
6
5
4
3
The connecting cord of the
ISDN telephone must not exceed
10 m in length.
100 Ω/0.25 W
Terminating resistor in last jack
Maximum ranges:
1
System
2
3
8
Short bus: 150 m (492 ft.)
20m
Long bus: 150 m (492 ft.)
Figure 3-83
3-204
Wiring and Ranges for S0 Bus Jacks
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.21
STMD3
Introduction
The STMD3 board (Subscriber and Trunk Module Digital S0) provides eight S0 basic rate accesses for HiPath 3800 and comes in the following variants:
●
S30810-Q2217-X10 = S0 interfaces with no power supply
●
S30810-Q2217-X110 = S0 interfaces with power supply
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (red)
●
LED (green)
Figure 3-84
>
STMD3 (S30810-Q2217-X10/-X110) - LEDs on the Front Panel
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-205
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-91
STMD3 - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Flashing At least one channel is activated.
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-92
●
For connecting to the connector panels using RJ45 jacks: Table 3-93
●
For U.S. only: For connecting to the connector panels with CHAMP jack: Table 3-94
●
For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors: Table 3-95
3-206
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-92
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
STMD3 - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SIVAPAC connector
STMD3
MDFU-E
1
1Ea
23
1Eb
3
1Sa
4
1Sb
2b
5
2Ea
3a
6
2Eb
7
2Sa
8
2Sb
4b
9
3Ea
5a
10
3Eb
11
3Sa
12
3Sb
6b
13
4Ea
7a
14
4Eb
15
4Sa
16
4Sb
8b
17
5Ea
9a
18
5Eb
19
5Sa
20
5Sb
10b
24
6Ea
11a
25
6Eb
26
6Sa
27
6Sb
12b
29
7Ea
13a
30
7Eb
31
7Sa
32
7Sb
14b
34
8Ea
15a
35
8Eb
37
8Sa
38
8Sb
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Notes
1a
Basic
rate access 1
Basic
rate access 2
Basic
rate access 3
Basic
rate access 4
Basic
rate access 5
Basic
rate access 6
Basic
rate access 7
Basic
rate access 8
1b
2a
3b
4a
5b
6a
7b
8a
9b
10a
11b
12a
13b
14a
15b
16a
16b
3-207
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-93
STMD3 - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3-208
STMD3
Subscriber line
Pin
Trunk connection
Pin
3
4
1Ea
6
5
1Eb
4
3
1Sa
5
6
1Sb
3
4
2Ea
6
5
2Eb
4
3
2Sa
5
6
2Sb
3
4
3Ea
6
5
3Eb
4
3
3Sa
5
6
3Sb
3
4
4Ea
6
5
4Eb
4
3
4Sa
5
6
4Sb
3
4
5Ea
6
5
5Eb
4
3
5Sa
5
6
5Sb
3
4
6Ea
6
5
6Eb
4
3
6Sa
5
6
6Sb
3
4
7Ea
6
5
7Eb
4
3
7Sa
5
6
7Sb
3
4
8Ea
6
5
8Eb
4
3
8Sa
5
6
8Sb
Notes
Basic
rate access 1
Basic
rate access 2
Basic
rate access 3
Basic
rate access 4
Basic
rate access 5
Basic
rate access 6
Basic
rate access 7
Basic
rate access 8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-94
CHAMP jack
STMD3 - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack (For U.S. Only)
STMD3
1
S0, Receive
26
S0, Receive
2
S0, Transmit
27
S0, Transmit
3
S0, Receive
28
S0, Receive
4
S0, Transmit
29
S0, Transmit
5
S0, Receive
30
S0, Receive
6
S0, Transmit
31
S0, Transmit
7
S0, Receive
32
S0, Receive
8
S0, Transmit
33
S0, Transmit
9
S0, Receive
34
S0, Receive
10
S0, Transmit
35
S0, Transmit
11
S0, Receive
36
S0, Receive
12
S0, Transmit
37
S0, Transmit
13
S0, Receive
38
S0, Receive
14
S0, Transmit
39
S0, Transmit
15
S0, Receive
40
S0, Receive
16
S0, Transmit
41
S0, Transmit
Notes
Basic
rate access 1
Basic
rate access 2
Basic
rate access 3
Basic
rate access 4
Basic
rate access 5
Basic
rate access 6
Basic
rate access 7
Basic
rate access 8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-209
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-95
Color
group
STMD3 - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors (Cable
for Ports 1 - 16)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-210
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
SU
connector
19
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
STMD3
1Ea
39
1Eb
38
1Sa
48
1Sb
27
2Ea
47
2Eb
16
2Sa
46
2Sb
05
3Ea
45
3Eb
14
3Sa
Basic
rate access
1
Basic
rate access
2
Basic
rate access
3
MDFU-E
S0 patch panel,
MW8 pin
Station
Trunk
connection connection
1a
3
4
1b
6
5
2a
4
3
2b
5
6
3a
3
4
3b
6
5
4a
4
3
4b
5
6
5a
3
4
5b
6
5
6a
4
3
44
3Sb
6b
5
6
23
4Ea
7a
3
4
43
4Eb
7b
6
5
32
4Sa
8a
4
3
42
4Sb
8b
5
6
11
5Ea
9a
3
4
9b
6
5
10a
4
3
10b
5
6
11a
3
4
11b
6
5
12a
4
3
12b
5
6
13a
3
4
31
5Eb
02
5Sa
22
5Sb
13
6Ea
33
6Eb
04
6Sa
24
6Sb
15
7Ea
35
7Eb
06
7Sa
26
7Sb
17
8Ea
37
8Eb
08
8Sa
28
8Sb
Basic
rate access
4
Basic
rate access
5
Basic
rate access
6
Basic
rate access
7
Basic
rate access
8
13b
6
5
14a
4
3
14b
5
6
15a
3
4
15b
6
5
16a
4
3
16b
5
6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.22
STMD8
Introduction
The STMD8 (Subscriber And Trunk Module Digital S0) board contains eight S0 basic rate accesses for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, which are used
●
for the S0 trunk connection (via NT) (not for U.S.)
●
for a Point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connection
●
for S0 networking (not for U.S) (CorNet N, CorNet NQ or QSig)
●
for an S0 bus for connecting ISDN telephones (not for U.S.) (separate power supply required).
Switches and LEDs
H300
LEDs
H301
.
.
.
.
H308
Lockout switch
Figure 3-85
1
:
:
8
On
S300
STMD8 (S30810-Q2558-X200)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-211
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
H300 LED (see Figure 3-85): Reference clock display (clock is generated if this feature was
configured using HiPath 3000 Manager E).
●
–
On: Reference clock for clock generator is created.
–
Off: No reference clock
LEDs H301 to H308 (see Figure 3-85)
●
Table 3-96
STMD8 - LED Statuses (H301 to H308)
LED Status
(on/off)
Meaning
Action
During Startup and Initialization
Flickering
(50/50 ms)
Board test unsuccessful
Replace board.
Flashing
(100/100 ms)
Board not configured
Inspect visually, remove and re-insert
board if necessary.
Replace board if flashing continues.
On
Loading in progress
Flashing
(100/100 ms)
Code could not be loaded
Off
Board loaded
Flashing
(500/500 ms)
Board loaded but not yet activated
Replace board.
During Operation
On
ISDN layer 2 activated
Flickering
(450/50 ms)
Dependability test (loopback test)
in progress
Flashing
(500/500 ms)
Board is out of service (e.g. S300/x Check whether board was deactivat“closed”)
ed using HiPath 3000 Manager E or
lockout switch.
Off
ISDN layer 2 not activated
3-212
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S0 trunk connection (via NT) (not for U.S.)
>
Table 2-10 lists examples of the maximum cable lengths for connecting trunks.
HiPath 3750
Public network
MDFU cable
STMD8
(CABLU)
MDFU or
MDFU-E
NT
S0 Trunk Connection (Example for HiPath 3750)
Figure 3-86
1Sb
1Eb
1Ea
1Sa
NT (network termination):
The connection depends on the
country-specific NT.
S0 basic
rate access 1
Figure 3-87
>
MDFU, MDFU-E
S0 basic
rate access 2
......
STMD8
S0 NT Connection(Not for U.S.)
When starting up S0 ports during operation with PABXs, it is important to ensure that
the NT switch is in the POINT-TO-POINT position.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-213
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Point-to-point or point-to-multipoint connection
●
Point-to-multipoint connection
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700 can be operated on an ISDN multi-device connection (S0 bus) to
CO. This allows parallel operation to other ISDN devices located on this port.
Note the following:
●
–
Maintain the correct polarity on the T/R wires.
–
The phone company assigns an 11-digit DID number (MSN or multiple subscriber
number) for telephones to be connected to the S0 bus. There are usually at least three
MSNs per basic rate access.
–
When setting the system-wide ISDN parameters, select "EURO CO PMP" under Port
configuration (code 20 4 1) for the port you are using.
–
Enter the MSN in the table for DID numbers. For each MSN assigned, callers can directly dial a station, group, or hunt group in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 system.
–
Leave the "PABX number" parameter unchanged.
–
Always configure HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 as the last station on the S0 bus because terminating resistors (2 x 100 Ω) are permanently installed in the trunk connection of the communications server. Remove any terminating resistors from the last
socket.
Point-to-point connection
Use a point-to-point connection if you have a dedicated line (trunk circuit/tie trunk circuit)
or to extend the range if only one telephone is connected to the S0 bus.
3-214
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S0 networking (not for U.S)
>
For examples of the maximum cable lengths for direct CorNet N/CorNet NQ networking, please refer to Table 2-10.
S0 networking in a plant without NT
HiPath 3000 /
HiPath 4000
HiPath 3750
4
MDFU or
MDFU-E
STMD8
MDFU or
MDFU-E
STMD8
S0
MDFU Cable (CABLU)
S0 networking in a plant with NT
HiPath 3000 /
HiPath 4000
HiPath 3750
2
MDFU
or
STMD8
NT
NT
MDFU or
MDFU-E
STMD8
Fixed line (cabling must be approved by
NT suppliers)
MDFU Cable (CABLU)
S0 networking using leased lines
HiPath 3000 /
HiPath 4000
HiPath 3750
STMD8
MDFU
or
NT
NT
MDFU or
MDFU-E
STMD8
Fixed connection via public network (NT
connection according to Figure 3-87)
MDFU Cable (CABLU)
Figure 3-88
S0 Networking Options (Not for U.S.) (Examples for HiPath 3750)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-215
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S0 bus for connecting ISDN telephones (not for U.S.)
HiPath 3750
MDFU or
MDFU-E
STMD8
The maximum permitted S0 bus
length between the MDFU and the
last wall socket is 150 m (490 ft.).
S0 bus
MDFU cable
(CABLU)
Max.10 m
●
●
Universal wall socket
UAE 8/8 (8)
AP: L30460-X951-X
UP: L30460-X952-X
Max. of
8 terminals
Combination socket UAE 2 x 8 (8)
L30460-X958-X
Max.10 m
Terminating resistors 2x100 ohms,
V39230-Z4101-F
Max.10 m
Assignment of MW jack pins 1- 8:
8-pin
7
ISDN terminal
ISDN terminal
S0 Bus to the STMD8 over the MDFU or MDFU-E (Not for U.S.)
Figure 3-89
8
ISDN terminal
6
5
4
3
2
6-pin
1
6
SR SX SX SR
4-pin
5
4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
Always establish contact on the
center four pins.
4
3
2
1
SR SX SX SR
Figure 3-90
3-216
Pin Assignments in MW Jacks
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S0 bus - example of jack assignment (not for U.S.)
from MDFU/
patch panel
230 Vac
8
7
UAE
connector
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
SR SX SX SR
1. Mini-Western
jack (MW8 = 8-pin):
SR.1 Receive 6
SX.1 Transmit 4
SX.2 Transmit 5
SR.2 Receive 3
6
S0power
supply
unit
(Sedlbauer AG)
5
4
3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2nd to 8th MiniWestern jack
(MW8 = 8-pin)
Terminating resistors in the last
jack: 2 x 100 ohms,
V39230-Z4101-F
Figure 3-91
>
S0 Bus - Example of Jack Assignment (Not for U.S.)
ISDN boards can also be connected to available optiPoint 500 series telephones (except for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) using an optiPoint ISDN
Adapter.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-217
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
Table 3-97
Color
group
STMD8 - Cable and Connector Assignment (Not for U.S.)
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-218
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
SU
connector
BP: Xx8
19
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
STMD8
1Ea
39
1Eb
38
1Sa
48
1Sb
27
2Ea
47
2Eb
16
2Sa
46
2Sb
05
3Ea
Basic
rate access
1
Basic
rate access
2
Basic
rate access
3
MDFU/
MDFU-E
S0 patch panel,
MW8 pin
Station
Trunk
connection connection
1a
3
4
1b
6
5
2a
4
3
2b
5
6
3a
3
4
3b
6
5
4a
4
3
4b
5
6
5a
3
4
5b
6
5
6a
4
3
45
3Eb
14
3Sa
44
3Sb
6b
5
6
23
4Ea
7a
3
4
43
4Eb
7b
6
5
32
4Sa
8a
4
3
42
4Sb
8b
5
6
11
5Ea
9a
3
4
9b
6
5
10a
4
3
10b
5
6
11a
3
4
11b
6
5
12a
4
3
12b
5
6
13a
3
4
13b
6
5
14a
4
3
14b
5
6
15a
3
4
15b
6
5
16a
4
3
16b
5
6
31
5Eb
02
5Sa
22
5Sb
13
6Ea
33
6Eb
04
6Sa
24
6Sb
15
7Ea
35
7Eb
06
7Sa
26
7Sb
17
8Ea
37
8Eb
08
8Sa
28
8Sb
Basic
rate access
4
Basic
rate access
5
Basic
rate access
6
Basic
rate access
7
Basic
rate access
8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-98
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
STMD8 - Assignment (SUXx8) (For U.S. Only)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU connector
STMD8
Backplane: Xx8
19
1Ra
39
1Rb
38
1Sa
48
CHAMP jack, MDF
1
1 Receive –
26
1 Receive +
2
1 Transmit –
1Sb
27
1 Transmit +
27
2Ra
3
2 Receive –
47
2Rb
28
2 Receive +
16
2Sa
4
2 Transmit –
46
2Sb
29
2 Transmit +
05
3Ra
5
3 Receive –
45
3Rb
30
3 Receive +
14
3Sa
6
3 Transmit –
44
3Sb
31
3 Transmit +
23
4Ra
7
4 Receive –
43
4Rb
32
4 Receive +
32
4Sa
8
4 Transmit –
42
4Sb
33
4 Transmit +
11
5Ra
9
5 Receive –
31
5Rb
34
5 Receive +
02
5Sa
10
5 Transmit –
22
5Sb
35
5 Transmit +
13
6Ra
11
6 Receive –
33
6Rb
36
6 Receive +
04
6Sa
12
6 Transmit –
24
6Sb
37
6 Transmit +
15
7Ra
13
7 Receive –
35
7Rb
38
7 Receive +
06
7Sa
14
7 Transmit –
26
7Sb
39
7 Transmit +
17
8Ra
15
8 Receive –
37
8Rb
40
8 Receive +
08
8Sa
16
8 Transmit –
28
8Sb
41
8 Transmit +
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Notes
No other wires used.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-219
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Connecting ISDN terminals to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 (for U.S. only)
S0 bus with MW jack
You must change the signal sequence to connect up ISDN telephones. Transmit wires must be
on the inside; receive wires on the outside (see Figure 3-92).
To do so, jumper the four wires on the provided line cord to the pins for the STMD8 ports on the
main distribution frame (MDF).
The ISDN terminals must have their own local power supply.
S0 bus wiring from STMD8 port on MDF or from optiset E ISDN adapter (for U.S. only)
optiset E ISDN
adapter
SR
SX
SX
SR
1
23
4
6
75
8
09
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
↵←
→
↑↵
1
2
3
4
5
6
MW8 jack 1
(8-pin)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Contact is always established using the center
pins
MW8 = Cross the wires as shown
(not required in S0 bus from ISDN
adapter).
STMD8 port on
MDF (port 1 shown)
SX 2
SX 27
SR 1
SR 26
.
.
.
Figure 3-92
3-220
MW8 jacks 2
to 7 (8-pin)
100 Ω/0.25 W
Terminating
resistors in the last
jack
Last MW8 jack
(8-pin)
MW8 jack 1
(8-pin)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MW8 jack 2
(8-pin)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STMD8 - S0 Bus Wiring from STMD8 Port or from ISDN Adapter (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.23
STMI2
Introduction
STMI2 (Subscriber Trunk Module IP) is a VoIP gateway board (VoIP - Voice over IP) which provides the functionality of HG 1500 in HiPath 3800. This includes:
●
Connection of a local LAN to the HiPath 3800 and connection with external LANs via the
ISDN and DSL interfaces of HiPath 3800.
●
Support for the conventional functions of an ISDN and DSL router with the additional functionality of a media gateway for the transfer of voice, fax and data.
●
Forwarding of calls between IP-supported networks (LAN, intranet, Internet) and circuitswitched networks (ISDN, PSTN).
Configuration is performed via Web-based management (WBM) which enables the administration of HG 1500 without any special software requirements.
>
A combination of up to eight STMI2 boards can be used per system, but the following
restrictions must be observed:
●
A maximum of four STMI2 boards may be inserted per HiPath 3800 cabinet.
●
To allow for future channel expansion with extension modules, the slot between
two STMI2 boards should remain free.
For information on configuration, refer to the HG 1500 Administration Manual.
For information on how to calculate the number of boards required for HG 1500, see
Section 10.6.4.
Board versions
Table 3-99
Board
STMI2
STMI2 - Board Variants
Part number
S30810-Q2316-X100
Services
Voice and Data
DSPs
B channels
DSP channels
2
32
Sixteen simultaneous Voice over IP connections are possible per DSP (Digital Signal Processor).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-221
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Extension modules
The STMI2 board has two HGA (HiPath Gateway Accelerator) slots, which can be used to connect the extension modules.
Table 3-100
Extension
module
PDMX
(PMC DSP
Module Extended)
STMI2 - Extension Modules
Part number
Function
S30807-Q5697X200
Notes
The PDMX extension module
is not released at present.
HGA
slot 1
HGA
slot 0
Figure 3-93
3-222
STMI2 (S30810-Q2316-X100) - HGA Slots
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Connections
The STMI2 board features the following connections on the front panel:
●
Two RJ45 jacks for LAN interfaces. These provide access to the Ethernet standard (IEEE
802.3) with 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps with automatic configuration. Manual configuration is
also possible.
●
9-pin Sub-D plug for V.24 interface
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-223
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
Run (green)
– on = at least 1 B channel busy
– off = normal operation
●
Fail (red) = error encountered
V.24 interface (9-pin Sub-D plug)
Two Ethernet (10/100BaseT) LAN connectors (8-pin RJ45 jacks):
●
LAN2 (only released for service applications)
●
LAN1
The LAN interface status is indicated by two LEDs:
●
LED1:
– Green = 100 Mbps online (link)
– Yellow = 10 Mbps online (link)
– Flashing = active
●
LED2 (green):
– On = full-duplex (FDX)
– Off = half-duplex
Figure 3-94
3-224
STMI2 - Front Panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
V.24interface
The V.24 cable (C30267-Z355-A25) is used for connecting the service PC.
The following settings must be chosen for a terminal or PC connected to the V.24 interface:
Transmission rate
38,400 (default)
Data bits
8
Parity bit
None
Stop bits
1
Data flow control
None
It is recommended that the local echo be deactivated on the connected terminal or PC.
Table 3-101
STMI2 - V.24 Interface Assignment
Pin
Signal
I/O
1
DCD
2
RxD
I
3
TxD
O
4
DTR
O
5
0V
6
DSR
I
7
RTS
O
8
CTS
I
9
RI
Remark
Not used
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
Ground
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
Internal pull-up resistor in level switch (MAX211E)
Not used
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-225
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LAN interfaces
Table 3-102
STMI2 - LAN Interface Assignment (RJ45 Jacks)
Pin
Signal
1
TDP (Transmit Data +)
2
TDN (Transmit Data –)
3
RDP (Receive Data +)
4
TT1 (Transmit Termination 1)
5
TT2 (Transmit Termination 2)
6
RDN (Receive Data –)
7
RT1 (Receive Termination 1)
8
RT2 (Receive Termination 2)
Signals TT1/2 and RT1/2 are not needed for transmitting data. They represent a signal termination of 100 ohms (so-called Bob Smith termination) for the two unused wire pairs in a 4-pair
twisted pair cable.
3-226
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.24
TIEL
Introduction
The TIEL board (Tie Line Ear & Mouth) provides four bothway analog tie trunk circuits for E&M
signaling for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. Each tie trunk circuit has eight connectors: incoming speech path (2), outgoing speech path (2), incoming signaling (2) and outgoing signaling
(2).
This allows tie trunk traffic to other private communication systems.
Speech paths
The speech paths can be set to four-wire or two-wire mode. Four-wire connections should be
used for high transmission quality on analog networks (this description deals only with four-wire
mode).
The advantage of separate speech paths for the incoming and outgoing directions is that the
stability (echo) of a connection is not adversely affected. In addition, repeaters in the transmission equipment compensate for attenuation loss on the line.
E&M signaling paths
The E&M signaling paths carry the signals that control connection setup and cleardown. Various interfaces can be selected, depending on the requirements of the remote system or transmission equipment. These interface types have different numbers of wires and different potentials.
Starting up a tie trunk
Before you can start up a tie trunk, you must determine the type of interface supported by the
two systems. Type 2 is preferable because it virtually excludes problems with longitudinal voltages.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-227
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Characteristics of the interface types
●
E&M interface type 1 (Figure 3-96)
The interface in the transmission equipment does not require negative power feeding. This
type uses only two signal wires; the communication system and transmission equipment
are non-floating, so they are not protected from longitudinal voltage.
●
E&M interface type 1A (Figure 3-97)
Same as type 1, but without a 0-V rest potential on the M-wire.
●
E&M interface type 1B or 5 (Figure 3-98)
The interfaces in both the transmission equipment and the communication system require
negative power feeding. This type uses only two signal wires. The two M-wires are connected to 0-V potential only, meaning that no special measures are required to prevent
short-circuit currents in the event of ground leakage. The communication system and
transmission equipment are non-floating, so they are not protected from longitudinal voltage.
●
E&M interface type 2 (Figure 3-99
The interfaces in both the transmission equipment and the communication system require
negative power feeding. This type uses four signal wires. The M-contacts are floating, so
there is no non-floating link between the communication system and transmission equipment.
>
●
Interface type 2 is recommended; it provides the best longitudinal voltage protection.
E&M interface type 3
This type uses four signal wires. The M-signal has GND or Vbattery (- 48 V) for direct TIELto-TIEL connection (without converter).
3-228
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Interface specifications
Transmit path
Four-wire transmit level
-3.5 dBr
Four-wire receive level
-3.5 dBr
Characteristic impedance
600 ohms
Frequency range
0.3 to 3.4 kHz, +/- 1 dB
Dielectric strength of speech wires against
ground
1 kV surge, 1.2/50 µs and 10/700 µs
Signaling
Type of E&M interface (programmable)
1, 1A, 1B, 2, 3, 5
Protocols
To ANSI/EIA/TIA-464-A, configurable
Immediate start
Wink signal
Delay signal
Signaling method
DP or DTMF
Characteristics of the signaling protocols
Connecting two switching units via a tie trunk requires a protocol supported by both systems.
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 supports:
●
"Immediate start" protocol
No seizure acknowledgment; with answer signal.
This is the most widely used protocol internationally.
●
"Wink signal" protocol
Proceed to send signal using "wink" signal; with answer signal.
This protocol is the same as the "immediate start" protocol except that it also features a
proceed-to-send signal. It is most useful for connecting systems that are not immediately
ready for digit input.
●
"Delay signal" protocol
Dial delay with "delay" signal; with answer signal.
This protocol permits the transmission of dialing information to be delayed until the receiving exchange is ready. It differs from the wink signal protocol only in that the remote system
returns a backward signal immediately after seizure even if it is not ready for digit input.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-229
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Switches and LEDs
H0
LEDs
H1
H2
H3
Lockout switches:
(S1/1 to 4,
S1/5 to 8 = used
for factory testing)
1
S1/1
:
S1/8
1
DIP-FIX switches
(factory default):
23
4
1
4 2356
2356
2356
1
1
S302
S304
2356
1 4
23
1
2356
1 4
S403
S402
S404
2356
1
4
S303
3-230
23
2356
1 4
v S204
4
S202
S104
S203
Figure 3-95
1
4
S103
1
S102
23
2356
TIEL (S30810-Q2520-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
DIP-FIX switch positions
Table 3-103
TIEL - Functions of the DIP-FIX Switches
Function
Type 1
(Figure 3-96)
CCT 1
Type 2
(Figure 3-99
and
Figure 3-100)
CCT 4
Position
Switches
Position
Switches
Position
Switches
Position
S103
1-2
4-6
1-2
S203
1-2
4-6
1-2
S303
1-2
4-6
1-2
S403
1-2
4-6
1-2
1-3
4-6
1-2
S203
1-3
4-6
1-2
S303
1-3
4-6
1-2
S403
S203
S302
1-3
4-5
1-2
S403
S202
1-3
4-5
1-2
S303
S102
1-3
4-5
1-2
S402
1-3
4-5
1-2
S103
S102
Open
1-2
S203
S202
Open
1-2
S303
S302
Open
1-2
S403
S402
Open
1-2
S103
1-2
4-6
1-3
S203
1-2
4-6
1-3
S303
1-2
4-6
1-3
S403
1-2
4-6
1-3
S103
S102
Type 1B or 5
(Figure 3-98)
CCT 3
Switches
S102
Type 1A
(Figure 3-97)
CCT 2
S103
S202
S202
S302
S302
S402
S402
1-3
4-6
1-2
(factory default)
Type 3
S102
S202
S302
S402
2 speech wires
S104
1-3
4-6
S204
1-3
4-6
S304
1-3
4-6
S404
1-3
4-6
4 speech wires
S104
1-2
4-5
S204
1-2
4-5
S304
1-2
4-5
S404
1-2
4-5
(factory default)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-231
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Signal wire connection
>
The following maximum ranges (without converter) must be taken into account:
●
4-wire speech: 8 km for 0.6 mm ∅
●
2-wire speech: 6 km for 0.6 mm ∅
E&M interface type 1 (not for U.S)
Remote system/transmission
equipment with TIEL
TIEL
- 48 V
E
1E
1E
1M
1M
1ka
1kb
1ga
1gb
1ga
1gb
1ka
1kb
E
- 48 V
1
4
1
2356
23
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
S102
S202
S302
S402
3-232
4
2356
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
(see Table 3-105)
System A
Figure 3-96
1
1
23
S102
S202
S302
S402
System B
E&M Interface Type 1 (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
E&M interface type 1A (not for U.S.)
Remote system/transmission
equipment with TIEL
TIEL
- 48 V
E
E
M
M
M
E
- 48 V
1
4
2356
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
Figure 3-97
1
1
23
2356
S102
S202
S302
S402
4
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
1
23
S102
S202
S302
S402
E&M Interface Type 1A (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-233
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
E&M interface type 1B or 5 (not for U.S.)
Remote system/transmission
equipment with TIEL
TIEL
- 48 V
1
E
4
2356
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
Figure 3-98
3-234
E
E
M
M
- 48 V
E
1
1
23
2356
S102
S202
S302
S402
4
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
1
23
S102
S202
S302
S402
E&M Interface Type 1B or 5 (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
E&M interface type 2 (not for U.S)
Remote system//transmissionequipment with TIEL
TIEL
- 48 V
E
E
SG
M
SB
1
4
2356
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
Figure 3-99
E
- 48 V
E
SG
M
SB
1
1
23
2356
S102
S202
S302
S402
4
CCT 1: S103
CCT 2: S203
CCT 3: S303
CCT 4: S403
1
23
S102
S202
S302
S402
E&M Interface Type 2 (Not for U.S)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-235
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
E&M interface type 2 - circuit diagram, MDFU or MDFU-E numbering (not for U.S.)
Splitting strip in MDFU/MDFU-E
TIEL
Circuit 1, E&M interface type 2
4 speech wires
2
a1
1
1
S104
4
3
2356
b1
5
S104
150
- 48 V
1
5
6 a 10 a 14 a Incoming
2b
6 b 10 b 14 b speech
E
3a
SG
3b
7 a 11 a 15 a Incoming
signal7 b 11 b 15 b ing
3
K101
2
3 S103
M
4a
27
SB
6
9 b 13 b
1
2
4
Outgoing
speech
120
2.4 k
9 a 13 a
2a
b2
Optocoupler
5a
5b
S104
6
1a
Notes
1b
a2
4
S102
CCT CCT CCT CCT
1
2
3
4
4b
8 a 12 a 16 a Outgoing
8 b 12 b 16 b signaling
PTC
- 48 V
Figure 3-100
3-236
E&M Interface Type 2 - Circuit Diagram, MDFU or MDFU-E Numbering (Not for
U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-104
TIEL - LED Statuses
LED Status
(on/off)
Meaning
Action
During Startup and Initialization
Flickering (50/50 Board test unsuccessful
ms)
Replace board.
Flashing (100/
100 ms)
Board not configured
Inspect visually, remove and re-insert
board if necessary.
Replace board if flashing continues.
On
Loading in progress
Flashing (100/
100 ms)
Code could not be loaded
Off
Board loaded
Flashing (500/
500 ms)
Board loaded but not yet activated
Replace board.
During Operation
On
Circuit seized
Flashing in ring
cadence
Circuit in ringing state
Flickering (450/
50 ms)
Dependability test (loopback test)
in progress
Flashing (500/
500 ms)
Circuit out of service (e.g. S1/x in
“on” position”)
Off
Circuit is idle, no seizure
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Check whether the circuit was deactivated with HiPath 3000 Manager E or
lockout switch.
3-237
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
>
Assignment must be coordinated with the remote system.
Table 3-105
Color
group
Pair
TIEL - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.)
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
1
2
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
1
3
grn/wht
wht/brn
4
brn/wht
wht/gry
5
6
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
2
7
ora/red
red/grn
8
3-238
grn/red
SU
connector
TIEL
BP: Xx8
MDFU/
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8
pin
Notes
19
1ka
1a
5
Ring
39
1kb
1b
4
Tip
38
1ga
2a
6
Ring
48
1gb
2b
3
Tip
27
1E
3a
1
Ear
47
1SG
3b
2
System
ground
16
1M
4a
7
Mouth
46
1SB
4b
8
System
battery
05
2ka
5a
5
Ring
45
2kb
5b
4
Tip
14
2ga
6a
6
Ring
44
2gb
6b
3
Tip
23
2E
7a
1
Ear
43
2SG
7b
2
System
ground
32
2M
8a
7
Mouth
42
2SB
8b
8
System
battery
Port
1
Port
2
●
●
Transmit
with 4-wire
speech
Transmit +
receive with
2-wire
speech
Receive with 4wire speech
Signal wires
●
●
Transmit
with 4-wire
speech
Transmit +
receive with
2-wire
speech
Receive with 4wire speech
Signal wires
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-105
Color
group
Pair
TIEL - Cable Assignment (Not for U.S.)
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
red/brn
9
brn/red
2
10
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
11
blu/blk
blk/ora
12
ora/blk
blk/grn
3
13
14
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
15
gry/blk
yel/blu
4
16
blu/yel
SU
connector
TIEL
BP: Xx8
MDFU/
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8
pin
Notes
11
3ka
9a
5
Ring
31
3kb
9b
4
Tip
02
3ga
10a
6
Ring
22
3gb
10b
3
Tip
13
3E
11a
1
Ear
33
3SG
11b
2
System
ground
04
3M
12a
7
Mouth
24
3SB
12b
8
System
battery
15
4ka
13a
5
Ring
35
4kb
13b
4
Tip
06
4ga
14a
6
Ring
26
4gb
14b
3
Tip
17
4E
15a
1
Ear
37
4SG
15b
2
System
ground
08
4M
16a
7
Mouth
28
4SB
16b
8
System
battery
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port
3
Port
4
●
●
Transmit
with 4-wire
speech
Transmit +
receive with
2-wire
speech
Receive with 4wire speech
Signal wires
●
●
Transmit
with 4-wire
speech
Transmit +
receive with
2-wire
speech
Receive with 4wire speech
Signal wires
3-239
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-106
#
a-Wire
(Tip)
TIEL - Assignment (SU Xx8) (For U.S. Only)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
1
2
3
4
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
5
6
7
8
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
9
10
11
12
3-240
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
SU connector
TIEL
CHAMP jack, MDF
Notes
BP: Xx8
19
1Ra
1
Ring
●
39
1Rb
26
Tip
●
38
1Sa
2
Ring 1
48
1Sb
27
TIP 1
27
2Ra
3
E
47
2Rb
28
System ground
16
2Sa
4
M
46
2Sb
29
System battery
05
3Ra
5
Ring
●
45
3Rb
30
Tip
●
14
3Sa
6
Ring 1
44
3Sb
31
TIP 1
23
4Ra
7
E
43
4Rb
32
System ground
32
4Sa
8
M
42
4Sb
33
System battery
11
5Ra
9
Ring
●
31
5Rb
34
Tip
●
02
5Sa
10
Ring 1
22
5Sb
35
TIP 1
13
6Ra
11
E
33
6Rb
36
System ground
04
6Sa
12
M
24
6Sb
37
System battery
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Transmit with 4-wire
speech
Transmit + receive with
2-wire speech
Receive with 4-wire
speech
Signal wires
Transmit with 4-wire
speech
Transmit + receive with
2-wire speech
Receive with 4-wire
speech
Signal wires
Transmit with 4-wire
speech
Transmit + receive with
2-wire speech
Receive with 4-wire
speech
Signal wires
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-106
#
a-Wire
(Tip)
TIEL - Assignment (SU Xx8) (For U.S. Only)
b-Wire
(Ring)
blk/grn
13
14
15
16
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU connector
TIEL
CHAMP jack, MDF
Notes
BP: Xx8
15
7Ra
13
Ring
●
35
7Rb
38
Tip
●
06
7Sa
14
Ring 1
39
TIP 1
Port 4
26
7Sb
17
8Ra
15
E
37
8Rb
40
System ground
08
8Sa
16
M
28
8Sb
41
System battery
Transmit with 4-wire
speech
Transmit + receive with
2-wire speech
Receive with 4-wire
speech
Signal wires
No other wires used.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-241
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.25
TLA2 (Not for U.S.), TLA4 (Not for U.S.), TLA8 (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
The MSI boards TLA2, TLA4 and TLA8 provide 2, 4 and 8 analog trunks (DP and DTMF dialing
method) for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing).
Interfaces
T/R ports
MSI 1 - 4
To CO
(CO 3, 4
not for
TLA2)
1
X2
50
TLA2/4
8
1
To
CUP/
CUC
X3 (free)
X1
8
1
to GEE
Module
2
X4
10
Figure 3-101
TLA2, TLA4 (Not for U.S.) - Interfaces (S30817-Q923-Bxxx, -Axxx)
Table 3-107
TLA2, TLA4 (Not for U.S.) - Contact Assignments
1
Contact
Connector X2
Connector X4
1
a trunk 1
GND for GEE50 FKR, otherwise free
2
b trunk 1
b trunk 1
3
a trunk 2
a trunk 1
4
b trunk 2
b trunk 2
5
a trunk 31
a trunk 2
6
b trunk
31
b trunk 31
7
a trunk 41
a trunk 31
8
b trunk 41
b trunk 41
9
a trunk 41
10
Call charging module assignment (GMZ)
Not for TLA2
3-242
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
The MSI board TLA8 with eight analog trunks for DP and DTMF signalling in HiPath 3550 and
HiPath 3350.
1
to GEE
Module
T/R ports
MSI 1 - 4
To CO
T/R ports
MSI 5 - 8
To CO
to GEE
Module
X3
10
1
50
X2
TLA8
8
X1
1
To
CUP/
CUC
X4
2
8
1
X5
10
Figure 3-102
TLA8 (Not for U.S.) - Interfaces (S30817-Q926-Axxx)
Table 3-108
TLA8 (Not for U.S.) - Contact Assignments
Contact
Connector X3
Connector X2
Connector X4
Connector X5
1
GND
a trunk 1
a trunk 5
GND
2
b trunk 1
b trunk 1
b trunk 5
b trunk 5
3
a trunk 1
a trunk 2
a trunk 6
a trunk 5
4
b trunk 2
b trunk 2
b trunk 6
b trunk 6
5
a trunk 2
a trunk 3
a trunk 7
a trunk 6
6
b trunk 3
b trunk 3
b trunk 7
b trunk 7
7
a trunk 3
a trunk 4
a trunk 8
a trunk 7
8
b trunk 4
b trunk 4
b trunk 8
b trunk 8
9
a trunk 4
–
–
a trunk 8
10
GMZ 1
–
–
GMZ 2
GMZ= Call charging module assignment
GND=GND for GEE50 FKR, otherwise free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-243
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.26
TLA4R (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
The TLA4R (Trunk Line Analog Rack) board provides four ports for the analog trunk connection
(DP and DTMF signaling methods) on HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing). There
are also two ALUM power failure transfers.
The transmission and function-oriented characteristics of the TLA4R are completely identical
to those of the TLA boards that are used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350. The only differences
are
●
the two ALUMs which are only available on the TLA4R.
●
the call metering receiving equipment interface, which is only on the TLA boards.
Interfaces
Trunk 1
:
:
Trunk 4
8 MW8
jacks
50
11
18
21
:
X1
X5
ALUM
2
To
CUPR
CUCR
1+2
88
Figure 3-103
TLA4R (Not for U.S.) Interfaces (S30817-Q923-Zxxx)
Table 3-109
TLA4R (Not for U.S.) Contact Assignments
MW8 Jack
X5, pin
Trunk connections 1-4
1
14
a trunk 1
15
b trunk 1
24
a trunk 2
25
b trunk 2
2
3-244
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-109
3
TLA4R (Not for U.S.) Contact Assignments
34
a trunk 3
35
b trunk 3
44
a trunk 4
45
b trunk 4
MW8 Jack
X5, pin
ALUM 1 + 2
5
54
TB1
55
TA1
64
TB2
65
TA2
74
BE1
75
AE1
84
BE2
85
AE2
4
6
7
8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
ALUM1: Stn card connection
ALUM2: Stn card connection
ALUM1: Analog telephone
connection
ALUM2: Analog telephone
connection
3-245
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.27
TM2LP
Introduction
The TM2LP (Trunk Module Loop Procedure) board connects up to eight analog trunks to HiPath 3800 using the loop-start protocol.
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (red)
●
LED (green)
Figure 3-104
>
3-246
TM2LP - Front Panel (S30810-Q2159-Xxxx)
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-110
TM2LP - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Action
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-111
●
For connecting to the connector panels using RJ45 jacks: Table 3-112
●
For U.S. only: For connecting to the connector panels with CHAMP jack: Table 3-113
●
For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors: Table 3-114
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-247
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-111
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3-248
a-Wire
(Tip)
TM2LP - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
SIVAPAC connector
1
1a
23
1b
3
2a
4
2b
5
3a
6
3b
7
4a
8
4b
9
5a
10
5b
11
6a
12
6b
13
7a
14
7b
15
8a
16
8b
17
brn/red
red/gry
18
19
gry/red
blk/blu
20
24
blu/blk
blk/ora
25
26
ora/blk
blk/grn
27
29
grn/blk
blk/brn
30
31
brn/blk
blk/gry
32
34
gry/blk
yel/blu
35
37
blu/yel
TM2LP
38
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
MDFU-E
Notes
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
5a
5b
6a
6b
7a
7b
8a
8b
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-112
TM2LP - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pin
TM2LP
4
1a
5
1b
4
2a
5
2b
4
3a
5
3b
4
4a
5
4b
4
5a
5
5b
4
6a
5
6b
4
7a
5
7b
4
8a
5
8b
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Notes
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
3-249
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-112
TM2LP - Connector Panel Assignment with RJ45 Jacks
RJ45 jack
No.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
3-250
Pin
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
TM2LP
Notes
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-113
TM2LP - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack (For U.S. Only)
CHAMP jack
TM2LP
1
1a
1 Ring
26
1b
1 TIP
2
2a
2 Ring
27
2b
2 TIP
3
3a
3 Ring
28
3b
3 TIP
4
4a
4 Ring
29
4b
4 TIP
5
5a
5 Ring
30
5b
5 TIP
6
6a
6 Ring
31
6b
6 TIP
7
7a
7 Ring
32
7b
7 TIP
8
8a
8 Ring
33
8b
8 TIP
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
Notes
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-251
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-114
Color
group
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-252
16
TM2LP - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors (Cable for
Ports 1 - 16)
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
SU
connector
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
brn/red
red/gry
31
02
gry/red
blk/blu
22
13
blu/blk
blk/ora
33
04
ora/blk
blk/grn
24
15
grn/blk
blk/brn
35
06
brn/blk
blk/gry
26
17
gry/blk
yel/blu
37
08
blu/yel
TM2LP
28
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
Notes
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.28
TMAMF (for selected countries only)
Introduction
The TMAMF (Trunk Module Analog for MultiFrequency Code Signaling) board contains eight
trunks for analog direct inward dialing. The system supports MFC-R2 signaling (default setting),
MFC-R2 with caller ID, tone dialing, and dial pulsing. It is not possible to use DTMF and MFCR2 (with or without caller ID) simultaneously.
There are two versions of this board:
●
S30810-Q2587-A200 for use in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
●
S30810-Q2587-A400 for use in HiPath 3550.
Switches and LEDs
LEDs
H0 (green)
:
:
:
:
H7
0
:
:
7
H100 (yellow)
On
Lockout switch S501
(factory default)
Subminiature D connector for
DSP diagnosis
Figure 3-105
TMAMF (S30810-Q2587-Axxx)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-253
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Notes on DSP diagnosis
You can use the trace function built into the TMAMF module to diagnose malfunctions or obtain
more precise error analysis. The subminiature D connector provides information about MFCR2 signaling. To activate the trace function, you must connect a PC with a terminal emulation
program (such as Microsoft HyperTerminal).
Terminal configuration:
●
Bits per second = 19,200
●
Data bits = 8
●
Stop bit = 1
●
Parity = none
●
Flow control = none
Pin assignments of the diagnostic cable
TMAMF: Subminiature D connector
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
6 7 8 9
9 8 7 6
1
2
3
5
Figure 3-106
3-254
PC: RS-232 interface
1
3
2
5
Pin Assignments of the TMAMF Diagnostic Cable
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
●
H100 LED (see Figure 3-105): signal processor status
Table 3-115
TMAMF - LED Statuses (H100)
LED Status
(on/off)
Meaning
Action
During Startup and Initialization
Off
–
Flashing
(250/250 ms)
The DSP (digital signal processor)
is waiting for DID digits
On
The DSP is being reset
During Operation
●
Off
The DSP is idle
Flashing
(250/250 ms)
Error: the DSP has not yet received Replace board.
the DID digits.
On
The MFC-R2 filter is on
LEDs H0 to H7 (see Figure 3-105): trunk status
Table 3-116
TMAMF - LED Statuses (H0 to H7)
LED Status
(on/off)
Meaning
Action
During Operation
Off
The trunk is idle; no seizure
On
The trunk was seized
Flashing
(500/500 ms)
Trunk out of service (e.g. S1/x
“closed”)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Check whether the trunk was deactivated using HiPath 3000
Manager E or the lockout switch.
3-255
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
Table 3-117
Color
group
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-256
16
TMAMF - Cable Assignment
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
SU
connector
BP: Xx8
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
brn/red
red/gry
31
02
gry/red
blk/blu
22
13
blu/blk
blk/ora
33
04
ora/blk
blk/grn
24
15
grn/blk
blk/brn
35
06
brn/blk
blk/gry
26
17
gry/blk
yel/blu
37
08
blu/yel
TMAMF
28
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
MDFU/
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
Notes
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.29
TMC16 (U.S. Only)
Introduction
The trunk module TMC16 (Trunk Module Central Office) connects up to 16 analog ground-start
or loop-start trunks with the HiPath 3800.
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (red)
●
LED (green)
Figure 3-107
>
TMC16 (for U.S. only) (S30810-Q2485-X) - Front Panel
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-257
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-118
TMC16 (for U.S. only) - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-119
●
For connecting to the connector panels with CHAMP jack: Table 3-120
●
For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors: Table 3-121
3-258
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-119
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
TMC16 (for U.S. only) - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SIVAPAC connector
TMC16
1
1a
23
1b
3
2a
4
2b
5
3a
6
3b
7
4a
8
4b
9
5a
10
5b
11
6a
12
6b
13
7a
14
7b
15
8a
16
8b
17
9a
18
9b
19
10a
20
10b
24
11a
25
11b
26
12a
27
12b
29
13a
30
13b
31
14a
32
14b
34
15a
35
15b
37
16a
38
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Notes
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
5a
5b
6a
6b
7a
7b
8a
8b
9a
9b
10a
10b
11a
11b
12a
12b
13a
13b
14a
14b
15a
15b
16a
16b
3-259
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-120
TMC16 (For U.S. Only) - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack
CHAMP jack
3-260
TMC16
1
1a
1 Ring
26
1b
1 TIP
2
2a
2 Ring
27
2b
2 TIP
3
3a
3 Ring
28
3b
3 TIP
4
4a
4 Ring
29
4b
4 TIP
5
5a
5 Ring
30
5b
5 TIP
6
6a
6 Ring
31
6b
6 TIP
7
7a
7 Ring
32
7b
7 TIP
8
8a
8 Ring
33
8b
8 TIP
9
9a
9 Ring
34
9b
9 TIP
10
10a
10 Ring
35
10b
10 TIP
11
11a
11 Ring
36
11b
11 TIP
12
12a
12 Ring
37
12b
12 TIP
13
13a
13 Ring
38
13b
13 TIP
14
14a
14 Ring
39
14b
14 TIP
15
15a
15 Ring
40
15b
15 TIP
16
16a
16 Ring
41
16b
16 TIP
Notes
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-121
Color
group
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
16
TMC16 (for U.S. only) - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors (Cable for Ports 1 - 16)
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
TMC16
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
9a
31
9b
02
10a
22
10b
13
11a
33
11b
04
12a
24
12b
15
13a
35
13b
06
14a
26
14b
17
15a
37
15b
08
16a
28
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port 9
Port 10
Port 11
Port 12
Port 13
Port 14
Port 15
Port 16
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
9a
4
9b
5
10a
4
10b
5
11a
4
11b
5
12a
4
12b
5
13a
4
13b
5
14a
4
14b
5
15a
4
15b
5
16a
4
16b
5
Notes
3-261
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.30
TMCAS (for selected countries only)
Introduction
For V1.0 and later, TMCAS (Trunk Module Channel Associated Signaling) boards can be used
in HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700, and HiPath 3550 to support the country-specific CAS protocol.
The board converts the Euro-ISDN protocol on an S2M link into the Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) protocol. The board functions only in connection with a TMS2 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700) or TS2 (HiPath 3550). There is no direct connection between the TMCAS board and
the system’s central control unit. The TMS2/TS2 handles all signaling and data traffic.
Switches and display
Display
25-pin SUB-D jack:
V24 interface for connecting the
service PC with the ECGM tool
Lockout switch
(position = free, factory default)
H1
X10
Battery
S1
Switch S4
1
Off
= default
Jumper
S2
3 2 1
S3
Figure 3-108
TMCAS (S30810-Q2938-X)
Administration of the CAS protocol converter
Use the ECGM tool for administration. For information on installing the software on the service
PC and on the required settings, see Page 3-270.
3-262
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
You can use the C39195-Z7267-C13 cable for the connection between jack X10 and the service PC.
Switches S4-1 to S4-4 for setting the impedance
To ensure that the TMCAS works properly, the same impedance must be selected both on the
S2M side of the TMCAS and on the TMS2 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700) or TS2 (HiPath 3550)
board.
Impedance on the CAS Side
Switch settings
S4-1
S4-2
120 ohms (default)
Off
Off
100 ohms
On
Off
75 ohms
Off
On
No function
On
On
Impedance on the S2M Side
Switches
S4-3
S4-4
120 ohms (default)
Off
Off
100 ohms
On
Off
75 ohms
Off
On
No function
On
On
Switches S4-5 to S4-8
Switches
Function
S4-5
Reserved
S4-6
Flash memory: only for laboratory purposes (the flash memory
is erased when switch is set to “On”).
S4-7
Reserved
S4-8
Battery: Select the “On” switch position to make the connection
to the processor’s real-time clock only after the protocol converter has been configured.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-263
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Jumpers S2 and S3 for GND connection
You can set the GND connection (signal ground) of the receiving (Rx) and transmitting (Tx)
lines on the CAS side here.
GND connection
Jumper setting
no signal ground (default)
S2 = 1 - 2, S3 = 1 - 2
signal ground on receive lines (Rx) on the CAS side
S2 = 2 - 3
signal ground on the transmit lines (Tx) on the CAS
side
S3 = 2 - 3
Recommendations for the GND connection:
●
symmetric line (120 ohms)
Ground the cable’s shield on the side of the connected device (NT, MUX, modem).
●
coaxial line (75 ohms)
Do not ground the shield on both ends of the cable.
–
Tx: Ground the cable’s shield on the TMCAS side.
–
Rx: Ground the cable’s shield on the side of the connected device (NT, MUX, modem).
3-264
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Seven-segment display H1
The board statuses listed in the following table are displayed on H1.
Table 3-122
TMCAS - Seven-Segment Display H1
Display
Meaning
Waiting for the TMCAS software download
TMCAS software download start
TMCAS software download
Writing the TMCAS software/extender software into the flash memory
Loading the TMCAS software/extender software from the flash memory
Waiting for ECGM command (10 s)
Calculating the checksum
No TMCAS software in the flash memory, waiting for reload
Flash memory erased (changing display)
TMCAS board active
TMCAS board active, boot process completed
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-265
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
TMCAS in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
A maximum of four TMCAS boards can be used in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. For power
supply reasons, a maximum of two TMCAS are possible for one cabinet. Because the board
does not need a PCM highway, there are no restrictions concerning the 64 time-division multiplex channels per PCM segment. However, TMCAS must always be plugged in to the left of the
associated TMS2. An example of a TMCAS in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 cabinet is
shown in Figure 3-109.
X90
UPSM
X80
X70
X60
X50
X40
T
M
S
2
T
M
C
A
S
X30
X20
X88
X78
X68
X58
X48
X38
X28
X89
X79
X69
X59
X49
X39
X29
TMS2-TMCAS connection cable:
C39195-A9700-B510, length = 0.2 m
X10
CBCPR
TMCAS cable:
C39195-A9700-B512/B514, length = 10 m
Figure 3-109
TMCAS in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Backplane View of the “8-Slot” Basic
Cabinet
Table 3-123
Assignment of the TMS2-TMCAS Connection Cable C39195-A9700-B510
SU connector Xx9, pin
Function
6
a-wire (T), receive
26
b-wire (R), receive
2
a-wire (T), transmit
22
b-wire (R), transmit
33
+5 V for board detection
35
+5 V (reserved)
4
GND
Page 3-268 has information on the assignments for the two C39195-A9700-B512, -B514 TMCAS cables.
3-266
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
TMCAS in HiPath 3550
TMCAS can be used only in slot 10 of the wall housing.
X8, X9
TMCAS
X2
Connection Cable
TS2-TMCAS:
C39195-A9700B511, length =
0.57 m
TS2
PSU/
UPS
TMCAS
TS2
X8
X2
X9
TMCAS cable:
C39195-A9700B512/-B514, length
= 10 m
Figure 3-110
TMCAS in HiPath 3550
Table 3-124
Assignment of the TS2-TMCAS Connection Cable C39195-A9700-B511
TS2
Wieland terminal X2, pin
1, 2, 3
Function
TMCAS
SU connector X9, pin
–
–
4
+5 V for board detection
33
5
a-wire (T), receive
6
6
b-wire (R), receive
26
7
a-wire (T), transmit
2
8
b-wire (R), transmit
22
Page 3-268 has information on the assignments for the two C39195-A9700-B512, -B514 TMCAS cables.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-267
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Assignments for the two TMCAS cables for HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700, and HiPath 3550
You can use one of the following two cables to connect the network terminator NT, multiplexer
MUX, or modem to the TMCAS board:
●
symmetric line (120 ohms)
Table 3-125
Assignment of the TMCAS Cable C39195-A9700-B512
SU connector Xx8, pin
●
Function
Color code
2
a-wire (T), receive
grn
22
b-wire (R), receive
blk
6
a-wire (T), transmit
red
26
b-wire (R), transmit
blk
coaxial line (75 ohms)
Table 3-126
Assignment of the TMCAS Cable C39195-A9700-B514
SU connector Xx8, pin
3-268
Function
Wire
2
a-wire (T), receive
BNC shield, cable 1
22
b-wire (R), receive
BNC signal, cable 1
6
a-wire (T), transmit
BNC shield, cable 2
26
b-wire (R), transmit
BNC signal, cable 2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Procedure for retrofitting a TMCAS board
Step
Activity
1.
Disconnect system from power supply and open system.
2.
Insert TMS2 (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700) or TS2 (HiPath 3550).
3.
●
●
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700: Insert TMCAS next to the TMS2, on the left.
HiPath 3550 (wall housing): Insert TMCAS in slot 10.
4.
Plug in TMS2/TS2-TMCAS connection cable.
5.
Connect the NT to the system using the TMCAS cable.
6.
Close the system and connect it to the power supply.
7.
After the system has booted, both boards are entered in the system’s database
(TMS2 or TS2 and TMCAS).
8.
If necessary, configure with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Possible problems:
TMCAS not entered in HiPath 3000 Manager E
The TMCAS is displayed automatically after the generation/regeneration of the database
in a system with a correctly inserted and connected TMCAS-TMS2/TS2 combination.
●
Missing electrical connection between TMS2/TS2 and TMCAS
No TMCAS entry in the database. If a correctly configured database (with TMCAS inserted offline) is then loaded into the system using generation/regeneration, the TMCAS configured in HiPath 3000 Manager E appears only in the SW configuration.
●
Incompatible board configuration
There is a correctly inserted TMCAS-TMS2/TS2 combination in the system. If there is a
different board entered in HiPath 3000 Manager E immediately to the left of the TMS2 (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700) or in the HiPath 3550’s large slot, the generation is rejected.
●
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-269
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Installing the ECGM tool and configuring the CAS protocol converter
This section contains information on installing the ECGM tool on the service PC and for configuring the CAS protocol converter on the TMCAS board.
The ECGM tool supports the following actions:
●
Extender, database and software download
●
CAS protocol configuration
●
Database programming
●
Trace options
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Create directory c:\ecginst on the service PC.
2.
Set up the connection to the download server (for information on this, contact your
local ITSC) and copy the following files into the directory c:\ecginst:
●
e1v0xx.exe (for example, e140ah.exe)
●
Ee1v0yy.exe (for example, Ee140am.exe)
●
Ecgm_vzz.exe (for example Ecgm_4aa.exe)
Explanation of the variables:
●
v = software version
●
xx = country version of a file
●
yy = file version for channels
●
zz = file version for maintenance
3.
Run .exe files. This will extract the following files, for example:
Ecgm.cab (WinZip file)
●
Setup.lst (LST file)
●
Setup.exe (EXE file)
●
4brazil.iam (IAM file)
●
Ecg_edb4.ein (EIN file)
●
4brazil.eam (EAM file)
●
E140ah.sin (SIN file)
●
E140ah.pnm (PNM file)
●
X140pai.pnm (PNM file)
●
X130aq.pnm (PNM file)
●
4.
Execute Setup.exe file. This will create the directory ecgm and extract various
files.
5.
Copy vbrazil.iyy (for example, 4brazil.iam) to the directory ecgm.
6.
Run the file ecgm.exe.
3-270
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Step
Activity
7.
Make the following settings in the ECGM tool:
●
File/Options menu: Select the service PC’s COM interface (for example:
COM1)
●
File/Install Software menu: Select the file E1v0xx.pnm (for example,
E140ah.pnm from the directory ecginst.
●
File/Install Edb menu: Select the file Ecg_edbv.ein (for example
Ecg_edb4.ein) from the directory ecginst.
●
File/Update Site menu:
– Under ECG SOFTWARE, select loadware file E1v0xx.pnm.
– Under “ECG EDB”, select file vbrazil.iyy.
– Under “FILE NAME”, select file extension .db for logging TMCAS events.
– Enter the customer name under "ECG NAME".
8.
Close the ECGM tool and then restart (ecgm.exe).
9.
Enter the COM interface under “COMM” and the customer name in the Settings/ECG Name menu. All other windows are updated automatically.
10.
Channel configuration
Define the channel parameters in the View/Database menu (reserve unused
channels with "Out of Service".):
●
Protocol
●
Signaling method (incoming and outgoing)
●
Clock master (always central office)
●
Operator number (corresponds to the number of the attendant console of the
HiPath 3000)
11.
Software download
If the seven-segment display H1 on the TMCAS displays “H”, it is necessary to
download the extender software (Download/Extender menu). Otherwise, continue with the next step.
12.
Start the software/database download using the Download/Software and
Database menu. This procedure takes approximately 8 minutes.
The download is complete when the configured channels display the “Idle” status.
The seven-segment display H1 on the TMCAS shows “A” (= active).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-271
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.31
TMDID (for U.S. only)
Introduction
The TMDID board (Trunk Module Direct Inward Dialing) provides direct inward dialing from the
central office (CO) to HiPath 3800.
The board has eight trunk circuits that connect to analog trunks.
The circuits can be set up for immediate start or wink start.
>
The peripheral board slots on the HiPath 3800 are fitted with SIPAC 9 SU connectors. Since the TMDID board has SIVAPAC connector strips, you will have to install
a SIVAPAC-SIPAC board adapter in order to be able to use it in HiPath 3800.
For information on upgrade procedures, please see Section 4.2.5.4.
Switches
●
Switches for manual trunk selection. In this case, all trunks are filtered one after the other
until the LED of the desired trunk flashes.
●
Lockout switch which can be used to manually block the selected trunk circuit.
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-127
TMDID (For U.S. Only) - LED Statuses
LED status
0-7
Meaning
Off
The trunk circuit is free.
On
The trunk circuit is assigned.
Slow flashing
The trunk circuit was deactivated by the software.
Fast flashing
The switch was pressed and the trunk circuit was selected for manual activation or deactivation.
3-272
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Front panel
LEDs (green) for displaying the trunk status:
●
Trunk circuit 0
●
Trunk circuit 1
●
Trunk circuit 2
●
Trunk circuit 3
●
Trunk circuit 4
●
Trunk circuit 5
●
Trunk circuit 6
●
Trunk circuit 7
Switch
Lockout switch
Figure 3-111
TMDID (for U.S. only) (S30810-Q2452-X) - Front Panel
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-128
●
For connecting to the connector panels with CHAMP jack: Table 3-129
●
For connecting to the connector panels using SIPAC 1 SU connectors: Table 3-130
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-273
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-128
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3-274
a-Wire
(Tip)
TMDID (for U.S. only) - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
SIVAPAC connector
1
1a
23
1b
3
2a
4
2b
5
3a
6
3b
7
4a
8
4b
9
5a
10
5b
11
6a
12
6b
13
7a
14
7b
15
8a
16
8b
17
brn/red
red/gry
18
19
gry/red
blk/blu
20
24
blu/blk
blk/ora
25
26
ora/blk
blk/grn
27
29
grn/blk
blk/brn
30
31
brn/blk
blk/gry
32
34
gry/blk
yel/blu
35
37
blu/yel
TMDID
38
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
MDFU-E
Notes
1a
1b
2a
2b
3a
3b
4a
4b
5a
5b
6a
6b
7a
7b
8a
8b
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-129
TMDID (For U.S. Only) - Connector Panel Assignment with CHAMP Jack
CHAMP jack
TMDID
1
1a
1 Ring
26
1b
1 TIP
2
2a
2 Ring
27
2b
2 TIP
3
3a
3 Ring
28
3b
3 TIP
4
4a
4 Ring
29
4b
4 TIP
5
5a
5 Ring
30
5b
5 TIP
6
6a
6 Ring
31
6b
6 TIP
7
7a
Ring
32
7b
7 TIP
8
8a
8 Ring
33
8b
8 TIP
9
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
Notes
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-275
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-130
Color
group
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-276
16
TMDID (for U.S. only) - Connector Panel Assignment with SIPAC 1 SU Connectors (Cable for Ports 1 - 16)
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
SU
connector
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
brn/red
red/gry
31
02
gry/red
blk/blu
22
13
blu/blk
blk/ora
33
04
ora/blk
blk/grn
24
15
grn/blk
blk/brn
35
06
brn/blk
blk/gry
26
17
gry/blk
yel/blu
37
08
blu/yel
TMDID
28
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
Notes
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.32
TMDID8 (for U.S. only)
Introduction
TMDID8 (Trunk Module Direct Inward Dialing) provides direct inward dialing from the central
office (CO) to HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
The board has eight trunk circuits that connect to analog trunks.
The circuits can be set up for immediate start or wink start.
Switches and LEDs
H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8
T4
A
T3
S2
T8
G
Figure 3-112
Trunk 3 A
Trunk 4
G
A
T2
T7
T1
S1
Trunk 1
Trunk 2
G
T6
S4
Trunk 7
Trunk 8
A
G
T5
S3
Trunk 5
Trunk 6
TMDID8 (for U.S. only) (S30810-Q2507-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-277
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Switches
Adjust switches S1 to S4 to compensate for trunk loop resistance.
Table 3-131
TMDID8 (for U.S. only) - Trunk Circuits and Recommended Switch Settings
Trunk circuit
Loop < 1800 ohms:
Open switch
Loop > 1800 ohms:
Close switch
1
S1A, S1B, S1C, S1D
S1A, S1B, S1C, S1D
2
S1E, S1F, S1G, S1H
S1E, S1F, S1G, S1H
3
S2A, S2B, S2C, S2D
S2A, S2B, S2C, S2D
4
S2E, S2F, S2G, S2H
S2E, S2F, S2G, S2H
5
S3A, S3B, S3C, S3D
S3A, S3B, S3C, S3D
6
S3E, S3F, S3G, S3H
S3E, S3F, S3G, S3H
7
S4A, S4B, S4C, S4D
S4A, S4B, S4C, S4D
8
S4E, S4F, S4G, S4H
S4E, S4F, S4G, S4H
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-132
TMDID8 (for U.S. only) - LED Statuses
Status of LEDs 1–8
3-278
Meaning
Off
Channel is idle, ready to use
On
Channel is seized
Flashing
Channel is deactivated
Winking
System software test in progress
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDF)
Table 3-133
#
a-Wire
(Tip)
TMDID8 (for U.S. only) - Assignment (SU Xx8)
b-Wire
(Ring)
SU connector
(backplane)
TMDID8
CHAMP jack, MDF
Notes
Xx8
1
wht/blu
blu/wht
2
wht/ora
ora/wht
3
wht/grn
grn/wht
4
wht/brn
brn/wht
5
wht/gry
gry/wht
6
red/blu
blu/red
7
red/ora
ora/red
8
red/grn
grn/red
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
1
1 a/b-wire
26
1 b/a-wire
2
2 a/b-wire
27
2 b/a-wire
3
3 a/b-wire
28
3 b/a-wire
4
4 a/b-wire
29
4 b/a-wire
5
5 a/b-wire
30
5 b/a-wire
6
6 a/b-wire
31
6 b/a-wire
7
7 a/b-wire
32
7 b/a-wire
8
8 a/b-wire
33
8 b/a-wire
No other wires used.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-279
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.33
TMEW2
Introduction
The TMEW2 board (Trunk Module for E&M World) provides four analog tie trunk circuits for
E&M signaling for HiPath 3800. Each tie trunk circuit has eight connectors: incoming speech
path (2), outgoing speech path (2), incoming signaling (2) and outgoing signaling (2). This allows tie trunk traffic to other private communication systems.
>
The peripheral board slots on the HiPath 3800 are fitted with SIPAC 9 SU connectors. Since the TMEW2 board has SIVAPAC connector strips, you will have to install
a SIVAPAC-SIPAC board adapter in order to be able to use it in HiPath 3800.
For information on upgrade procedures, please see Section 4.2.5.4.
Speech paths
The speech paths can be set to four-wire or two-wire mode. Four-wire connections should be
used for high transmission quality on analog networks (this description deals only with four-wire
mode).
The advantage of separate speech paths for the incoming and outgoing directions is that the
stability (echo) of a connection is not adversely affected. In addition, repeaters in the transmission equipment compensate for attenuation loss on the line.
E&M signaling paths
The E&M signaling paths carry the signals that control connection setup and cleardown. Various interfaces can be selected, depending on the requirements of the remote system or transmission equipment. These interface types have different numbers of wires and different potentials.
Starting up a tie trunk
Before you can start up a tie trunk, you must determine the type of interface supported by the
two systems. Type 2 is preferable because it virtually excludes problems with longitudinal voltages.
3-280
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Front panel
Two LEDs indicating the board status:
●
LED (red)
●
LED (green)
Figure 3-113
>
TMEW2 - Front Panel (S30810-Q2292-X100)
To ensure sufficient shielding, provide the board with a shielding panel. For information on mounting the shielding panel, see Section 4.2.5.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-281
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-134
TMEW2 - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
Cable and connector assignment
●
For connecting to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane: Table 3-135
3-282
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Table 3-135
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
TMEW2 - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
SIVAPAC connector
TMEW2
1
1ka
23
1kb
3
1ka
4
1kb
5
1ka
6
1kb
7
1ka
8
1kb
9
1ga
10
1gb
11
1ga
12
1gb
13
1ga
14
1gb
15
1ga
16
1gb
17
1E
18
1M
19
1E
20
1M
24
1E
25
1M
26
1E
27
1M
29
grn/blk
blk/brn
30
31
brn/blk
blk/gry
32
34
gry/blk
yel/blu
35
37
blu/yel
38
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
MDFU-E
Notes
1a
Ring
1b
Tip
2a
Ring
2b
Tip
3a
Ring
3b
Tip
4a
Ring
4b
Tip
5a
Ring
5b
Tip
6a
Ring
6b
Tip
7a
Ring
7b
Tip
8a
Ring
8b
Tip
9a
Ear
9b
Mouth
10a
Ear
10b
Mouth
11a
Ear
11b
Mouth
12a
Ear
12b
Mouth
13a
13b
14a
14b
15a
15b
16a
16b
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit
Transmit
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
System ground, system battery
System ground, system battery
System ground, system battery
System ground, system battery
3-283
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.34
TMGL4 (for U.S. only)
Introduction
A TMGL4 trunk module connects up to four analog ground-start or loop-start trunks to HiPath
3550 and HiPath 3350.
Ground start is the default.
7
Warning
You must disconnect the power and remove the slip-on connectors from the TMGL4
board before removing it from the system.
Do not connect the slip-on connectors to the TMGL4 board until the board is seated
in its slot and the system power is on.
Failure to follow these instructions may severely damage the system.
Interfaces
50
1
X2
To trunks
TMGL4 board
To
CUP/
CUC
X1
8
To ANI4
Figure 3-114
3-284
X3
2
TMGL4 (For U.S. Only) - Interfaces (S30810-Q2918-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Contact assignment
Table 3-136
TMGL4 (For U.S. Only) - Contact Assignment
Contact
Connector X2
Port
1
b-wire (ring), trunk 1
1
2
a-wire (tip), trunk 1
3
b-wire (ring), trunk 2
4
a-wire (tip), trunk 2
5
b-wire (ring), trunk 3
6
a-wire (tip), trunk 3
7
b-wire (ring), trunk 4
8
a-wire (tip), trunk 4
2
3
4
Note: Pinouts shown are at the board itself. The main distribution frame cable (MDF cable) supplied reverses the signal order before the MDF.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-285
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.35
TMGL4R (for U.S. only)
Introduction
A TMGL4R trunk module connects up to four analog ground-start or loop-start trunks to HiPath
3500 and HiPath 3300.
Ground start is the default.
Interfaces
To ANI4R
To trunk 1
:
:
:
To trunk 4
To GEE
Figure 3-115
>
3-286
1
X5 (MW10 jack)
50
11
X1
X4 (4 MW4 jacks)
2
44
To
CUPR
CUCR
X3
TMGL4R (for U.S. only) (S30810-K2918-Z)
If ANI4R is installed as option 1 or 2, TMGL4R board must be inserted in slot 4, 6 or
8 (slots 6 and 8 are not available with HiPath 3300).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Contact assignment
Table 3-137
TMGL4R (for U.S. only) - Contact Assignment
Port
X3 Pin
(To GEE)
X4 Pin
(To trunks 1-4)
X5 Pin
(To ANI4R)
Signal
1
3
12
3
b-wire (ring), trunk 1
2
13
2
a-wire (tip), trunk 1
5
22
5
b-wire (ring), trunk 2
4
23
4
a-wire (tip), trunk 2
7
32
7
b-wire (ring), trunk 3
6
33
6
a-wire (tip), trunk 3
9
42
9
b-wire (ring), trunk 4
8
43
8
a-wire (tip), trunk 4
10
–
10
Call charging module
assignment (GMZ)
2
3
4
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-287
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.36
TMGL8 (for U.S. only)
Introduction
The TMGL8 trunk module connects up to eight analog ground-start or loop-start trunks to HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
Ground start is the default.
Switches and LEDs
Switches
1
On
8
LEDs
H1
.
.
.
.
H8
Figure 3-116
TMGL8 (for U.S. only) (S30810-K2703-Z)
Switches
The TMGL8 board has an eight-path microswitch under a flip-up cover. The following settings
apply for each channel:
●
ON (right): Channel is enabled.
●
OFF (left): Channel is disabled; no new seizures are permitted.
3-288
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-138
TMGL8 (for U.S. only) - LED Statuses
Status of LEDs 1–8
Meaning
Off
Channel is idle, ready to use
On
Channel is seized
Flashing
Channel is deactivated
Winking
System software test in progress
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDF)
Table 3-139
#
a-Wire
(Tip)
TMGL8 (for U.S. only) - Assignment (SU Xx8)
b-Wire
(Ring)
SU connector
(backplane)
TMGL8
CHAMP jack, MDF
Notes
Xx8
1
wht/blu
blu/wht
2
wht/ora
ora/wht
3
wht/grn
grn/wht
4
wht/brn
brn/wht
5
wht/gry
gry/wht
6
red/blu
blu/red
7
red/ora
ora/red
8
red/grn
grn/red
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
1
1 a/b-wire
26
1 b/a-wire
2
2 a/b-wire
27
2 b/a-wire
3
3 a/b-wire
28
3 b/a-wire
4
4 a/b-wire
29
4 b/a-wire
5
5 a/b-wire
30
5 b/a-wire
6
6 a/b-wire
31
6 b/a-wire
7
7 a/b-wire
32
7 b/a-wire
8
8 a/b-wire
33
8 b/a-wire
No other wires used.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-289
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.37
TML8W (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
A TML8W (Trunk Module Loop Start World) board connects up to eight analog trunks for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 using the loop-start protocol.
The jumpers on the TML8W must be adjusted for call detail recording with a GEE8 subboard.
Jumpers on TML8W
On
1
:
:
8
Jumpers
(Circuit)
Lockout switch S100
(factory default)
Jumpers
(only available on
specific
board
variants)
LEDs
W650
W600
:
:
H101 (red)
W300
H100 (green)
W700 (1)
W703 (2)
W706 (3)
W709 (4)
W800 (5)
W803 (6)
W806 (7)
W809 (8)
Jumpers
W700
W706
W800
W806
Figure 3-117
>
3-290
W703
W709
W803
W809
W650 (8)
W600 (7)
W550 (6)
W500 (5)
W450 (4)
W400 (3)
W350 (2)
W300 (1)
Inserted
Call Detail Recording (GEE8)
Yes
16 kHz/50 Hz
No
12 kHz
Yes
Without
silent reversal
No
with
silent reversal
Factory default = All jumpers inserted
TML8W (Not for U.S.) (S30817-Q626-Axxx, -Bxxx)
For Austria only: If a ÜFS trunk is connected to the TML8W, remove the jumpers
(W300 to W650) to activate silent reversal.
If silent reversal is inactive, users in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 would hear a
busy signal following backward release instead of being released.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-140
TML8W (Not for U.S.) - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
Action
Flashing At least one circuit is activated.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-291
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
Table 3-141
Color
group
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
3-292
16
TML8W (Not for U.S.) - Cable Assignment
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
SU
connector
BP: Xx8
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
2b
27
3a
47
3b
16
4a
46
4b
05
5a
45
5b
14
6a
44
6b
23
7a
43
7b
32
8a
42
8b
11
brn/red
red/gry
31
02
gry/red
blk/blu
22
13
blu/blk
blk/ora
33
04
ora/blk
blk/grn
24
15
grn/blk
blk/brn
35
06
brn/blk
blk/gry
26
17
gry/blk
yel/blu
37
08
blu/yel
TML8W
28
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
MDFU/
MDFU-E
Patch
panel,
MW8 pin
1a
4
1b
5
2a
4
2b
5
3a
4
3b
5
4a
4
4b
5
5a
4
5b
5
6a
4
6b
5
7a
4
7b
5
8a
4
8b
5
Notes
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.38
TMQ4 (for U.S. only)
Introduction
An TMQ4 (ISDN BRI) trunk module connects up to four digital trunks to the HiPath 3550 and
HiPath 3350.
The TMQ4 board provides basic rate interface (BRI) ISDN via a U2B1Q interface. The interface
supports the following central office protocols:
●
AT&T 5Ess NI-1
●
AT&T 5ESS Custom
●
Nortel DMS100 NI-1
●
Siemens EWSD NI-1
Interfaces
50
1
X2
To trunks
TMQ4 board
8
To
CUP/
CUC
X1
2
Figure 3-118
TMQ4 (for U.S. only) (S30810-Q2917-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-293
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Contact assignment
Table 3-142
TMQ4 (for U.S. only) - Contact Assignment
Contact
Connector X2
Port
Contact
Connector X2
1
b-wire (ring), trunk 1
1
5
b-wire (ring), trunk 3
2
a-wire (tip), trunk 1
6
a-wire (tip), trunk 3
3
b-wire (ring), trunk 2
7
b-wire (ring), trunk 4
4
a-wire (tip), trunk 2
8
a-wire (tip), trunk 4
2
Port
3
4
Note: Pinouts shown are at the board itself. The main distribution frame cable (MDF cable) supplied reverses the signal order before the MDF.
3-294
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.39
TMST1 (for U.S. only)
Introduction
The TMST1 trunk board connects a digital trunk with HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. This is how
an ISDN primary multiplex connection is implemented (PRI, Primary Rate Interface) by means
of a T1 interface.
It can also be used for the following layer-1 operating modes:
●
Super Frame SF
●
Extended Super Frame ESF
A maximum of eight TMST1 modules can be used in a HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700.
Rather than connecting to a main distribution frame (MDF), the TMST1 board connects to a
channel service unit (CSU). The CSU supplies the required secondary protection.
Switches and LEDs
Lockout
switch
LEDs
Figure 3-119
Up = in service
Down = out of service
H1
H2
TMST1 (for U.S. only) (S30810-Q2920-X)
The lockout switch alerts the system software that the module will be removed so that no new
calls are routed to the board.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-295
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
Table 3-143
TMST1 (for U.S. only) - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Activity
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not plugged in Check plug contact on
correctly.
board.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test is
in progress.
Board is defective if status remains unReplace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Loadware loading not successfully completed. Board is faulty.
Replace board.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to errors detected by test loops) or board was
deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Check whether the board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If
not, replace board.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully. Board is
OK (idle state).
Off
On
3-296
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
On
Board error
Replace board.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
TMST1 adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)), contact assignment
MW8 (RJ48C)
jack
(to the CSU or
networked
system)
SIPAC 1
SU jack
(Xx9 backplane)
Figure 3-120
TMST1 Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12 (for U.S.
only)
Table 3-144
TMST1 Adapter (For U.S. Only) - Cable Assignment
MW8 (RJ48C)
SIPAC 1 SU
jack
SU connector backplane
1
C2
22
b-wire (ring), receive
2
E2
2
a-wire (tip), receive
3
–
–
–
4
C6
26
b-wire (ring), transmit
5
E6
6
a-wire (tip), transmit
6
–
–
–
7
–
–
–
8
–
–
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
TMST1
Xx9
3-297
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.40
TMS2 (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
The TMS2 (Trunk Module S2M) board provides 30 B channels (voice channels) for HiPath 3750
and HiPath 3700, which are used
●
for the S2M trunk connection (via NT).
●
for the S2M networking via S2M lines.
To support country-specific CAS protocols, you can use the Euro-ISDN CAS gateway ECG.
The ECG cabinet is a protocol converter that converts the Euro-ISDN protocol into the Channel
Associated Signaling CAS protocol. Refer to the installation instructions, which are provided
with each ECG cabinet, for information on the connection and power supply.
For HiPath 3000 V1.0 and later, you can also use the new TMCAS board to support countryspecific CAS protocols.
Switches and LEDs
LEDs
Lockout switch S1
(position = free,
factory default)
Jumper
(setting = symm.
line (120 ohms,
factory default)
Figure 3-121
3-298
H1 (red)
H2 (green)
H3 (red)
S1
X302
1
2
3
X300
1
2
3
X301
TMS2 (Not for U.S) (S30810-Q2915-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Jumper settings
The X300 or X302 jumpers are used to set the TMS2 interface for the connection of this interface to NT1. The following can be set:
●
symmetric line (120 ohms)
Use only pre-formed cables S30267-Z57-Axxx to guarantee problem-free operation
(length = 6 m (not available in Germany), 10 m or 20 m).
●
coaxial line (75 ohms)
S30267-Z69-Axxx.
TMS2
Interface
Jumper
X300
Jumper
X301
Jumper
X302
120 ohms =
factory default
2-3
2-3
2-3
75 ohms
1-2
1-2
1-2
SU connector assignment (backplane) and cable color codes
Table 3-145
TMS2 (Not for U.S.) - SU Connector Assignment and Cable Color Codes
SU connector
Xx8/Xx91
Pin
1
Function
Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx, color code
Up to and including
status 6
Status 7 or later
2
a-wire (T), receive
grn
wht/blu
22
b-wire (R), receive
blk
blu/wht
6
a-wire (T), transmit
red
wht/ora
26
b-wire (R), transmit
blk
ora/wht
SU connector Xx8B is used in board status 4 and lower, whereas SU connector Xx9 is used in board status 5 and higher.
>
Note that the SU connector Xx9 was used in the old TMS2M board.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-299
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
LED statuses and their meanings
●
H1 (red) and H2 (green) LEDs
Table 3-146
TMS2 (Not for U.S.) - LED Statuses
Red LED
Green
LED
Status
Action
Off
Off
Board not receiving power or not
plugged in correctly.
Board is out of order.
On
Off
Board is receiving power and board test
is in progress.
Board is defective if status remains un- Replace board.
changed (board test unsuccessful).
Check plug contact on
board.
Loadware loading not successfully com- Replace board.
pleted. Board is faulty.
Error detected on board.
Board is deactivated (not applicable to
errors detected by test loops) or board
was deactivated using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Flashing
Off
Loadware is being loaded.
Off
On
Board test completed successfully.
Board is OK (idle state).
Off
●
Check whether the
board was deactivated
using HiPath 3000 Manager E. If not, replace
board.
Flashing At least one subscriber line circuit is activated.
H3 LED (see Figure 3-121): Reference clock display (clock is generated if this feature was
configured using HiPath 3000 Manager E).
–
On: Reference clock for clock generator is created.
–
Off: No reference clock
3-300
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S2M trunk connection
Table 2-10 lists examples of the maximum cable lengths for connecting trunks.
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
TMS2
Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx
Public network
NT
6 m (not Germany), 10 m and 20 m
Figure 3-122
S2M trunk connection
Observe the following when connecting NTs using the S30267-Z57-Axxx cable:
●
Keep the cable from the NT to HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 as short as possible to ensure
proper operation.
●
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 must always be grounded (whether the line used by the network provider is copper or optical fiber) (see 1 TR 211 item 2.4, Protective Measures and
Grounding). The diameter of the earth conductor must be at least 2.5 mm2. Grounding the
system using sheath wires is not sufficient.
For operating reasons, keep the ground connection from the NT to the system as short as
possible.
7
●
Caution
In order to guarantee successful operation, you must ensure that the NT is
grounded on the network provider side.
Power supply
The NT must be fed over the –48 V (max. 10 W, observe the power requirements of the
NTs) of the UPSM (see Figure 3-123).
The voltage is fed out on backplane connector X06 (pins 17 + 37 = –48 V). Use the CABLU
supplied to connect the system with the MDFU. This places the voltage on pair no. 15 (= –
48 V) of the splitting strip.
The delivery does not include a CABLU if the REAL board has been ordered or is already
being used (the necessary CABLU is included in the delivery of the “ALUM using REAL”
feature).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-301
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
- 48 V
X06
MDFU
0V
- 48 V
CABLU
Pair no. 15
UPSM
Earth
TMS2
NT
HiPath 3750,
HiPath 3700
Figure 3-123
Supplying NTs via S2M
S2M - NT Connection
NT 1
Network
terminator:
The connection
depends
on the countryspecific NT.
HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 (NT 2)
PE
Earth connection,
min. 2.5 mm2
a
b
Receive
direction
Transmit
direction
a
b
Shield
●
Power supply, see Figure 3-123
●
Backplane, connection to
– Xx8
– XX9 (board release 5 or later)
●
Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx
– Length: 6 (not in Germany), 10 and 20 m
– Color code (see Table 3-145)
The wires in a wire pair may be interchanged.
Figure 3-124
3-302
B
A
C
K
P TMS2
L
A
N
E
S2M - NT Connection (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S2M connection to Deutsche Telekom NT (for Germany only)
NT 1
NTPMGF
NTPMKU
+ (0 V)
1
2
s UBatt
– (- 48 V) 3
FPE
4
a
5 Signal receive
b S2M
6
7
s
8
a
b S2M
9
s
10 Signal trans-
s = shield
HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 (NT 2)
+ (0 V)
1
s UBatt
2
– (- 48 V) 3
4
PE
a
5
b S2M
6
7
s
a
8
b S2M
9
10
s
11
s
12
a UK2
b
13
14
s
15
a UK2
b
16
Power supply
Earth connection,
min. 2.5 mm2
Receive
direction
Transmit
direction
Shield
●
Power supply, see Figure 3-123
●
Backplane, connection to
– Xx8
– Xx9 (board release 5 or later)
●
Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx
– Length: 6 (not in Germany), 10 and 20 m
– Color code (see Table 3-145)
The wires in a wire pair may be interchanged.
Figure 3-125
B
A
C
K
P TMS2
L
A
N
E
S2M Connection to Deutsche Telekom NT (For Germany Only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-303
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S2M networking
For examples of the maximum cable lengths for direct CorNet N/CorNet NQ networking, please
refer to Table 2-10.
S2M networking in site without NT
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4
TMS2
TMS2
Cable S30267-Z58-A50 (5 m) (not in GermaHiPath 4000
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4
TMS2
S30267-Z59-A45 cable (4.5 m)
(can be extended using HiPath-4000-specific
cable)
S2M networking in site with NT
HiPath 3000 /
HiPath 4000
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
TMS2
NT
Fixed connection
(cabling must be approved
by NT supplier)
NT
TMS2
Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx
6 m (not Germany), 10 m and 20 m
S2M networking using leased lines
HiPath 3000,
HiPath 4000
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
TMS2
NT
NT
TMS2
Fixed connection via public
network (NT connection according to Figure 3-124)
Cable S30267-Z57-Axxx
6 m (not Germany), 10 m and 20 m
Figure 3-126
3-304
S2M Networking Options (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.41
TST1 (for U.S. only)
Introduction
The digital T1/PRI trunk module (TST1) connects the communications server to primary rate
interface (PRI) ISDN via a T1 interface.
There are two versions of this board:
●
S30810-Q2919-X - for use in the HiPath 3550 (wall housing)
●
S30810-K2919-Z - for use in the HiPath 3500 (19-inch housing)
The board can also be used for the following layer-1 operating modes:
●
Super Frame SF
●
Extended Super Frame ESF
Board usage is subject to the following restrictions:
●
Only one TST1 board allowed (primary multiplex access)
●
For slot 7 or 9 only
Rather than connecting to a main distribution frame (MDF), the TST1 connects to a channel
service unit (CSU). The CSU supplies the required secondary protection.
Interfaces
50
To CO
1
X2
TST1
X1
8
To
CUC
CUCR
1
Figure 3-127
TST1 (For U.S. Only) (S30810-Q2919-X/S30810-K2919-Z)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-305
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Contact assignment
Table 3-147
TST1 (For U.S. Only) - Contact Assignment
Contact
X2
Contact
X2
1
b-wire (ring), receive
5
a-wire (tip), transmit
2
a-wire (tip), receive
6
not connected
3
not connected
7
not connected
4
b-wire (ring), transmit
8
not connected
3-306
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.42
TS2 (Not for U.S.), TS2R (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
The board contains a four-wire interface with S2M code for connection to the public telecommunications network or private networks.
Up to thirty trunk calls can be conducted simultaneously via the S2M interface. The total transmission speed including signaling and synchronization is 2048 Mbps.
Two trace files are available:
●
●
Implemented up to and including V4.0:
–
TS2 (Trunk Module S2M) S30810-Q2913-X100 (Figure 3-128) - for use in HiPath 3550
(wall housing)
–
TS2R (Trunk Module S2M Rack) S30810-K2913-Z100 (Figure 3-129) - for use in HiPath 3500 (19-inch housing)
Implemented in V5.0 and later:
>
In HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and later, the B channels in the TS2 and TS2R boards
are subject to license. Consequently, the two boards below have been assigned
a new hardware identification code. The new codes prevent the boards from being used in earlier versions. Functionality and layout of the boards have not been
changed.
–
TS2 (Trunk Module S2M) S30810-Q2913-X300 (Figure 3-128) - for use in HiPath 3550
(wall housing)
–
TS2R (Trunk Module S2M Rack) S30810-K2913-Z300 (Figure 3-129) - for use in HiPath 3500 (19-inch housing)
Board usage is subject to the following restrictions:
●
Only one TS2/TS2R board allowed (primary multiplex access)
●
For slot 7 or 9 only
To support country-specific CAS protocols, you can use the Euro-ISDN CAS gateway ECG.
The ECG cabinet is a protocol converter that converts the Euro-ISDN protocol into the Channel
Associated Signaling CAS protocol. Refer to the installation instructions, which are provided
with each ECG cabinet, for information on the connection and power supply.
For HiPath 3000 V1.0 and later, you can also use the new TMCAS board to support countryspecific CAS protocols.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-307
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
TS2 interfaces
S2M interface:
TS2
1
●
Wieland terminal (symm. line)
50
X2
To
8
X1
●
MW8 (RJ48C)
jack (MW line)
1
CUC
X5
2
Figure 3-128
TS2 (Not for U.S.) - Interfaces (S30810-Q2913-X100, -X300)
TS2R interfaces
TS2R
To
S2M interface:
●
50
X1
MW8 (RJ48C)
jack (MW line)
1
CUCR
X5
2
Figure 3-129
3-308
TS2R (Not for U.S.) - Interfaces (S30810-K2913-Z100, -Z300)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Network interfaces
The TS2 board is connected to the network transfer point (NT1) via the symmetrical line (120
ohms, four-wire twisted-pair cable) at X2 or via an MW line at X5.
Note: use the connection kits listed on Page 3-311 for NT connections in Spain and Portugal.
●
Symmetrical line (120 ohms)
The maximum cable length (approx. 130 m) depends on the quality of the cable used and
its signal attenuation. Use shielded cables only to guarantee proper operation.
Connect the cable to the X2 using an 8-pin Wieland terminal (TS2 only).
Table 3-148
●
Contact Assignments for X2 Connector
Contact
X2 (TS2 only)
1
–48 V (NT1 feeding), max. 15 W
2
0 V (NT1 feeding)
3
GND
4
Board ID for TMCAS
5
a-wire (T), transmit
6
b-wire (R), transmit
7
a-wire (T), receive
8
b-wire (R), receive
MW line (MW8 jack (RJ48C))
The shielded 8-pin MW8 (RJ48C) jack X5 is provided for connecting MW lines. The maximum cable length (approx. 100 m) depends on the quality of the cable used and its signal
attenuation.
Table 3-149
Contact Assignments for the MW8 (RJ48C) jack X5
Pin
X5
Pin
X5
1
b-wire (R), receive
6
Free
2
a-wire (T), receive
7
Free
3
Free
8
Free
4
b-wire (R), transmit
11
GND
5
a-wire (T), transmit
12
GND
An additional line must be provided from pins 1 and 2 on the X2 connector to NT1 for NT1
feeding.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-309
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
S2M trunk connection
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500
TS2/TS2R
Figure 3-130
Public network
NT1
S2M Trunk Connection
Keep the cable from the NT to HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3500 as short as possible to ensure proper operation.
7
Caution
There should be absolutely no ground connection between the HiPath 3550 wall
housing and the NT. Do not connect the shield of the connection cable you are using
either on the HiPath 3550 side or on the NT side.
If the HiPath 3550 system is separately grounded (such as with the 19-inch housing
of the HiPath 3500), you may make a connection between HiPath 3550 and NT.
NT1 power supply
●
TS2 board
The NT1 supply voltage of –48 V can be tapped from the X2 connector (see Table 3-148).
There is a power limit of < 15 W for this voltage, which the system feeds over the CUC.
●
TS2R board
The NT1 power supply must come from an S30122-X7321-X (S30122-X7321-X100 with
UPS operation) power supply unit.
3-310
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Cable set for NT connections (Spain and Portugal only)
●
Spain (and in certain cases Portugal)
Public
network
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500
Cable 1
TS2/TS2R
●
Interface
converter
NT
Cable 2
Portugal
Public
network
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500
Cable 1
TS2/TS2R
Figure 3-131
Interface
converter
Cable 2
Cable 3
NT
S2M - NT Connections for Spain and Portugal
Connection kit contents and part numbers:
●
●
TS2/TS2R connection kit for Spain and Portugal: F50035-E2-X63
containing the following:
–
Interface converter: S30122-X7357-X
–
Cable 1 = Patch cable MW8 (RJ48C), 10 m: C39195-Z7208-A100
–
Cable 2 (2 units) = coaxial adapter cable, 30 cm: S30267-Z354-A3
TS2/TS2R upgrade kit for Portugal: L30252-U600-A190
containing the following:
–
Cable 3 (2 units) = Mini-coaxial cable, 10 cm: S30267-Z353-A1
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-311
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.43
4SLA (Not for U.S.), 8SLA, 16SLA (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
The 4SLA, 8SLA, and 16SLA (Subscriber Line Analog) modules for analog T/R interfaces connect HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing) to conventional analog telephones and supplementary equipment (such as group 3 fax machines and entrance telephone adapters).
Interfaces
T/R ports
1-4
Stns. 1 to 4
T/R ports
5-8
Stns. 5 to 8
(not with
4SLA)
50
1
X2
8
X1
1
4/8SLA
X3
2
8
To
CUP
CUC
Figure 3-132
4SLA (Not for U.S.), 8SLA - Interfaces (S30810-Q2923-X200, -X100)
Table 3-150
4SLA (Not for U.S.), 8SLA Contact Assignments
Contact
X2 (T/R ports 1 to 4)
X3 (T/R ports 5 to 8)
1
a1
a5
2
b1
b5
3
a2
a6
4
b2
b6
5
a3
a7
6
b3
b7
7
a4
a8
8
b4
b8
3-312
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
1
X2
T/R ports
1-4
Stns. 1 to 4
8
50
1
T/R ports
5-8
Stns. 5 to 8
X3
X1
8
T/R ports
9-12
Stns. 9 to 12
T/R ports
13-16
Stns. 13 to 16
16SLA
1
X4
2
To
CUP
CUC
8
1
X5
8
Figure 3-133
16SLA (Not for U.S.) - Interfaces (S30810-Q2923-X)
Table 3-151
16SLA (Not for U.S.) - Contact Assignments
Contact
X2
(T/R ports 1 to
4)
X3
(T/R ports 5 to
8)
X4
(T/R ports 9 to
12)
X5
(T/R ports 1316)
1
a1
a5
a9
a 13
2
b1
b5
b9
b 13
3
a2
a6
a1
a 14
4
b2
b6
b 10
b 14
5
a3
a7
a 11
a 15
6
b3
b7
b 11
b 15
7
a4
a8
a 12
a 16
8
b4
b8
b 12
b 16
The operating mode (short or long line with the appropriate flash times) can be set up for each
subscriber line interface with HiPath 3000 Manager E (the menu settings: Set up station –> Station –> Param –> Flags).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-313
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Technical connection conditions
●
Maximum supply current: approximately 34 mA; maximum supply voltage: approximately
40 Vdc
●
Ring voltage against negative supply voltage (a-wire (tip)/RING): two telephones maximum
●
Range, see Section 2.6
●
Loop current detection > 10 mA
●
Ground button detection > 20 mA
●
The transmission method can be configured country-specifically by entering the country
code.
3-314
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
3.3.44
8SLAR
Introduction
The 8SLAR (Subscriber Line Analog Rack) board provides eight T/R interfaces for connecting
analog telephones and supplementary equipment (such as group 3 fax machines and TFE
adapters) in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing).
Interfaces
Port 1
50
11
X1
T/R ports
1–8
(4-pin MW8
jacks)
X2
2
To
CUPR
CUCR
88
Port 8
Figure 3-134
8SLAR Interfaces (S30810-K2925-Z)
Table 3-152
8SLAR Contact Assignments
MW8 jack
X2, pin
T/R ports 1-4
MW8 Jack
X2, pin
T/R ports 5-8
1
14
a1
5
54
a5
15
b1
55
b5
24
a2
64
a6
25
b2
65
b6
34
a3
74
a7
35
b3
75
b7
44
a4
84
a8
45
b4
85
b8
2
3
4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6
7
8
3-315
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Peripheral Boards
Technical connection conditions
●
Maximum supply current: approximately 34 mA; maximum supply voltage: approximately
40 Vdc
●
Ring voltage against negative supply voltage (a-wire (tip)/RING): two telephones maximum
●
Range, see Section 2.6
●
Loop current detection > 10 mA
●
Ground button detection > 20 mA
●
The transmission method can be configured country-specifically by entering the country
code.
3-316
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4
Options
3.4.1
ALUM4
Introduction
In the event that HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 experience a voltage drop, voltage dip or unrecoverable system errors, a trunk failure transfer (ALUM) is activated (MSI only).
The module implements a power failure transfer for four analog telephones. The only kind of
telephone that can be used is an analog telephone. The signaling method of the connected
telephones should be the same as that on the trunk line, otherwise signaling will not be possible.
When the system is deactivated or if an error occurs, the trunk lines are connected directly to
the telephones. When normal operation is resumed, the transfer represented in the figure below takes place.
ALUM4 module function
X6 KX-X relay interface
16
From analog trunks
System
1
Pins 1-8
To analog trunk board
X3
To analog stations
To central control or
analog station board
X4
Pins 9-16
Figure 3-135
ALUM4 - Function
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-317
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Interfaces
CB side
1
X1
X3
from the CO
16
X6
1
8
ALUM module
1
X4
to the
X2
8
Board side
Figure 3-136
>
ALUM4 - Interfaces (S30817-Q935-A)
The cable that is plugged in by default is split and is connected to the TLA and to the
4/8/16SLA board.
ALUM module contact assignments
Table 3-153
ALUM4 - Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.)
Contact
Connector X3
Connector X4
Connector X6
1
R1 from trunk 1a
AE1 to Stn. 1a
AT1 to TLA a
2
T1 from trunk 1b
BE1 to Stn. 1b
BT1 to TLA b
3
R2 from trunk 2a
AE2 to Stn. 2a
AT2 to TLA a
4
T2 from trunk 2b
BE2 to Stn. 2b
BT2 to TLA b
5
R3 from trunk 3a
AE3 to Stn. 3a
AT3 to TLA a
6
T3 from trunk 3b
BE3 to Stn. 3b
BT3 to TLA b
7
R4 from trunk 4a
AE4 to Stn. 4a
AT4 to TLA a
8
T4 from trunk 4b
BE4 to Stn. 4b
BT4 to TLA b
9
–
–
TA1 to SLA* a
10
–
–
TB1 to SLA* b
11
–
–
TA2 to SLA* a
12
–
–
TB2 to SLA* b
3-318
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Table 3-153
ALUM4 - Interface Assignments (Not for U.S.)
Contact
Connector X3
Connector X4
Connector X6
13
–
–
TA3 to SLA* a
14
–
–
TB3 to SLA* b
15
–
–
TA4 to SLA* a
16
–
–
TB4 to SLA* b
* = or to free analog port
Table 3-154
Pin
ALUM4 - Interface Assignments (For U.S. Only)
X3
(to MDF)
X4
(to MDF)
Y-Cable from X6 to
TMGL4
Y-Cable from X6 to Analog Ports1
Pin
Assignment
Pin
Assignment
1
R from trunk
1
R to station 1
1
T to TMGL4 port 1
9
T to analog port 1
2
T from trunk
1
T to station 1
2
R to TMGL4 port 1
10
R to analog port 1
3
R from trunk
2
R to station 2
3
T to TMGL4 port 2
11
T to analog port 2
4
T from trunk
2
T to station 2
4
R to TMGL4 port 2
12
R to analog port 2
5
R from trunk
3
R to station 3
5
T to TMGL4 port 3
13
T to analog port 3
6
T from trunk
3
T to station 3
6
R to TMGL4 port 3
14
R to analog port 3
7
R from trunk
4
R to station 4
7
T to TMGL4 port 4
15
T to analog port 4
8
T from trunk
4
T to station 4
8
R to TMGL4 port 4
16
R to analog port 4
Note: Pinouts shown are at the board itself. The supplied main distribution frame cable (MDF
cable) reverses the signal order for X3 and X4 before the MDF.
1
To the analog station ports on the CBCC (recommended) or to four consecutive ports on an 8SLA board.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-319
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
ALUM module block diagram
Trunk
Connector
X3
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3350
ALUM
R1
Relay
K1-B
T1
Connector X6
K2-B
BT1 (T1)
AT1 (R1)
TA1
TB1
Trunk
board
Station
board
K2-C
K1-C
AE1
Relay
BE1
Connector
X4
Analog telephone
Figure 3-137
3-320
ALUM4 - Basic Structure
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.2
AMOM
Introduction
AMOM is an opto-electronic converter that can be used to connect fiber optic cables to the SubD jacks on the front panel of the DIUN2 and DIU2U boards.
HiPath 3800
Optical fiber cable
DIUN2
or
DIU2U
Figure 3-138
S
U
B
D
AMOM
S
U
B
D
AMOM - Connection to DIUN2 and DIU2U
AMOM variants
AMOM variant Wave length
Op.fiber
cable
S30807-K5480- 850/820 nm
X100
multimode
50 µm
62.5 µm
S30807-K5480- 1300 nm
X200
multimode
S30807-K5480- 1300 nm
X300
mono mode
1
Cable length Cable attenua- Maximum at(km)
tion
tenuation1
(dB/km)
(dB)
2.5
3
3
3.5
11.5
14.5
50 µm and
62.5 µm
6
1
10
9 µm/125
8
0.5
8
Maximum optical attenuation in an AMOM to AMOM connection: a reserve of 4 dB attenuation must be included for ageing
and splicing.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-321
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Connector assignment
Table 3-155
Pin
AMOM - 15-Pin Sub-D Plug Assignment
Signal
Signal description
Route
4
LWLO0_FRONT
Data output on the optical fiber interface
Input
5
GND
Ground return path for the +5V power supply
Input/output
6
SCAN_IN0
Adapter test
Output
7
SCAN_IN0
Adapter test
Output
10
+5 V
+5-V power supply
Input
11
LWLI0_FRONT
Data input on the optical fiber inter- Output
face (front)
12
GND
Ground return path for the +5V power supply
Input/output
14
+5 V
+5-V power supply
Input
No other pins used.
3-322
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.3
ANI4 (for selected countries only)
Introduction
The ANI4 (Automatic Number Identification) board is responsible for receiving station numbers
modulated using the CPFSK method, demodulating them, and forwarding them to the base
system HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350. In V4.0 SMR-7 or later, the station name is analyzed in
addition to the call number and shown on the telephone display.
Each ANI4 can serve four trunks. It contains the external trunk board hardware interfaces
(TMGL4) as well as a trunk and options bus interface. The trunks are transferred directly on the
board between the trunk and the trunk board interfaces.
Interfaces on the ANI4 module
CBside
LEDs
TMGL4
2/1
4/3
6/5
8/7
10/9
X 3 *)
(green)
(red)
X1
ANI4
1
Trunk
X4
X2
8
Board side
*) Pins: Component side/solder side
Figure 3-139
ANI4 (For Selected Countries Only) - Interfaces (S30807-Q6917-Axxx)
LED statuses and their meanings
On the ANI4 board two LEDs are implemented that show the status of trunk channel 1.
After system startup the green LED is on and the red LED is off. This signals that the layer-1
firmware has started correctly.
If ANI4 is recognized properly by the system, the green LED is reset (after all system software
initialization), and the bottom line of the display on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 phones appears. This means that the ANI4 has received system software activation for all four channels.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-323
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Table 3-156
ANI4 (For Selected Countries Only) - LED Statuses for Trunk 1
LED
Meaning
Action
Green LED - Firmware Condition
Off
No caller ID signals on the line.
Call service provider and
ask if feature is available.
Line is not connected to trunk channel 1.
Connect line to trunk channel 1.
The incoming signal is lower than –36 dBm (as defined in Bellcore SR3004 for the lowest caller ID signal (space - signal)): the Mitel chip on ANI4 shows no
reaction.
Call service provider and
ask if feature is available.
If so, the signal that appears
on the customer side is too
low (not Bellcore-compliant).
This must be corrected by
the service provider.
The LED or the microcontroller is defective.
Replace ANI4 board.
The system has not yet started.
Start up system.
On
(but
glowing
weakly)
The Mitel chip interprets the signal on the line as an –
FSK carrier signal. However, this could mean that
there is noise or speech on the line, too.
The firmware is in the state of recognition.
On
(for approx.
1 s)
A valid caller ID signal (correct channel seizure/mark –
- bit sequence + valid message byte) on the line is being recognized at the moment. If a message is not
displayed on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone,
there may be too much noise on the line. In other
words, some bits in the signal have “tipped over” into
the other logical status. The firmware builds the
checksum for the received caller ID message byte
and compares this checksum with the one received.
Red LED - Checksum Status
On
The received caller ID signal has a checksum error. If the red LED is on after evThe LED is reset after the next correct caller ID mes- ery call: the FSK signal is
sage is received.
provided, but is not Bellcorecompliant on the customer
side. This must be corrected
by the service provider.
Off
Checksum is OK.
3-324
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
ANI4 module contact assignments
Table 3-157
ANI4 (For Selected Countries Only) - Contact Assignments
Contact
Connector X3
Component Side
Connector X3
Solder Side
Connector X4
1
--
Not assigned
a-wire (tip), trunk 1
2
b-wire (ring), trunk 1
--
b-wire (ring), trunk 1
3
--
a-wire (tip), trunk 1
a-wire (tip), trunk 2
4
b-wire (ring), trunk 2
--
b-wire (ring), trunk 2
5
--
a-wire (tip), trunk 2
a-wire (tip), trunk 3
6
b-wire (ring), trunk 3
--
b-wire (ring), trunk 3
7
--
a-wire (tip), trunk 3
a-wire (tip), trunk 4
8
b-wire (ring), trunk 4
--
b-wire (ring), trunk 4
9
--
a-wire (tip), trunk 4
–
10
GMZ
--
–
GMZ= Call charging module assignment
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-325
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
ANI4 installation instructions
Follow the steps below to install ANI4 in the HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 system.
7
Caution
Remove the trunk slip-on connectors from the TMGL4 board before starting to work
on the system.
Be sure to reinstall the ANI4 and TMGL4 boards in their slots before reconnecting
the trunks.
1.
Disconnect the trunks from theTMGL4 board (Figure 3-140: Figure 1).
2.
Unplug the system from the power supply.
3.
Install the ANI4 board in the system.
4.
Connect the OPAL adapter cable to the ANI4 board.
5.
Use the ribbon cable supplied with the board to connect ANI4 and TMGL4, making sure
that the colored markings (pin 1) at both ends of the cable are facing upwards(Figure 3140: Figure 2).
6.
Connect the trunk slip-on connectors to the ANI4 (Figure 3-140: Figure 3).
7.
Restart the system by reconnecting the power plug.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Pin 1
Pin 1
Figure 3-140
3-326
ANI4 (For Selected Countries Only) - Installation Steps
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.4
ANI4R (for selected countries only)
Introduction
The ANI4R (Automatic Number Identification Rack) board is responsible for receiving station
numbers modulated using the CPFSK method, demodulating them, and forwarding them to the
HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 base system. In V4.0 SMR-7 or later, the station name is analyzed
in addition to the call number and shown on the telephone display.
Each ANI4R module can serve four trunks. It contains the external trunk board hardware interfaces (TMGL4R) and the options bus interface.
>
If ANI4R is installed as option 1 or 2, TMGL4R board must be inserted in slot 4, 6 or
8 (slots 6 and 8 not available with HiPath 3300).
Interfaces
To OPALR, or previous option
1
TMGL4R
X3 (10-pin MW10 jack)
10
X1
ANI4R
X2
Board side
Figure 3-141
ANI4R (for selected countries only) (S30807-Q6917-Z103)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-327
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Contact assignment
Table 3-158
ANI4R (For Selected Countries Only) - Contact Assignment
X3 Pin
Signal
X3 Pin
Signal
1
–
6
a-wire (tip), trunk 3
2
a-wire (tip), trunk 1
7
b-wire (ring), trunk 3
3
b-wire (ring), trunk 1
8
a-wire (tip), trunk 4
4
a-wire (tip), trunk 2
9
b-wire (ring), trunk 4
5
b-wire (ring), trunk 2
10
Call charging module assignment
(GMZ)
3-328
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.5
7
Announcement and Music Modules
Caution
Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting a subboard. Otherwise you may damage the board.
Introduction
The HiPath 3000 systems use different modules or boards for playing announcements and music on hold. For details on connecting these boards, refer to the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
>
The following HiPath Xpressions Compact boards support music on hold in V4.0
SMR-7 or later and announcements in V5.0 or later:
●
IVML8, IVML24 (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700)
●
IVMNL, IVMN8 (HiPath 3800)
●
IVMP8 (not for U.S.), IVMP8R (not for U.S) (HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300)
●
IVMS8, IVMS8R (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300)
For detailed information on HiPath Xpressions Compact, startup and administration,
see the manual for the product (see Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).
Overview
Table 3-159
Module/
Board
EXM
Announcement and Music Modules
Part number
S30817-Q902B401
Notes
●
●
EXMR
S30122-K7403-Z
●
●
●
MPPI
S30122-K7275-B
●
●
MPPI (not
for U.S.)
S30122-K5380X200
●
●
Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing),
see Figure 3-142.
Connected via cable to X4 connector on CBCC/CBCP.
Used in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing).
Board installed directly on CBRC (X19 and X20).
Connected via cable to Cinch jack on the front panel
(see Figure 3-143).
Used in all HiPath 3000 systems
Board installed directly on the central control board
(X19 and X20).
Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing).
Connected via cable to X4 connector on CBCC/CBCP.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-329
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Table 3-159
Module/
Board
Announcement and Music Modules
Part number
Notes
UAM (not for S30122-X7217-X
U.S.)
●
UAMR (not
for U.S.)
●
S30122-X7402-Z
●
●
Used in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing).
Connected to OPAL and analog interface (for the announcement function)
Used in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing).
Connected to OPALR and analog interface (for the announcement function).
Notes on displaying options
You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to display the presence of options. The presence of MPPI
or UAM (HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 only) is displayed as “Option 5”.
The ALUM4 module cannot be displayed.
Slot for EXM
Cable duct
Slot for
EXM module
Figure 3-142
3-330
EXM Slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 Wall Housing
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Connection of EXMR
Front panel
of the system
X1
EXMR
Cinch jack
X2
(component side)
Cable C39195-Z7001-C79
Figure 3-143
EXMR Connection to HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-331
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.6
EVM
Introduction
The optional subboard EVM (Entry Voice Mail) provides the functionality of integrated Voice
Mail in HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350,HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300. The central control boards
S30810-Q2935-A301 (CBCC) and S30810-Q2935-Z301 (CBRC) must be used for this.
The board is plugged directly into the X32 connector on the central control boards CBCC (see
Figure 3-1) or CBRC (see Figure 3-2) using the connector strip X2.
7
Caution
The EVM subboard must not be plugged in or out when the system is energized.
Place the central control board on a flat surface before inserting the EVM subboard.
The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so you
should always mount them (see Figure 3-144).
Otherwise you may damage the board.
HiPath Entry Voice Mail has capacity to store up to two hours of recorded messages. You can
create up to
●
24 standard mailboxes and
●
four Auto Attendant mailboxes.
Information on administering HiPath Entry Voice Mail for HiPath 3000 can be found in the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help.
7
3-332
Caution
If using a different voicemail application (such as HiPath Xpressions Compact), the
EVM voice mail ports must be deactivated. To do this, set the ports to the "Standard"
station type and remove them from the active voicemail hunt group. Next set the
number of mailboxes for autoconfiguration to "0". This prevents the user making accidental changes to Call Management.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Interfaces
Spacing bolts
X2
26-pin socket strip
X1 (not used for HiPath 3000)
Figure 3-144
EVM (S30807-Q6945-X) - Interfaces
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-333
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.7
EXMNA (for U.S. only)
Introduction
The EXMNA (external music on hold) module provides a connection for external music on hold
in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350.
The EXMNA connects to the CBCC and CBCP board (connector X4) by means of a ribbon cable.
●
Ribbon cable connected = External music
●
Ribbon cable not connected = Internal music
Expert mode code 22 11 allows you to choose between music on, music off, ring tone, or music
on unscreened transfer. If the EXMNA module is connected, you must select Music on using
Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E. The module is operational as soon as it is plugged in.
Interfaces
Ribbon cable to
CB
1
X1
10
To external music
source
Figure 3-145
EXMNA
X2
EXMNA (For U.S. Only) (S30807-Q6923-X)
Cable duct
Slot for EXMNA module
Figure 3-146
3-334
EXMNA (for U.S. only) - Slot for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Contact assignment
Table 3-160
EXMNA (for U.S. only) - Contact Assignments
Contact
Connector X1
Connector X2
1
GND
Input
2
Not assigned
Input
3
Not assigned
Not assigned
4
EXMCL
Not assigned
5
EXMDIR
6
HRES
7
EXMD
8
EXMDET
9
+5 V
10
Not assigned
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-335
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.8
GEE8 (not for U.S)
Introduction
The Call Metering Receiving Equipment GEE8 (12/16 kHz) can be plugged into the TML8W
board to record call charge pulses (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700).
Interfaces X10 and X11 connect to the board.
Switch for setting the level per circuit
●
On = – 24 dBm
●
Off = – 10 dBm
Switch on GEE8
X10
Figure 3-147
3-336
On 1
8
X11
GEE8 (Not for U.S.) (S30817-Q664-xxxx)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.9
GEE12 (nor for U.S.), GEE16 (not for U.S.), GEE50 (not for U.S.)
Introduction
Each of the modules listed below supports four call-metering receiving units for recording and
preprocessing call charge pulses in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350.
Table 3-161
Module
GEE12/GEE16/GEE50 (Not for U.S.) Modules
Frequency
GEE 12
12 kHz
GEE 16
16 kHz
GEE 50
50 Hz
Remarks
also for Silent Reversal
The call charge detection channel is looped in the trunk and then routed to the TLA
Interfaces
CB side
1
1
10
1
To CO
LS
X1
X3
to the TLA
X4
10
X5
GEE module
8
X2
Board side
Figure 3-148
GEE12, GEE16, GEE50 (Not for U.S.) - Interfaces (S30817-Q951-Axxx)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-337
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Contact assignments
Table 3-162
GEE12, GEE16, GEE50 (Not for U.S.) - Contact Assignments
Contact
Connector X3
Connector
X4
Connector
X5
1
a
GND *
CO 1 (AL1)
0V
2
b
CO 1 (BN 1)
CO 1 (BL1)
0V
3
a
CO 1 (AN 1)
CO 2 (AL2)
RTS
4
b
CO 2 (BN 2)
CO 2 (BL2)
CTS
5
a
CO 2 (AN 2)
CO 3 (AL3)
RxD
6
b
CO 3 (BN 3)
CO 3 (BL3)
TxD
7
a
CO 3 (AN 3)
CO 4 (AL4)
0V
8
b
CO 4 (BN 4)
CO 4 (BL4)
+5V
9
a
CO 4 (AN 4)
–
0V
Call charging module assignment
–
+5V
10
* for GEE 50 in France; otherwise free
3-338
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.10
HOPE (for U.S. only)
Introduction
The HOPE (Hicom Office PhoneMail Entry) board provides Hicom Office PhoneMail Entry
functions.
>
The HOPE board does not identify itself to the system and is therefore not visible in
the HiPath 3000 Manager E card map. When expanding a system (such as HiPath
3350 or HiPath 3550), ensure that a free slot is available.
Interfaces
LED status indicator
Software load/diagnostic button
Digital station connector
On/off switch
(Off—towards LED
On—towards slot)
PCMCIA slot
Card ejector
Figure 3-149
HOPE (For U.S. Only) (S30122-Q7078-X; S30122-Q7079-X)
Board components
The following list describes the purpose of the components on the HOPE board:
●
The LED status indicator signals the state of the Hicom Office PhoneMail system
●
The software load/diagnostic button is for software loads (for example, loading a specific
language).
●
The digital station connector connects the HOPE board to the corresponding digital ports,
using a modular cable
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-339
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
●
The on/off switch turns the Office PhoneMail system on and off
●
The PCMCIA slot is for Office PhoneMail software cards (for example, voice cards).
●
The card ejector ejects the software cards from the PMCIA slot
Installation, servicing, and connectivity
For information on installing, connecting, and servicing the HOPE board, refer to the Hicom Office PhoneMail Entry Installation and System Administration Guide.
3-340
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.11
OPAL and OPALR
Introduction
The adapter cable for connecting the central board to the first optional board comes in two versions:
●
OPAL (Options Adapter Cable Long) C39195-A7001-B130 (Figure 3-150 - for use in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 (wall housing).
●
OPALR (Options Adapter Cable Long Rack) C39195-A7001-B142 (Figure 3-151) - for use
in HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing).
OPAL interfaces
Option board connection
Ribbon cable
folded and secured
CBCC/CBCP interface
Figure 3-150
OPAL (C39195-A7001-B130)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-341
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
OPALR interface
Option board connection
CBRC interface
Figure 3-151
3-342
OPALR (C39195-A7001-B142)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.12
PFT1 (Not for U.S.), PFT4 (Not for U.S.)
Introduction
In the event of a power failure or system error in HiPath 3800 and HiPath 3750, up to
●
1 analog trunk with a PFT1 (Power Failure Transfer) board
●
4 analog trunks with a PFT4 board
can be transferred (ALUM) to designated analog telephones (Figure 3-152).
When using an analog telephone for outgoing calls, you may need to adapt its signaling method
to match the signaling method of the connected trunk.
ALUM using PFT1/PFT4
TRUNK
a
PFT
b
R
E
L
A
I
S
TMB
Trunk circuit
TMA
SMA
SMB
SLA
Analog station board
(optional)
SLB
Analog telephone
Figure 3-152
ALUM Using PFT1/PFT4 (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-343
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Installation location of the PFT1 and PFT4 board (MDFU/MDFU-E)
Wire PFT1 or PFT4 into the MDFU or MDFU-E. The boards require -48 V. For the assignments
of both boards, see Figure 3-154.
2 x PFT1
or
1 x PFT4
System side
Figure 3-153
3-344
Line network
Installation Location of PFT1 and PFT4 (MDFU/MDFU-E) (Not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
PFT1 and PFT4 board assignment
X1
TMA 10
TMB
A
B
SMA
SMB
SLA
SLB
X2
TMA
1
TMB
A
B
SMA
SMB
SLA
SLB
1
TMA 10
TMB
A
B
SMA
SMB
SLA
SLB
10
TMA
1
TMB
A
B
SMA
SMB
SLA
SLB
- 48
PFT
10
X4
1
X3
Figure 3-154
PFT4
X1
TMA
1
TMB
A
B
SMA
SMB
SLA
SLB
- 48
PFT
10
PFT1
TMA, TMB = Trunk circuit
A, B = a, b (Telephone company)
SMA, SMB = SLA board
SLA, SLB = Analog telephone
PFT1 (S30777-Q539-X) and PFT4 (S30777-Q540-X) Board Assignment
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-345
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.13
REAL
Functions
The tasks of the REAL (S30807-Q5913-X) board in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 are divided
into two functional areas (see Figure 3-156):
●
Relay (REAL)
Four individual, controllable relays (K1 to K4) are available for special connections. The relays are energized by the CBCPR board via the REAL socket X05 connection cable. The
switch contacts for all relays are floating and protected by surge protectors.
In addition, a - 48-V line fused using a PTC resistor is routed to MDFU/MDFU-E and can
be used there for external applications (max. 80 mA).
- 48-V lines are provided at pins 17 and 37 (SU connector X06) for external applications
with higher power requirements. These lines have a load capacity of max. 15 W.
●
Power Failure Transfer ALUM (REAL)
This function is provided by two relays (K5, K6) with two switch contacts each. In the event
of a power failure or a system restart or reload, an analog trunk is transferred from the system to an analog telephone. The system monitors the line’s loop current to avoid disconnecting any trunk calls in progress when the power is restored.
In normal mode, the relays are activated:
–
The trunk is connected to the line trunk module.
–
The subscriber line is connected to the subscriber line module.
In the event of a power failure or during a restart or reload (low potential of trunk failure
transfer signal from CBCPR), the relays are deactivated giving rise to the following situation:
–
The signals to the line trunk module and subscriber line module are split and the trunk
is connected directly to the subscriber line.
If the power supply voltage returns after an interruption and a trunk call is in progress, activation of the trunk failure transfer relay is prevented (by optocoupler).
3-346
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Relay specifications
Electrical characteristics of the relays are as follows:
●
Operating voltage: 12 Vdc
●
Trunk failure transfer power consumption: 40 mA at 12 V nominal voltage
●
Power consumption per relay: 20 mA at 12 V nominal voltage
●
Trunk failure transfer contact load: 60 mA at -60 V nominal voltage
●
Maximum trunk failure transfer contact load with atmospheric influence: 8 A
●
Contact load for relays K1 to K4: 1 A with 250 Vac
●
Maximum current drain - 48 VF: 80 mA
Installation location of the REAL board (backplane)
The REAL board (basic cabinet only) is connected to the backplane using a ribbon cable (X05).
It is connected to the MDFU or MDFU-E or the patch panel using an SU cable connector X06.
X80
UPSM
X70
07
X05
REAL
with
connection
cable
Figure 3-155
X06
Installation Location of the REAL Board
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-347
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Relay contacts of the REAL board
REAL
X06
MDFU
REAL
02 10a
11 9a
RK1
PFTASa
X06
PFTASb
Relay
K1
UK1
AK1
31 9b
RK2
22 10b
13 11a
Relay
K2
UK2
AK2
33 11b
RK3
15 13a
04 12a
UK3
Relay
K3
24 12b
AK3
Relay
K5
PFTALa
42 8b
43 7b
23 7a
PFTTLb
PFTTLa
PFTTSb
Relay
K6
Relay
K4
AK4
PFTALb
32 8a
44 6b
14 6a
45 5b
35 13b
06 14a
RK4
UK4
Current
sensor
Relay
K5
MDFU
PFTTSa
05 5a
26 14b
Relay
K6
– 48 V,
max.
80 mA
16 4a
46 4b
27 3a
GND
– 48 V,
max.
15 W
Figure 3-156
3-348
48 2b
17 15a
37 15b
X06 MDFU
PFTASa/b = Line trunk module
PFTALa/b = Trunk
PFTTLa/b = Subscriber line (telephone)
PFTTSa/b = Subscriber board (SLA)
RK = Normally closed contact
UK = Switch contact
AK = Normally open contact
Power supply for external applications
(maximum 15 W): -48 V is available on
backplane pins 17 + 37 (GND = pins 27 + 48)
if no REAL is available.
REAL - Relay Contacts (De-Energized) and MDFU Interfaces
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Cable and connector assignment (backplane, MDFU/MDFU-E, patch panel)
Table 3-163
Color
group
Pair
1
2
1
3
4
REAL - Cable and Connector Assignment
a-Wire
(Tip)
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
5
6
7
2
8
9
10
11
12
3
13
14
15
4
16
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SU
connector
REAL
BP: X06
MDFU/
MDFU-E
19
1a
39
1b
38
2a
48
GND
2b
27
GND
3a
47
S0 patch panel
MW8 pin
3b
16
– 48 V (max. 80 mA)
4a
46
– 48 V (max. 80 mA)
4b
05
PFTTSa
5a
4
45
PFTTSb
5b
5
14
PFTTLa
6a
4
44
PFTTLb
6b
5
23
PFTALa
7a
4
43
PFTALb
7b
5
32
PFTASa
8a
4
42
PFTASb
8b
5
11
RK1, opener
9a
3
31
AK1, closer
9b
2
02
UK1
10a
1
22
UK2
10b
3
13
RK2, opener
11a
2
33
AK2, closer
11b
1
04
RK3, opener
12a
3
24
AK3, closer
12b
2
15
UK3
13a
1
35
UK4
13b
3
06
RK4, opener
14a
2
26
AK4, closer
14b
1
17
– 48 V (15 W max.)
15a
37
– 48 V (15 W max.)
15b
08
16a
28
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Station
board
(SLA)
Subsc. line
(telephone)
Trunk
Circuit board
3-349
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.14
REALS
Introduction
The REALS (Relais and ALUM for SAPP) board is used in HiPath 3800 to provide the following
functions:
●
Four individual, controllable relays are available for special connections, such as door
openers.
The switch contacts for all relays are floating and protected by surge protectors.
Electrical characteristics of the relays are as follows:
●
–
Maximum current drain at – 48 V: 80 mA
–
Operating voltage: + 5 V
–
Contact current: max. 1.25 A
–
Contact power: max. 30 W
Trunk failure transfer (ALUM)
In the event of a power failure or a system restart or reload, an analog trunk is transferred
from the system to an analog telephone. If the power supply voltage returns after an interruption and a trunk call is in progress, activation of the trunk failure transfer relay is prevented by optocoupler.
ALUM relay electrical data:
–
Operating voltage: + 5 V
–
Contact current: max. 1.25 A
–
Contact power: max. 30 W
All of the functions are controlled by the CBSAP board.
Two –48-V lines fused using a PTC resistor are available for external applications. Signals are
picked up via MDFU-E (Table 3-164: M48VF1 / 0V_F and M48VF2 / 0V_F). Each trunk has a
maximum load capacity of 300 mA.
3-350
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
To the SIPAC 4SU connector X17
Signals are picked up via SIVAPAC connector X116 on the backplane.
Removal tab
You can insert a screwdriver here to remove REALS from the shelf.
Figure 3-157
REALS (S30807-Q6629-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-351
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Slot
Insert the REALS board into the slot marked 3 in the lower part of the shelf in the basic cabinet
and apply pressure until you hear a click (see Figure 4-21).
The slots for the power supply units and for the REALS board must be covered with an outer
panel before the system is started up. The outer panel is fixed onto the shelf with screws (see
Figure 3-158).
Figure 3-158
REALS Slots in the Basic Cabinet (With Outer Panel Mounted)
Cable and connector assignment
Table 3-164 shows the assignment of the SIVAPAC connector X116 on the backplane and the
assignment of the jumper strip in the MDFU-E.
3-352
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Table 3-164
Pair
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
REALS - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
wht/blu
blu/wht
wht/ora
ora/wht
wht/grn
grn/wht
wht/brn
brn/wht
wht/gry
gry/wht
red/blu
blu/red
red/ora
ora/red
red/grn
grn/red
red/brn
brn/red
red/gry
gry/red
blk/blu
blu/blk
blk/ora
ora/blk
blk/grn
grn/blk
blk/brn
brn/blk
blk/gry
gry/blk
yel/blu
blu/yel
SIVAPAC Connector X116
REALS
MDFU-E
Notes
20
M48VF1
1a
– 48 V (max. 300 mA)
38
0V_F
1b
18
PFTTLB
2a
17
PFTTLA
2b
16
0V
3a
15
–
3b
14
0V_F
4a
13
M48VF2
4b
12
–
5a
11
0V
5b
10
AK1
6a
9
AK2
6b
8
AK3
7a
7
AK4
7b
6
0V
8a
5
PFTASA
8b
4
PFTASB
9a
3
PFTALA
9b
2
PFTALB
10a
1
–
10b
37
–
11a
36
0V
11b
35
–
12a
34
–
12b
32
RK3
13a
31
0V
13b
30
RK1
14a
29
RK2
14b
27
RK4
15a
26
0V
15b
24
PFTTSB
16a
23
PFTTSA
16b
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
ALUM: Subscriber line
(telephone)
– 48 V (max. 300 mA)
ALUM: Trunk board
ALUM: Trunk
ALUM: Subscriber line
module
3-353
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Table 3-164
Pair
17
18
a-Wire
(Tip)
REALS - SIVAPAC Connector Assignment on the Backplane
b-Wire
(Ring)
yel/ora
ora/yel
yel/grn
grn/yel
19
yel/brn
brn/yel
20
yel/gry
gry/yel
21
vio/blu
blu/vio
22
vio/ora
ora/vio
23
vio/grn
grn/vio
24
vio/brn
brn/vio
3-354
SIVAPAC Connector X116
REALS
MDFU-E
58
–
17a
57
S5
17b
56
0V
18a
55
–
18b
54
–
19a
53
S3
19b
52
S4
20a
51
0V
20b
50
UK1
21a
49
UK2
21b
48
UK3
22a
47
UK4
22b
46
0V
23a
45
–
23b
44
–
24a
43
S6
24b
Notes
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.15
STBG4 (For France Only)
Introduction
This current-limiting board is for connecting loop start trunks in France (HiPath 3550 and HiPath
3350). It includes the current-limiting components and surge-protection elements required by
law.
No options bus lines are needed.
The slot X3 wiring is polarized.
The STBG4 channel is looped between TLA and the trunk.
CB side
1
TLA
X3
10
1
MDF
X1
STBG4
X4
Trunk
X2
8
Board side
Figure 3-159
STBG4 (For France Only) - Interfaces (S30817-Q934-A)
Table 3-165
STBG4 (For France Only) - Contact Assignment
Contact
Connector X3
Connector X4
1
Not used
AL 1
2
BL 1
BL 1
3
AN 1
AL 2
4
BL 2
BL 2
5
AN 2
AL 3
6
BL 3
BL 3
7
AN 3
AL 4
8
BL 4
BL 4
9
AN 4
–
10
Not used
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-355
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.16
STRB, STRBR
Introduction
This option comes in two versions:
●
STRB (Control Relay Board) S30817-Q932-A (Figure 3-160) - for use in HiPath 3550 and
HiPath 3350 (wall housing)
●
STRBR (Control Relay Board Rack) S30817-K932-Z (Figure 3-161) - for use in HiPath
3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-inch housing)
The STRB or STRBR has four double-pin, double-throw relays as shown in Figure 3-162).
Actuators and sensors for monitoring, alerting, controlling and regulating can be connected to
the control relay board. Actuators are relays that can be energized from any station by means
of a code (such as a door opener). Sensors (such as thermostats or motion detectors) can detect a change of status in the connected equipment and activate a feature or dial a station number stored in the system.
The board has a total of four outputs (in the form of two floating switch contacts each) and four
control inputs in the form of optocouplers for externally activating an electrically isolated normally open (NO) contact.
7
Caution
CDB data is stored on the board. When replacing the board, be sure to store the
CDB data elsewhere. If a used board is used, old data may still be present on the
board.
Only factory technicians should use the "Reset options" procedure in expert mode
(code 29-3-3). Using the procedure during operation returns all options to their factory defaults, and they must be reset before they can accept data again from the central board.
Example: You can route the +12-V signal for power failure alert to the control input of the optocoupler for connector X4 or X6. Route the signal through a normally open (NO) contact that is
electrically isolated from the external device, then program the alert type. For safety, the control
voltage for the optocoupler is electrically isolated from the system’s other partial voltages.
For the manual relay on/off function and door opener, you must enter the desired switching time
(expert mode code 26 2).
3-356
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
STRB interfaces
CBCC/CBCP side
1
X3
8
X5
8
1
MDF
1 8
X6
1
X1
STRB
X4
X2
8
Board side
Figure 3-160
STRB Interfaces (S30817-Q932-A)
STRBR interfaces
CBRC side
8-pin MW8
jacks
11
:
18
21
:
28
31
:
38
41
:
48
X1
X3
STRBR
X2
Board side
Figure 3-161
STRBR Interfaces (S30817-Q932-Z)
Control relay connection values
7
Warning
The STRB or STRBR interface is an SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage Circuit) interface, as defined by IEC 60950.
Do not connect any circuits whose voltages exceed the following limit values:
Maximum: 30 Vac (42 Vpeak) or 60 Vdc.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-357
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
STRB and STRBR board relay and sensor functions
STRB or STRBR
K1.21
K1.22
K1.23
Relay
K1.11
K1.12
K1.13
+12 V
+12 VI
Short the wires to activate the
sensor.
OPTKP1
Sensor
To system
Figure 3-162
3-358
STRB and STRBR Board Relay and Sensor Functions
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
STRB contact assignment
Table 3-166
Connector
X3
X4
X5
X6
STRB Contact Assignments
Contact
Signal Name
1
K 4.21
Relay contact K4.2 (common)
2
K 4.22
Relay contact K4.2 (NO)
3
K 4.23
Relay contact K4.2 (NC)
4
K 3.21
Relay contact K3.2 (common)
5
K 3.22
Relay contact K3.2 (NO)
6
K 3.23
Relay contact K3.2 (NC)
7
K 2.21
Relay contact K2.2 (common)
8
K 2.22
Relay contact K2.2 (NO)
1
K 2.23
Relay contact K2.2 (NC)
2
K 1.21
Relay contact K1.2 (common)
3
K 1.22
Relay contact K1.2 (NO)
4
K 1.23
Relay contact K1.2 (NC)
5
+12VI
+12-V control voltage optocoupler
6
OPTKP 2
7
+12VI
8
OPTKP 1
1
K 3.12
Relay contact K3.1 (NO)
2
K 3.13
Relay contact K3.1 (NC)
3
K 2.11
Relay contact K2.1 (common)
4
K 2.12
Relay contact K2.1 (NO)
5
K 2.13
Relay contact K2.1 (NC)
6
K 1.11
Relay contact K1.1 (common)
7
K 1.12
Relay contact K1.1 (NO)
8
K 1.13
Relay contact K1.1 (NC)
1
OPTKP 3
2
+12VI
3
OPTKP 4
4
+12VI
+12-V control voltage optocoupler
5
K 4.11
Relay contact K4.1 (common)
6
K 4.12
Relay contact K4.1 (NO)
7
K 4.13
Relay contact K4.1 (NC)
8
K 3.11
Relay contact K3.1 (common)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Function
Control input optocoupler 2
+12-V control voltage optocoupler
Control input optocoupler 1
Control input optocoupler 3
+12-V control voltage optocoupler
Control input optocoupler 4
3-359
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
STRBR contact assignments
Table 3-167
STRBR Contact Assignments
X3, pin
Signal Name
11
ACT4-2M
Relay contact K203 (common) 2
12
ACT4-2B
Relay contact K203 (NO) 2
13
ACT4-2A
Relay contact K203 (NC) 2
14
ACT4-1M
Relay contact K203 (common) 1
15
ACT4-1B
Relay contact K203 (NO) 1
16
ACT4-1A
Relay contact K203 (NC) 1
17
P12VI
18
SENSE4
Control input optocoupler 4
21
ACT3-2M
Relay contact K202 (common) 2
22
ACT3-2B
Relay contact K202 (NO) 2
23
ACT3-2A
Relay contact K202 (NC) 2
24
ACT3-1M
Relay contact K202 (common) 1
25
ACT3-1B
Relay contact K202 (NO) 1
26
ACT3-1A
Relay contact K202 (NC) 1
27
P12VI
28
SENSE3
Control input optocoupler 3
31
ACT2-2M
Relay contact K201 (common) 2
32
ACT2-2B
Relay contact K201 (NO) 2
33
ACT2-2A
Relay contact K201 (NC) 2
34
ACT2-1M
Relay contact K201 (common) 1
35
ACT2-1B
Relay contact K201 (NO) 1
36
ACT2-1A
Relay contact K201 (NC) 1
37
P12VI
38
SENSE2
Control input optocoupler 2
41
ACT1-2M
Relay contact K200 (common) 2
42
ACT1-2B
Relay contact K200 (NO) 2
43
ACT1-2A
Relay contact K200 (NC) 2
44
ACT1-1M
Relay contact K200 (common) 1
45
ACT1-1B
Relay contact K200 (NO) 1
46
ACT1-1A
Relay contact K200 (NC) 1
47
P12VI
48
SENSE1
3-360
Function
+ 12-V optocoupler 4
+ 12-V optocoupler 3
+ 12-V optocoupler 2
+ 12-V optocoupler 1
Control input optocoupler 1
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.17
V24/1 (not for U.S.)
Introduction
You can use the V24/1 board in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350. This provides a serial V.24 interface for connecting PCs, printers or applications.
Interfaces
To CBCC/CBCP (X7) via ribbon cable
1
26
Component side
shown
X2
25-pin Sub-D jack
Figure 3-163
V24/1 (Not for U.S.) (S30807-Q6916-X100)
Figure 3-164
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - V.24 Connections
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-361
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
Connector assignment
To CB
X7: Edge connector
25-pin
TTL/RS-232
Level-converter and
electrical isolation
X2: Sub-D jack,
25-pin
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
RTS
CTS
CTS
RTS
DSR
DTR
DTR
DSR
Vcc
GND
0V
Figure 3-165
V.24 (RS-232) Connector Assignment, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350
Table 3-168
Pin Assignments of the V.24 Socket X2
Connector X2
Signal
I/O
2
TxD
O
3
RxD
I
4
RTS
O
5
CTS
I
6
DSR
I
20
DTR
O
7
0V
12000 12100
No other pins in connector X2 are used.
3-362
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.18
V.24 Adapter
The V.24 adapter is required as an adapter between the 25-pin connector on the cable
(C39195-Z7267-C13) and a 9-pin jack for connection to the V.24 interface on all HiPath 3000
V1.2 (or later) systems.
V.24 adapter assignment
Table 3-169
V.24 Adapter Assignment (C39334-Z7080-C2)
9-pin jack
Signal
Pin
25-pin jack
Pin
1
DCD
8
2
RxD
3
3
TxD
2
4
DTR
20
5
GND
7
6
DSR
6
7
RTS
4
8
CTS
5
9
RI
22
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
3-363
boards.fm
Boards for HiPath 3000
Options
3.4.19
V.24 Cable
The V.24 cable is used, for example, for connecting a service PC to the V.24 interface on all
HiPath 3000 systems (V1.2 or later).
V.24 cable assignment
9-pin jack
DCD 1
1
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
RxD
2
2
RxD
Receive Data
TxD
3
3
TxD
Transmit Data
DTR 4
4
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
DSR 6
6
DSR
Data Send Ready
RTS 7
7
RTS
Request To Send
CTS 8
8
CTS
Clear To Send
GND 5
5
GND
Ground
9
RI
Ring Indicator
RI
Figure 3-166
3-364
9-pin jack
9
Shield
V.24 Cable Assignment (C30267-Z355-A25)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Overview
4
Installing HiPath 3000
4.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
Installing HiPath 3800, page 4-3
●
Installation Prerequisites, page 4-3
●
Installation Procedure, page 4-4
●
Installing HiPath 3800 (Standalone), page 4-5
●
Installing HiPath 3800 (19-Inch Cabinet), page 4-21
●
Installing Boards (Configuration Notes), page 4-31
●
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane, page 4-49
●
Using an External Main Distribution Frame or External Patch Panel, page 4-64
●
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBSAP, page 4-79
●
Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-80
●
Making Trunk and Networking Connections, page 4-80
●
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-81
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700, page 4-83
●
Installation Prerequisites, page 4-83
●
Installation Procedure, page 4-84
●
Installing HiPath 3750, page 4-86
●
Installing HiPath 3700 (19-Inch Cabinet), page 4-127
●
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBCPR, page 4-151
●
Configuration notes, page 4-152
●
Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-161
●
Making trunk connections, page 4-161
●
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-162
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300, page 4-163
●
Installation Prerequisites, page 4-163
●
Installation Procedure, page 4-164
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-1
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Overview
Topic
●
Installing HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350, page 4-165
●
Installing HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-Inch Housing), page 4-186
4-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.1
Installation Prerequisites
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.
Tools and resources needed
The following are needed for installing the HiPath 3800 system:
●
●
Tools:
–
Hex or open-end wrench, 8 mm, open-end wrench 13 mm
–
Diagonal cutting pliers, telephone pliers, wire stripper, flat-nosed pliers
–
Slotted screwdrivers, from 2 to 8 mm (1/4 to 5/16 in.)
–
Phillips or cross-point screwdrivers, sizes 1 and 2
–
TORX screwdriver
–
Wire stripper (for example, from Krone)
–
Board wrench (part no. C39300-A7194-B10)
–
Electric drill, hammer
–
Level, tape measure
–
For U.S. only: Punch-down tool suitable for the block used (such as block 66)
Resources:
–
Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E
–
Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltages
–
Telephone test set for analog interfaces
–
Not for U.S.: ISDN tester (such as K3000 or Aurora)
–
For U.S. only: AuroraDuet, AuroraExpert, AuroraRemote or similar, ISDN protocol analyzer
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-3
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.2
Installation Procedure
Table 4-1
HiPath 3800 - Installation Procedure
Step
Installation Activity
Installing HiPath 3800 (Standalone)
Installing HiPath 3800 (19-Inch Cabinet)
1.
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-5 Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-21
(usually predetermined)
(generally determined by the existing 19inch cabinet)
2.
Unpacking the Components, page 4-7
Unpacking the Components, page 4-24
3.
Setting up the System Cabinets (from
Page 4-8):
Single Cabinet
Mounting System Cabinets in the 19-Inch
Cabinet, page 4-25
Two cabinets (stacked)
Two cabinets (side by side)
4.
Grounding the System, page 4-15
Checking the Grounding, page 4-20
Grounding the System, page 4-28
Checking the Grounding, page 4-30
5.
Installing Boards (Configuration Notes), page 4-31
6.
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane, page 4-49
7.
If required: use an external main distribution frame or external patch panel,
from Page 4-64:
Main Distribution Frame MDFU-E
Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X
S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3
●
●
●
8.
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBSAP, page 4-79
9.
Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-80
10.
Making Trunk and Networking Connections, page 4-80
11.
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-81
4-4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3
Installing HiPath 3800 (Standalone)
This section contains information on how to install the HiPath 3800 communication system.
This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to
Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment or expansions.
4.2.3.1
Selecting the Installation Site
Selecting a site
The customer usually has a preferred installation site in mind.
Make sure that the customer’s site meets the following guidelines:
●
To guarantee sufficient system ventilation, allow a minimum of 50 mm clearance between
the base of the cabinet and the ground and between stacked cabinets.
●
When cabinets are stacked, the basic cabinet must always be at the bottom of the stack.
●
Allow a minimum clearance of 10 cm both at the rear and the front of the cabinets for maintaining boards and for wiring.
●
Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat (for example sunlight and heaters).
●
Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments.
●
Avoid contact with chemicals.
●
Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during operation. Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used.
●
Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2.9.
For U.S. Only:
●
Install secondary-protection equipment.
●
Avoid standard carpeting, as it tends to produce electrostatic charges.
●
Ensure the availability of a power source that meets the requirements described in
Section 4.2.3.1.1.
●
Ensure that Siemens equipment is 40 in. (101.6 cm) from other electrical equipment. The
National Electrical Code (NEC) requires 36 in. (91.44 cm) of clearance in front of electrical
equipment and 40 in. (101.6 cm) of clearance from other electrical service equipment.
Information on the design of the HiPath 3800 can be found in Section 2.2.2.1.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-5
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.1.1
For U.S. only: AC outlet
An AC connection is required for each cabinet. The AC connection must fulfill the requirements
specified in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2
Electrical Connection Values (USA only)
Nominal
voltage
120 V AC/
60 Hz
7
Nominal voltage range
Nominal Frequency
Range
from
to
from
to
110 V AC
130 V AC
47 Hz
63 Hz
Wall Outlet Configurations
NEMA 5-15, 2-pin, 3wire, earth
WARNING
Never connect a HiPath 3800 system or a combination of HiPath 3800 systems directly to a wall socket. Use a UL-listed or CSA-certified surge protector for every two
cabinets.
AC Power Outlet Requirements
●
A UL-listed or CSA-certified surge protector must be connected between the socket and
the system. Two cabinets can be connected to each surge protector. Never connect a HiPath 3800 system or a combination of systems directly to a wall socket.
●
The power source may not be more than 2.4 m (8 ft.) from the system.
●
The power source must provide 120 V AC (single-phase, fused) power at 50-60 Hz and
20 A.
●
A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power.
●
An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used.
The system must be properly grounded before startup (see description in Section 4.2.3.4).
4-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.2
Unpacking the Components
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure
that they are correct and complete.
2.
Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the
proper departments.
3.
Dispose of the packing materials properly.
7
Caution
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment
with visible damage.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-7
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.3
Setting up the System Cabinets
Introduction
The cabinets are not supplied with pre-installed boards. For information on board installation,
please see Section 4.2.5, “Installing Boards (Configuration Notes)”.
If it has been agreed to provide connector panels for connecting peripherals, these are included
in the delivery. For information on the installation procedure, please see Section 4.2.5.3,
“Mounting Connector Panels (if required)”.
The front plastic cover (for board servicing) and the rear plastic cover (for cable servicing) are
not attached to the system cabinets. Both covers are supplied in separate packages.
7
4.2.3.3.1
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to
the grounding point of the electrical building installation before starting the system
and before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
Overview
System configurations
The following setup options are possible for system cabinets:
●
Single cabinet
●
Two cabinets (stacked)
●
Two cabinets (side by side)
4-8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.3.2
7
Setting Up a Single Cabinet
Caution
To guarantee sufficient ventilation for the system cabinet, allow a minimum clearance of 50 mm between the base of the cabinet and the ground.
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Place the system cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and
stable.
2.
Check that the space between the base of the cabinet and the ground is at least
50 mm.
3.
If necessary, set up the basic cabinet in the following way:
●
Unscrew lock nut (Figure 4-1, A) on one of the cabinet feet using an open-end
wrench (wrench size = 13 mm).
●
Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut (Figure 4-1, B)
so that the cabinet is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
●
Fix the cabinet foot in position by tightening the lock nut (Figure 4-1, A).
Basic cabinet setup
A
≥ 50 mm
B
Figure 4-1
HiPath 3800 - Setting Up the Basic Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-9
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.3.3
7
Stacking Two Cabinets
Caution
To guarantee sufficient ventilation for the system cabinets, comply with the following
requirements:
●
The basic cabinet must be set up as the bottom cabinet.
●
Allow a minimum of 50 mm clearance between the base of the cabinet and the
floor, and between basic and expansion cabinets.
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Place the system cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and
stable.
2.
Check that the space between the base of the basic cabinet and the ground is at
least 50 mm.
3.
If necessary, set up the basic cabinet in the following way:
●
Unscrew lock nut (Figure 4-1, A) on one of the cabinet feet using an open-end
wrench (wrench size = 13 mm).
●
Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut (Figure 4-1, B)
so that the cabinet is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
●
Fix the cabinet foot in position by tightening the lock nut (Figure 4-1, A).
4.
Place the expansion cabinet on top of the basic cabinet.
The cabinet feet have indents. When placing the expansion cabinet on top of the
basic cabinet, ensure that these indents are sitting precisely on top of the screw
heads in the four corners of the basic cabinet (Figure 4-2).
5.
Check that the space between the base of the basic cabinet and the ground is at
least 50 mm.
6.
If necessary, set up the expansion cabinet as described in Step 3.
4-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Positioning the cabinet feet
Figure 4-2
HiPath 3800 - Positioning the Cabinet Feet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-11
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Installing a stacked two-cabinet system
≥ 50 mm
≥ 50 mm
Figure 4-3
4-12
HiPath 3800 - Installing a Stacked Two-Cabinet System (Rear View)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.3.4
7
Setting Up a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side
Caution
To guarantee sufficient ventilation in the system cabinets, allow a minimum clearance of 50 mm between the base of the cabinets and the ground.
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Place the system cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and
stable.
2.
Check that the space between the base of the basic cabinet and the ground is at
least 50 mm.
3.
If necessary, set up the basic cabinet in the following way:
●
Unscrew lock nut (Figure 4-1, A) on one of the cabinet feet using an open-end
wrench (wrench size = 13 mm).
●
Adjust the height of the cabinet foot by turning the screw nut (Figure 4-1, B)
so that the cabinet is steady and the minimum clearance is observed.
●
Fix the cabinet foot in position by tightening the lock nut (Figure 4-1, A).
4.
Place the expansion cabinet beside the basic cabinet.
Note: The cabinets can be placed directly beside one another.
5.
Check that the space between the base of the expansion cabinet and the ground
is at least 50 mm.
6.
If necessary, set up the expansion cabinet as described in Step 3 ensuring that
both cabinets are at exactly the same level.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-13
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Installing a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side
≥ 50 mm
Figure 4-4
4-14
HiPath 3800 - Installing a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side (Rear View)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.4
Grounding the System
Ground the system as described.
4.2.3.4.1
Not for U.S.: Grounding the System
Grounding: Grounding options
7
Danger
Each HiPath 3800 system cabinet and all external main distribution frames (for example, MDFU-E) must be grounded as shown in Figure 4-5 by a separate ground
conductor (minimum cross-section = 2.5 mm2). Make sure that the ground conductor
is securely installed and strain-relieved.
If external factors can impact on the ground conductor and if protected installation is
not possible, the ground conductor must have a minimum cross-section of 4 mm2.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.
The illustrations starting with Figure 4-6 show different grounding options.
7
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low-voltage network (230 Vac), you
must hire a licensed electrician to ground the system separately using option 1b
(Figure 4-7).
Note on possible ground loops
>
To avoid ground loops from remotely operated devices (V.24 system peripherals),
the devices should be connected to the same low-voltage network (sub-distribution
board) if possible.
If the building floor plan does not permit this, you may need a line driver to isolate
the external devices in the event of a malfunction.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-15
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Grounding the system(s) and a possible main distribution frame
HiPath 3800, EC (if present)
Attach to the grill using cable ties
to next main distribution frame
(if present)
e. g., MDFU-E
Main distribution frame
(if present)
HiPath 3800, BC
green/yellow
Min. cross-section ≥ 2.5 mm2
Any color, except for green or
yellow to avoid confusion
Min. cross-section ≥ 2.5 mm2
Example Potential equalization bus
but not:
- central heating system
- drain channels
- ground conductor for antenna system
Figure 4-5
4-16
HiPath 3800 - Grounding the System Cabinets and Main Distribution Frame
(nor for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Grounding option 1a
HiPath 3800
Main grounding terminal
green/yellow
Example Potential equalization bus
Figure 4-6
HiPath 3800 - Grounding Option 1a (not for USA)
Grounding option 1b
L1 N PE
230 V ~
Grounding outlets
HiPath 3800
Example Connector
socket
Main grounding
terminal
green/yellow
Figure 4-7
HiPath 3800 - Grounding Option 1b (not for USA)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-17
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.4.2
For U.S. Only: Grounding the System
A connecting cable is used for grounding the system cabinets. The system must also be
grounded by a separate ground conductor. Choose a ground connection with less than 2 ohms
of resistance, such as:
●
Master ground busbar
●
Ground field
●
Copper ground rod
Run a separate earth ground conductor from the earth ground to the cabinet frame ground (located in the lower right corner of the backplane). The minimum cross-section required is
12 AWG.
Figure 4-8 shows the safety conductor connectors for the basic cabinet. An expansion cabinet
requires a separate earth ground.
4-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
HiPath 3800
Connection cable
with plug
AC outlet
Fuse box facility
20 A
120 VAC, 60 Hz
Neutral ground
Main grounding terminal
Recommended: 12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire conductor not exceeding 126 feet in length; blank or green/yellow.
Grounding point (example: Master
ground busbar)
Located in the electrical service
panel providing power to the HiPath 3800 system.
Notes: Single-point ground (SPG) configuration shown.
7
Figure 4-8
DANGER
This wire installation must be completed by a qualified electrician and must
comply with the national and local electrical codes.
HiPath 3800 - Earth ground connection (for U.S. only)
Grounding the Main Distribution Frame
Mount and ground the MDF in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-19
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.3.5
Checking the Grounding
Procedure
Perform the tests in the table below to ensure that the system is properly grounded before startup.
Step
Activity
Target
1.
Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection to
the system:
Perform measurement between the PE (protective
earth) on a socket in the internal installation (at the system’s installation site) and HiPath 3800.
< 10 ohms
Prerequisites:
●
HiPath 3800 is not yet connected to the low-voltage
network via the power cable.
●
The system’s separate grounding is connected.
2.
Check the ohmic resistance between the individual system parts (basic cabinet, expansion cabinet, main distribution frame).
< 1 ohm
Prerequisite:
HiPath 3800 is not yet connected to the low-voltage network via the power cable.
4-20
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.4
Installing HiPath 3800 (19-Inch Cabinet)
This section contains information on how to install the HiPath 3800 communication system in
a 19-inch cabinet. This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment or expansions.
4.2.4.1
Selecting the Installation Site
The installation site is generally determined by the 19-inch cabinet already installed.
The following specifications must be observed when selecting a location:
●
The 19-inch cabinets provided for installing the HiPath 3800 components must have the
following characteristics:
–
Components installed in the 19-inch cabinet must be accessible from both the front
and the rear.
–
It should be possible to install 19-inch components both at the front and at the rear
( four vertical bars).
–
It is recommended that the width of the cabinet measure 700 to 800 mm; the depth at
least 600 mm. Deeper cabinets (800 - 900 mm) make installation, cable servicing, and
the installation of additional components in the rear of the cabinet much easier.
–
The support brackets required for installing the system cabinets must have a minimum
ultimate load of 40 kg. The support brackets must be purchased from the relevant 19inch cabinet supplier.
–
The system cabinets must be fixed to the cabinet bars using the angle brackets included in the delivery.
●
One height unit (one height unit is approx. 1.7” = 43 mm) must be kept clear above the cabinet to accommodate the gray plastic cover (Figure 4-9) attached to the top of the system
cabinets. Never remove this plastic cover.
●
The following minimum clearance must be provided in order to ensure adequate ventilation
of the system cabinets in the 19-inch cabinet (see Figure 4-10):
●
–
three height units between two stacked system cabinets.
–
one height unit above one system cabinet if a patch panel is being installed, for example.
To guarantee sufficient heat dissipation, the basic cabinet must be mounted at the lowest
position in a 19-inch cabinet. In a 19-inch cabinet with active (heat-emitting) components
already installed, the lowest position must be cleared for installation of the basic cabinet. If
inactive components (e.g. patch panel) are involved, the basic cabinet can also be installed
above them.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-21
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Figure 4-9
HiPath 3800 - System Cabinet with Plastic Cover
●
Do not expose the 19-inch cabinet to direct sources of heat (such as sunlight and heaters.).
●
Do not expose the 19-inch cabinet to extremely dusty environments.
●
Avoid contact with chemicals.
●
Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during operation. Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used.
●
Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2.9.
Information on the design of the HiPath 3800 can be found in Section 2.2.2.1.
4-22
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Examples for installation in a 19-inch cabinet
7
Caution
The height units represented in yellow in Figure 4-10 must be kept clear to ensure
adequate ventilation of the system cabinets.
Examples of a 19-inch cabinet height of 1.92 m with 37 height units
Patch Panel
HiPath 3800
Expansion cabinet
Patch Panel
HiPath 3800
Basic cabinet
Figure 4-10
HiPath 3800
Basic cabinet
HiPath 3800 - Installation Examples in the 19-Inch Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-23
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.4.1.1
For U.S. only: AC outlet
An AC connection is required for each cabinet. The AC connection must fulfill the requirements
specified in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3
Electrical Connection Values (USA only)
Nominal
voltage
120 V AC/
60 Hz
Nominal voltage range
Nominal Frequency
Range
from
to
from
to
110 V AC
130 V AC
47 Hz
63 Hz
Wall Outlet Configurations
NEMA 5-15, 2-pin, 3wire, earth
The system must be properly grounded before startup (see description in Section 4.2.4.4).
4.2.4.2
Unpacking the Components
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure
that they are correct and complete.
2.
Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the
proper departments.
3.
Dispose of the packing materials properly.
7
4-24
Caution
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment
with visible damage.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.4.3
Mounting System Cabinets in the 19-Inch Cabinet
Introduction
The cabinets are not supplied with pre-installed boards. For information on board installation,
please see Section 4.2.5, “Installing Boards (Configuration Notes)”.
If it has been agreed to provide connector panels for connecting peripherals, these are included
in the delivery. For information on the installation procedure, please see Section 4.2.5.3,
“Mounting Connector Panels (if required)”.
7
4.2.4.3.1
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to
the grounding point of the electrical building installation before starting the system
and before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
Mounting a System Cabinet using Support and Angle Brackets
If a two-cabinet system is to be installed in a 19-inch cabinet, each system cabinet should be
installed separately.
The following components are required to install a system cabinet:
●
Two cabinet-specific support brackets with an ultimate load > 40 kg, which must be provided by the 19-inch cabinet supplier.
●
Two angle brackets (order no. C39165-A7075-D1), which are supplied with the system
cabinet.
7
Caution
To guarantee sufficient ventilation for the system cabinets, comply with the following
requirements:
●
The basic cabinet may only be mounted at the lowest position in a 19-inch cabinet. In a 19-inch cabinet with active (heat-emitting) components already installed, the lowest position must be cleared for installation of the basic cabinet.
If inactive components (e.g. patch panel) are involved, the basic cabinet can
also be installed above them.
●
A minimum clearance of three height units must be maintained between two
stacked system cabinets. A minimum clearance of one free height unit above a
system cabinet is sufficient if a patch panel is to be installed, for example.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-25
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Procedure
7
Warning
Never attempt to lift a system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet without assistance.
Step
Activity
1.
Remove all four cabinet feet from the system cabinet.
To do this, unscrew the lock nuts (Figure 4-11, A) on the cabinet feet using an
open-end wrench (wrench size = 13 mm). Unscrew cabinet feet completely.
2.
Attach the two angle brackets (A in Figure 4-12) to the sides of the system cabinet
using the screws that have been supplied (four per bracket).
3.
Attach a right-handed and a left-handed support bracket (B in Figure 4-12) in the
19-inch cabinet using the screws provided.
Note: the use of cabinet floors is not permitted to prevent overheating.
4.
Lift the system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet and sit the cabinet on the two support brackets (B in Figure 4-12). Slide the cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet until the
front edge of the system cabinet is flush with the front of the 19-inch frame.
5.
Secure the system cabinet using the two angle brackets (A, in Figure 4-12) on the
frame of the 19-inch cabinet using the screws provided.
Please note that a minimum clearance of three height units must be observed between two stacked system cabinets. A minimum clearance of one free height unit
above a system cabinet is sufficient if a patch panel is to be installed, for example.
6.
Repeat steps 1 to 5 if you want to install an expansion cabinet.
A
Figure 4-11
4-26
HiPath 3800 - Removing Cabinet Feet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Installation in the 19-inch cabinet
A
B
A
B
Figure 4-12
HiPath 3800 - Installing System Cabinets in 19-Inch Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-27
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.4.4
Grounding the System
Ground the system as described.
Grounding: Inspection and Implementation
Preliminary Inspection of the 19-Inch Cabinet:
Is the 19-inch cabinet grounded
by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow)?
NO
The 19-inch cabinet must be grounded by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow).
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the
low-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a licensed electrician to install the ground.
NO
A potential equalization bus must be installed in
the 19-inch cabinet and connected to the ground
conductor.
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the
low-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a licensed electrician to install the ground.
YES
Does the 19-inch cabinet have
a potential equalization bus at
which the HiPath 3800 can be
grounded as shown in Figure 413 ?
YES
If you answer “Yes” to both questions, the system (system cabinets, patch panels) may be
grounded as described below.
7
4-28
Danger
Each HiPath 3800 system cabinet and any patch panel (S30807-K6143-X) that may
be installed must be grounded as shown in Figure 4-13 by a separate ground conductor (minimum cross-section = 2.5 mm2). Make sure that the ground conductor is
securely installed and strain-relieved.
If external factors can impact on the ground conductor and if protected installation is
not possible, the ground conductor must have a minimum cross-section of 4 mm2.
Please note:
The 19-inch cabinet’s potential equalization bus may only be used if it is grounded
by a separate ground conductor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Grounding the system cabinets and possible patch panels
To other patch panels S30807-K6143-X (if
present)
(A ground conductor is not required for the S0
patch panel S30807-K6143-X.)
HiPath 3800, EC (if present)
Attach to the grill using
cable ties
HiPath 3800, BC
green/yellow
Min. cross-section ≥ 2.5 mm2
Patch Panel
(if present)
for example, Patch Panel
S30807-K6143-X
Any color, except for green or
yellow to avoid confusion
Min. cross-section ≥ 2.5 mm2
Potential equalization bus,
in 19" cabinet for example
Figure 4-13
HiPath 3800- Grounding the Systems and Patch Panels in a 19-Inch Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-29
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Note on possible ground loops
>
To avoid ground loops from remotely operated devices (V.24 system peripherals),
the devices should be connected to the same low-voltage network (sub-distribution
board) if possible.
If the building floor plan does not permit this, you may need a line driver to isolate
the external devices in the event of a malfunction.
4.2.4.5
Checking the Grounding
Procedure
Perform the tests in the table below to ensure that the system is properly grounded before startup.
Step
Activity
Target
1.
Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection to
the 19-inch cabinet:
Perform measurement between the PE (protective
earth) on a socket in the internal installation (at the system’s installation site) and HiPath 3800.
< 10 ohms
Prerequisites:
●
No device in the 19-inch cabinet is connected to the
low-voltage network via the power cable.
●
The system’s separate grounding (basic cabinet, expansion cabinet, patch panel) and the grounding of
the 19-inch cabinet are connected.
2.
Check the ohmic resistance between the individual system parts (basic cabinet, expansion cabinet, patch panel).
< 1 ohm
Prerequisite:
HiPath 3800 is not yet connected to the low-voltage network via the power cable.
4-30
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.5
7
Installing Boards (Configuration Notes)
Caution
Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially when
handling boards).
Introduction
The cabinet(s) are not supplied with pre-installed boards. Install the boards as described in the
following information.
7
4.2.5.1
Caution
●
To ensure that the system operates without blocking, you must follow the instructions in Section 4.2.5.6 concerning PCM highway distribution.
●
For thermal reasons the IVMNL board may only be installed in the basic cabinet.
Board Slots in the Basic and Expansion Cabinet
There are nine slots available in the basic cabinet BC (slots 1 to 5 and slots 7 to 10) and thirteen
in the expansion cabinet EC (slots 1 to 6 and slots 8 to 14) for peripheral boards.
The central control board CBSAP has a fixed slot (slot 6, only in the basic cabinet BC).
Depending on your requirements, up to three LUNA2 power supply units can be used in the
basic cabinet BC and up to four in the expansion cabinet EC.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-31
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Figure 4-14
4-32
HiPath 3800 - Board Slots in the Basic Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Not used
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Figure 4-15
HiPath 3800 - Board Slots in the Expansion Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-33
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.5.2
7
Inserting or Removing Boards
Caution
Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially when
handling boards).
Observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (see Page 19).
Introduction
Peripheral boards can be inserted and removed while the power is connected. Always use the
board wrench provided for removing and inserting boards.
See Section 9.2.1 for information on upgrading peripheral boards.
Procedure for inserting and removing the boards
If
Then
Board is to Insert the tip of the board wrench marked “Pull” into the top opening on the front
be recover of the board to be removed.
moved. Lever the board out of the shelf by pushing the board wrench upwards (Figure 416, left).
Then you can pull the module out of the system cabinet over the guide rails.
Board is to Using its guide rails slide the board into the system cabinet until it stops.
be added. Insert the tip of the board wrench marked “Plug In” into the bottom opening in the
front cover of the board.
Lever the board into the shelf of the cabinet by pushing the board wrench upwards (Figure 4-16, right).
4-34
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Removing a board
Figure 4-16
Inserting a board
HiPath 3800 - Removing/Inserting the Board Using the Board Wrench
Installing shielding covers
In order to guarantee adequate shielding, a shielding cover (C39165-A7075-B15) must be installed for boards with no connection options in the front panel. To do this, insert the two bottom
pins on the shielding cover into the openings provided for this purpose on the slide-in shelf.
Then push the shielding cover in the direction of the board until it locks into position (refer to
Figure 4-17).
Empty board slots must also be covered with shielding covers.
Figure 4-17
Installing the Board Shielding Cover
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-35
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Boards that can be connected from the front have a specially shielded front cover. An additional
cover is not required.
Special board attachments
●
DBSAP
The DBSAP board is plugged into four socket contacts on the backplane of the expansion
cabinet and fixed with screws.
●
LUNA2
Depending on the system configuration up to three LUNA2 modules can be used in the basic cabinet and up to four LUNA2 modules can be used in the expansion cabinet. For information on how to calculate the number of LUNA2 modules required, see the LUNA2
board description.
Push the LUNA2 power supply unit into the slots provided in the lower part of the system
cabinet shelf until you hear a click.
Removal tab
You can use a screwdriver here to remove
the LUNA2 from the
shelf.
Figure 4-18
HiPath 3800 - Installing the LUNA2 Power Supply Unit
The slots for the power supply units must be covered with an outer panel before the system
is started up. The outer panel is fixed onto the shelf with screws (see Figure 4-19 and
Figure 4-20).
4-36
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Fixing screws
Figure 4-19
HiPath 3800 - Slots for LUNA2 and REALS in the Basic Cabinet (With Outer Panel Mounted)
Fixing screws
Figure 4-20
HiPath 3800 - Slots for LUNA2 in the Expansion Cabinet (With Outer Panel
Mounted)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-37
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
●
REALS
Insert the REALS board into the slot marked 3 in the lower part of the shelf in the basic
cabinet and apply pressure until you hear a click.
Figure 4-21
HiPath 3800 - Installing the REALS Board
The slots for the power supply units and for the REALS board must be covered with an outer panel before the system is started up. The outer panel is fixed onto the shelf with screws
(see Figure 4-19).
4-38
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.5.3
Mounting Connector Panels (if required)
The HiPath 3800 has various connection options for connecting the peripherals. If you intend
to use connector panels, mount the panels supplied as follows:
If
Connector panels
with RJ45 jacks
(see
Section 4.2.6.5)
Then
Slot with
STMD3
Attach a connector panel with 8 RJ45 jacks (S30807Q6624-X) to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane.
Slot with
SLCN
SLMA
SLMA8
SLMO2
SLMO8
TM2LP
TMC161
TMDID1
Attach a connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks (S30807Q6622-X) to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane.
different or no as- Use filler panels to cover the backplane sections of
signment
other boards and empty board slots.
For U.S. only:
Connector panels
with CHAMP jack
(see
Section 4.2.6.6)
Slot with
SLMA
SLMA8
SLMO2
SLMO8
STMD3
TM2LP
TMC161
TMDID1
Attach a connector panel with CHAMP jacks (S30807Q6626-X) to the SIVAPAC connector on the backplane.
different or no as- Use filler panels to cover the backplane sections of
signment
other boards and empty board slots.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-39
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
If
Connector panels
with SIPAC 1 SU
connectors
(see
Section 4.2.6.7)
Then
Slot with
SLCN
SLMA
SLMA8
SLMO2
SLMO8
STMD3
TM2LP
TMC161
TMDID1
Plug a connector panel with SIPAC 1 SU connectors
(S30807-Q6631-X) into the SIVAPAC connector on
the backplane.
different or no as- Use filler panels to cover the backplane sections of
signment
other boards and empty board slots.
1
For U.S. only
4-40
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.5.4
Installing the SIVAPAC-SIPAC Board Adapter
The peripheral board slots on the HiPath 3800 are fitted with SIPAC 9 SU connectors. The
TMEW2 and TMDID (for U.S. only) boards have SIVAPAC connector strips and as a result,
SIVAPAC-SIPAC board adapters have to be installed in order to use them in HiPath 3800.
The SIVAPAC-SIPAC board adapter consists of three individual parts (refer to Figure 4-22):
●
two adapter modules
●
one startup module
Adapter modules
Startup module
Component
side
board
Figure 4-22
SIVAPAC-SIPAC Board Adapter
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-41
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Procedure: Installing the SIVAPAC-SIPAC Board Adapter
Step
Activity
1.
Rotate the board so that the backplane connector is pointing towards you.
2.
Carefully pull the locking hooks (Figure 4-23, A) on an adapter module apart.
3.
Align the adapter module on the connector strip (Figure 4-23, B) of the board. The
outside edges of the adapter module must match the outside edges of the connector
strip.
4.
Make sure that the outermost row of pins on the adapter module and the outermost
row of jacks on the connector strip are aligned flush with one another and press the
adapter module fully into the connector strip.
5.
Close the locking hooks.
6.
Repeat steps 2 to 5 to install the second adapter module.
7.
Plug the startup module (Figure 4-23, C,) into the hotplug connector on the board.
A
A
B
B
C
Figure 4-23
4-42
Installing the SIVAPAC-SIPAC Board Adapter
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Replacing the Board Lock
Install the board adapter increases the board length. The boards jut out slightly from the board
shelf. To ensure that these boards can still snap into place in spite of the board adapter, the
upper black lock must be replaced with a gray lock.
Black and gray board locks
Figure 4-24
Remove the black lock
Replacing the Board Lock
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-43
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.5.5
Initializing the Boards
The system software detects the boards in ascending order, starting with the lowest installation
position the first time the system starts up. The system initializes subscriber line circuits and
ports in the sequence indicated by the arrow (Figure 4-25).
The system activates all connected boards in the following situations:
●
The maximum configuration has not yet been reached. While sequentially scanning the
slots for each board, the system software checks whether the maximum number of stations
or trunks has been exceeded. If it has, the board is not activated. The board LED shows
the board’s status.
●
At least one B channel on line trunk modules is available for the slot (only the available
number of B channels is activated).
Assignment of subscriber line circuits and ports
Expansion cabinet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14
Basic cabinet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
C
B
S
A
P
Figure 4-25
4-44
HiPath 3800 - Initialization of Subscriber Line Circuits and Ports
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.5.6
Distribution of the PCM Highway
HiPath 3800 provides PCM highway bundles with 2 x 4 PCM highways for each peripheral
board slot. There are 32 time-division multiplex channels available for each PCM highway.
Blockages occur if these are busy. The system cannot execute any more call requests.
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, make sure when performing configuration that the boards on a PCM segment do not require more than the number of time-division
multiplex channels available. The following figures show the PCM highways for both system
cabinets of the HiPath 3800.
Basic cabinet: PCM highways
PCM highway bundle A
with 2 x 4 PCM highways
PCM highway bundle F
with 2 x 4 PCM highways
HDLC
Figure 4-26
HiPath 3800 - PCM Highways in the Basic Cabinet
The basic cabinet provides two PCM highway bundles with 2 x 4 PCM highways each. There
are 32 time-division multiplex channels available for each PCM highway.
The PCM highway bundles in the basic cabinet are used by peripheral boards according to the
following rules:
●
Single-cabinet system (basic cabinet only)
With the exception of boards DIUN2, DIU2U (for U.S. only), IVMNL, IVMN8 and STMI2, the
peripheral boards only use the PCM highways of bundle A:
–
PCM segment for board slots 1 – 5 = 128 time-division multiplex channels (four PCM
highways)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-45
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
–
PCM segment for board slots 7 – 10 = 128 time-division multiplex channels (four PCM
highways)
DIUN2, DIU2U (for U.S. only), IVMNL, IVMN8 and STMI2 use the PCM highways from bundle F. Thus there are an additional 128 time-division multiplex channels available for slots
1 – 5 and for slots 7 – 10 for these boards.
If more than the 2 x 128 time-division multiplex channels from bundle F are required because of the configuration with these boards, the system will automatically resort to timedivision multiplex channels from bundle A.
●
Two-cabinet system (basic cabinet + expansion cabinet)
All peripheral boards use the PCM highways from bundle A only.
Expansion cabinet: PCM highways
PCM highway bundle A
with 2 x 4 PCM highways
Connection to the PCM highway
bundle F in the basic cabinet
PCM highway bundle F
(not used)
HDLC connection to the basic cabinet
HDLC
Figure 4-27
HiPath 3800 - PCM Highways in the Expansion Cabinet
The expansion cabinet provides a PCM highway bundle with 2 x 4 PCM highways. There are
32 time-division multiplex channels available for each PCM highway.
●
PCM segment for board slots 1 – 6 = 128 time-division multiplex channels (four PCM highways)
●
PCM segment for board slots 8 – 14 = 128 time-division multiplex channels (four PCM highways)
PCM highway bundle F is not used.
4-46
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Time-division multiplex channels for peripheral boards
The following table lists the number of time-division multiplex channels that the different boards
require.
Table 4-4
Maximum Number of Time-Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board
Board
Maximum number of time-division multiplex channels required
DIU2U
60
DIUN2
60
IVMN8
8
IVMNL
24
SLCN
641
SLMA
242
SLMA8
82
SLMO2
482 3
SLMO8
162 3
STMD3
16
STMI2
STMI2 +
32
PDMX4
64
TM2LP
8
TMC16
16
TMDID
8
TMEW2
4
1
2
3
4
A time-division multiplex channel is required if a call is being conducted over the “home SLCN board” of a mobile telephone. If a call is being conducted over a “Current location SLCN board”, additional time-division multiplex channels will
be required. More information is provided in Section 11.6, “Multi-SLC and System-Wide Networking”.
The current number of time-division multiplex channels required is determined by the number of active stations.
The maximum number of masters and slaves possible is taken into consideration.
PDMX is not currently released.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-47
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.5.7
Static Traffic Capacity
The static traffic capacity of the HiPath 3800 system can be determined as follows.
Table 4-5
HiPath 3800 - Static Traffic Capacity
HiPath 3800
Single-cabinet system
(see Page 4-45)
Two-cabinet system
(see Page 4-46)
1
Slots per PCM segment
Static traffic capac- Total static traffic
ity per PCM segcapacity of the
ment
system
1–5
128 erlangs +
(128 erlangs1)
7 – 10
128 erlangs +
(128 erlangs1)
1–5
128 erlangs
7 – 10
128 erlangs
11 – 16
128 erlangs
18 – 24
128 erlangs
512 erlangs
512 erlangs
The basic cabinet provides two PCM highway bundles with 2 x 4 PCM highways each. DIUN2, DIU2U (for U.S. only),
IVMNL, IVMN8 and STMI2 use the PCM highways from bundle F. Thus there are an additional 128 time-division
multiplex channels available for slots 1 – 5 and for slots 7 – 10 for these boards in the basic cabinet. If HiPath 3800
is used as a two-cabinet system, a use of PCM highway bundle F is not possible.
4-48
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.6
>
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane
All cables that leave the system cabinet must be attached to the metal back panel
using cable ties.
Connection options
Peripheral devices can be connected up to the HiPath 3800 in a number of different ways:
●
SIVAPAC connector on the backplane for connecting the external main distribution frame
via CABLUs (prefabricated cabling units) or for connecting external patch panels (see
Section 4.2.6.4).
●
Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for direct connection of peripherals (see
Section 4.2.6.5). The connector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the
backplane.
●
For U.S. Only: Connector panels with CHAMP jack for direct connection of peripherals (see
Section 4.2.6.6). The connector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the
backplane.
●
Connector panels each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting the external mail
distribution frame MDFU-E or external patch panels using CABLUs (see Section 4.2.6.7).
The connector panels are clipped onto the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane.
The type of connection used will be decided in consultation with the customer on conclusion of
the agreement. The cabinets will be delivered accordingly with or without clipped-on connector
panels.
7
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to
the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-49
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.6.1
Backplane of the Basic Cabinet
9 SIVAPAC connector for peripherals
AC port
DC port
68-pin DB68 minijack (connection to
EC)
Figure 4-28
4-50
HiPath 3800 - Backplane (S30804-Q5392-X) of the Basic Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
X101
X102
X103
X104
X105
X212
X116
X209
X201
X109
X110
X111
X112
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
X211
Figure 4-29
HiPath 3800 - Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Basic Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-51
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Table 4-6
HiPath 3800 - Assignment of Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the
Basic Cabinet
Connector
Function
X101 – X105 SIVAPAC connector for connecting peripherals:
X109 – X112 CABLUs and open-end cables are used for connection to the MDFU-E or to
an external patch panel (see Section 4.2.6.4).
Note: The SIVAPAC connectors can have the following connector panels:
●
Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for direct connection of peripherals
(see Section 4.2.6.5).
●
For U.S. only: Connector panels with CHAMP jack for direct connection
of peripherals (see Section 4.2.6.6).
●
Connector panels each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting
an external main distribution frame or external patch panel using CABLUs
(see Section 4.2.6.7).
X116
SIVAPAC connectors for picking up the signals from the REALS board.
CABLUs for connection to the MDFU-E (jumper strip for 25 TW):
●
C39195-A7267-A372: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-36)
●
C39195-A7267-A373: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-36)
Open-end cable (24 TW) for connection to an external patch panel:
●
S30267-Z196-A150: 15 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A250: 25 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A350: 35 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A550: 55 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A950: 95 m in length
X201
68-pin DB68 mini-jack for connecting the cable C39195-Z7611-A10 to the expansion cabinet (for the DBSAP board)
X209
DC port
X211, X212
4-52
AC power
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Expansion Cabinet Backplane
Figure 4-30
DBSAP with 68-pin
DB68 mini-jack (connection to BC)
AC port
DC port
13 SIVAPAC connectors
for peripheral boards
4.2.6.2
HiPath 3800 - Expansion Cabinet Backplane (S30804-Q5393-X)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-53
inst_h3.fm
X101
X102
X211
X209
X103
X104
X105
X106
X223
X220 –
X109
X110
X111
X210
X112
X113
X114
X115
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Figure 4-31
4-54
HiPath 3800 - Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the Expansion Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Table 4-7
HiPath 3800 - Assignment of Connectors and Jacks on the Backplane of the
Expansion Cabinet
Connector
Function
X101 – X106 SIVAPAC connector for connecting peripherals:
X109 – X115 CABLUs and open-end cables are used for connection to the MDFU-E or to
an external patch panel (see Section 4.2.6.4).
Note: The SIVAPAC connectors can have the following connector panels:
●
Connector panels with RJ45 jacks for direct connection of peripherals
(see Section 4.2.6.5).
●
For U.S. only: Connector panels with CHAMP jack for direct connection of
peripherals (see Section 4.2.6.6).
●
Connector panels each with two SIPAC 1 SU connectors for connecting
an external main distribution frame or external patch panel using CABLUs
(see Section 4.2.6.7).
X209, X210
X211
DC port
AC power
X220 – X223 Connections for plugging in the DBSAP board.
DBSAP has a 68-pin DB68 mini-jack for connecting the cable C39195-Z761110 to the basic cabinet (to the jack X201).
4.2.6.3
Connecting Cables Between the Basic and Expansion Cabinet
The connection cable C39195-Z7611-A10 has to be connected up for feeding the HDLC, PCM,
and clock signals from the basic cabinet to the expansion cabinet:
●
Basic cabinet = X201 jack
●
Expansion cabinet = DBSAP board
>
To ensure smooth operation, use only shielded cables with a maximum length of
1 m.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-55
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.6.4
Connecting Peripherals to the SIVAPAC Connector on the Backplane
The boards should be installed in the cabinets as described in Section 4.2.5.
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to
the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
7
Use the CABLUs (prefabricated cabling units) that are listed in the following table to establish
the connection with the MDFU-E. Open-end cables must be used if an external patch panel is
being used. See also Section 4.2.7, “Using an External Main Distribution Frame or External
Patch Panel”.
CABLUs and open-end cables for SIVAPAC connectors
If
Then
Slot with
SLCN
SLMA8
SLMO8
STMD3
TM2LP
TMC16 1
TMDID1
CABLUs for connection between backplane (SIVAPAC connector) and
MDFU-E (splitting strip for 16 TW):
●
C39195-A7267-A370: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-36)
●
C39195-A7267-A371: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-36)
CABLU for connection between backplane (SIVAPAC connectors) and external patch panel S30807-K6143-X (SIVAPAC socket terminal strip):
●
S30267-Z333-A20: 2 m in length (refer to Figure 4-42)
●
S30267-Z333-A50: 5 m in length (refer to Figure 4-42)
Open-end cable (24 TW) for connection between backplane (SIVAPAC connector) and external patch panel:
●
S30267-Z196-A150: 15 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A250: 25 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A350: 35 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A550: 55 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A950: 95 m in length
4-56
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
1
If
Then
Slot with
SLMA
SLMO2
CABLUs for connection between backplane (SIVAPAC connector) and
MDFU-E (jumper strip for 25 TW):
●
C39195-A7267-A372: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-36)
●
C39195-A7267-A373: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-36)
CABLU for connection between backplane (SIVAPAC connectors) and external patch panel S30807-K6143-X (SIVAPAC socket terminal strip):
●
S30267-Z333-A20: 2 m in length (refer to Figure 4-42)
●
S30267-Z333-A50: 5 m in length (refer to Figure 4-42)
Open-end cable (24 TW) for connection between backplane (SIVAPAC connector) and external patch panel:
●
S30267-Z196-A150: 15 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A250: 25 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A350: 35 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A550: 55 m in length
●
S30267-Z196-A950: 95 m in length
For U.S. only
Information on cable and connector assignment is provided in the board descriptions in
Chapter 3.
Closing the backplane of the system cabinets
>
After the cable has been connected, the backplane of the basic cabinet and that of
the expansion cabinet (if applicable) must be closed with the dummy panels provided (C39165-A7075-C44).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-57
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Figure 4-32
4-58
HiPath 3800 - Backplane of the Basic Cabinet with Mounted Filler Panels
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.6.5
Connecting Peripherals to the Connector Panels with RJ45 Jacks
The boards should be installed in the cabinets as described in Section 4.2.5. The connector
panels plugged into the SIVAPAC connectors of the backplane are equipped with eight or 24
RJ45 jacks according to the relevant board.
Connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks
Connector panel with eight RJ45 jacks
8-pin RJ45 jack
8
Figure 4-33
1
HiPath 3800 - connector panels with RJ45 Jacks
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to
the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
7
Connect the peripheral directly to the 8-pin RJ45 jacks on the connector panels.
If
Then
Slot with
STMD3
Connector panel with eight RJ45 jacks: S30807-Q6624-X
The RJ45 jacks are configured with four wires. S0 stations can be directly
connected (1:1 cable). The receive and send lines should be switched for
trunk connections.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-59
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
If
Slot with
SLCN
SLMA
SLMA8
SLMO2
SLMO8
TM2LP
TMC161
TMDID1
different or no
assignment
1
Then
Connector panel with 24 RJ45 jacks: S30807-Q6622-X
The RJ45 jacks are configured with two wires.
The backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots must be covered with filler panels.
For U.S. only
Information on cable and connector assignment is provided in the board descriptions in
Chapter 3.
4-60
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.6.6
For U.S. only: Connecting Peripherals to the Connector Panels with CHAMP
Jack
The boards should be installed in the cabinets as described in Section 4.2.5. The S30807Q6626-X connector panels attached to the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane are
equipped with a CHAMP jack.
Figure 4-34
HiPath 3800 - Connector Panel with CHAMP Jack (for U.S. only)
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to
the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
7
Connect the peripheral directly to the CHAMP jack in the connector panels.
If
Then
Slot with periph- A cable with CHAP jack should be used to connect to a main distributor
eral card
frame or external patch panel.
No assignment The backplane sections with empty board slots must be covered with filler
panels.
Information on cable and connector assignment is provided in the board descriptions in
Chapter 3.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-61
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.6.7
Connecting Peripherals to the Connector Panels with SIPAC 1 SU
Connectors
The boards should be installed in the cabinets as described in Section 4.2.5. The S30807Q6631-X connector panels attached to the SIVAPAC connectors on the backplane have two
SIPAC 1 SU connectors each.
Cables and connectors for ports 17 - 24
Cables and connectors for ports 1 - 16
Figure 4-35
7
HiPath 3800 - Connector Panel with Two SIPAC 1 SU Connectors (S30807Q6631-X)
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets to
the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
Use the CABLUs that are listed in the following table to establish the connection with the
MDFU-E or an external patch panel. See also Section 4.2.7, “Using an External Main Distribution Frame or External Patch Panel”.
In special cases where the prefabricated CABLUs cannot be used, open-end cables should be
used.
4-62
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
CABLUs and open-end cables for SIPAC 1 SU connectors
1
If
Then
Slot with
SLCN
SLMA8
SLMO8
STMD3
TM2LP
TMC16 1
TMDID1
CABLUs for connection between connector panel (SIPAC 1 SU connectors)
and MDFU-E (splitting strip for 16 TW):
●
S30269-Z100-A11: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-36)
●
S30269-Z100-A21: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-36)
CABLU with 16 TW for connection between connector panel (SIPAC 1 SU
connectors) and external patch panel S30807-K6143-X (SIVAPAC socket
terminal strip):
●
S30267-Z362-A20: 2 m in length (refer to Figure 4-42)
Open-end cable (16 TW) for connection between backplane (SIPAC 1 SU
connectors) and external patch panel:
●
S30267-Z192-A60: Open-end cable with 16 TW, 6 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A100: Open-end cable with 16 TW, 10 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A200: Open-end cable with 16 TW, 20 m in length
(Information on the required stripped lengths for open-end cables is
provided in Figure 4-47.)
Slot with
SLMA
SLMO2
CABLUs for connection between connector panel (SIPAC 1 SU connectors)
and MDFU-E (jumper strip for 25 TW):
●
S30269-Z100-A14: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-36)
●
S30269-Z100-A24: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-36)
CABLU with 24 TW for connection between connector panel (SIPAC 1 SU
connectors) and external patch panel S30807-K6143-X (SIVAPAC socket
terminal strip):
●
S30267-Z363-A20: 2 m in length (refer to Figure 4-42)
Open-end cable (16 TW) for connection between backplane (SIPAC 1 SU
connectors) and external patch panel:
●
S30267-Z192-A60: Open-end cable with 16 TW, 6 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A100: Open-end cable with 16 TW, 10 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A200: Open-end cable with 16 TW, 20 m in length
(Information on the required stripped lengths for open-end cables is
provided in Figure 4-47.)
different or no
assignment
The backplane sections of other boards and empty board slots must be covered with filler panels.
For U.S. only
Information on cable and connector assignment is provided in the board descriptions in
Chapter 3.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-63
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7
Using an External Main Distribution Frame or External Patch
Panel
The HiPath 3800 has various connection options for connecting the peripherals. The type of
connection used will be decided in consultation with the customer on conclusion of the agreement. This may involve the implementation of an external main distribution frame or an external
patch panel.
This section contains information on the following external components:
●
Main distribution frame MDFU-E, Section 4.2.7.1
●
Patch panel S30807-K6143-X, Section 4.2.7.2
●
S0 patch panel C39104-Z7001-B3, Section 4.2.7.3
●
For U.S. only: Connecting Network Facilities, Section 4.2.7.4
4-64
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.1
Using an External Main Distribution Frame MDFU-E S30805-U5283-X
For U.S. only:
328.8 mm
1
2
3
4
Jumpering
Channel
669.0 mm
5
6
21 slots (9 x 30 mm)
19
20
21
Special built-in
comps.
2 x PFT1
or
System side
Figure 4-36
Line network
MDFU-E - Layout and Dimensions (669.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm)
Not more than 21 CABLUs per MDFU-E with one 16-TW strip or 25-TW strip (9 x 30 mm) can
be implemented.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-65
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.1.1
Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (MDFU-E)
The MDFU-E main distribution frame should be installed in the direct vicinity of the system
(note length of connection cable) and at eye level.
The packing material contains a drawing that can be used as a drilling template.
Procedure for wall mounting
Step
Activity
1.
Use the template to drill the holes.
2.
Insert the wall anchors and screw in the screws, leaving 5 mm projecting.
3.
Remove the housing cover and mount the MDFU-E on the brackets.
4.
Tighten the screws through the holes.
4.2.7.1.2
7
Laying the Line Network and Jumpers on the MDFU-E
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets and
all main distribution frames to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
Jumpers, external line network
Most main distribution frames do not have an external side. You must jumper them to the incoming line network (see jumpering duct, Figure 4-36). Use a standard wiring tool for laying the
cable wires.
Surge protector
To divert surges caused by lightning, insert surge protectors on
●
lines that leave the system buildings (outside stations)
●
lines > 500 m long.
Connect the polarized surge protectors to the plugging locations on the splitting strip described
above (see Figure 4-38).
4-66
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Splitting and jumper strips
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
E = Receive
S = Transmit
1Ea 1Sa
1Eb 1Sb
a
1
2
b
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
b
S0 bus 8
S0 bus 1 ...
Splitting strip for 16 TW (C39334-A166-A1)
a
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
Jumper strip for 25 TW (C39334-A166-A3)
Figure 4-37
15
17
19
21
23
25
b
No. 25 not used
Assignment (Numbering) of the Splitting/Jumper Strips (view from above)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-67
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Stripping the open-end cable for the MDFU-E
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
1
1
2
3
2
Example for connecting
3
the wires
4
4
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
13
14
13
View from below
14
15
15
16
16
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
View from above (surge
protector plug locations)
Cable with film sheath: No. 6 (conductive copper tape) 1.5 windings. Ground wire
shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape (1).
Stripped length
250 ± 5
Stripped length = 600 ± 5 mm
(1)
Stripped length = 910 ± 5 mm for
MDFU-E slots 1 to 10
Velcro tape (19 mm wide)
Bundle fastener
Figure 4-38
4-68
Stripping an Open-End Cable for the MDFU-E
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Color Codes for the Open-End Cable
Table 4-8
Color Codes for the Open-End Cable
Color Group
Pair
1
1
a-Wire
(Tip)
wht/blu
b-Wire
(Ring)
Color Group
Pair
4
16
a-Wire
(Tip)
yel/blu
blu/wht
2
blu/yel
wht/ora
17
yel/ora
ora/wht
3
ora/yel
wht/grn
18
yel/grn
grn/wht
4
grn/yel
wht/brn
19
yel/brn
brn/wht
5
brn/yel
wht/gry
20
yel/gry
gry/wht
2
6
red/blu
gry/yel
5
21
vio/blu
blu/red
7
red/ora
blu/vio
22
vio/ora
ora/red
8
red/grn
ora/vio
23
vio/grn
grn/red
9
red/brn
b-Wire
(Ring)
grn/vio
24
vio/brn
brn/red
3
10
red/gry
11
blk/blu
brn/vio
Note: In the case of cables with 16 double
wires,
the specifications for pairs 17 to 24 are
gry/red
not relevant.
blu/blk
12
blk/ora
ora/blk
13
blk/grn
grn/blk
14
blk/brn
brn/blk
15
blk/gry
gry/blk
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-69
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.2
Inserting the External Patch Panel S30807K6143-X
Structure
>
All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties.
SIVAPAC edge connector: port for
CABLU connection to the backplane
Eight surge protector plug locations
Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks
MW8 jack assignment:
4 = a-wire
5 = b-wire
8
1
Necessary height units for 19-inch cabinet assembly: 1
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
Figure 4-39
4-70
Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.2.1
Installing the Patch Panel in a 19-Inch Cabinet
Installation procedure
7
Caution
The patch panel must be installed above the system cabinet.
A minimum of one height unit must be kept clear above the cabinet to guarantee sufficient ventilation of the system cabinet. This is achieved by the gray plastic cover
fixed to the top of the system cabinets. Never remove this plastic cover.
Insert the patch panel (A, in Figure 4-40) above the system cabinet and secure it to the 19-inch
frame on both the left and the right using two screws on each side.
A
B
Figure 4-40
Installing the External Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-71
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.2.2
7
Connecting the Line Network to the External Patch Panel
Danger
Be sure to connect the main protective earthing terminal on all system cabinets and
all patch panels to the grounding point of the electrical building installation before
connecting up the peripherals (for example, potential equalization bus).
Telephones and trunks are connected directly to the MW8 jack on the front of the patch panel.
Information on MW8 jack assignment on the front of the patch panel is provided in the board
descriptions (in the “Cable and Connector Assignment” table) in Chapter 3.
Surge protector
To divert surges caused by lightning, insert surge protectors on
●
lines that leave the system buildings (outside stations)
●
lines > 500 m long.
Connect the polarized surge protectors to the plugging locations F1 to F8 provided on the patch
panel (see Figure 4-42).
Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks each
Example 1
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
Board with 16 ports
Board with 16 ports
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
Example 2
Board with 24 ports
Example 3
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
Board with 16 ports
Figure 4-41
4-72
Board with 16 ports
Board with 24 ports
Layout of the Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X for Different Peripheral Boards
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
SIVAPAC edge connectors: port for CABLU connection to the backplane
X5
X1
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
1
1
1
1
X9
X10
1
1
PFT1
F1 F4 F6 F8 Slots F1–F8 for
surge protector
F2 F3 F5 F7
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
X9, X10, X11 and PFT1 not
used in HiPath 3000.
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks
Options for connecting the external line network:
●
Connection via the MW8 jacks on the front of the patch panels. Using jumper wire,
bridges must be inserted between the terminal strips X12 and X14 and between X13
and X15. The contact between the connector X5 and the first eight MW8 jacks is only
set up when wire bridges are present.
●
Direct connector jumpering on the X12/X13 connector. Bridges are not necessary in
this case.
1
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
X12, X14
8
7
8
X13, X15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
Figure 4-42
Assignment of Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-73
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.3
Inserting External S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3
Structure
>
All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties.
3 x 8 MW8 jacks
Necessary height units for 19-inch cabinet assembly: 1
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
Figure 4-43
4-74
S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.3.1
Installing the S0 Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet
Installation Procedure
7
Caution
The patch panel must be installed above the system cabinet.
A minimum of one height unit must be kept clear above the cabinet to guarantee sufficient ventilation of the system cabinet. This is achieved by the gray plastic cover
fixed to the top of the system cabinets. Never remove this plastic cover.
Insert the S0 patch panel (A, in Figure 4-44) above a system cabinet and secure it to the 19inch frame on both the left and the right using two screws (B) on each side.
A
B
Figure 4-44
Installing the External S0 Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-75
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.3.2
Connecting Lines to the External S0 Patch Panel
24
22
20
18 ...
... 8
6
4
2
23
21
19
17 ...
... 7
5
3
1
3 x 8 MW8 jacks, numbering
:
Pin
8
Figure 4-45
1
MW8 jack assignment:
as a subscriber line
as a trunk connection
3
Transmit +
Receive +
4
Receive +
Transmit +
5
Receive –
Transmit –
6
Transmit –
Receive –
Assignment of the S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3
CABLUs must be manually connected to the S0 patch panel (Figure 4-46). You can use the Krone wiring tool for this.
87632145
Pin assignment of MW8 jacks
Twist the wire pairs before laying them.
Figure 4-46
4-76
Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Stripping the open-end cable for the S0 patch panel
Stripped length
250 ± 5
(1)
Velcro tape (19 mm wide)
Bundle fastener
Cable with film sheath: No. 6 (conductive copper tape) 1.5 windings. Ground wire shortened
to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape (1).
Stripped length = 600 mm ± 5 mm
Figure 4-47
Stripping the Open-End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel
The color codes for open-end cables are provided in Table 4-8.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-77
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.7.4
7
For U.S. only: Connecting Network Facilities
DANGER
Ground the system properly before connecting the stations.
Connecting to the Point of Demarcation
Most main distribution frames are designed with a network demarcation block. You must crossconnect the MDF to the incoming trunks. Use a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires.
Connecting to T1, PRI, or CorNet
7
Caution
The TMST2 Module can only be installed in conjunction with a listed channel service
unit CSU.
Secondary Protection
7
4-78
DANGER
To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, the following boards require
secondary protection when their lines leave the building where the main distribution
frame is housed:
●
DIU2U*
●
SLMA / SLMA8
●
TMC16
●
TMDID
●
TMEW2
●
TM2LP
* When this module is connected to the public network, secondary protection must
be provided by the CSU.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.8
7
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the
CBSAP
Caution
Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially when
handling boards). Connect the wristband to the slide-in shelf in the cabinet using the
alligator clip.
The boards should be installed in the cabinets as described in Section 4.2.5.
The central control boards are not always fully equipped when delivered. Optional plug-in
boards are packaged individually.
See Section 3.2.4 for information on slots for subboards on the central control board CBSAP.
7
Caution
Place the central control board on a flat surface before installing subboards.
The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so you
should always mount them (see Figure 3-6).
Otherwise you may damage the board.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-79
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.9
Connecting Workpoint Clients
Refer to Chapter 10 for details.
4.2.10
Making Trunk and Networking Connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
DIUN2 (S2M)
●
STMD3 (S0)
●
STMI2 (IP)
●
TM2LP (MSI)
●
TMEW2 (E&M)
●
DIU2U (For U.S. Only)
●
TMC16 (U.S. Only)
●
TMDID (for U.S. only)
4-80
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
4.2.11
Performing a Visual Inspection
Introduction
Before starting up the system, you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware, cables,
and the power supply. The procedure is shown in Table 4-9. The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnected from the power supply.
Caution
Before beginning work, make sure that the system is grounded and disconnected
from the power supply.
Observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (see Page 19).
7
Visual Inspection Procedure
Table 4-9
Step
Visual Inspection Procedure
Activity
Resources/
Remarks
Action
1.
Compare the slots of the
available boards with the
component mounting diagram.
Board assignment map
If necessary, correct the board configuration and notify the sales department.
2.
Check that all boards are
secure.
See Page 4-34
If necessary, plug the boards in again.
3.
Check that a shielding cover
has been attached for all
boards with no connection
options in the front cover.
If necessary, replace missing shielding covers (refer to Page 4-35).
4.
Check whether the slots for
LUNA2 and for REALS (basic cabinet only) are covered by an outer panel.
If necessary, attach the outer panel
(see Page 4-36).
5.
Check whether all system
cabinets have been sealed
at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
Get additional connection and filler
panels where required.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-81
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3800
Table 4-9
Visual Inspection Procedure
Step
Activity
6.
Check whether a separate
grounding is connected to
the main grounding terminals of all system cabinets.
7.
Check the local supply volt- Digital multimeage.
ter
8.
Only for installing HiPath
3800 as a standalone system:
close all system cabinets
with the front and back plastic covers provided.
>
4-82
Resources/
Remarks
Action
If necessary, ground the system as
described in the following sections:
●
Section 4.2.3.4, for installing the
standalone HiPath 3800
●
Section 4.2.4.4, for installing the
HiPath 3800 in the 19-inch cabinet.
Fit the cover into the guides and press
down on the cover unit it snaps into
place.
After finishing the visual inspection, you can begin starting up the HiPath 3800 as
described in Chapter 5.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.1
Installation Prerequisites
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.
Tools and resources needed
The following are needed for installing the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 system:
●
●
Tools:
–
Hex or open-end wrench, 8 mm
–
Diagonal cutting pliers, telephone pliers, wire stripper, flat-nosed pliers
–
Slotted screwdrivers, from 2 to 8 mm (1/4 to 5/16 in.)
–
Phillips or cross-point screwdrivers, sizes 1 and 2
–
TORX screwdriver
–
Wire stripper (for example, from Krone)
–
Electric drill, hammer
–
Level, tape measure
–
For U.S. only: Punch-down tool suitable for the block used (such as block 66)
Resources:
–
Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E
–
Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltages
–
Telephone test set for analog interfaces
–
Not for U.S.: ISDN tester (such as K3000 or Aurora)
–
For U.S. only: AuroraDuet, AuroraExpert, AuroraRemote or similar, ISDN protocol analyzer
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-83
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.2
Installation Procedure
Table 4-10
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 - System Installation Procedure
Step
Installation Activity
Installing HiPath 3750
Installing HiPath 3700 (19-Inch Cabinet)
1.
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-87 Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-128
(usually predetermined)
(generally determined by the existing 19inch cabinet)
2.
Unpacking the Components, page 4-89
Unpacking the Components, page 4-128
3.
Install MDFU or MDFU-E (not for USA),
page 4-90
Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19Inch Cabinet, page 4-129
4.
Setting up the System Cabinets (from
Page 4-91):
Single Cabinet
Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-Inch
Cabinet, page 4-133
Two cabinets (stacked)
Two cabinets (side by side)
Three cabinets (stacked)
5.
Grounding the System, page 4-106
Checking the Grounding, page 4-111
Grounding the System, page 4-134
Checking the Grounding, page 4-136
6.
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane,
page 4-112
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane,
page 4-137
7.
Laying the Line Network and Setting
Connecting the Line Network to the Patch
Jumpers on the MDFU or MDFU-E, page
Panel, page 4-150
4-122
8.
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBCPR, page 4-151
9.
Configuration notes, page 4-152 (cabinet(s) are already equipped with the boards)
10.
Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4-161
4-84
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Table 4-10
Step
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700 - System Installation Procedure
Installation Activity
Installing HiPath 3750
Installing HiPath 3700 (19-Inch Cabinet)
11.
Making trunk connections, page 4-161
12.
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-162
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-85
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3
Installing HiPath 3750
This section contains information on how to install the HiPath 3750 communication system.
This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to
Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.
Information on
●
the possible equipment of central boards with optional plug-in boards
●
board configuration
●
final visual inspection
applies to both HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 and is described starting in Section 4.3.5.
4-86
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.1
Selecting the Installation Site
Selecting a site
The customer usually has a preferred installation site in mind.
Make sure that the customer’s site meets the following guidelines:
●
To guarantee sufficient system ventilation, allow a minimum of 10 cm clearance in front of
and behind the housing.
●
Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat (for example sunlight and heaters).
●
Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments.
●
Avoid contact with chemicals.
●
Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during operation. Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used.
●
Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2.9.
For U.S. Only:
●
Install secondary-protection equipment.
●
Avoid standard carpeting, as it tends to produce electrostatic charges.
●
Ensure the availability of a power source that meets the requirements described in
Section 4.3.3.1.1.
●
Ensure that Siemens equipment is 40 in. (101.6 cm) from other electrical equipment. The
National Electrical Code (NEC) requires 36 in. (91.44 cm) of clearance in front of electrical
equipment and 40 in. (101.6 cm) of clearance from other electrical service equipment.
●
The equipment room for the system should provide adequate space for installation and
maintenance activities (such as removing and replacing boards). Leave at least 16 in. (42
cm) on all sides of the system, and 36 in. (16 cm) in front.
Information on the design of the HiPath 3750 can be found in Section 2.2.2.2.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-87
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.1.1
For U.S. only: AC outlet
An AC connection is required for each cabinet. The AC connection must fulfill the requirements
specified in Table 4-11.
Table 4-11
Nominal
voltage
120 V AC/
60 Hz
7
Electrical Connection Values (for U.S. only)
Nominal voltage range
Nominal Frequency
Range
from
to
from
to
110 V AC
130 V AC
47 Hz
63 Hz
Wall Outlet Configurations
NEMA 5-15, 2-pin, 3wire, earth
WARNING
Never connect a HiPath 3750system or a combination of HiPath 3750systems directly to a wall socket. Use a UL-listed or CSA-certified surge protector for every two
cabinets.
AC Power Outlet Requirements
●
A UL-listed or CSA-certified surge protector must be connected between the socket and
the system. Two cabinets can be connected to each surge protector. Never connect a HiPath 3750system or a combination of systems directly to a wall socket.
●
The power source may not be more than 2.4 m (8 ft.) from the system.
●
The power source must provide 120 V AC (single-phase, fused) power at 50-60 Hz and
20 A.
●
A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power.
●
An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used.
The system must be properly grounded before startup (see description in Section 4.3.3.5).
4-88
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.2
Unpacking the Components
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure
that they are correct and complete.
2.
Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the
proper departments.
3.
Dispose of the packing materials properly.
7
Caution
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment
with visible damage.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-89
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.3
Install MDFU or MDFU-E (not for USA)
Introduction
The following are used as main distribution frames:
●
MDFU-E, which is shipped with new systems (see Figure 4-71).
●
the MDFU (one MDFU unit per system cabinet), which was used for Hicom 150 E OfficePro
in Release 2.0 and earlier (see Figure 4-70).
Installation notes
The main distribution frame should be installed in the direct vicinity of the system (note length
of connection cable) and at eye level. Mount it on the wall according to the instructions that
came with it. The bag attached to the cover contains a drill template. It also contains the necessary screws and wall anchors for attaching the MDF to the wall.
Procedure for wall mounting
Step
4-90
Activity
1.
Use the template to drill holes.
2.
Insert the wall anchors and screw in the screws, leaving 5 mm projecting.
3.
Remove the housing cover. Attach the main distributor frame to the brackets and
remove the packing protection covering.
4.
Tighten the screws through the holes.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4
7
Setting up the System Cabinets
Warning
A fully equipped HiPath 3750 cabinet weighs 22 kg (48.46 lb). We recommend lifting
cabinets only before they are equipped. Do not attempt to lift objects that you think
are too heavy for you; use a hand truck or get assistance.
Introduction
Cabinets are supplied fitted with the specific boards required by the customer.
7
4.3.3.4.1
Danger
Be sure to ground the system properly before starting it up and connecting the stations.
Overview
System configurations
The following setup options are possible for system cabinets:
System
One cabinet on a horizontal surface
One cabinet on a wall (for U.S. only)
Two cabinets stacked on a horizontal surface
Two cabinets stacked on a wall (for U.S. only)
Two cabinets side-by-side on a horizontal surface
Three cabinets on a horizontal surface (two stacked)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-91
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4.2
Removing the Cabinet Covers
How the covers are secured
The front cabinet cover (for board servicing) and the rear cabinet cover (for cable servicing) are
each secured by two snap fasteners.
You can remove the upper and lower grills on both covers. This allows the cables to be routed
to the MDFU or MDFU-E for example.
To replace a cover, position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press down on the cover
until it snaps into place.
Procedure (Figure 4-48)
Step
Activity
1.
Insert a slotted screwdriver (with the blade vertical) into a recess (1).
2.
Carefully swing the handle of the screwdriver toward the center of the cabinet (2)
until the fastener snaps out and the cover loosens.
3.
Then insert the screwdriver in the second recess (3), loosen its snap fastener.
Mounting the cover
(3)
Cabinet
(1)
(2)
Figure 4-48
4-92
HiPath 3750 - Removing the Front and Rear Covers
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4.3
Setting Up a Single Cabinet
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Remove the front and rear cover from the cabinet.
2.
Place the system cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and
stable.
4.3.3.4.4
Mounting a One-Cabinet System on the Wall (for U.S. only)
You can mount a one-cabinet system on the wall using the wall-mount kit.
Wall-Mount Kit
Latching assembly
Bracket for wall mounting
Keyed holes
Latch
Swing-out component
Figure 4-49
HiPath 3750 - Wall-Mount Kit (for U.S. only)
Procedure
Step
1.
Activity
Install a plywood backboard at least 0.75 in. (19.05 mm) thick.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-93
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Step
Activity
2.
Use the wall-mounting bracket as a template to drill three holes in the backboard.
Use the keyed holes in the top of the bracket and the round hole in the bottom of the
bracket.
3.
Install the screws in the top two holes, tightening them until 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) is protruding.
4.
Bolt the swing-out assembly on the wall-mounting bracket to the back of the cabinet.
5.
Close the swing-out assembly; Then mount the bracket and cabinet on the top
screws.
6.
Swing the cabinet open and tighten the top screws completely.
7.
Insert and fully tighten the bottom screw in the round hole.
8.
Bolt the latching assembly to the opposite edge of the cabinet.
You can invert the bracket to have the cabinet swing out in the opposite direction.
7
WARNING
Do not fasten power cords to building surfaces when mounting cabinets on the wall.
Wall Mounting (One-Cabinet System)
Figure 4-50
4-94
HiPath 3750 Mounting a One-Cabinet System on the Wall (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4.5
Stacking Two Cabinets
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Remove the front and rear cabinet covers.
2.
Mount stabilizer feet on basic cabinet (BC). Place the basic cabinet in the installation site and make sure that it is level and stable.
3.
Place expansion cabinet (EC1) on basic cabinet. Insert the feet on EC1 into the
depressions on the top of the BC.
4.
If mounting the system on the floor or on a table, attach the two cabinets using
four connecting plates each held by two screws with washers (Figure 4-51).
Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction (inside
the cabinets and pointing inward).
7
DANGER
The connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for free-standing systems.
>
For U.S. only: You can install seismic anchors for greater stability, as is required in
some installations. Additional information can be found in Section 4.3.3.4.9.
Take note that the bolts and inserts included in the seismic anchor kit are designed
for concrete floors. Bolts for other surfaces must be requested or supplied separately.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-95
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Installing a two-cabinet system
EC1
EC1
Inside
the cabinet
BC
BC
Figure 4-51
Washers
HiPath 3750 - Installing a Two-Cabinet System (Stacked)
Laying the Connecting Cables
To lay the connecting cables between the two cabinets, you can cut out the pre-stamped recesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and
break them out with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.
7
4-96
Caution
Be careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and corners.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Procedure: Fitting stabilizer feet
7
Caution
Always mount the stabilizer feet on stacked, surface-mounted system cabinets to
ensure stability (Figure 4-52).
Step
Activity
1.
Place the stabilizer feet beneath the right and left outer edges of the cabinets. Insert the cabinet feet into the two holes in the stabilizer feet (1).
2.
Attach the stabilizer feet to the metal housing of the cabinet (2) by inserting two
screws per foot into the pre-drilled holes in the housing.
3.
Continue installing the system.
Mounting the stabilizer feet
(2)
(2)
(1)
Figure 4-52
(1)
(2)
HiPath 3750 - Mounting the Stabilizer Feet (Three-Cabinet System Shown)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-97
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4.6
For U.S. only: Mounting Two Cabinets Stacked on the Wall
You can mount two cabinets stacked on the wall using the wall-mount kit.
7
DANGER
The second cabinet also requires an earth ground as described on
Section 4.3.3.5.2. Do not fasten wall-mounted cabinets with the connecting plates,
as this will interfere with the earth ground.
Wall-Mount Kit
Latching assembly
Bracket for wall mounting
Keyed holes
Latch
Swing-out component
Figure 4-53
HiPath 3750 - Wall-Mount Kit (for U.S. only)
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Install a plywood backboard at least 0.75 in. (19.05 mm) thick.
2.
Use the wall-mounting bracket as a template to drill three holes in the backboard.
Use the keyed holes in the top of the bracket and the round hole in the bottom of the
bracket.
3.
Install the screws in the top two holes for each bracket, tightening them until 0.25 in.
(6.35 mm) is protruding.
4-98
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Step
Activity
4.
Bolt the swing-out assembly on the wall-mounting bracket to the back of each cabinet.
5.
Close the swing-out assembly; Close the swing-out assembly and hang each bracket and cabinet on the top screws.
6.
Swing the cabinet open and tighten the top screws completely.
7.
Insert and fully tighten the bottom screws in the round holes.
8.
Bolt the latching assembly to the opposite edge of each cabinet.
You can invert the wall brackets to have the cabinets swing out in the opposite direction.
7
Warning
Do not fasten power cords to building surfaces when mounting cabinets on the wall.
Wall Mounting (Stacked Two-cabinet System)
Figure 4-54
HiPath 3750 Wall Mounting for a Stacked Two-Cabinet System (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-99
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Laying the Connecting Cables
To lay the connecting cables between the two cabinets, you can cut out the pre-stamped recesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and
break them out with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.
7
4-100
Warning
Be careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and corners.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4.7
Setting Up a Two-Cabinet System Side by Side
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Remove the front and rear cabinet covers.
2.
Place the system cabinets side by side at the installation site and make sure that
they are level and stable. Correct any differences in height.
3.
If mounting the system on the floor or on a table, attach the two cabinets using
four connecting plates each held by two screws with washers (Figure 4-55).
Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction (inside
the cabinets and pointing inward).
7
DANGER
The connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for free-standing systems.
Installing a two-cabinet system
BC
EC1
BC
Washers
Figure 4-55
EC1
Inside the cabinet
HiPath 3750 - Installing a Two-Cabinet System (Side By Side)
Laying the Connecting Cables
To lay the connection cables between the cabinets, first remove the lower grills in the rear covers.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-101
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4.8
7
Setting Up a Stacked Three-Cabinet System
Caution
Up to two cabinets can be stacked.
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Remove the front and rear cabinet covers.
2.
Mount one stabilizer foot on the basic cabinet and one on the expansion cabinet
(EC2). Place EC2 next to the BC in the installation site and make sure that it is
level and stable. Correct any differences in height.
3.
Place expansion cabinet (EC1) on basic cabinet. Insert the feet on EC1 into the
depressions on the top of the BC.
4.
Attach the three cabinets using four connecting plates, each held by two screws
with washers (Figure 4-56).
Make sure that the connecting plates are mounted in the correct direction (inside
the cabinets and pointing inward).
7
DANGER
The connecting plates must be installed to ensure proper grounding for free-standing systems.
>
For U.S. only: You can install seismic anchors for greater stability, as is required in
some installations. Additional information can be found in Section 4.3.3.4.9.
Take note that the bolts and inserts included in the seismic anchor kit are designed
for concrete floors. Bolts for other surfaces must be requested or supplied separately.
4-102
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Installing a three-cabinet system
Inside
the cabinet
EC1
Washers
EC1
BC
EC2
BC
EC2
Figure 4-56
HiPath 3750 - Installing a Three-Cabinet System (Stacked)
Laying the Connecting Cables
●
To lay the cables between the BC and EC2, remove the lower grills in the two rear covers.
●
To lay the connection cables between stacked cabinets, you can cut out the pre-stamped
recesses in the bottom of EC1 and the top of the BC with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers
and break them out with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.
7
Caution
Be careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and corners.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-103
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.4.9
For U.S. only: Installing the Seismic Anchors
Seismic anchors can be used for additional stability if desired by the customer or required by
code.
>
Local building codes may require the use of seismic anchors in critical locations,
such as hospitals. The HiPath 3750 seismic anchor kit includes bolts and attachments specially designed for concrete floors. If necessary, consult the location planner to check legal requirements or whether the customer requires seismic anchors
for a different substrate.
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Hook the anchor into the center holes in the lower grill on each cabinet (front and
back).
2.
Bolt the anchor to the floor using the holes provided.
The anchor for the back of the cabinets is wider to provide space for cables.
Seismic Anchoring
Front
Figure 4-57
4-104
Back
HiPath 3750 Seismic Anchors (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Seismic Anchors for Multiple Cabinets
Figure 4-58
HiPath 3750 Seismic Anchoring for Multiple Cabinets (Front View) (for U.S.
only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-105
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.5
Grounding the System
4.3.3.5.1
Not for U.S.: Grounding the System
Grounding: Grounding options
7
Danger
The HiPath 3750 system and the MDFU or MDFU-E must be grounded as shown in
Figure 4-59 by a separate ground conductor (minimum cross-section = 2.5 mm2)
Make sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and strain-relieved.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.
If one or two ECs are required in addition to the BC, the four metal connecting plates must be
installed to properly ground these cabinets.
The illustrations starting with Figure 4-60 show different grounding options.
7
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the low-voltage network (230 Vac), you
must hire a licensed electrician to ground the system separately using option 1b
(Figure 4-61).
Note on possible ground loops
>
4-106
To avoid ground loops from remotely operated devices (V.24 system peripherals),
the devices should be connected to the same low-voltage network (sub-distribution
board) if possible.
If the building floor plan does not permit this, you may need a line driver to isolate
the external devices in the event of a malfunction.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Grounding the system cabinets and main distribution frame
HiPath 3750, BC
to the second and third MDFU (if
present)
MDFU, MDFU-E
Any color, except for green or
yellow to avoid confusion
Min. cross-section = 2.5 mm2
Grounding screw (metal backplane, lower center)
green/yellow
Min. cross-section = 2.5 mm2
Attach to the grill using cable ties
Example Potential equalization bus
but not:
- central heating system
- drain channels
- ground conductor for antenna system
Figure 4-59
HiPath 3750 - Grounding the System Cabinets and Main Distribution Frame
(not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-107
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Grounding option 1a
HiPath 3750
green/yellow
Example Potential equalization bus
Figure 4-60
HiPath 3750 - Grounding Option 1a (not for USA)
Grounding option 1b
L1 N PE
230 V ~
Grounding outlets
HiPath 3750
Example Connector
socket
green/yellow
Figure 4-61
4-108
HiPath 3750 - Grounding Option 1b (not for USA)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.5.2
For U.S. only: Grounding the System
A connecting cable is used for grounding the system cabinets. The system must also be
grounded by a separate ground conductor. Choose a ground connection with less than 2 ohms
of resistance, such as:
●
Master ground busbar
●
Ground field
●
Copper ground rod
Run a separate earth ground conductor from the earth ground to the cabinet frame ground (located in the center of the bottom of the backplane). The minimum cross-section required is
12 AWG.
Figure 4-62 shows the safety conductor connectors for the basic cabinet
If one or two ECs are required in addition to the BC in a standalone system, the four metal connecting plates must be installed to properly ground these cabinets.
If two system cabinets are mounted on the wall, a separate grounding connector is also required for the expansion cabinet. Do not use the metal connecting plates on wall-mounted systems.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-109
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
HiPath 3750
Connection cable
with plug
AC outlet
Fuse box facility
20 A
120 VAC, 60 Hz
Neutral ground
Main grounding terminal
Recommended: 12 AWG solid or stranded copper wire conductor not exceeding 126 feet in length; blank or green/yellow.
Grounding point (example: Master
ground busbar)
Located in the electrical service
panel providing power to the HiPath 3750 system.
Note: Single-point ground (SPG) configuration shown.
7
DANGER
This wire installation must be completed by a qualified electrician and must
comply with the national and local electrical codes.
Figure 4-62
HiPath 3750 - Grounding connector for Basic Cabinet (for U.S. only)
Grounding the Main Distribution Frame
Mount and ground the MDF in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
4-110
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.6
Checking the Grounding
Procedure
Perform the tests in the table below to ensure that the system is properly grounded before startup.
Step
Activity
Target
1.
Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection to
the system:
Perform measurement between the PE (protective
earth) on a socket in the internal installation (at the system’s installation site) and HiPath 3750.
< 10 ohms
Prerequisites:
●
HiPath 3750 is not yet connected to the low-voltage
network via the power cable.
●
The system’s separate grounding is connected.
2.
Check the ohmic resistance between the individual system parts (basic cabinet, expansion cabinets, main distribution frame).
< 1 ohm
Prerequisite:
HiPath 3750 is not yet connected to the low-voltage network via the power cable.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-111
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.7
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane
>
All cables that leave the cabinet must be attached to the ventilation grill on the metal
back panel using cable ties.
4.3.3.7.1
>
Backplanes on the “8-Slot” Cabinets
The “8-slot” basic cabinet has seven slots, while the expansion cabinets each have
eight slots for peripheral boards.
Backplane on the “8-slot” basic cabinet
X90
X80
X70
X60
X50
X40
X30
X20
X10
CBCPR
UPSM
X11
EC1
X12
X5
X13
EC2
X14
REAL
(BC
only)
X6
X88
X78
X68
X58
X48
X38
X28
X89
X79
X69
X59
X49
X39
X29
X7
Figure 4-63
4-112
HiPath 3750 - Backplane on the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Backplane on the “8-slot” expansion cabinets
X100
X90
X80
X70
X60
X50
X40
X30
X20
X10
–
UPSM
X13
BC
X14
Not used
Not
used
Figure 4-64
X98
X88
X78
X68
X58
X48
X38
X28
X99
X89
X79
X69
X59
X49
X39
X29
HiPath 3750 - Backplane on the “8-Slot” Expansion Cabinets
Jack Assignment on the “8-Slot” Backplane
Table 4-12
Jack Assignment on the “8-Slot” Backplane
Connector
Cabinet
Function
X7
BC
V.24 interface (no electrical isolation) via 25-pin jack: Connection for
printer, Plus products, and other devices.
X5
BC
Cable connector to REAL
X6
BC
MDFU-to-REAL connection via SU connector
X11
BC
Cable connector to EC1: X13
X12
BC
Cable connector to EC1: X14
X13
BC
EC1
EC2
Cable connector to EC2: X13
Cable connector to BC: X11
Cable connector to BC: X13
X14
BC
EC1
EC2
Cable connector to EC2: X14
Cable connector to BC: X12
Cable connector to BC: X14
X28 - X88
All
1 SU connector each (16 TW) to MDFU or MDFU-E
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-113
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Table 4-12
Jack Assignment on the “8-Slot” Backplane
Connector
Cabinet
Function
X98
EC1
EC2
X29 - X89
All
1 SU connector each (8 TW) to MDFU or MDFU-E (not for S2M)
X99
EC1
EC2
1 SU connector each (8 TW) to MDFU or MDFU-E (not for S2M)
1 SU connector each (16 TW) to MDFU or MDFU-E
Connection cables between the “8-slot” basic and expansion cabinets
If installing a multi-cabinet system, you must also connect the cables between the BC and ECs.
If
Two-cabinet
System
Three-cabinet
System
4-114
Then
Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)
(see Figure 4-65)
Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)
Connect BC to EC2 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)
(see Figure 4-66)
●
●
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System: Connection Cable (See Table 4-12)
Cabinet part numbers
●
BC = S30777-U757-X
●
EC1 = S30777-U708-X100
EC1
X13
X14
Backplane part numbers
●
BC = S30777-Q757-X
●
EC1 = S30777-Q708-X100
Connection cable part numbers
●
For connecting BC to EC1 =
S30267-Z178-A13
Figure 4-65
BC
X11
X12
X13
X14
Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connection Cables between BC and EC1
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-115
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System: Connection Cable (See Table 4-12)
Cabinet part numbers
●
BC = S30777-U757-X
●
EC1, EC2 = S30777-U708-X100
EC1
Backplane part numbers
●
BC = S30777-Q757-X
●
EC1, EC2 = S30777-Q708-X100
X13
X14
Connection cable part numbers
●
Connect BC to EC1, BC to EC2 =
S30267-Z178-A13
EC2
X13
BC
X14
Figure 4-66
X11
X12
X13
X14
Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connection Cables between BC, EC1 and
EC2
The cables between the basic cabinet and the expansion cabinets are connected in a star configuration.
Terminating resistors in “8-slot” cabinets
●
BC: Between slots CBCPR + 2 and 3 + 4 and 8 + UPSM
●
EC1: Between slots 11 + 12 and 13 + 14 and 15 + 16 and 17 + UPSM
●
EC2: Between slots 20 + 21 and 22 + 23 and 24 + 25 and 26 + UPSM
4-116
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.7.2
Connection between the MDFU or MDFU-E and Backplane
Introduction
Set up the connection between the main distribution frame and the system using CABLUs (prefabricated cabling units) with the following characteristics:
●
System side: SIPAC 1 SU connector(s)
●
Cable: 16 x 2 x 0.4
●
Main distribution frame side:
–
Not for U.S.: Different distribution strips or carriers (Figure 4-69)
–
For U.S. only: 50-pin CHAMP jacks
Not for U.S.: Not more than 9 CABLUs per MDFU (Figure 4-70) and 21 CABLUs per MDFU-E
(Figure 4-71) with one 16-TW strip or 25-TW strip (9 x 30 mm) strip can be implemented.
In special cases where the prefabricated CABLUs cannot be used, open-end cables should be
used.
Not for U.S.: CABLUs for the slots containing peripheral boards (Figure 4-87)
If
Then
Assignment
with
SLMO81,
SLMO24,
SLA8N1,
SLA16N1
or
SLA24N
Route 16 TW to the MDFU or MDFU-E via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via SU Xx9,
using a standard cable (with 16 TW) for each connection. Connect both cables (= 1 CABLU with SU connectors labeled 8 and 9) to the same jumper
strip (25 TW).
Part numbers for CABLUs with 25-TW jumper strip:
●
S30269-Z100-A14: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-71)
●
S30269-Z100-A24: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-71)
Note: If replacing an old system, for example, you can use existing standard
CABLUs with splitting strips for 16 TW. If an SLMO24 board is used, you
must lay an additional CABLU (SU Xx9) to the MDFU or MDFU-E.
Assignment
with
TMS2
S2M connections are not set up via the MDFU or MDFU-E.
A direct connection is set up to the NT or networked system via the backplane connector SU Xx9 and a special cable (see Section 3.3.40, “TMS2
(Not for U.S.)”).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-117
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
If
Then
Slot with any Route 16 TW to the MDFU or MDFU-E via SU Xx8 using a CABLU.
other peripheral Part numbers for CABLUs with 16-TW jumper strips:
●
S30269-Z100-A11: 3 m in length, short stripped length for MDFU-E
board
slots 11-21 (see Figure 4-71)
●
S30269-Z100-A21: 3 m in length, long stripped length for MDFU-E
slots 1-10 (see Figure 4-71)
Assignment
with
REAL
1
16 TWs are routed to (and manually laid at) the MDFU or MDFU-E via
SU X6 (backplane) using an open-end cable.
Part numbers for open-end cable:
●
S30267-Z192-A60: 6 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A100: 10 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A200: 20 m in length
A CABLU with 16 TW is also sufficient for these boards. A CABLU with 24 TW is recommended to simplify station configuration expansion (for example, by replacing the SLMO8 by an SLMO24).
For U.S. Only: CABLUs for the slots containing peripheral boards (Figure 4-87)
If
Then
Slot with 24-port Route 16 TW to the main distribution frame via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via
peripheral board SU Xx9, using standard CABLU S30267-Z365-A30 (SU connectors are labeled "8" and "9"). Both cables are connected to the same 50-pin Champ
jack.
Slot with 16-port Route 16 TW to the main distribution frame via SU Xx8 using standard CAperipheral board BLU S30267-Z365-A30.
Slot with TMST1 T1 connections (see Section 3.3.39, “TMST1 (for U.S. only)”) are not set up
via the main distribution frame.
An adapter (1 SU connector - 8-pin MW8 (RJ48C) jack, Figure 4-67) is connected directly to the SU Xx9 backplane connector. You can use a special
cable to create a direct connection to the CSU or networked system.
4-118
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
S2M adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)
MW8 (RJ48C
jack
(to the NT, CSU
or networked
system)
Figure 4-67
SIPAC 1 SU
jack (Xx9
backplane)
S2M Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-119
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Stripping the open-end cable
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
1
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
1
2
2
Connect the
3
3
wires
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
13
14
13
View from below
14
15
15
16
16
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
a
b
View from above (surge
protector plug locations)
Cable with film sheath: No. 6 (conductive copper tape) 1.5 windings. Ground
wire shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape (1).
Stripped length
250 ± 5
Stripped length = 600 ± 5 mm
(1)
Stripped length = 910 ± 5 mm for
MDFU-E slots 1 to 10
Velcro tape (19 mm wide)
Bundle fastener
Figure 4-68
4-120
Stripping an Open-End Cable (not for the U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Color Codes for the Open-End Cable
Table 4-13
Color Codes for the Open-End Cable
Color
group
Pair
a-Wire
(Tip)
1
1
wht/blu
b-Wire
(Ring)
Color
group
Pair
a-Wire
(Tip)
3
11
blk/blu
blu/wht
2
blu/blk
wht/ora
12
blk/ora
ora/wht
3
ora/blk
wht/grn
13
blk/grn
grn/wht
4
grn/blk
wht/brn
14
blk/brn
brn/wht
5
brn/blk
wht/gry
15
blk/gry
gry/wht
2
6
red/blu
7
gry/blk
4
blu/red
b-Wire
(Ring)
16
yel/blu
blu/yel
red/ora
ora/red
8
red/grn
grn/red
9
red/brn
brn/red
10
red/gry
gry/red
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-121
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.8
7
Laying the Line Network and Setting Jumpers on the MDFU or MDFU-E
Danger
Connect the system to ground before connecting the stations.
Not for U.S.: Jumpers, external line network
Most main distribution frames do not have an external side. You must jumper them to the incoming line network (see jumpering duct, Figure 4-70 = MDFU, Figure 4-71 = MDFU-E). Use
a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires.
>
If you jumper stations on the MDFU or MDFU-E (for example, with an ICCS network)
without first entering the relocate code, when you reconnect them the stations affected will go into operation with the data of the stations originally installed.
Not for U.S.: Surge protector
To divert surges caused by lightning, insert surge protectors on
●
lines that leave the system buildings (outside stations)
●
lines > 500 m long.
Connect the polarized surge protectors to the plugging locations on the splitting strip described
above (see Figure 4-68).
4-122
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Splitting and jumper strips
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
E = Receive
S = Transmit
1Ea 1Sa
1Eb 1Sb
a
1
2
b
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16
b
S0 bus 8
S0 bus 1 ...
Splitting strip for 16 TW (C39334-A166CABLU
S30269-Z100-A14:
Cable 1 (SU Xx8)
Cable 2 (SU Xx9)
No. 25 not
used
a
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
b
Jumper strip for 25 TW (C39334-A166-A3)
Figure 4-69
Assignment (Numbering) of the Splitting/Jumper Strips, (view from above) (not
for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-123
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Layout and dimensions of the MDFU
328.8
1
2
3
367.0
4
Jumpering
Channel
5
6
7
9 slots (9 x 30 mm)
8
9
Special built-in comps.
2 x PFT1
or
1 x PFT4
System side
Figure 4-70
4-124
Line network
MDFU - Layout and Dimensions (367.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm) (not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Layout and dimensions of the MDFU-E
328.8
1
2
3
4
Jumpering
Channel
5
669.0
6
21 slots (9 x 30 mm)
19
20
21
Special built-in
comps.
2 x PFT1
or
System side
Line network
The MDFU-E is delivered with most systems.
Figure 4-71
MDFU-E - Layout and Dimensions (669.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm) (not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-125
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.3.8.1
7
For U.S. only: Connecting Network Facilities
DANGER
Ground the system properly before connecting the stations.
Connecting to the Point of Demarcation
Most main distribution frames are designed with a network demarcation block. You must crossconnect the MDF to the incoming trunks. Use a standard wiring tool for laying the cable wires.
Connecting to T1, PRI, or CorNet
7
Caution
The TMST1 module can only be installed in conjunction with a listed channel service
unit (CSU).
Secondary Protection
7
4-126
DANGER
To protect against surge voltage caused by lightning, the following boards require
secondary protection when their lines leave the building where the main distribution
frame is housed:
●
SLA16N / SLA24N
●
TIEL4*
●
TMDID8
●
TMGL8
●
TMST1**
* If not connected to facility provider terminal equipment.
** When this module is connected to the public network, secondary protection must
be provided by the CSU.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4
Installing HiPath 3700 (19-Inch Cabinet)
Overview
This section contains information on how to install the HiPath 3700 communication system in
a 19-inch cabinet. This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.
Information on
●
the possible equipment of central boards with optional plug-in boards
●
board configuration
●
final visual inspection
applies to both HiPath 3700 and HiPath 3750 and is described starting in Section 4.3.5.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-127
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.1
Selecting the Installation Site
The installation site is generally determined by the 19-inch cabinet already installed.
The environmental conditions specified in the system data chapter should also be taken into
consideration in this case (Section 2.9).
Information on the design of the HiPath 3700 can be found in Section 2.2.2.5.
4.3.4.1.1
For U.S. only: AC outlet
An AC connection is required for each cabinet. The AC connection must fulfill the requirements
specified in Table 4-14.
Table 4-14
Nominal
voltage
120 V AC/
60 Hz
Electrical Connection Values (for U.S. only)
Nominal voltage range
Nominal Frequency
Range
from
to
from
to
110 V AC
130 V AC
47 Hz
63 Hz
Wall Outlet Configurations
NEMA 5-15, 2-pin, 3wire, earth
The system must be properly grounded before startup (see description in Section 4.3.4.5).
4.3.4.2
Unpacking the Components
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure
that they are correct and complete.
2.
Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the
proper departments.
3.
Dispose of the packing materials properly.
7
4-128
Caution
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment
with visible damage.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.3
7
Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19-Inch Cabinet
WARNING
A fully equipped HiPath 3700 cabinet weighs 22 kg (48.46 lb). We recommend lifting
cabinets only before they are equipped. Do not attempt to lift objects that you think
are too heavy for you; use a hand truck or get assistance.
Introduction
You can install up to three system cabinets in a 19-inch cabinet. Each cabinet must be mounted
separately.
It is only possible to extend the HiPath 3700 to a three cabinet system if the 19-inch cabinets
are next to one another and accessible from the back.
Cabinets are supplied fitted with the specific boards required by the customer.
7
4.3.4.3.1
Danger
Be sure to ground the system properly before starting it up and connecting the stations.
Removing the Cabinet Covers
How the covers are secured
The front cabinet cover (for board servicing) and the rear cabinet cover (for cable servicing) are
each secured by two snap fasteners.
You can remove the upper and lower grills on both covers. This allows the cables to be routed
to the patch panel for example.
To replace a cover, position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press down on the cover
until it snaps into place.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-129
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Procedure (Figure 4-72)
Step
Activity
1.
Insert a slotted screwdriver (with the blade vertical) into a recess (1).
2.
Carefully swing the handle of the screwdriver toward the center of the cabinet (2)
until the fastener snaps out and the cover loosens.
3.
Then insert the screwdriver in the second recess (3), loosen its snap fastener.
Mounting the cover
(3)
Cabinet
(1)
(2)
Figure 4-72
7
4-130
HiPath 3700 - Removing the Front and Rear Covers
Warning
The front and rear covers on all system cabinets must be closed before the system
is started up in a 19-inch cabinet.
To replace a cover, position the snap fasteners in the two guides and press down on
the cover until it snaps into place.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.3.2
Mounting the System Cabinet with Angle Brackets
An assembly kit (C39165-A7027-D5) with eight angle brackets is provided for installing the 19inch cabinet.
Procedure
7
Warning
Never attempt to lift a system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet without assistance.
Step
Activity
1.
Attach a right-handed and a left-handed support bracket (A in Figure 4-73) to the
19-inch cabinet using two screws per bracket.
2.
Remove the front and rear cabinet covers.
3.
Remove both side pieces of the system cabinet.
4.
Attach the two angle brackets (B in Figure 4-73) to the front of the system cabinet
using two screws per bracket.
5.
Attach the four angle brackets (C in Figure 4-73) to the rear of the system cabinet
for base and cover support.
6.
Lift the system cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet and sit the cabinet on the two support brackets (A). Slide the cabinet into the 19-inch cabinet until the front edge of
the system cabinet is flush with the front of the 19-inch frame.
7.
Attach the system cabinet to the angle bracket (B) in the 19-inch cabinet frame
using two screws per bracket.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-131
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Installation in the 19-inch cabinet
B
C
A
Figure 4-73
HiPath 3700 - Installation in the 19-Inch Cabinet
Laying the Connecting Cables
To lay the connection cables between system cabinets and patch panels, you can cut out the
pre-stamped recesses in the bottom of system cabinet with a pair of diagonal cutting pliers and
break them out with a pair of flat-nosed pliers.
7
4-132
Caution
Be careful when breaking out the recesses. Remove any sharp edges and corners.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.4
Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet
The customer-specific communication network and HiPath 3700 are connected via patch panels. Patch panels are installed beneath the system cabinets in the 19-inch cabinet (upward thermal radiation).
Installation Procedure
Install the patch panel immediately under the system cabinet (A in Figure 4-74) and attach it to
the left and right of the 19-inch frame using two screws (B) on each side.
Mounting the patch panel
A
B
Figure 4-74
HiPath 3700 - Mounting the Patch Panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-133
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.5
Grounding the System
Grounding: Inspection and Implementation
Preliminary Inspection of the 19-Inch Cabinet:
Is the 19-inch cabinet grounded
by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow)?
NO
The 19-inch cabinet must be grounded by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow).
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the
low-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a licensed electrician to install the ground.
NO
A potential equalization bus must be installed in
the 19-inch cabinet and connected to the ground
conductor.
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the
low-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a licensed electrician to install the ground.
YES
Does the 19-inch cabinet have
a potential equalization bus at
which the HiPath 3700 can be
grounded as shown in Figure 475?
YES
If you answer “Yes” to both questions, the system (system cabinets, patch panels) may be
grounded as described below.
7
4-134
Danger
Each HiPath 3700 system cabinet and each patch panel (S30807-K6143-X) must be
grounded as shown in Figure 4-75 by a separate ground conductor (minimum crosssection = 2.5 mm2). Make sure that the ground conductor is securely installed and
strain-relieved.
Please note:
The 19-inch cabinet’s potential equalization bus may only be used if it is grounded
by a separate ground conductor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Grounding the system cabinets and patch panels
HiPath 3700, EC2 (if present)
Attach to the grill
using cable ties
To other patch panels S30807K6143-X (if present)
(A ground conductor is not required for the S0 patch panel
S30807-K6143-X.)
HiPath 3700, EC1 (if present)
HiPath 3700, BC
Patch Panel
S30807-K6143-X
green/yellow
Min. cross-section = 2.5 mm2
Any color, except for green or
yellow to avoid confusion
Min. cross-section = 2.5 mm2
Potential equalization bus,
in 19" cabinet for example
Figure 4-75
HiPath 3700- Grounding the Systems and Patch Panels in a 19-Inch Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-135
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Note on possible ground loops
>
To avoid ground loops from remotely operated devices (V.24 system peripherals),
the devices should be connected to the same low-voltage network (sub-distribution
board) if possible.
If the building floor plan does not permit this, you may need a line driver to isolate
the external devices in the event of a malfunction.
4.3.4.6
Checking the Grounding
Procedure
Perform the tests in the table below to ensure that the system is properly grounded before startup.
Step
Activity
Target
1.
Check the ohmic resistance of the ground connection to
the 19-inch cabinet:
Perform measurement between the PE (protective
earth) on a socket in the internal installation (at the system’s installation site) and HiPath 3700.
< 10 ohms
Prerequisites:
●
No device in the 19-inch cabinet is connected to the
low-voltage network via the power cable.
●
The system’s separate grounding (basic cabinet, expansion cabinet, patch panel) and the grounding of
the 19-inch cabinet are connected.
2.
Check the ohmic resistance between the individual system parts (basic cabinet, expansion cabinets, patch panels).
< 1 ohm
Prerequisite:
HiPath 3700 is not yet connected to the low-voltage network via the power cable.
4-136
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.7
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane
>
All cables that leave the cabinet must be attached to the ventilation grill on the metal
back panel using cable ties.
4.3.4.7.1
>
Backplanes on the “8-Slot” Cabinets
The “8-slot” basic cabinet has seven slots, while the expansion cabinets each have
eight slots for peripheral boards.
Backplane on the “8-slot” basic cabinet
X90
X80
X70
X60
X50
X40
X30
X20
X10
CBCPR
UPSM
X11
EC1
X12
X5
X13
EC2
X14
REAL
(BC
only)
X6
X88
X78
X68
X58
X48
X38
X28
X89
X79
X69
X59
X49
X39
X29
X7
Figure 4-76
HiPath 3700 - Backplane on the “8-Slot” Basic Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-137
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Backplane on the “8-slot” expansion cabinets
X100
X90
X80
X70
X60
X50
X40
X30
X20
X10
–
UPSM
X13
BC
X14
Not used
Not
used
Figure 4-77
X98
X88
X78
X68
X58
X48
X38
X28
X99
X89
X79
X69
X59
X49
X39
X29
HiPath 3700 - Backplane on the “8-Slot” Expansion Cabinets
Jack Assignment on the “8-Slot” Backplane
Table 4-15
Jack Assignment on the “8-Slot” Backplane
Connector
Cabinet
Function
X7
BC
V.24 interface (no electrical isolation) via 25-pin jack: Connection for
printer, Plus products, and other devices.
X5
BC
Cable connector to REAL
X6
BC
S0-patch-panel-to-REAL connection via SU connector
X11
BC
Cable connector to EC1: X13
X12
BC
Cable connector to EC1: X14
X13
BC
EC1
EC2
Cable connector to EC2: X13
Cable connector to BC: X11
Cable connector to BC: X13
X14
BC
EC1
EC2
Cable connector to EC2: X14
Cable connector to BC: X12
Cable connector to BC: X14
X28 - X88
All
4-138
1 SU connector each (16 TW) to the patch panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Table 4-15
Jack Assignment on the “8-Slot” Backplane
Connector
Cabinet
Function
X98
EC1
EC2
X29 - X89
All
1 SU connector each (8 TW) to the patch panel (not for S2M)
X99
EC1
EC2
1 SU connector each (8 TW) to the patch panel (not for S2M)
1 SU connector each (16 TW) to the patch panel
Connection cables between the “8-slot” basic and expansion cabinets
If installing a multi-cabinet system, you must also connect the cables between the BC and ECs.
If
Then
Two-cabinet Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)
System
(see Figure 4-78)
Three-cabinet
System
Connect BC to EC1 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)
Connect BC to EC2 = 2 cables (S30267-Z178-A13)
(see Figure 4-79)
●
●
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-139
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System: Connection Cable (See Table 4-15)
Cabinet part numbers
●
BC = S30777-U757-X
●
EC1 = S30777-U708-X100
EC1
X13
X14
Backplane part numbers
BC = S30777-Q757-X
●
EC1 = S30777-Q708-X100
●
Connection cable part numbers
●
For connecting BC to EC1 =
S30267-Z178-A13
Figure 4-78
4-140
BC
X11
X12
X13
X14
Two-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connection Cables between BC and EC1
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System: Connection Cable (See Table 4-15)
Cabinet part numbers
●
BC = S30777-U757-X
●
EC1, EC2 = S30777-U708-X100
EC1
Backplane part numbers
●
BC = S30777-Q757-X
●
EC1, EC2 = S30777-Q708-X100
X13
X14
Connection cable part numbers
●
Connect BC to EC1, BC to EC2 =
S30267-Z178-A13
EC2
X13
BC
X14
Figure 4-79
X11
X12
X13
X14
Three-Cabinet “8-Slot” System - Connection Cables between BC, EC1 and
EC2
The cables between the basic cabinet and the expansion cabinets are connected in a star configuration.
Terminating resistors in “8-slot” cabinets
●
BC: Between slots CBCPR + 2 and 3 + 4 and 8 + UPSM
●
EC1: Between slots 11 + 12 and 13 + 14 and 15 + 16 and 17 + UPSM
●
EC2: Between slots 20 + 21 and 22 + 23 and 24 + 25 and 26 + UPSM
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-141
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.7.2
Connecting the Patch Panel and Backplane (in the 19-Inch Cabinet)
Introduction
Set up the connection between the patch panel and system using CABLUs (prefabricated cabling units) with the following characteristics:
●
System side: SIPAC 1 SU jack
●
Cable: 16 x 2 x 0.4 (the standard cable length is 2 m)
●
Patch panel side:
–
Not for U.S.: Open-end cable (for STMD8) or SIVAPAC socket connectors (for all other
boards)
–
For U.S. only: ---
Not for U.S.: CABLUs for the slots containing peripheral boards
If
Then
Assignment
with
SLMO81,
SLMO24,
SLA8N1,
SLA16N1
or
SLA24N
Route 16 TW to the patch panel (S30807-K6143-X) via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via
SU Xx9 using a standard cable (with 16 TW) for each connection. Connect
both cables (= 1 CABLU with SU jacks labeled 8 and 9) to the same SIVAPAC
socket terminal strip (25 TW).
Part number for CABLU with 24 TW:
●
S30267-Z363-A20: 2 m in length
Assignment
with
STMD8
You need a special S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-B3) for this. The 16 TW
are routed to (and manually laid at) the S0 patch panel via SU Xx8 (backplane) using an open-end cable.
Part numbers for open-end cable:
●
S30267-Z192-A60: 6 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A100: 10 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A200: 20 m in length
Assignment
with
TMS2
S2M connections are not set up via a patch panel.
An adapter (SIPAC 1 SU jack - 8-pin MW8 (RJ48C) jack, Figure 4-85) is connected directly to the SU Xx9 backplane connector. You can use a special cable (see Section 3.3.40, “TMS2 (Not for U.S.)”) to create a direct connection
to the NT or networked system.
4-142
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
If
Then
Slot with any Route 16 TW to the patch panel (S30807-K6143-X) via SU Xx8 using a CAother periph- BLU.
eral board Part number for CABLU with 16 TW:
●
S30267-Z362-A20: 2 m in length
Assignment
with
REAL
1
Route the REAL board via an S0 patch panel (C39104-Z7001-B3). The 16 TW
are routed to (and manually laid at) the S0 patch panel via SU X6 (backplane)
using an open-end cable.
Part numbers for open-end cable:
●
S30267-Z192-A60: 6 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A100: 10 m in length
●
S30267-Z192-A200: 20 m in length
A CABLU with 16 TW is also sufficient for these boards. A CABLU with 24 TW is recommended to simplify station configuration expansion (for example, by replacing the SLMO8 by an SLMO24).
For U.S. only: CABLUs for the slots containing peripheral boards
If
Then
Slot with 24-port Route 16 TW to the patch panel via SU Xx8 and 8 TW via SU Xx9, using
peripheral
standard CABLU S30267-Z365-A30 (SU connectors are labeled "8" and
boards
"9"). Both cables are connected to the same 50-pin Champ jack.
Slot with 16-port Route 16 TW to the main distribution frame via SU Xx8 using standard CAperipheral
BLU S30267-Z365-A30.
boards
Slot with TMST1 T1 connections (see Section 3.3.39, “TMST1 (for U.S. only)”) are not set up
via the main distribution frame.
An adapter (1 SU connector - 8-pin MW8 (RJ48C) jack, Figure 4-85) is connected directly to the SU Xx9 backplane connector. You can use a special
cable to create a direct connection to the CSU or networked system.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-143
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Structure of the Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X
>
All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties.
SIVAPAC edge connector: port for
CABLU connection to the backplane
Eight surge protector plug locations
Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks
MW8 jack assignment:
4 = a-wire
5 = b-wire
8
1
Necessary height units for 19-inch cabinet assembly: 1
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
Figure 4-80
Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X
Information on MW8 jack assignment on the front of the patch panel is provided in the board
descriptions (in the “Cable and Connector Assignment” table) in Chapter 3.
Surge protector
To divert surges caused by lightning, insert surge protectors on
●
lines that leave the system buildings (outside stations)
●
lines > 500 m long.
Connect the polarized surge protectors to slots F1 – F8 provided on the patch panel
(seeFigure 4-81).
4-144
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
SIVAPAC edge connectors: port for CABLU connection to the backplane
X5
X1
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
1
1
1
1
X9
X10
1
1
PFT1
F1 F4 F6 F8 Slots F1–F8 for
surge protector
F2 F3 F5 F7
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
X9, X10, X11 and PFT1 not
used in HiPath 3000.
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks
Options for connecting the external line network:
●
Connection via the MW8 jacks on the front of the patch panels. Using jumper wire,
bridges must be inserted between the terminal strips X12 and X14 and between X13
and X15. The contact between the connector X5 and the first eight MW8 jacks is only
set up when wire bridges are present.
●
Direct connector jumpering on the X12/X13 connector. Bridges are not necessary in
this case.
1
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
X12, X14
8
7
8
X13, X15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
Figure 4-81
Structure of the Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-145
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Structure of the S0 patch panel C39104-Z7001-B3
>
All incoming cables must be attached to the patch panel using cable ties.
24
22
20
18 ...
... 8
6
4
2
23
21
19
17 ...
... 7
5
3
1
3 x 8 MW8 jacks, numbering
:
Pin
8
1
MW8 jack assignment:
as a subscriber line
as a trunk connection
3
Transmit +
Receive +
4
Receive +
Transmit +
5
Receive –
Transmit –
6
Transmit –
Receive –
Necessary height units for 19-inch cabinet assembly: 1
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
Figure 4-82
S0 Patch Panel C39104-Z7001-B3
CABLUs must be manually connected to the S0 patch panel (Figure 4-83). You can use the Krone wiring tool for this.
Refer to the following tables for information on the assignment of the MW8 jacks:
●
Table 3-97 for STMD8 board
●
Table 3-163 for REAL board
4-146
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
87632145
Pin assignment of MW8 jacks
Twist the wire pairs before laying them.
Figure 4-83
Laying Wire Pairs at the S0 Patch Panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-147
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Stripping the open-end cable for the S0 patch panel
Stripped length
250 ± 5
(1)
Velcro tape (19 mm wide)
Bundle fastener
Cable with film sheath: No. 6 (conductive copper tape) 1.5 windings. Ground wire
shortened to 25 mm and soldered onto conductive tape (1).
Stripped length = 600 mm ± 5 mm
Color
group
Pair
a-Wire
(Tip)
1
1
wht/blu
2
wht/ora
b-Wire
(Ring)
Color
group
Pair
a-Wire
(Tip)
2
6
red/blu
7
red/ora
blu/wht
wht/grn
4
wht/brn
8
red/grn
9
red/brn
3
11
blk/blu
12
blk/ora
b-Wire
(Ring)
blu/blk
ora/blk
13
blk/grn
14
blk/brn
grn/blk
brn/red
10
gry/wht
a-Wire
(Tip)
grn/red
brn/wht
wht/gry
Pair
ora/red
grn/wht
5
Color
group
blu/red
ora/wht
3
b-Wire
(Ring)
brn/blk
red/gry
15
blk/gry
16
yel/blu
gry/red
gry/blk
4
blu/yel
Figure 4-84
4-148
Stripping the Open-End Cable for the S0 Patch Panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
S2M adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)
MW8 (RJ48C
jack
(to the NT, CSU
or networked
system)
Figure 4-85
SIPAC 1 SU
jack (Xx9
backplane)
S2M Adapter (SIPAC 1 SU - MW8 (RJ48C)) C39228-A7195-A12
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-149
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.4.8
Connecting the Line Network to the Patch Panel
Danger
Connect the system to ground before connecting the stations.
7
Telephones and trunks are connected directly to the MW8 jacks on the front of the patch panel.
Information on MW8 jack assignment on the front of the patch panel is provided in the board
descriptions (in the “Cable and Connector Assignment” table) in Chapter 3.
>
If you jumper stations on the patch panel (for example, with an ICCS network) without first entering the relocate code, when you reconnect them the stations affected
will go into operation with the data of the stations originally installed.
Front panel with 3 x 16 MW8 jacks each
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
SLA16N, SLC16, SLC16N
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
SLA24N
SLA16N, SLC16, SLC16N
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31
33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
SLA16N, SLC16, SLC16N
Figure 4-86
4-150
SLA16N, SLC16, SLC16N
SLA24N
Layout of the Patch Panel S30807-K6143-X for Different Peripheral Boards
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.5
7
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the
CBCPR
Caution
Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially when
handling boards). Connect the wristband to the slide-in shelf in the cabinet using the
alligator clip.
The cabinets are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer-specific requirements when the system is delivered.
The central control boards are not always fully equipped when delivered. Optional plug-in
boards are packaged individually.
See Chapter 3 for information on slots for subboards on the central control boards.
7
Caution
Place the central control board on a flat surface before installing subboards.
The spacing bolts supplied guarantee the correct insertion of the subboard, so you
should always mount them (see Figure 3-6).
Otherwise you may damage the board.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-151
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.6
Configuration notes
Introduction
The cabinet/cabinets is/are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer-specific
requirements when the system is delivered.
Board slots in “8-slot” cabinets
Nine board slots are available in each cabinet. The following boards are assigned permanent
slots:
●
CBCPR central processor board -> slot 01 in the BC
●
UPSM power supply unit -> slot 09 in the BC, slot 18 in EC1, slot 27 in EC2.
Depending on their width, peripheral boards can be inserted in slots 02 to 08 in the BC, 10 to
17 in EC1 and 19 to 26 in EC2 (the adhesive label beneath each slot identifies the slot) (see
Figure 4-87).
4-152
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Slots in “8-slot” basic and expansion cabinets
Basic cabinet (BC)
Slot no.:
Slot width
(mm):
UPSM
CBCPR
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
45
30
30
30
30
30
30
45
90
X10
X20
X30
X40
X50
X60
X70
X80
X90
Expansion cabinets EC1 and EC2
Slot no.,
EC1:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
UPSM
EC2:
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
UPSM
Slot width
(mm):
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
90
X10
X20
X30
X40
X50
X60
X70
X80
X90
Figure 4-87
Slot Numbers and Widths in “8-Slot” BC, EC1, and EC2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-153
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Width of the peripheral boards
Peripheral boards are divided into
●
●
Wide boards requiring a slot 45 mm (1.75”) wide:
–
TML8W with GEE8
Use a 45 mm slot even if you are not installing a GEE8 so that you can easily add a
GEE8 later.
–
TMDID8 (for U.S. only)
Narrow boards requiring a slot 30 mm (1.2”) wide (= all other boards)
You can insert wide boards into a 30 mm (1.2") slot. but if you do so, you can no longer use the
slot to its right.
7
Caution
Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially when
handling boards).
Initializing the Boards
The system software detects the boards in ascending order, starting with the lowest installation
position the first time the system starts up. The system initializes subscriber line circuits and
ports in the sequence indicated by the arrow (Figure 4-88).
The system activates all connected boards in the following situations:
●
The maximum configuration has not yet been reached. While sequentially scanning the
slots for each board, the system software checks whether the maximum number of stations
or trunks has been exceeded. If it has, the board is not activated. The board LED shows
the board’s status.
●
At least one B channel on line trunk modules is available for the slot (only the available
number of B channels is activated).
4-154
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Assignment of subscriber line circuits and ports
Expansion
Expansion cabinet1
cabinet
U
U
P
P
S
S
M
M
BC
BC
C
C
B
B
C
C
P
P
R
R
Figure 4-88
Expansion
Expansion cabinet
cabinet 2
U
U
P
P
S
S
M
M
U
U
P
P
S
S
M
M
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Initialization of Subscriber Line Circuits and
Ports
For U.S. only: Recommended configuration
To avoid B-channel blocking, install the TMST1 board only in the BC or in the first two slots of
the ECs. HiPath 3000 Manager E observes this rule when performing off-line configuration.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-155
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Distribution of the PCM segments
There are 64 time-division multiplex channels available for each PCM segment. Blockages occur if these are busy. The system cannot execute any more call requests.
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, make sure when you perform configuration that the boards on a PCM segment do not require more than the 64 time-division multiplex channels that are available. The following table lists the number of time-division multiplex
channels that the different boards require.
Table 4-16
Number of Time-Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board
Board
CR8N
Number of time-division multiplex channels required
8
HXGM3 (without extension 16
modules for additional DSP
channels)
IVML8
8
IVML24
24
SLA8N, SLA16N, and
SLA24N
Depends on the number of stations
SLC16/SLC16N
Depends on the number of mobile telephones logged on
SLMO8, SLMO24
Depends on the number of stations (hosts (master) and clients
(slave))
STMD8
16
TIEL
4
TMDID8
8
TML8W
8
TMS2
30
TMST1
24
4-156
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
7
Caution
The following board assignment rules must be observed to ensure that the system
works properly and without blocking:
●
SLC16, SLC16N
– Maximum SLC16 or SLC16N per PCM segment. The SLC16 or SLC16N
should be configured alone on the PCM segment, where possible.
– Note the following information on the subject of multi-SLCs: “SLC16 and
SLC16N board distribution in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 cabinets” on
page 3-143.
●
IVML8, IVML24 (see Section 3.3.5)
– A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 per system.
– Then install them in the slot beside the power supply in the basic cabinet or
the expansion cabinets.
– No SLC16 or SLC16N may be inserted in the PCM segment of the IVML8/
IVML24.
– No SLMO24 may be inserted in the PCM segment of the IVML24.
– If a TMS2 is configured on the PCM segment of the IVML24, only a board
with a maximum of 8 ports may be inserted in the free slot.
●
SLMO24
A maximum of two SLMO24s per PCM segment; the number of connected stations (hosts (master) and clients (slaves)) may not be more than 64.
The figures below show the PCM segments (64 time-division multiplex channels each) for the
different HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 system configurations.
Single-cabinet system: PCM segments
“8-slot” cabinets
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
U
P
S
M
BC
Figure 4-89
PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-157
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Two-cabinet system: PCM segments
“8-slot” cabinets
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
U
P
S
M
U
P
S
M
EC1
BC
Figure 4-90
1 111111 1
0 123456 7
PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System
Three-cabinet system: PCM segments
“8-slot” cabinets
1 111111 1
0 123456 7
U
P
S
M
EC1
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
BC
Figure 4-91
4-158
U
P
S
M
1 222222 2
9 012345 6
U
P
S
M
EC2
PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
Static traffic capacity
The static traffic capacity of the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 systems can be determined as
follows.
Table 4-17
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Static Traffic Capacity
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
Slots per PCM segment
Single-cabinet system
(see Figure 4-89)
02 + 03
64 erlangs
04 + 05
64 erlangs
06 + 07 + 08
64 erlangs
02 + 03
64 erlangs
04 + 05
64 erlangs
06 + 07 + 08
64 erlangs
10 + 11
64 erlangs
12 + 13
64 erlangs
14 + 15
64 erlangs
16 + 17
64 erlangs
02 + 03
64 erlangs
04 + 05
64 erlangs
06 + 07 + 08
64 erlangs
10 + 11 + 19 + 20
64 erlangs
12 + 13 + 21 + 22
64 erlangs
14 + 15 + 23 + 24
64 erlangs
16 + 17 + 25 + 26
64 erlangs
Two-cabinet system
(see Figure 4-90)
Three-cabinet system
(see Figure 4-91)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Static traffic capac- Total static traffic
ity per PCM segcapacity of the
ment
system
192 erlangs
448 erlangs
448 erlangs
4-159
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.6.1
Inserting or Removing Boards
Introduction
Peripheral boards can be inserted and removed while the power is connected. Two levers are
attached to the front corners of the boards to simplify insertion and removal. When closed,
these levers engage with the board, locking it in place.
See Section 9.2.2 for information on upgrading peripheral boards.
Procedure for inserting and removing the boards (Figure 4-92)
If
Then
Boards
Swing both plastic levers outward simultaneously. You can now pull the board
Unlocking the out of the system on its guide rails.
board
(1)
Boards
Latching assembly
(2)
Slide the board into the system using its guide rails. Insert the hooks on the
locking levers into the recesses in the shelf. Press down on both levers simultaneously in the direction of the shelf until they snap into place.
Locking and Unlocking Boards
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
Figure 4-92
Locking and unlocking boards
Special board attachments
The power supply is screwed onto the grill of each cabinet.
4-160
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
The special REAL board is mounted on the metal back panel (basic cabinet only) and connected to the backplane with a ribbon cable.
4.3.7
Connecting Workpoint Clients
For information, see Chapter 10.
4.3.8
Making trunk connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
STMD8 (S0 trunk connection)
●
TMS2 (Not for U.S.) (S2M trunk connection)
●
TMAMF (for selected countries only)
●
TML8W (Not for U.S.) (MSI)
●
TIEL
●
TMDID8 (for U.S. only)
●
TMGL8 (for U.S. only)
●
TMST1 (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-161
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
4.3.9
Performing a Visual Inspection
Introduction
Before starting up the system, you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware, cables,
and the power supply. The procedure is shown in Table 4-18. The visual inspection must be
performed while the system is disconnected from the power supply.
7
Caution
Before beginning work, make sure that the system is grounded and disconnected
from the power supply.
Observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (see Page 19).
Visual Inspection Procedure
Table 4-18
Step
Visual Inspection Procedure
Activity
Resources/
Remarks
Action
1.
Compare the slots for the installed boards with the board
assignment map.
Board assignment
map
Correct the board configuration and notify the
sales department.
2.
Check all boards for proper
seating.
See Page 4-160
Check the additional
mechanical attachments for the UPSM.
Reconnect and fasten the
boards.
3.
Check the local line voltage.
Digital multimeter
>
4-162
After finishing the visual inspection, you can begin starting up the HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 system as described in Chapter 5.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.1
Installation Prerequisites
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.
Tools and resources needed
The following are needed for installing the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath
3300 systems:
●
●
Tools:
–
Diagonal cutting pliers, telephone pliers, wire stripper, flat-nosed pliers
–
Slotted screwdrivers, from 2 to 8 mm (1/4 to 5/16 in.)
–
Phillips or cross-point screwdrivers, sizes 1 and 2
–
TORX screwdriver
–
Electric drill, hammer
–
Level, tape measure
–
For U.S. only: Punch-down tool suitable for the block used (such as block 66)
Resources:
–
Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E
–
Digital multimeter for testing ground connections and partial voltages
–
Telephone test set for analog interfaces
–
Not for U.S.: ISDN tester (such as K3000 or Aurora)
–
For U.S. only: AuroraDuet, AuroraExpert, AuroraRemote or similar, ISDN protocol analyzer
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-163
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.2
Table 4-19
Step
Installation Procedure
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - System Installation
Procedure
Installation Activity
Installing HiPath 3550 and HiPath
3350
Installing HiPath 3500 and HiPath
3300 (19-Inch Housing)
1.
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4165
(usually predetermined)
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4187
(usually predetermined)
2.
Unpacking the Components, page 4168
Unpacking the Components, page 4188
3.
Not for U.S.: Mounting the Main Distribu- Not for U.S.: Attaching a HiPath 3500
tion Frame (HiPath 3550 only), page 4- and HiPath 3300 to the Wall, page 4-189
168
4.
Removing the System Housing Cover, Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300
page 4-170
in a Cabinet, page 4-190
5.
Attaching the System to the Wall, page
4-172
Grounding the System, page 4-192
6.
Grounding the System and the Main
Distribution Frame, page 4-173
Installing the Boards, page 4-193
7.
Installing the Boards, page 4-175
Connecting Cables and the Line Network, page 4-194
8.
Laying the Line Network and Connection Cables, page 4-176
Configuration notes, page 4-195
9.
Attaching Ferrite, page 4-179
Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4198
10.
Configuration notes, page 4-181
Making trunk connections, page 4-198
11.
Connecting Workpoint Clients, page 4- Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4185
198
12.
Making trunk connections, page 4-185
13.
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4185
4-164
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3
Installing HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350
This section contains information on how to install HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350. This chapter
describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.
4.4.3.1
Selecting the Installation Site
Selecting a site
The customer usually has a preferred installation site in mind.
Make sure that the customer’s site meets the following guidelines:
●
To guarantee sufficient system ventilation, keep the area surrounding the housing clear as
follows: allow 30 cm clearance on the left (for board replacement), and 10 cm clearance on
the right, top and bottom of the housing.
●
Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat (for example sunlight and heaters).
●
Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments.
●
Avoid contact with chemicals.
●
Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during operation. Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used.
●
Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2.9.
For U.S. Only:
●
Ensure that the installation site is in the immediate vicinity of an electrical outlet
●
Allow space for a main distribution frame or other additional equipment.
●
Install lightning and surge arrester equipment.
●
Avoid standard carpeting, as it tends to produce electrostatic charges.
●
Ensure that Siemens equipment is 40 in. (101.6 cm) from other electrical equipment. The
National Electrical Code (NEC) requires 36 in. (91.44 cm) of clearance in front of electrical
equipment and 40 in. (101.6 cm) of clearance from other electrical service equipment.
●
Ensure that the equipment room for the system provides adequate space for installation
and maintenance activities, including removing and replacing the cover). See Figure 4-93
for space requirements on the sides of the system. We recommend using a plywood backboard at least 0.5 in. (127 mm) thick and measuring at least 4 ft. (122 cm) by 4 ft. (122 cm.).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-165
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Main distribution frame
Leave 46 cm
(18’’) free
50.8 cm
(20’’)
HiPath 3550
or
HiPath 3350
20.3 cm
(8’’)
Backplane
122 X 122 cm (4 X 4 ft.)
The system measures 18 by 17.7 inches (46 x 45 cm). The following spaces
should be allowed: 18 in. (46 mm) of clearance on the left, and at least 8 in. (203
mm) of clearance on the top and right. Allow 20 in. (50.8 cm) of clearance on the
bottom (for cables).
Figure 4-93
4-166
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Space Requirements (for U.S. only)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
You will find information on the design and dimensions in the following section:
●
HiPath 3550 Section 2.2.2.3
●
HiPath 3350 Section 2.2.2.4
4.4.3.1.1
For U.S. only: AC outlet
The AC connection must fulfill the requirements specified in Table 4-20.
Table 4-20
Nominal
voltage
120 V AC/
60 Hz
Electrical Connection Values (for U.S. only)
Nominal voltage range
Nominal Frequency
Range
from
to
from
to
110 V AC
130 V AC
47 Hz
63 Hz
Wall Outlet Configurations
NEMA 5-15, 2-pin, 3wire, earth
AC Power Outlet Requirements
●
The power source may not be more than 2 m (6 ft.) from the system.
●
The power source must supply a voltage of 120 V AC (single phase, fused) in 50-60 Hz.
●
A warning should be attached to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental removal of power.
●
An independent electric circuit with an isolated ground conductor should be used.
●
Recommendation: Add a power surge protector between the outlet and the system.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-167
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.2
Unpacking the Components
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure
that they are correct and complete.
2.
Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the
proper departments.
3.
Dispose of the packing materials properly.
7
4.4.3.3
Caution
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment
with visible damage.
Not for U.S.: Mounting the Main Distribution Frame (HiPath 3550 only)
Introduction
MDFU is the main distribution frame used (see Figure 4-94).
Installation notes
The MDFU-E main distribution frame should be installed in the direct vicinity of the system
(note length of connection cable) and at eye level. Mount it on the wall according to the instructions that came with it. The bag attached to the cover contains a drill template. It also contains
the necessary screws and wall anchors for attaching the MDF to the wall.
The MDFU must be grounded. Refer to Section 4.4.3.6 for an explanation of the procedure.
4-168
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Procedure for mounting the MDFU on the wall
Step
Activity
1.
Use the template to drill the holes.
2.
Insert the wall anchors and screw in the screws, leaving 5 mm projecting.
3.
Remove the housing cover and mount the MDFU-E on the brackets.
4.
Tighten the screws through the holes.
Layout and dimensions of the MDFU
328.8
1
2
3
367.0
4
Jumpering
Channel
5
6
7
9 slots (9 x 30 mm)
8
9
Special built-in comps.
2 x PFT1
or
1 x PFT4
System side
Figure 4-94
Line network
MDFU - Layout and Dimensions (367.0 x 328.8 x 125.4 mm) (not for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-169
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.4
7
Removing the System Housing Cover
Warning
To prevent injuries, you must observe the following instructions for the removal and
attachment of the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 housing cover.
Procedure
Step
1.
4-170
Activity
Loosen the two screwed plugs on the housing cover with a slotted screw driver.
Hold the housing cover so that it does not fall.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Step
2.
Activity
Remove the housing cover.
Warning
Grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only.
The shielding plate on the inside of the cover may have sharp edges which can
cause cuts.
Mounting the housing cover
To close the system housing again, put the cover on and fasten it with the two screwed plugs.
To avoid injuries, grasp the housing cover by its outside walls only when mounting it.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-171
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.5
Attaching the System to the Wall
Attach the system to the wall as shown in Figure 4-95.
Attaching the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 housing to the wall
None
Mounting
point
Hang system
and tighten screws
PSU/
UPS
Cable
duct
Rear wall of housing
Oblong holes for
Attachment of
PSU
UPS
to the rear
wall of housing
30 cm
Minum clearance for replacing boards
Figure 4-95
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Wall Attachment
Figure 4-96
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Wall Attachment
4-172
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.6
Grounding the System and the Main Distribution Frame
Not for U.S.: Grounding of the System
>
Because of their safety class, the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 do not have to be
grounded.
If grounding is required in certain countries (for example in Finland, Norway, U.S.),
the wall housing HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 must be grounded by a separate
ground conductor via the ground connection marked “
”.
For U.S. and Canada only: Grounding the system
The connector cables of systems HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 have a grounding. The system
must also be grounded by a separate ground conductor. This grounding connection must meet
the requirements of the relevant authorities (U.S. National Electrical Code, Canadian Electrical
Code). Lay a separate grounding from the earth to the system’s grounding connector. The
cross-section of the grounding must measure at least 14 AWG.
Grounding for the external main distributor frame
●
Not for U.S.:
–
HiPath 3550: Shipments always include an MDFU (Germany only) and two grounding
cables. Use one of the cables to ground the MDFU. It is not necessary to ground the
connection between the MDFU and HiPath 3550 (see Figure 4-97).
–
HiPath 3350: This system type does not require an external main distribution frame.
The connection cables to the peripherals are attached directly to the boards and routed to the outside via a cable duct inside the housing.
7
Danger
An external main distribution frame which requires grounding (if the existing
ground connection is marked “
”) must be grounded by a separate ground
conductor (minimum cross-section = 2.5 mm2)
Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.
Refer to Figure 4-97 when replacing a customer system but maintaining the existing external main distribution frame.
●
For U.S. only:
The customer supplies a main distribution frame to complete the communications system.
Mount and ground the MDF in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-173
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Grounding an external main distribution frame
O
L
D
Communication system to be
replaced
S
Y
S
T
E
M
N
E
W
Main distribution frame being
reused
Grounding
screw
HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350
(Grounding not required)
S
Y
S
T
E
M
External main distribution frame
(You must install proper grounding,
if required)
e. g. MDFU
green/yellow
Min. cross-section = 2.5 mm2
Example Potential equalization bus
but not:
- central heating system
- drain channels
- ground conductor for antenna system
Figure 4-97
4-174
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350 - Grounding an External Main Distribution Frame
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.7
Installing the Boards
Outside the U.S., the system is already equipped with the boards needed for the customer-specific requirements when the system is delivered.
In the U.S., you may need to install the boards.
Connecting to T1, PRI, or CorNet (for U.S. only)
7
Caution
The TST1 Module (HiPath 3550) can be installed only in conjunction with a listed
channel service unit (CSU).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-175
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.8
Laying the Line Network and Connection Cables
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - CABLU for connection to the external main distribution
frame
Jumper strip (25 TW) for installation in the external main distribution frame
6 slip-on connectors (4 TW each) for connection to the HiPath
3550 and HiPath 3350 boards
Figure 4-98
4-176
Layout of CABLU S30269-Z41-A30 (Length = 3 m)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
HiPath 3550 - MDFU ports for peripheral boards in HiPath 3750 format
The two arrows on the left mark the connections for the cables coming from the
main distribution frame (MDFU).
Figure 4-99
HiPath 3550 - Backplane Connection for a Peripheral Board in HiPath 3750
Format
Not for U.S.: HiPath 3550: Connecting the Cabling
If
Then
SLA8N
SLA16N
SLA24N
SLC16
SLC16N
SLMO24
Route the 16 TW to the MDFU via the SU X8 and 8 TW via SU X9 (see
Figure 4-99) using a standard cable (with 16 TW). Connect both cables (= 1
CABLU with SU connectors labeled 8 and 9) to the same jumper strip (25
TW).
Slot with any
other peripheral board
●
●
Without an external main distribution frame (MDFU):
You can attach cables for the peripheral boards directly to the boards (see
Figure 4-100 for the slip-on connectors) and route them to the MDFU
through the cable duct inside the housing.
With an external main distribution frame (MDFU):
Use CABLU S30269-Z41-A30 (Figure 4-98) to connect the peripheral
boards to the customer’s line network. As shown in Figure 4-100, you can
connect the eight-pin slip-on connectors to the boards directly. The line
network connects directly to the jumper strip.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-177
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Not for U.S.: HiPath 3350: Connecting the Cabling
The integrated distribution frame in HiPath 3350 allows you to connect the cable network to
the trunk and the stations using screw connections on slip-on connectors. that can be easily
removed for easy system connection and disconnection.
The peripheral boards and optional boards contain a distribution frame component in the form
of edge connectors on the boards.
The slip-on connectors for these edge connectors are supplied with the boards.
Screw connections to
the network
Figure 4-100
Plug connection
to the
HiPath
3550andHiPath
3350
Integrated Distribution Frame - Slip-On Connector Screw Connections
If you have an external main distribution frame (MDFU), use CABLU S30269-Z41-A30
(Figure 4-98) to connect the peripheral boards to the customer’s line network. As shown in
Figure 4-100, you can connect the 8-pin slip-on connectors directly to the boards. The line network connects directly to the jumper strip.
For U.S. only: HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350: Connecting the Cabling
If the boards are not already connected to the appropriate cables leaving the system, you need
to connect them.
●
The TST1 Module (HiPath 3550) connects to a customer-supplied channel service unit
(CSU) using the supplied cable. The CSU provides the required secondary protection.
●
Each port on the STLS4 Module connects to an S0 bus using the supplied, silver-satin connector cord and a surface-mounted RJ21X jack. The surface-mounted RJ21X jack is not
supplied.
The signals must be reversed in the RJ45X jack. See Figure 3-76.
●
The board in Slot 10 of HiPath 3550 connects using a special cable from the backplane to
the main distribution frame (MDF).
●
The remaining peripheral boards and options are connected by means of a mains distributor provided on the customer side or a comparable unit. This is where the MDF cables
supplied are used (Octopus cable with Amphenol terminators). You select the output pattern on the Amphenol connector by which slip-on connector you use on each board edge
connector.
4-178
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
●
Note: The MDF cable reverses the signals coming from the board. This means that R/T on
the board interface becomes T/R on the Amphenol connector.
4.4.3.9
Attaching Ferrite
To keep within the interference limit required by EMC Class B, you must attach ferrite to the
following lines.
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 power cables (wall housing)
The wall housing’s power cable must be guided through the C39022-Z7000-C7 ferrite sleeve
that is included in the accessory pack. Position the ferrite sleeve as shown in Figure 4-101 so
that you will be able to close the housing cover.
40 +/– 5 mm
min. 15 mm
Ferrite sleeve
C39022-Z7000-C7
Power cable
Figure 4-101
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Power Cable with Ferrite Sleeve
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-179
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Digital and analog trunks and subscriber lines from HiPath 3550 (wall housing)
>
The accessory pack does not contain enough ferrite sleeves for all trunks and subscriber lines possible in a maximum system configuration. In this case, you will need
to order additional ferrite.
If
Then
Trunk board or Guide both standard cables from SU X8 and SU X9 (see Figure 4-99) to the
subscriber line MDFU through two ferrite sleeves (C39022-Z7000-C7) each. The ferrite
modules in Hi- should be placed as far inside the housing as possible.
Path 3750 format
Trunk or subscriber line
modules in
“small” format
4-180
Guide the trunk and subscriber lines of all ports connected on a board
through a ferrite sleeve twice, i.e. in a loop. The ferrite should be fixed in the
cable duct if possible. If the number of lines makes this impossible, the ferrite
can be attached directly at the output of the cable duct.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.10
>
Configuration notes
Restrictions for equipment with IVMP8, IVMS8, TST1 and TS2 boards must be observed.
HiPath 3550: system overview and slots
PSU
UPS
Cable
duct
1
2
Slot levels
Figure 4-102
3
4
Optional boards
5
CUC
6
HiPath 3550 - Wall Housing System Overview
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-181
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
CUC: Connection Unit Com
CBCC
Opt.1
Opt.2
Opt.3
Slot 2
Slot 3
Opt.4
Slot 6
Slot 7
Opt.5
Slot 8
Slot 9
Slot 10 (HiPath 3750
Slot 4
Wall
Slot 5
OPAL
V.24
to MDF
1
Figure 4-103
2
3
Slot levels
4
5
6
HiPath 3550 - Slots in the Wall Housing
The CBCC board is connected to
the optional board via a ribbon cable (OPAL) (see adjacent figure).
Figure 4-104
4-182
HiPath 3550 - Option Adapter Long (OPAL)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
HiPath 3350: system overview and slots
PSU
UPS
Cable
duct
1
2
Optional boards
3
CUP
Slot levels
Figure 4-105
HiPath 3350 - Wall Housing System Overview
CUP: Connection Unit Point
Opt.2
Opt.3
Opt.4
Opt.5
Slot 2
Slot 3
V.24
Wall
CBCC
Slot 4
Slot 5
Opt.1
OPAL
1
2
3
Slot levels
Figure 4-106
HiPath 3350 - Slots in the Wall Housing
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-183
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Static traffic capacity
The HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 systems have the following static traffic capacities.
Table 4-21
System
HiPath 3550
(see Figure 4103)
HiPath 3350
(see Figure 4106)
1
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 - Static Traffic Capacity
Slots
Static traffic capac- Total static traffic capacity
ity
of the system
2 / 3 (CBCC)
24 erlangs
4
16 erlangs
5
16 erlangs
6
16 erlangs
7
16 erlangs
8
16 erlangs
9
30 erlangs1
10
64 erlangs
2 / 3 (CBCC)
24 erlangs
4
16 erlangs
5
16 erlangs
198 erlangs
56 erlangs
Use of a TS2 board results in a capacity of 30 erlangs. A maximum of one TS2 per HiPath 3550 is possible, and the board
may only be installed in slot 7 or 9, thus resulting in 30 Erlangs for slot 7 or 9.
4-184
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.3.11
Connecting Workpoint Clients
For information, see Chapter 10.
4.4.3.12
Making trunk connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
STLS2 (Not for U.S.), STLS4 (S0 trunk connection)
●
TS2, HiPath 3550 only (S2M trunk connection)
●
TLA2 (Not for U.S.), TLA4 (Not for U.S.), TLA8 (Not for U.S.) (MSI)
●
TMAMF (for selected countries only), HiPath 3550only
●
TMGL4 (for U.S. only)
●
TMQ4 (for U.S. only)
●
TST1 (for U.S. only), HiPath 3550only
4.4.3.13
Performing a Visual Inspection
Before starting up the system, you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware, cables,
and the power supply. The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnected from the power supply.
7
Step
Caution
Conduct the visual inspection only while the system is disconnected from the power
supply.
Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (see Page 1-9).
Activity
Resources/Remarks
1.
Compare the slots for the
installed boards with the
board assignment map.
2.
Check the local line voltage. Digital multimeter
>
Board assignment map
Possible remedies
Correct the board
configuration and notify the sales department.
After finishing the visual inspection, you can begin starting up the system as described in Chapter 5.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-185
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4
Installing HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 (19-Inch Housing)
This section contains information on how to install the HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 19-inch
housing. This chapter describes the standard installation procedures for the basic system. Refer to Chapter 9 for information about supplementary equipment and expansions.
7
4.4.4.1
Danger
The HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems can only be operated with a closed housing.
Before opening the housing, make sure that the system is de-energized as follows:
●
Disconnect the line cord on any connected battery pack (for UPSC-DR only).
●
Disconnect the line cord on any connected EPSU2-R (for UPSC-DR only).
●
Disconnect the power plug.
Installation Versions
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 are designed for the following three installation variants:
●
Wall mounting (with assembly kit 39165-A7027-D2)
●
Desk installation (assembly kit includes adhesive feet 39165-A7027-D2.)
Stick the adhesive feet to the bottom of the housing.
●
Installation in the 19-inch cabinet (with assembly kit 39165-A7027-D1 for HiPath 3500, assembly kit 39165-A7027-D4 for HiPath 3300)
You can also install an ECR expansion cabinet rack in which you can install a battery pack (for
uninterruptible power supply) and/or an additional external power supply EPSU2-R (if the system’s internal power supply is not sufficient) (see Section 9.2.4).
4-186
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.2
Selecting the Installation Site
Selecting a site
The customer usually has a preferred installation site in mind, for example an existing 19-inch
cabinet.
Make sure that the customer’s site meets the following guidelines:
●
To guarantee sufficient system ventilation, allow a minimum of 10 cm clearance around the
housing.
●
Do not expose the systems to direct sources of heat (for example sunlight and heaters).
●
Do not expose the systems to extremely dusty environments.
●
Avoid contact with chemicals.
●
Take every precaution to prevent the formation of condensation on the system during operation. Systems covered with condensation must be dried before being used.
●
Observe the environmental conditions specified in Section 2.9.
You will find information on the design and dimensions in the following section:
●
HiPath 3500 Section 2.2.2.6
●
HiPath 3300 Section 2.2.2.7
4.4.4.2.1
For U.S. only: AC outlet
The AC connection must fulfill the requirements specified in Table 4-22.
Table 4-22
Nominal
voltage
120 V AC/
60 Hz
Electrical Connection Values (for U.S. only)
Nominal voltage range
Nominal Frequency
Range
from
to
from
to
110 V AC
130 V AC
47 Hz
63 Hz
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Wall Outlet Configurations
NEMA 5-15, 2-pin, 3wire, earth
4-187
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.3
Unpacking the Components
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Compare the components with the packing slip or customer receipt to make sure
that they are correct and complete.
2.
Determine whether any damage has occurred during transport and report it to the
proper departments.
3.
Dispose of the packing materials properly.
7
4-188
Caution
Only use tools and equipment that are in perfect condition. Do not use equipment
with visible damage.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.4
Not for U.S.: Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall
Procedure for wall mounting (Figure 4-107)
Step
Activity
1.
Drill a hole in the selected wall, insert a wall anchor and screw in the screws.
2.
Screw the angle brackets (A) and (B) for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 onto the
base of the device.
3.
Mount the system with the angle bracket (A) on the screws.
4.
Drill a second hole in the wall for the lower angle bracket (B), insert a wall anchor
and attach the angle bracket with a screw.
Wall mounting
A
HiPath 3500 /
HiPath 3300
B
Figure 4-107
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Wall Installation (for U.S.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-189
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.5
Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet
Procedure for 19-inch cabinets (Figure 4-108)
Step
Activity
1.
HiPath 3500 only: Attach the two angle brackets (A) to the 19-inch cabinet using
two screws per bracket.
2.
Attach the two angle brackets (B) to the left and right of the HiPath 3500 or HiPath
3300 using two screws per bracket.
3.
Slide the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 system into the 19-inch cabinet and attach
it to the left and right of the 19-inch frame with screws.
4-190
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Mounting the 19-inch cabinet
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3300
B
B
HiPath 3500
A
Figure 4-108
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Mounting the 19-Inch Cabinet
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-191
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.6
Grounding the System
Grounding: Inspection and Implementation
Preliminary Inspection of the 19-Inch Cabinet:
Is the 19-inch cabinet grounded
by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow)?
NO
The 19-inch cabinet must be grounded by a separate ground conductor (green/yellow).
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the
low-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a licensed electrician to install the ground.
NO
A potential equalization bus must be installed in
the 19-inch cabinet and connected to the ground
conductor.
Danger
If your personnel are not qualified to work on the
low-voltage network (230 Vac), you must hire a licensed electrician to install the ground.
YES
Does the 19-inch cabinet have
a potential equalization bus at
which the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 can be grounded?
YES
If you answer “Yes” to both questions, the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 systems may be
grounded as described below.
4-192
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Procedure: Ground the system
Proceed as follows to ground the HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems (see also diagram below).
Step
Activity
1.
Connect the grounding cable to the potential equalization bar on the 19-inch cabinet.
2.
Connect the grounding cable to the system’s ground connection with the grounding screw supplied (point A).
3.
Attach the grounding cable (strain relief) to the system (point B) with a cable tie.
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300
systems
A
Grounding cable
B
Potential equalization bar
Figure 4-109
7
4.4.4.7
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Grounding
Danger
The HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 housing to be wall-mounted must be grounded by
a separate ground conductor (such as a potential equalization bar). Make sure that
the ground conductor is securely installed and strain-relieved.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in electrical shock.
Installing the Boards
The systems are already equipped with the boards needed for the customer’s specific requirements.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-193
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.8
Connecting Cables and the Line Network
Not for U.S. and Canada Connection cable for the expansion cabinet rack ECR (if
present)
To meet EMC requirements, the braided shields on the connection cable must be connected to
the housing on the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 side and on the ECR side.
●
Attaching to the HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 side
A clip and a tooth lock washer are enclosed with the ECR mounting set. Use these and the
housing cover mounting screw to attach the braided shield to the HiPath 3500 or HiPath
3300 housing (as shown in Figure 4-110). The tooth lock washer must be mounted between the painted surface of the cover and the clip.
Housing cover mounting screw
Clip
Tooth lock washer
Housing cover
Figure 4-110
●
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Connection Cable to ECR
Attaching to the ECR side (see Page 9-9)
Line network
The connecting cords to the peripherals can be connected directly to the relevant MW8 jacks
on the front panel of the 19-inch housing.
4-194
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.9
Configuration notes
HiPath 3500: system overview and slots
7
Caution
For safety, operate HiPath 3500 only with the housing front closed. Always use dummy panels (C39165-A7027-B115) to close slots that are not equipped with boards.
Slot
levels:
5 (options)
Slots 1-3
4 (CBRC)
Figure 4-111
>
Slot 6
Slot 7
3 (Peripheralboards)
Slot 8
Slot 9
2 (Peripheralboards)
Slot 4
Slot 5
1 (Peripheralboards)
HiPath 3500 - Slot Levels in the 19-Inch Housing
It is imperative that you observe the restrictions regarding TS2R installation.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-195
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
HiPath 3300: system overview and slots
7
Caution
For safety, operate HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed. Always use dummy panels (C39165-A7027-B115) to close slots that are not equipped with boards.
Slot
levels:
3 (options)
Slots 1-3
Slot 4
Figure 4-112
4-196
2 (CBRC)
Slot 5
1 (Peripheralboards)
HiPath 3300 - Slot Levels in the 19-Inch Housing
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
Static traffic capacity
The HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems have the following static traffic capacities.
Table 4-23
System
HiPath 3500
(see Figure 4111)
HiPath 3300
(see Figure 4112)
1
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 - Static Traffic Capacity
Slots
Static traffic capac- Total static traffic capacity
ity
of the system
2/3 (CBRC)
24 erlangs
4
16 erlangs
5
16 erlangs
6
16 erlangs
7
16 erlangs
8
16 erlangs
9
30 erlangs1
2/3 (CBRC)
24 erlangs
4
16 erlangs
5
16 erlangs
134 erlangs
56 erlangs
Use of a TS2R board results in a capacity of 30 erlangs. A maximum of one TS2R per HiPath 3500 is possible, and the
board may only be installed in slot 7 or 9, thus resulting in 30 Erlangs for slot 7 or 9.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
4-197
inst_h3.fm
Installing HiPath 3000
Installing HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, and HiPath 3300
4.4.4.10
Connecting Workpoint Clients
For information, see Chapter 10.
4.4.4.11
Making trunk connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
STLS4R (S0 trunk connection)
●
TS2R, only HiPath 3500 (S2M trunk connection)
●
TLA4R (Not for U.S.) (MSI)
●
TMGL4R (for U.S. only)
●
TST1 (for U.S. only), HiPath 3500 only
4.4.4.12
Performing a Visual Inspection
Before starting up the system, you must perform a visual inspection of the hardware, cables,
and the power supply. The visual inspection must be performed while the system is disconnected from the power supply.
7
Step
Caution
Conduct the visual inspection only while the system is disconnected from the power
supply.
Always wear an antistatic wristband and observe the measures for protecting electrostatically sensitive devices (see Page 1-9).
Activity
Resources/Remarks
1.
Compare the slots for the
installed boards with the
board assignment map.
2.
Check the local line voltage. Digital multimeter
>
4-198
Board assignment map
Possible remedies
Correct the board
configuration and notify the sales department.
After finishing the visual inspection, you can begin starting up the system as described in Chapter 5.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Overview
5
Starting Up HiPath 3000
5.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
Starting Up HiPath 3800, page 5-2
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, page 5-11
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300, page 5-19
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-1
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
5.2
Starting Up HiPath 3800
This section contains information on how to start up the HiPath 3800 communication system.
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should start up the system.
7
Danger
The system may only be started (connected to the power supply) if all system cabinets are sealed at the rear with the connection and filler panels provided.
5.2.1
Table 5-1
5-2
Startup Procedure
HiPath 3800 - Startup Procedure
Step
Startup Activity (Remarks)
1.
Supplying the System with Power, page 5-3
(Plugging in the power supply cable for the system cabinet(s) and positioning the
switches for all LUNA2 power supplies to “DC-ON” –> starting system boot)
2.
Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-6
3.
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 5-7
4.
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number, page 5-9
5.
Customer-Specific Programming, page 5-10
6.
Performing a System Check, page 5-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
5.2.2
Supplying the System with Power
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Plug in the power supply cable for the system cabinet(s).
2.
Position all LUNA2 power supply switches to “DC-ON”.
Note: Startup does not begin until the switches on all LUNA2 units are in “DC-ON”
position.
3.
Monitor the RUN LED of the CBSAP. The individual steps of the system boot
(Table 5-2) can be observed this way.
RUN LEDHiPath 3800
The CBSAP features a RUN LED that signals the system boot status in three phases:
●
Phase 1: Basic tasks (recovery, database, query) are started.
●
Phase 2: Loadware is installed for peripheral boards.
●
Phase 3: Data is installed for peripheral boards.
The RUN LED flashes at a different rhythm to indicate each specific phase. The phases are
always separated by a 3-second pause during which the LED is not lit.
Table 5-2
RUN LED - LED Status Meaning
RUN LED
1st flashing
rhythm
Meaning
2nd flash- 3rd flashing
ing
rhythm
rhythm
short
short
long
Phase 1: Basic tasks (recovery, database, query) are
started.
short
long
short
Phase 2: Loadware is installed for peripheral boards.
short
long
long
Phase 3: Data is installed for peripheral boards.
Definition of the flashing rhythms:
●
short = 0.25 s on/0.25 s off
●
long = 0.75 s on/0.25 s off
>
The HiPath 3800 is ready when the date “1. JAN 00” and the time “00:00” appear in
the display on the system telephone.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-3
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
5.2.2.1
Assigning Station Numbers
The first time the system is initialized, the system determines its capacity and stores the result
in the CDB (customer database). After each system reset, the system accesses this data and
generates a continuous numbering plan.
If the system detects changes to the board configuration during startup, the following action is
taken:
If
Then
Missing or defective board
No action.
Different board type
The system does not automatically activate the board.
Underequipped or same
board variant
Board is activated. The same station range is used.
Over-equipped board variant Board is activated. The old station range is activated and the
ports associated with the new board are inserted at the end.
The ports are split if there is no contiguous station range available.
New board in empty slot
●
●
5-4
Board was the last one installed in accordance with the
placement sequence:
All boards are activated and the numbering plan continues
without a gap.
Board was inserted ahead of another board in the placement sequence:
Board is activated and appended to the last board in the
numbering plan.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
Procedure: Reinitialization
Proceed as follows if measures to expand the system configuration require reinitialization of the
numbering plan:
Step
Activity
Description
1.
Disconnect the system from
the power supply. Check that
the system is de-energized.
Expand as required.
2.
Connect system to power sup- A continuous numbering plan is generated (as was
ply
the case when the system was first initialized).
Notes:
●
Changes to the extension numbers result in
changes to the individual, extension-specific
data.
●
Only those ports provided for in accordance
with the maximum configuration are activated if
the maximum line configuration is exceeded
(too many trunk boards).
●
A mixture of subscriber line circuits and trunk
lines on one S0 board can result in gaps in line
numbering. This is because all S0 ports are initially activated as trunks and are only subsequently reconfigured.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-5
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
5.2.3
Carrying Out a System Reload
After supplying the system with power, you must carry out a system reload.
Procedure
>
The reset/reload switch is tested by a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA). This
FPGA is loaded by the processor when starting up the HiPath 3800 and is only fully
functional after the loading process is complete. If the reset/reload switch is activated
during loading, then it is not possible to evaluate the cause of the restart. For this
reason, the reset/reload switch may only be activated after the system startup (green
Run LED lights up).
Press and hold down the reset switch for at least 5 seconds (FAIL LED (red) goes out). If you
do not hold down the reset switch for a full 5 seconds, the system may perform a reset rather
than a reload or may not reload properly.
5-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
5.2.4
>
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the
Password Type
Since the system software no longer provides all languages, some systems no longer start up in the customary local language after the country code is entered. You
must now load the local language prior to country initialization, using HiPath 3000
Manager E (see information on multilingual text output in the Feature Description HiPath 3000/5000).
After carrying out the country initialization, but before loading the required local language, the displays come up in German.
Carry out the country initialization on the system telephone with internal station number 100
(port 01). This process loads the country-specific language and features and ensures that the
system meets the country’s conditions for approval.
In Germany, no country adaptation is required after a reload because the system boots with the
German country code by default.
The next step involves selecting the password type.
Input procedure
Table 5-3
Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type
Step
Entry
Description
1.
*95
2.
31994
Default user name
3.
31994
Default password
4.
XXXXX
You are prompted to enter a new password (max. 15 digits)
5.
XXXXX
You are prompted to confirm the password entered in step
4.
6.
29 - 5
7.
X
8.
XX
Start system administration
Country initialization
You are prompted to select the password type:
1 = Variable password
2 = Fixed password
You are prompted to enter the country code (see Page A24). The system then boots up with the country-specific default information.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-7
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
Table 5-3
Step
Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type
Entry
Description
Notes:
●
On step 4 and step 5: If a new password is issued, both steps are omitted when calling
the system again.
●
On step 6: No country adjustment is necessary for Germany because the system starts
up with German codes.
●
On step 7: When selecting the fixed password, the default password (31994) overwrites
the new password entered under step 4.
Entering the country code starts the system. Any data that has already been stored, such as
system speed-dialing destinations and classes of service, is deleted or reset to the default value.
7
For Brazil only: CO call privileges, ringback protection per trunk
If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil, the option for saving the
digits dialed and transmitting them via the system (dial rule 1A) is not activated.
This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for
the dial tone from the analog trunk and does not set up the connection between the
DTMF terminal and the trunk until it recognizes the dial tone. Digits dialed before dial
tone recognition are therefore not recognized by the CO. This in turn can impact CO
call privileges.
To avoid this, Least Cost Routing LCR should be activated for all systems with the
country code for Brazil and with connection to analog trunks with DTMF signaling.
>
After you enter a country code, the default data is only guaranteed to load correctly
if the system software has been officially released for that country.
5-8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
5.2.5
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number
Introduction
Corresponding to the configuration, the system station number must be entered (without the
DID number or attendant code) on the system telephone that is assigned 100 as its internal
station number.
The system station number is determined by the network or service provider.
Depending on the configuration type, system station numbers should not be entered for
point-to-multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000, for example.
Example
Port number: 98008
National number: 2302 (prefix without 0)
International number: 49 (country code)
Station number type: international
Input procedure
Table 5-4
Entering the System Number
Step
Entry
Description
1.
*95
2.
Service
User name (identification)
3.
XXXXX
Enter password
System administration code
4.
Watch the display.
Scroll until “ISDN parameters” and “PABX number” appear.
Confirm your selection.
OR:
Expert mode: Enter the code 20 2 1 to 4.
5.
Follow the user prompting on the display.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-9
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3800
5.2.6
Customer-Specific Programming
You can program the system using one of the following tools:
●
Assistant T (programming telephone, see Appendix A)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E (PC tool)
>
Changes to the system (for example key programming) made using HiPath 3000
Manager E during an offline programming session will be lost when the database is
loaded.
When you program the system offline, the assignments of trunk and subscriber ports
depend on the order in which the boards are inserted. Usually, the boards are inserted from the lowest slot to the highest.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
5.2.7
Performing a System Check
Checking the telephones
●
Check the time and date display on each telephone. If a display does not appear, either the
telephone or the link is defective. Replace the terminal or fix the link.
●
Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12.3.1.8 on all telephones.
Checking for proper system booting
●
Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.
5-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
5.3
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
This section contains information on how to start up the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 communication systems.
7
5.3.1
Table 5-5
Step
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should start up the system.
Startup Procedure
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Startup Procedure
Startup Activity (Remarks)
1.
Supplying the System with Power, page 5-12
(Plugging in the power supply unit -> starting system boot)
2.
Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-15
3.
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 515
4.
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number, page 5-17
5.
Customer-Specific Programming, page 5-18
6.
Performing a System Check, page 5-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-11
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
5.3.2
Supplying the System with Power
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Plug in the power supply cable on the power supply unit(s).
2.
Monitor the Run LED of the CBCPR. The individual steps of the system boot
(Table 5-6) can be observed this way.
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 RUN LED
The CBCPR has a RUN LED that indicates the system status.
Table 5-6
RUN LED - LED Status Meaning
RUN LED
Off
No power
On
Reset switch pressed briefly
Off
Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds (LED is extinguished
to acknowledge that a reload has begun)
On
System boot
Off
for 0.1 s
1
Meaning
Load operation: APS in SDRAM, loadware, and card data.
Flashing
0.5 s on/0.5 s off
Normal operating state (zero load)1
Flashing
0.1 s on/0.1 s off
MMC removed or defective
The flashing rhythm depends on the load. The higher the system load the slower the flashing rhythm.
>
5-12
The HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 is ready when the date “1. JAN 00” and the time
“00:00” appear in the display on the system telephone.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
5.3.2.1
Assigning Station Numbers
The first time the system is initialized, the system determines its capacity and stores the result
in the CDB (customer database). After each system reset, the system accesses this data and
generates a continuous numbering plan.
If the system detects changes to the board configuration during startup, the following action is
taken:
If
Then
Missing or defective board
No action.
Different board type
The system does not automatically activate the board.
Underequipped or same
board variant
Board is activated. The same station range is used.
Over-equipped board variant Board is activated. The old station range is activated and the
ports associated with the new board are inserted at the end.
The ports are split if there is no contiguous station range available.
New board in empty slot
●
●
Board was the last one installed in accordance with the
placement sequence:
All boards are activated and the numbering plan continues
without a gap.
Board was inserted ahead of another board in the placement sequence:
Board is activated and appended to the last board in the
numbering plan.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-13
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
Procedure: Reinitialization
Proceed as follows if measures to expand the system configuration require reinitialization of the
numbering plan:
Step
Activity
Description
1.
Disconnect the system from
the power supply. Check that
the system is de-energized.
Expand as required.
2.
Connect system to power sup- A continuous numbering plan is generated (as was
ply
the case when the system was first initialized).
Notes:
●
Changes to the extension numbers result in
changes to the individual, extension-specific
data.
●
Only those ports provided for in accordance
with the maximum configuration are activated if
the maximum line configuration is exceeded
(too many trunk boards).
●
A mixture of subscriber line circuits and trunk
lines on one STMD8 can result in gaps in line
numbering. This is because all STMD8 ports
are initially activated as trunks and are only
subsequently reconfigured.
5-14
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
5.3.3
Carrying Out a System Reload
After supplying the system with power, you must carry out a system reload. This can be performed during the initial system boot.
Procedure
Press and hold down the reset switch for at least 5 seconds (RUN LED goes out). If you do not
hold down the reset switch for a full 5 seconds, the system may perform a reset rather than a
reload or may not reload properly.
5.3.4
>
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the
Password Type
Since the system software no longer provides all languages, some systems no longer start up in the customary local language after the country code is entered. You
must now load the local language prior to country initialization, using HiPath 3000
Manager E (see information on multilingual text output in the Feature Description
HiPath 3000/5000).
After carrying out the country initialization, but before loading the required local language, the displays come up in German.
Carry out the country initialization on the system telephone with internal station number 100
(port 01). This process loads the country-specific language and features and ensures that the
system meets the country’s conditions for approval.
In Germany, no country adaptation is required after a reload because the system boots with the
German country code by default.
The next step involves selecting the password type.
Input procedure
Table 5-7
Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type
Step
Entry
Description
1.
*95
2.
31994
Default user name
3.
31994
Default password
4.
XXXXX
You are prompted to enter a new password (max. 15 digits)
5.
XXXXX
You are prompted to confirm the password entered in step
4.
6.
29 - 5
Start system administration
Country initialization
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-15
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
Table 5-7
Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type
Step
Entry
7.
X
8.
XX
Description
You are prompted to select the password type:
1 = Variable password
2 = Fixed password
You are prompted to enter the country code (see Page A24). The system then boots up with the country-specific default information.
Notes:
●
On step 4 and step 5: If a new password is issued, both steps are omitted when calling
the system again.
●
On step 6: No country adjustment is necessary for Germany because the system starts
up with German codes.
●
On step 7: When selecting the fixed password, the default password (31994) overwrites
the new password entered under step 4.
Entering the country code starts the system. Any data that has already been stored, such as
system speed-dialing destinations and classes of service, is deleted or reset to the default value.
7
For Brazil only: CO call privileges, ringback protection per trunk
If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil, the option for saving the
digits dialed and transmitting them via the system (dial rule 1A) is not activated.
This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for
the dial tone from the analog trunk and does not set up the connection between the
DTMF terminal and the trunk until it recognizes the dial tone. Digits dialed before dial
tone recognition are therefore not recognized by the CO. This in turn can impact CO
call privileges.
To avoid this, Least Cost Routing LCR should be activated for all systems with the
country code for Brazil and with connection to analog trunks with DTMF signaling.
>
After you enter a country code, the default data is only guaranteed to load correctly
if the system software has been officially released for that country.
5-16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
5.3.5
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number
Introduction
Corresponding to the configuration, the system station number must be entered (without the
DID number or attendant code) on the system telephone that is assigned 100 as its internal
station number.
The system station number is determined by the network or service provider.
Depending on the configuration type, system station numbers should not be entered for
point-to-multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000, for example.
Example
Port number: 98008
National number: 2302 (prefix without 0)
International number: 49 (country code)
Station number type: international
Input procedure
Table 5-8
Entering the System Number
Step
Entry
Description
1.
*95
2.
Service
User name (identification)
3.
XXXXX
Enter password
System administration code
4.
Watch the display.
Scroll until “ISDN parameters” and “PABX number” appear.
Confirm your selection.
OR:
Expert mode: Enter the code 20 2 1 to 4.
5.
Follow the user prompting on the display.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-17
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
5.3.6
Customer-Specific Programming
You can program the system using one of the following tools:
●
Assistant T (programming telephone, see Appendix A)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E (PC tool)
>
Changes to the system (for example key programming) made using during an HiPath
3000 Manager E offline programming session will be lost when the database is loaded.
When you program the system offline, the assignments of trunk and subscriber ports
depend on the order in which the boards are inserted. Usually, the boards are inserted from the lowest slot to the highest.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
5.3.7
Performing a System Check
Checking the telephones
●
Check the time and date display on each telephone. If a display does not appear, either the
telephone or the link is defective. Replace the terminal or fix the link.
●
Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12.3.1.8 on all telephones.
Checking for proper system booting
●
Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.
5-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
5.4
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
This section contains information on how to start up the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500
and HiPath 3300 communication systems.
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should start up the system.
7
Caution
For safety, operate HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 only with the housing front closed.
Always use dummy panels (C39165-A7027-B115) to close slots that are not
equipped with boards.
5.4.1
Table 5-9
Step
Startup Procedure
Startup Procedure
Startup Activity (Remarks)
1.
Supplying the System With Power, page 5-20 (starting system boot).
2.
Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-23
3.
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 523
4.
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number, page 5-25
5.
Customer-Specific Programming, page 5-26
6.
Performing a System Check, page 5-26
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-19
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
5.4.2
Supplying the System With Power
Procedure
Step
Activity
1.
Plug in the power supply cable and, where applicable, the battery cable.
2.
Monitor the Run LED of the central controller. The individual steps of the system
boot (Table 5-10) can be observed this way.
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 RUN LED
The central board has a RUN LED that indicates the system status.
Table 5-10
RUN LED - LED Status Meaning
RUN LED
Off
No power
on
Reset switch pressed briefly
Off
Reset switch held down for more than 5 seconds (LED is extinguished
to acknowledge that a reload has begun)
On
System boot
Off
for 0.1 s
1
Meaning
Load operation: APS in SDRAM, loadware, and card data.
Flashing
0.5 s on/0.5 s off
Normal operating state (zero load)1
Flashing
0.1 s on/0.1 s off
MMC removed or defective
The flashing rhythm depends on the load. The higher the system load the slower the flashing rhythm.
>
5-20
The system is ready when the date “1. JAN 00” and the time “00:00” appear in the
display on the system telephone.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
5.4.2.1
Assigning Station Numbers
The first time the system is initialized, the system determines its capacity and stores the result
in the CDB (customer database). After each system reset, the system accesses this data and
generates a continuous numbering plan.
If the system detects changes to the board configuration during startup, the following action is
taken:
If
Then
Missing or defective board
No action.
Different board type
The system does not automatically activate the board.
Underequipped or same
board variant
Board is activated. The same station range is used.
Over-equipped board variant Board is activated. The old station range is activated and the
ports associated with the new board are inserted at the end.
The ports are split if there is no contiguous station range available.
New board in empty slot
●
●
Board was the last one installed in accordance with the
placement sequence:
All boards are activated and the numbering plan continues
without a gap.
Board was inserted ahead of another board in the placement sequence:
Board is activated and appended to the last board in the
numbering plan.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-21
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
Procedure: Reinitialization
Proceed as follows if measures to expand the system configuration require reinitialization of the
numbering plan:
Step
Activity
1.
Disconnect the system
from the power supply.
Check that the system is
de-energized.
Expand as required.
2.
Connect system to pow- A continuous numbering plan is generated (as was the
er supply
case when the system was first initialized).
Notes:
●
Changes to the extension numbers result in changes to the individual, extension-specific data.
●
Only those ports provided for in accordance with
the maximum configuration are activated if the maximum line configuration is exceeded (too many
trunk boards).
●
A mixture of subscriber line circuits and trunk lines
on one S0 board can result in gaps in line numbering. This is because all board ports are initially activated as trunks and are only subsequently reconfigured.
●
S0 station: If stations are connected to an S0 board
(S0 bus), their station numbers result from the MSN
programmed in the telephone, regardless of the
connection.
If no MSN is programmed on a telephone or if no
MSN can be programmed, the system uses a default MSN. The default MSN can be administered
by S0 port (HiPath 3000 Manager E).
●
The system does not assign the MSN until the S0
port is configured on the “Euro bus”; the MSN can
be read out via administration.
5-22
Description
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
5.4.3
Carrying Out a System Reload
After supplying the system with power, you must carry out a system reload. This can be performed during the initial system boot.
Procedure
Press and hold down the reset switch for at least 5 seconds (RUN LED goes out). If you do not
hold down the reset switch for a full 5 seconds, the system may perform a reset rather than a
reload or may not reload properly.
5.4.4
>
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the
Password Type
Since the system software no longer provides all languages, some systems no longer start up in the customary local language after the country code is entered. You
must now load the local language prior to country initialization, using HiPath 3000
Manager E (see information on multilingual text output in the Feature Description
HiPath 3000/5000).
After carrying out the country initialization, but before loading the required local language, the displays come up in German.
Carry out the country initialization on the system telephone with the internal station number 100
(HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500) or 11 for (HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300) (port 01). This process
loads the country-specific language and features and ensures that the system meets the country’s conditions for approval.
In Germany, no country adaptation is required after a reload because the system boots with the
German country code by default.
The next step involves selecting the password type.
Input procedure
Table 5-11
Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type
Step
Entry
Description
1.
*95
2.
31994
Default user name
3.
31994
Default password
4.
XXXXX
You are prompted to enter a new password (max. 15 digits)
5.
XXXXX
You are prompted to confirm the password entered in step 4.
6.
29 - 5
Start system administration
Country initialization
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-23
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
Table 5-11
Entering the Country Code and Selecting the Password Type
Step
Entry
7.
X
8.
XX
Description
You are prompted to select the password type:
1 = Variable password
2 = Fixed password
You are prompted to enter the country code (see Page A-24).
The system then boots up with the country-specific default information.
Notes:
●
On step 4 and step 5: If a new password is issued, both steps are omitted when calling
the system again.
●
On step 6: No country adjustment is necessary for Germany because the system starts
up with German codes.
●
On step 7: When selecting the fixed password, the default password (31994) overwrites
the new password entered under step 4.
Note
Entering the country code starts the system. Any data that has already been stored, such as
system speed-dialing destinations and classes of service, is deleted or reset to the default value.
7
For Brazil only: CO call privileges, ringback protection per trunk
If the system was initialized with the country code for Brazil, the option for saving the
digits dialed and transmitting them via the system (dial rule 1A) is not activated.
This can lead to dialing problems at DTMF terminals because the system waits for
the dial tone from the analog trunk and does not set up the connection between the
DTMF terminal and the trunk until it recognizes the dial tone. Digits dialed before dial
tone recognition are therefore not recognized by the CO. This in turn can impact CO
call privileges.
To avoid this, Least Cost Routing LCR should be activated for all systems with the
country code for Brazil and with connection to analog trunks with DTMF signaling.
>
After you enter a country code, the default data is only guaranteed to load correctly
if the system software has been officially released for that country.
Table A-3, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3500 have not been introduced in
some of the countries listed in HiPath 3300. The correct loading of the default data
is not guaranteed for those countries.
5-24
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
5.4.5
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number
Introduction
Corresponding to the configuration, the system station number must be entered (without the
DID number or attendant code) on the system telephone that is assigned 100 as its internal
station number for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 and 11 in the case of HiPath 3350 and HiPath
3300.
The system station number is determined by the network or service provider.
Depending on the configuration type, system station numbers should not be entered for
point-to-multipoint operation or for tie trunks to HiPath 4000, for example.
Example
●
Port number: 98008
●
National number: 2302 (prefix without 0)
●
International number: 49 (country code)
●
Station number type: international
Input procedure
Table 5-12
Entering the System Number
Step
Entry
Description
1.
*95
2.
Service
User name (identification)
3.
XXXXX
Enter password
System administration code
4.
Watch the display.
Scroll until “ISDN parameters” and “PABX number” appear.
Confirm your selection.
OR:
Expert mode: Enter the code 20 2 1 to 4.
5.
Follow the user prompting on the display.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
5-25
start_h3.fm
Starting Up HiPath 3000
Starting Up HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
5.4.6
Customer-Specific Programming
You can program the system using one of the following tools:
●
Assistant T (programming telephone, refer to Appendix A)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E (PC tool)
>
Changes to the system (for example key programming) made using during an HiPath
3000 Manager E offline programming session will be lost when the database is loaded.
When you program the system offline, the assignments of trunk and subscriber ports
depend on the order in which the boards are inserted. Usually, the boards are inserted from the lowest slot to the highest.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
5.4.7
Performing a System Check
Checking the telephones
●
Check the time and date display on each telephone. If a display does not appear, either the
telephone or the link is defective. Replace the terminal or fix the link.
●
Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12.3.1.8 on all telephones.
Checking for proper system booting
●
Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.
5-26
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Overview
6
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
6.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
Introduction, page 6-2
Software Structure, page 6-5
Notes on Open Numbering in a HiPath 3000/5000 Network, page 6-8
Installation Requirements, page 6-9
HiPath 5000, page 6-12
●
Preparing for Installation, page 6-12
●
Integrating the HiPath 5000 Server in the Customer LAN, page 6-13
●
HiPath 5000 Installing Standard Components, page 6-14
●
Installing HiPath ComScendo Service, page 6-21
●
Installing HiPath Fault Management, page 6-30
●
Installing the TAPI Service Provider, page 6-34
●
Installing the HiPath Inventory Server Separately, page 6-35
●
Verifying Installation, page 6-40
Modifying HiPath 5000 Components (Retro-Fitting, Updating, Deleting), page 6-42
Performing Licensing, page 6-44
Optimizing Operating System Settings, page 6-45
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration, page 6-47
●
Configuring HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service, page 6-48
●
Configuring HiPath 5000 Server as a Central Administration Unit in an IP Network, page
6-49
HiPath Manager PCM, page 6-53
GetAccount, page 6-54
●
Parameters for Call Data Export, page 6-54
Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000, page 6-59
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-1
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Introduction
6.2
Introduction
HiPath 5000 is operated as a central administration unit in an IP network of HiPath 3000 systems. By creating a "Single System Image", all relevant nodes can be centrally administered.
HiPath 5000 is the platform for providing applications at a central point and enables them to be
used by all stations in the IP network.
The HiPath ComScendo Service also supports the use of an integrated gatekeeper as well as
features for IP workpoint clients from HiPath ComScendo. Up to 1000 registered IP workpoint
clients and up to 250 CorNet IP lines (CorNet NQ protocol tunneled in H.323 via Annex M1) are
supported in this process.
The HiPath ComScendo Service is virtually a complete HiPath 3000 node that is only configured as software on a PC. Apart from TDM-specific features (e.g. the connection of UP0/E stations, trunks and special stations such as door openers, etc.), all V5.0 features are available.
The HiPath ComScendo Service is administered over HiPath 3000 Manager E, while the
HG 1500 resources (see Page 10-38) are administered over Web-based Management (WBM).
Cross-platform use of HiPath ComScendo features (IP networking), for example in conjunction
with HiPath 4000, is implemented via CorNet-IP (CorNet-NQ protocol tunnelled in H.323 via annex M1). HG 1500 in HiPath 3000 and HG3550 V2.0 in HiPath 4000 are prerequisites for
IP networking over CorNet IP.
Parts of the following setup for HiPath 5000 are optional and can be installed both on the HiPath
5000 Server and on a separate PC.
●
Feature Server (central administration service in a HiPath 3000/5000 network)
●
Presence Manager (service for LED signaling of call processing station statuses and network-wide DSS keys)
●
HiPath ComScendo Service (gatekeeper and HiPath ComScendo features for IP workpoint
clients)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E (MS Windows-based tool for the administration of all service and
customer-specific data by Service)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager C (MS Windows-based tool for the administration of customer-specific data by the customer)
●
HiPath Software Manager (Web-based tool for upgrades (Upgrade Manager for HiPath
ComScendo Service and HG 1500) and backups (Backup Manager for HiPath ComScendo Service, HG 1500 and databases))
●
Inventory Manager (service for detecting software components installed and system information in a HiPath 3000/5000 network)
●
Customer License Agent CLA (service for analyzing and decrypting a HiPath License Management license file)
6-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Introduction
●
Central License Manager CLM (CLA front-end for reading in licenses in online and offline
mode)
●
Personal Call Manager PCM (Web-based application for the configuration and administration of personal call forwarding operations)
●
HiPath FM Desktop V3.0 (Java-based application for error signaling)
●
GetAccount (application that prepares generated call data records for further processing.)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-3
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Introduction
HiPath ComScendo Service with integrated
gatekeeper and HiPath
ComScendo features
Central resourcing of applications
(possibly installed on a separate
PC), such as:
●
HiPath Xpressions
●
HiPath ProCenter Office
●
HiPath Manager PCM
●
HiPath Fault Management
●
...
Central administration unit with:
●
Feature Server
●
Presence Manager
●
HiPath Software Manager
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E
●
Inventory Manager
●
...
HiPath 5000
HiPath 3500
optiPoint 410 ...
optiPoint 600 office
HiPath Cordless
Office
IP Network
optiClient 130
V5.0
optiClient
Attendant
optiPoint 500 ...
optiset E ...
PSTN
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3750
Figure 6-1
6-4
HiPath 5000 Multi-Node IP System
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Software Structure
6.3
Software Structure
Feature Server
The Feature Server is an essential component in the HiPath 5000 software architecture and
serves as a central point for administration and as a data interface for applications and middleware. In addition, the Feature Server synchronizes the HG 1500 boards with all necessary data
for digit analysis in a HiPath 3000/5000 network.
The networked HiPath 3000 systems (nodes) are administered over the Feature Server. The
HiPath 3000 Manager E administration tool does not communicate with the individual systems
but exchanges data with the Feature Server. The Feature Server ensures that the networked
HiPath 3000 systems receive synchronized CDB data.
The individual systems are accessed directly by HiPath 3000 Manager E in the course of maintenance and online functions.
HG 1500 boards are still administered on a board-specific basis using Web-based management (WBM).
The Feature Server is an MS Windows service that automatically starts at the same time as the
HiPath 5000 server.
Communication with the individual HiPath 3000 systems belonging to the network takes place
over their HG 1500 boards.
HiPath 3000
Node 1
CDB 1
HG 1500
HiPath 3000
Node 2
HiPath 3000
Node 3
CDB 2
CDB 3
HG 1500
HG 1500
Feature Server
CDB 1
CDB 2
CDB 3
Figure 6-2
Customer Data Exchange Between the Feature Server and Nodes
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-5
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Software Structure
The following figure shows the services and routines associated with the Feature Server.
CDB Synchronization
HiPath 3000 –> server
vsync.exe
Application Interface
Call Address Resolution Update Server
cars.exe
vaplx.dll
Server Control Layer
(MS Windows Service)
HG 1500 Registration
Server
regserver.exe
Event Log Texts
VEvtLogMsg.dll
AssCkds.dll
vsrv.exe
Accs520x.dll
Accs520x.dll
Accs520x.dll
Accs520x.dll
Server Database
vdbaccess.dll
Socket Interface
vsock.dll
Figure 6-3
6-6
Data Transfer Interface
Remote Procedure Call
Interface
vadmtftp.dll
FCT.dll
Feature Server Services and Routines
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Software Structure
The following table shows the most important features of the Feature Server.
Table 6-1
Feature Server Components
Component
vsrv.exe
vaplx.dll
cars.exe
regserver.exe
vsync.exe
FCT.dll
Function
Basic Feature Server component. As an MS Windows service, it starts all
other components.
Logical interface for applications. Provides read-only and read/write access
to CDB data.
The Call Address Resolution Server provides the HG 1500 boards with the
call numbers of all HiPath 3000 systems (nodes) that belong to the network.
Note: Event 1027 confirms that the corresponding HG 1500 board was
successfully downloaded with the call numbers of all HiPath 3000 systems
associated with the network (see Section 12.3.3).
Following startup, the HG 1500 boards automatically log on to the Feature
Server over the Registration Server.
All “node-specific” CDB changes (for example, by key programming, Assistant T) are reported by the node to the Feature Server’s VSYNC process.
This ensures the automatic synchronization of the Feature Server with the
new CDB data.
Interface to the systems for direct CDB data access.
Presence Manager
This is a Feature Server service for signaling the call processing station states “free”, “busy”
and “call” using the LEDs on the optiset E and optiPoint telephones in a HiPath 3000/5000 network. You can pick up a call by pressing the appropriate button.
Call processing states can only be signaled for a station if the Presence Manager can set a
CSTA monitor point on the relevant station. The status of a MULAP call number cannot be signaled, for example, because a CSTA monitor point cannot be set on a call number of this type.
The dssserver.exe service for the Presence Manager is installed with the HiPath 5000 software.
This is a user-configured service that receives its information from vaplx.dll. The TAPI Service Provider is required for the Presence Manager to work.
>
Note for troubleshooting and diagnosis
The Feature Server and Presence Manager components generate entries in the
Event Viewer (event log) which are used for troubleshooting and diagnosis.
Section 12.3.3 provides information on the possible entries and any necessary user
responses.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-7
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Notes on Open Numbering in a HiPath 3000/5000 Network
6.4
Notes on Open Numbering in a HiPath 3000/5000 Network
In contrast to standalone systems, a HiPath 3000/5000 network performs call number evaluation in a number of stages. All station and group numbers for the relevant HiPath 3000 systems
(nodes) are kept on the HG 1500 boards and subject to digit analysis. The Feature Server
sends the IP addresses of the relevant HiPath 3000 systems to the HG 1500 boards. The Feature Server also assigns every HG 1500 board a call number table in which all call numbers of
the other HiPath 3000 systems are saved. This means that every call number dialed can be
uniquely assigned to a node. These call number tables are also known as CAR (Call Address
Resolution) tables. The call number tables can be displayed using HG 1500’s Web-based management (WBM). Changes made to tables with the WBM can impact the digit analysis functionality and are not permitted. The CAR tables are updated and overwritten by the Feature Server
after every administration activity.
Internal call numbers can be assigned more than once in a network using open numbering.
However, to enable unique call number evaluation, every HiPath 3000 system is assigned a
unique node number. A station in node A always dials a station in node B by entering the node
number + internal call number.
The “Open numbering” system flag in HiPath 3000 Manager E must be set for every HiPath
3000 system involved. This flag must be set to permit the administration of the node number.
>
6-8
The node number (Settings/System parameters.../Flags: Node number) and the incoming PABX number for route 16 (HG 1500 route) (Settings/Lines / networking.../
Routes: PABX number - incoming) should be identical for every HiPath 3000 system.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Installation Requirements
6.5
Installation Requirements
To use HiPath 5000, the following minimum requirements must be met:
●
Hardware and software
Table 6-2
HW and SW Minimum Requirements for HiPath 5000
Component
●
New system
Upgrade an existing system
to V5.0
Processor
3 GHz CPU
Pentium III 1 GHz
RAM space
See Table 6-3
See Table 6-3
Hard disk
80 GB
18 GB
Operating system
MS Windows Server 2000 or
MS Windows Server 2003
MS Windows Server 2000
Interfaces
2 x serial
2 x serial
Slots
free PCI slots (for S0/S2M
boards for HPCO and HiPath
Xpressions)
free PCI slots (for S0/S2M
boards for HPCO and HiPath
Xpressions)
Drives
3.5-inch floppy disk drive
CD-ROM/DVD drive
3.5-inch floppy disk drive
CD-ROM/DVD drive
Network card
10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet net- 10/100 Mbps Ethernet network
work card
card
Monitor
17-inch color monitor
17-inch color monitor
Licenses
Information on features, interfaces, and products subject to mandatory licensing can be
found in Chapter 8, “Licensing”.
●
RAM requirements of the HiPath 5000 server
Table 6-3 can be used to determine the required RAM expansion (RAM space) of the HiPath 5000 server depending on the number of nodes in the HiPath 3000/5000 network and
the applications installed on the server.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-9
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Installation Requirements
Table 6-3
RAM Space of the HiPath 5000 Server
Minimum RAM
Up to
2 nodes
Up to
8 nodes
Up to
16 nodes
Up to
32 nodes
Up to
64 nodes1
512 MB
1 GB
1 GB
1.5 GB
2 GB
HiPath ComScendo Service
+ 100 MB
+ 100 MB
+ 100 MB
+ 100 MB
not supported
HiPath Manager PCM
V2.0
+ 90 MB
+ 90 MB
+ 90 MB
+ 90 MB
+ 90 MB
HiPath ProCenter Office
V1.3 with HiPath Xpressions V3.02
+ 400 MB
+ 400 MB
+ 600 MB
not supported
not supported
DLS
+ 250 MB
+ 250 MB
+ 250 MB
+ 250 MB
+ 250 MB
HiPath 5000 V5.0
+ HiPath FM V3.0
+ Teledata Office V3.0
+ HiPath Software Manager
1
2
Networks are currently released with up to 32 nodes. Larger configurations can be released on a project-specific basis.
In this special configuration, HiPath Xpressions V3.0 supports up to 248 Unified Messaging users or 400 voice mail
users.
6.5.1
Prerequisites for a Single-PC Solution
Table 6-4 shows the maximum expansion level permitted for the HiPath ComScendo Service
together with HiPath 5000 (central administration unit in an IP network) and other applications
on a single PC.
Table 6-4
Prerequisites for a Single-PC Solution
Upgrade V4.0 to 2 nodes1
V5.0
(3 GHz
1-node system
CPU)
(1 GHz CPU)
3-6
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
7 - 16
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
17 - 32
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
33 - 642
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
HiPath ComScendo
Service3
not possible
possible
possible
not possible
not possible
not possible
HiPath 5000 (central administration
unit in an IP network)
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
6-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Installation Requirements
Table 6-4
Prerequisites for a Single-PC Solution
Upgrade V4.0 to 2 nodes1
V5.0
(3 GHz
1-node system
CPU)
(1 GHz CPU)
3-6
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
7 - 16
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
17 - 32
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
33 - 642
nodes1
(3 GHz
CPU)
HiPath Software
Manager
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
DLS3
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
HiPath Manager
PCM V2.0
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
HiPath FM
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
possible
HPCO including Hi- up to 248 stations up to 248 up to 248 up to 248 not posPath Xpressions3
possible
stations stations stations
sible
possible possible possible
not possible
HPCO3
not possible
Teledata
1
2
3
Office3
1 to 32 agents
possible
1 to 32
agents
possible
1 to 32
agents
possible
1 to 32
agents
possible
not possible
Every HiPath 3000 gateway, every survivable media gateway and every HiPath ComScendo service counts as a node.
Networks are currently released with up to 32 nodes. Larger configurations can be released on a project-specific basis.
We do not recommend installing DLS, Teledata Office, HPCO (including HiPath Xpressions), and HiPath ComScendo Service together on a PC. Real-time operation of the HiPath ComScendo Service cannot be guaranteed if the lion’s share of
processor resources is required for DLS, Teledata Office, HPCO (including HiPath Xpressions). Software updates, call
charge data queries, statistics, etc. must be performed during off-peak hours when few or no calls are underway.
If the customer is unwilling to accept restrictions, HiPath ComScendo Service must be installed on a separate PC.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-11
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6
HiPath 5000
6.6.1
Preparing for Installation
To ensure successful installation, you should check the points listed in the table below before
installing the HiPath 5000 software.
Table 6-5
HiPath 5000 - Preparing for Installation
Component
Description
Hard disk partitioning
The server PC hard disk should be divided into two NTFS partitions. The
main partition C should have a capacity of at least 4 GB and should be reserved for the operating system and the HiPath 5000 software.
For safety reasons, partitioning with the format FAT 16/32 is not permitted.
Hardware
Make sure that no unnecessary hardware is connected to the server PC;
any sound cards should be removed.
Access privileg- To install HiPath 5000, you must log on to the operating system with admines
istrator rights or, if necessary, log on as the server domain administrator.
LAN integration
Check to ensure that the server PC has been correctly integrated in the customer LAN (see Section 6.6.2).
Miscellaneous
All applications running in the background must be closed prior to software
installation.
6-12
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.2
>
Integrating the HiPath 5000 Server in the Customer LAN
Network analysis must be performed before the relevant systems and applications
are installed to guarantee smooth operation in the IP customer network. Network
analysis determines the conditions under which the IP customer’s network is suitable for a HiPath 3000/5000 network.
The data necessary for integrating the HiPath 5000 server, for example, IP addresses, is defined as part of network analysis and in consultation with the customer (requirements specifications).
The settings are made under Control Panel - Network - Protocols.
●
Modify the IP address
●
Adapt the subnet mask, gateway.
●
Adapt the DNS entries, WINS entries.
●
Once the data has been customized, a reboot is required.
●
Test the LAN connection with a “ping” to another computer
●
Integrate the HiPath 5000 in the Windows domain under Control Panel - Network - Identification (a domain administrator account is required here!)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-13
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.3
HiPath 5000 Installing Standard Components
6.6.3.1
Overview
The installation program (Master Setup) enables both the basic installation of a HiPath 5000
system including middleware and components for system administration/analysis and the postinstallation of individual software components and tools (update, see Section 6.7).
Table 6-6
Software Components and Master Setup Tools
Component
Server PC
Client PC
Standard component
(default setup)1
HiPath ComScendo service
Yes
Yes
No
(see Section 6.6.4)
MSDE 2000 SQL database with SP3
Yes
No
Yes
TFTP Server
Yes
Yes
Yes
Common Web Service
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
(see Section 6.12)
HiPath Call Accounting (GetAccount) yes, optional
HiPath Manager PCM
yes, optional network-based
release
No
(see Section 6.11)
HiPath 3000 Manager E
Yes
Yes
Yes
HiPath 3000 Manager C
yes, optional
No
No
HiPath Inventory
Yes
Yes
Yes
(see Section 6.6.7)
HiPath Software Manager
Yes
No
Yes
Feature Server, Presence Manager
Yes
No
Yes
HiPath Fault Management
Customer License Agent CLA
Customer License Manager CLM
1
No
(see Section 6.6.5)
Yes
yes
(MS Windows
2000 Pro. or later)
Yes
yes, optional
No
No
Standard components should generally always be installed and are therefore already selected in the master setup
(= default setup).
>
6-14
HiPath ComScendo Service cannot be operated at the same time as an optiClient
130 V5.0 on a single PC.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.3.2
Licensing
Please refer to Chapter 8, “Licensing” for information on how to proceed.
A grace period of 30 days begins after startup. Licensing must be performed for all features,
interfaces, and products subject to mandatory licensing within this grace period.
HiPath 3000 Manager E comes with a customer-specific file which is used by the Customer License Agent CLA to generate a GPCF (Grace Period Configuration File) file. This file ensures
that the maximum expansion of all features subject to mandatory licensing is possible within
the 30-day grace period. The system or systems are not licensed.
The system falls into licensing default if licensing is not performed within the 30-day grace period. This means that features which subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced
functionality.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-15
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.3.3
Starting the Installation
A TAPI service provider must be installed on the relevant PC to enable the default setup to be
performed. Installation information can be found in Section 6.6.6.
Procedure
1.
Insert the installation CD.
The installation program is started via the autorun function. Alternatively you can initiate
Setup via Windows Explorer under <CD-ROM drive letter>:\setup.exe.
2.
Select the language you require for the Setup browser. German (Germany) and English
(USA) versions are currently available.
The system is prepared for installation.
3.
Click Next to start the installation routine.
Important installation information is displayed.
This includes the latest information on installation. Please read this information carefully.
4.
Click Next to proceed with the installation routine.
5.
Select destination path.
Select the folder where you want to install the program.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\siemens\hipath\ with Next or click
Browse and select a different folder.
6.
Select program folder.
Select the location where the setup should create the new shortcuts.
Confirm the default folder HiPath with Next or select a different folder.
6-16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
7.
The Select Features dialog appears.
Mark the components you want to install and unmark the ones you don’t.
>
The components marked by default (Default Setup) are standard components
that as a rule should always be installed. For information on the exact components to install, refer to your order.
The subsequent description of the installation procedure relates to the default
setup.
Information on installing the HiPath ComScendo Service can be found in
Section 6.6.4.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-17
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
8.
Then click Next.
>
At this point your attention is drawn to the fact that a TAPI service provider must
be installed for the current selection of components.
If this requirement is met, click Yes to continue with the procedure.
If there is no TAPI service provider installed, click No to cancel the procedure.
Install the TAPI service provider on the basis of the information in Section 6.6.6.
Then restart the master setup.
The Start Copying Files dialog appears.
Check if the correct destination directory and program group are specified and if all necessary components are installed.
9.
Click Next to start the copy operation.
>
6-18
The PC reboots after installing the MSDE 2000 SQL database.
The installation procedure is automatically continued after rebooting.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
10. The File Transfer Folder appears.
Select the folder where you want to install the files.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\siemens\hipath\tftp\files\ with
Next or click Change to select a different folder.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-19
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
11. Click Next to proceed with the setup routine.
The Trap Destinations and Communities dialog appears.
Enter the trap destinations (if necessary) and the HiPath Fault Management desktop community names.
12. Click Next to proceed with the setup routine.
13. When all selected components are installed, a dialog appears in which you can terminate
the setup with Finish.
6-20
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.4
Installing HiPath ComScendo Service
The HiPath ComScendo Service is virtually a complete HiPath 3000 node that is only configured as software on a PC. Apart from TDM-specific features (e.g. the connection of UP0/E stations, trunks and special stations such as door openers, etc.), all V5.0 features are available.
The HiPath ComScendo Service is administered over HiPath 3000 Manager E, while the
HG 1500 resources (see Page 10-38) are administered over Web-based Management (WBM).
The HiPath ComScendo service is not a standard component (default setup) of the master setup. For this reason, the procedure for a separate installation will be described here.
Procedure
1.
Insert the installation CD.
The installation program is started via the autorun function. Alternatively you can initiate
Setup via Windows Explorer under <CD-ROM drive letter>:\setup.exe.
2.
Select the language you require for the Setup browser. German (Germany) and English
(USA) versions are currently available.
The system is prepared for installation.
3.
Click Next to start the installation routine.
Important installation information is displayed.
This includes the latest information on installation. Please read this information carefully.
4.
Click Next to proceed with the installation routine.
5.
Select destination path.
Select the folder where you want to install the program.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\siemens\hipath\ with Next or click
Browse and select a different folder.
6.
Select program folder.
Select the location where the setup should create the new shortcuts.
Confirm the default folder HiPath with Next or select a different folder.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-21
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
7.
The Select Features dialog appears.
Select the HiPath ComScendo Service components you want to install and deselect the
ones you do not want to install.
6-22
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
8.
Then click Next.
The Start Copying Files dialog appears.
Finally, check whether the correct target directory and program group have been specified.
To implement the setup for the HiPath ComScendo service, both a TFTP server and an FM
Reporting client must be installed on the relevant PC. Both components are automatically
selected and installed by the Master Setup.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-23
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
9.
Click Next to start the copy procedure.
The File Transfer Folder appears.
Note: This dialog only appears if none of the Master Setup components has been installed
on the PC.
Select the folder where you want to install the program.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\siemens\hipath\tftp\files\ with
Next or click Change to select a different folder.
6-24
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
10. Click Next to proceed with the setup routine.
The Trap Destinations and Communities dialog appears.
Note: This dialog only appears if none of the Master Setup components has been installed
on the PC.
Enter the trap destinations (if necessary) and the HiPath Fault Management desktop community names.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-25
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
11. Continue setup with Next.
The Select Network Card dialog appears.
Note: This dialog only appears if the relevant PC has more than one network card.
Select the network card for HiPath 5000.
6-26
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
12. Continue setup with Next.
The Country selection dialog appears.
Confirm the default or select a different country to define the international standard settings
for language, currency and date format.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-27
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
13. Click Next to proceed with the setup routine.
The Destination Folder for Data dialog appears.
Select the folder for the HiPath ComScendo service data.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\siemens\hipath\hipath
5000\pcsdata\ with Next or click Change to select a different folder.
14. When all selected components are installed, a dialog appears in which you can terminate
the installation with Finish.
6-28
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.4.1
Checking the Installation of the HiPath ComScendo Service
Procedure
1.
Open the status display with Start/Program Files/HiPath/HiPath 5000 State
Viewer.
2.
The following appears:
Make sure that the server status is "Running" and that all service status indicators are
green.
>
Section 12.3.1.10 contains information about how to proceed in the event of a
fault, in other words if one or more service status indicators are red.
Details about configuring the HiPath ComScendo service can be found in Section 6.10.1.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-29
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.5
Installing HiPath Fault Management
HiPath Fault Management can read information from the HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 system
MIB via SNMP requests. This allows the system to permanently monitor the status of the network components and to include changes of status in the network administrator information.
Procedure
1.
Insert the installation CD.
The installation program is started via the autorun function. Alternatively you can initiate
Setup via Windows Explorer under <CD-ROM drive letter>:\setup.exe.
2.
Select the language you require for the Setup browser. German (Germany) and English
(USA) versions are currently available.
The system is prepared for installation.
3.
Click Next to start the installation routine.
Important installation information is displayed.
This includes the latest information on installation. Please read this information carefully.
4.
Click Next to proceed with the installation routine.
5.
Select destination path.
Select the folder where you want to install the program.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\siemens\hipath\ with Next or click
Browse and select a different folder.
6.
Select program folder.
Select the location where the setup should create the new shortcuts.
Confirm the default folder HiPath with Next or select a different folder.
6-30
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
7.
The Select Features dialog appears.
Select the HiPath Fault Management components you want to install and deselect the ones
you do not want to install.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-31
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
8.
Then click Next.
The Start Copying Files dialog appears.
Check if the correct destination directory and program group are specified and if all necessary components are installed.
9.
Click Next to start the copy procedure.
The software license agreement is displayed. The license terms must be accepted before
continuing with the setup.
10. Confirm the license agreement with Yes.
11. The Choose Destination Location dialog appears.
Select the folder where you want to install the Java Runtime Environment.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\javasoft\jre\<version>\ with Next
or click Browse and select a different folder.
6-32
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
12. The Select Browser dialog appears.
Select one of the available browsers for which the Java plugin is to be used as the standard
runtime environment for Java.
13. Confirm your selection with Next.
The InstallShield Wizard for HiPath Fault Management is started.
14. Click Next to proceed with the installation routine.
The licensing conditions for HiPath Fault Management are displayed. The license
terms must be accepted before continuing with the installation.
Click I accept the terms of the license agreement.
15. Click Next to proceed with the installation routine.
The installation options are displayed.
Select the Server & Client option.
16. Continue installation with Next.
The Directory Name dialog is displayed.
Confirm the name suggested with Next or click Browse to select a different directory.
17. Once installation is complete, a final dialog appears. Close the InstallShield Wizard for HiPath Fault Management with Finish.
18. A message appears indicating that the master setup has been successful. Close the setup
with Finish.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-33
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.6
Installing the TAPI Service Provider
This section describes the separate installation of the TAPI Service Provider.
The numbers for stations, trunks, and groups can be set up directly after installation of the TAPI
Service Provider.
1.
Insert the TAPI Service Provider installation CD and run Setup.
2.
Confirm the welcome dialog that appears with Next.
3.
The Setup Type dialog appears. Mark HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and confirm your selection
with Next.
The appropriate installation components are automatically preselected when you select
the setup type. The following are installed for HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0:
4.
●
TAPI Service Provider TSP
●
CSTA Message Dispatcher CMD
●
CSTA Service Provider CSP
●
Central Configuration Manager Client CCMC
The system starts to install the selected components.
When a component is successfully installed, the associated configuration dialog opens.
You can set the required parameters here or postpone configuration until a later time. For
further information, please refer to the online help for the TAPI Service Provider.
5.
When all selected components are installed, a dialog appears in which you can terminate
the installation with Finish
6.
Confirm the subsequent system message to enable the ACD service if the Call Center application HPCO is connected.
The TAPI service provider is now installed. For further information, please refer to the online
help for the TAPI Service Provider.
6-34
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.7
Installing the HiPath Inventory Server Separately
The software components and tools of the master setup mentioned in Table 6-6 can be installed
on several PCs. In such a scenario the Inventory Server should be installed on all PCs that are
to support the HiPath Inventory Manager.
Procedure
1.
Insert the installation CD.
The installation program is started via the autorun function. Alternatively you can initiate
Setup via Windows Explorer under <CD-ROM drive letter>:\setup.exe.
2.
Select the language you require for the Setup browser. German (Germany) and English
(USA) versions are currently available.
The system is prepared for installation.
3.
Click Next to start the installation routine.
Important installation information is displayed.
This includes the latest information on installation. Please read this information carefully.
4.
Click Next to proceed with the installation routine.
5.
Select destination path.
Select the folder where you want to install the program.
Confirm the default folder c:\program files\siemens\hipath\ with Next or click
Browse and select a different folder.
6.
Select program folder.
Select the location where the setup should create the new shortcuts.
Confirm the default folder HiPath with Next or select a different folder.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-35
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
7.
The Select Features dialog appears.
Select the HiPath Inventory components you want to install and deselect the ones you do
not want to install.
6-36
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
8.
Then click Next.
The Start Copying Files dialog appears.
Check if the correct destination directory and program group are specified and if all necessary components are installed.
To be able to implement the setup for HiPath Inventory, both an FM Reporting client and a
Common Web Service must be installed on the relevant PC. Both components are automatically selected and installed by the Master Setup.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-37
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
9.
Click Next to start the copy operation.
The Trap Destinations and Communities dialog appears.
Enter the trap destinations (if necessary) and the HiPath Fault Management desktop community names.
6-38
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
10. Click Next to proceed with the installation routine.
The Inventory Database Location dialog appears.
Enter the IP address and the port number of the PC where the database is installed (MSDE
SQL database server).
11. Confirm your entries with Next.
12. When installation is complete, a dialog appears in which you can terminate the setup with
Finish.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-39
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.8
Verifying Installation
Computer Management can be used to verify that all components are correctly installed. This
is included in NT-based operating system packages (MS Windows NT, MS Windows 2000,
MS Windows XP, etc.).
To start this component, select Settings - Control Panel - Administrative Tools
- Computer Management.
This program is a sophisticated desktop tool for performing remote maintenance on computers.
Possible actions include the following:
●
monitoring system events, for example, logon times and application errors.
●
creating and managing releases
●
starting and ending system services, for example task schedulers and spoolers.
●
defining properties for memory devices
●
displaying device configurations and adding new device drivers
●
administering server applications and services, for example, DNS (Domain Name System)
or DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
Computer Management is displayed in a separate window, like Windows Explorer. The console
structure (for the navigation and service program selection) contains the system programs,
data memory, services, and applications available on the computer. The right pane - the event
area - shows the tool’s attributes and data as well as any subordinate tools available.
>
6.6.8.1
Administrator user rights are required to use the full range of Computer Management
functions.
Working with Computer Management requires an appropriate level of familiarity with
the operating system.
Verifying the Start and Function of HiPath 5000 Services
Select Computer Management - Services and Applications - Services to check
if all necessary services were started.
6-40
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath 5000
6.6.8.2
Checking Entries in the Event Viewer
The Event Viewer (event log) provides status information on the HiPath 5000 server and any
application servers available.
All events associated with the server(s) and its (their) applications are saved. The events provide a quick and, above all, time-specific overview of all relevant actions (status, information,
warning, error, etc.).
To open the Event Viewer, select Computer Management - System Tools - Event
Viewer.
For more information, see Section 12.3.1.9, “Event Viewer for HiPath 5000 (Eventlog)”.
Table 12-8 shows the possible entries that may appear in the Event Viewer.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-41
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Modifying HiPath 5000 Components (Retro-Fitting, Updating, Deleting)
6.7
Modifying HiPath 5000 Components (Retro-Fitting, Updating,
Deleting)
The Setup maintenance program can be used for
●
retro-fitting,
●
updating and
●
removing
components associated with the current HiPath 5000 V5.0 installation.
When activated, the Setup creates the relevant selection lists based on the current HiPath 5000
V5.0 installation.
>
The WinAccount software for evaluating call data records is no longer used in HiPath
3000/5000 V4.0 or later.
Call data records must be evaluated with WinAccount before starting an update because updating uninstalls the WinAccount application.
Refer to the WinAccount user manual for information about the procedure
7
The TAPI Service Provider configuration (configuration and lines - refer to the TAPI
170 Service Provider Help) and the CDB files associated with the connected systems (refer to the Help for HiPath 3000 Manager E) should be saved for security reasons.
6-42
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Modifying HiPath 5000 Components (Retro-Fitting, Updating, Deleting)
Procedure
>
1.
All active applications must be closed down before an update. Close the database
server via the Task Manager and use the Services Control Manager to exit the telephony services and Feature Server.
Insert the installation CD.
The installation program is started via the autorun function. Alternatively you can initiate
Setup via Windows Explorer under <CD-ROM drive letter>:\setup.exe.
2.
Select the language you require for the Setup browser.
3.
The Setup maintenance program appears.
Mark the option you want and confirm with Next.
4.
Follow the on-screen user prompts.
You must restart your PC after updating the HiPath 5000 V5.0 installation.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-43
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Performing Licensing
6.8
Performing Licensing
Version 5.0 and later features a new, centralized licensing procedure, called HiPath License
Management. The procedure is used in all HiPath products, for example communication systems, workpoint clients, and applications.
A grace period of 30 days begins when HiPath 5000 is started up. Licensing must be performed
for all features, interfaces, and products subject to mandatory licensing within this grace period.
HiPath 3000 Manager E comes with a customer-specific file which is used by the Customer License Agent CLA to generate a GPCF (Grace Period Configuration File) file. This file ensures
that the maximum expansion of all features subject to mandatory licensing is possible within
the 30-day grace period. The system or systems are not licensed.
The system falls into licensing default if licensing is not performed within the 30-day grace period. This means that features which subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced
functionality.
>
6-44
Please refer to Chapter 8, “Licensing” for information on how to proceed.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Optimizing Operating System Settings
6.9
Optimizing Operating System Settings
This section describes how you can optimize the Windows 2000 Server operating system for
the implementation of HiPath 5000.
No information is available on how to optimize Windows Server 2003.
Table 6-7
Operating System Settings for HiPath 5000
Component
Description
Optimizing the physical Windows 2000 Server is normally optimized for maximum throughput
memory
as a file server. For a HiPath 5000 server, however, significantly less
memory is needed for the system-wide disk cache.
For this select the Balance Load option under Start/Settings/
Network and DC Connections/LAN Connection: Properties – File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks: Properties
Optimizing the virtual
memory
To optimize the virtual memory, enter 512 MB as the Total paging
file size for all drives under Start/Settings/Control Panel/
System: Advanced – Performance Settings: Virtual
Memory: Change.
The same values should be entered for the virtual memory’s upper
and lower thresholds so that the paging file does not have to be extended during operation.
Optimizing availability
If the operating system crashes (blue screen), it creates a file containing debugging information from the paging file the next time the
system starts. If the size of this file is the same size as the system’s
physical memory, almost all of the virtual memory will be used for
generating this file during system startup.
This may cause certain services on the HiPath 5000 server to experience problems in starting up. To recover this problem, you should
go to Start/Settings/Control Panel – System – Advanced
– Startup and Recovery and select the option none under Write Debugging Information.
All other options are viable. The Auto restart option forces an automatic restart in the event of a system crash, thus considerably increasing the server’s availability.
SMTP service
The operating system’s SMTP service should always be disabled as
HiPath 5000 provides its own SMTP link which may conflict with the
operating system’s service. To do this, go to Start/Settings/
Control Panel: Software – Add/Remove Windows Components : Internet Information Service (IIS) – Details: Remove SMTP Service.
Personal Call Manager and Internet Information Server
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-45
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Optimizing Operating System Settings
Table 6-7
Operating System Settings for HiPath 5000
Component
Description
The Personal Call Manager software runs within the context of the IIS
user. When a Windows Server system is being installed for the first
time, it must be taken into account that the default security settings
for the wwwroot directory do not always grant the Personal Call
Manager the necessary access rights.
You must ensure that the user account used by the Personal Call
Manager (account for "anonymous access" on the standard website
- by default this is the IIS guest account IUSR_<PC name>) has full
access to the wwwroott\PCM directory.
The PCM requires the following local full access rights to the hard
disk: C:\temp and C:\InetPub\wwwroot\PCM\ where C:\InetPub\wwwroot means the standard directory of the IIS (in other
installations this may have a completely different name).
The option “Cache ISAPI Applications” must not be disabled. This
option can be found under Standard website – Properties – Home
Directory – Configuration – Application Mapping.
If the option were disabled, the Personal Call Manger would lose its
“memory” of the users currently logged on and the error message
“You are not logged on” would be displayed permanently ...”.
Application protocol
6-46
Configure the following by right-clicking Properties under System
Log and Application Log in the operating system’s Event Viewer:
'Overwrite events as needed' and set 'Maximum log size' to approximately 2 MB.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration
6.10
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration
A distinction should be drawn between the basic configuration of a
●
HiPath 5000 PC with HiPath ComScendo service
The HiPath ComScendo Service is virtually a complete HiPath 3000 node that is only configured as software on a PC. Apart from the pure TDM features, all features of V5.0 are
available.
HiPath ComScendo Service is administered over HiPath 3000 Manager E, while the
HG 1500 resources (see Page 10-38) are administered over Web-based Management
(WBM).
●
HiPath 5000 server as central administration unit in an IP network, with or without HiPath
ComScendo Service .The formation of a “single system image” allows the central administration of all associated nodes (HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo
Service).
The IP network is administered via the Feature server. The HiPath 3000 Manager E administration tool does not communicate with the individual nodes but exchanges data with the
Feature server. The Feature server ensures that the networked nodes receive synchronized CDB data. The Feature Server is an MS Windows service that automatically starts
at the same time as the HiPath 5000 server.
HG 1500 boards are still administered on a board-specific basis using Web-based management (WBM).
The administration of IP networking with HiPath 3000 Manager E is divided into the following steps:
a) Configuring the individual nodes belonging to the network (HiPath 3000 and HiPath
5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service) = Configuration of the individual customer databases.
b) Configuring the Feature server = Create an empty server net file.
c)
Start data transfer = registration of the individual nodes and transfer of the node data
to the server net file.
d) Transfer the central database for IP networking = Load the server net file to the Feature
server. The customer database is then automatically distributed to the various nodes.
Future administrative node work is then performed by the server.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-47
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration
6.10.1
Configuring HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service
The customer database must be loaded to enable the individual IP workpoint clients, trunks,
etc. to be configured.
Procedure
1.
StartHiPath 3000 Manager E.
2.
Open the Transfer dialog using the File menu.
3.
In the Communication Settings tab select IP-HiPath as the access and enter the IP address of the HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service in the appropriate field.
Select Read/Write CDB and load the customer database by clicking the System -> PC
button.
>
During the first login, the system requests the identity of the user and asks for a
new password (for more information see Section 12.6.1.1, “Logon With User
Name and Password”).
4.
Perform the customer-specific system programming.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
5.
Save the customer database.
6.
Then switch to the Transfer dialog.
7.
In the Communication Settings tab select IP-HiPath as the access and enter the IP address of the HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service in the appropriate field.
Select Read/Write Database. Set the Overwrite and Hardware flags and transfer the customer database by clicking the PC –> System button.
Once transfer is complete, HiPath 5000 automatically performs a reset and then returns to
operation.
>
6-48
The HG 1500 resources (see Page 10-38) are to be administered with Web-based
Management (WBM). Information about the procedure can be found in the Webbased Management WBM Help.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration
6.10.2
Configuring HiPath 5000 Server as a Central Administration Unit
in an IP Network
The IP network is administered via the Feature server. The HiPath 3000 Manager E administration tool does not communicate with the individual nodes but exchanges data with the Feature server. The Feature server ensures that the networked nodes receive synchronized CDB
data. To facilitate this, a central customer database, the so called server net file, must be created for IP networking.
6.10.2.1
Creating a Central Customer Database for IP Networking
An empty server net file must be created in order to create a central customer database for IP
networking.
Procedure
1.
StartHiPath 3000 Manager E.
2.
Activate the HiPath 5000/AllServe server by selecting File - HiPath 5000/AllServe Transfer or via the appropriate button in the toolbar.
>
The menu item File - HiPath 5000/AllServe - New - HiPath 5000/AllServe
Server is only used to create a CDB memory generated offline.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-49
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration
3.
The Transfer (HiPath 5000/AllServe Server) dialog appears.
4.
The PC to be used as the HiPath 5000 server should be entered in the Server field.
Note: If the required software is not installed on the specified PC, the error message "HiPath 5000/AllServe Server not Installed on this PC" appears.
5.
Load the central customer database by clicking the Server –> Manager button.
6.
Then click Close.
6-50
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration
6.10.2.2
Adding Individual Nodes for IP Networking
The next steps in creating a central database for IP Networking are the registration of the individual nodes and the transfer of the node data to the server net file. The server net file is now
loaded to the Feature server. The customer database is then automatically distributed to the
various nodes.
The prerequisite for adding nodes (HiPath 3000) to a HiPath 3000/5000 network is the successful installation (see Chapter 4, “Installing HiPath 3000”) and startup (see Chapter 5, “Starting Up HiPath 3000”) of these systems.
Procedure
1.
To select the node to be added to the CDB, call File - HiPath 5000/AllServe - New - HiPath
3000.
2.
The Enter Source dialog appears.
3.
Select the appropriate source:
●
Customer database file
To open a saved CDB file.
●
create offline
An offline generated CDB is created.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-51
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Perform HiPath 5000 Basic Configuration
●
load from system
To load a CDB directly from a node.
If the Copy netwide data in node option is activated, the service and substitution codes
are copied from the CDB firstly created to all other CDB files of the node belonging to IP
networking.
4.
Confirm the selection of the source with the Finish button.
5.
To add the node, invoke File - HiPath 5000/AllServe - Transfer - HiPath 5000/AllServe
Server.
6.
The Transfer (HiPath 5000/AllServe Server) dialog appears.
Apply the node data to the server net file by clicking the Add node button.
7.
Finally, rewrite the data from HiPath 3000 Manager E to the HiPath 5000 server (Manager
–> Server button).
>
6-52
Refer to the Help for HiPath 3000 Manager E for additional information about the
procedure.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
HiPath Manager PCM
6.11
HiPath Manager PCM
For information, see the HiPath Manager PCM Installation and Administration Manual.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-53
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
GetAccount
6.12
GetAccount
Overview
The call data records generated during HiPath 3000/5000 operation can be copied to a text file
for further processing using the GetAccount program.
>
6.12.1
The WinAccount software for evaluating call data records is no longer used in HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 or later.
Parameters for Call Data Export
For HiPath 5000, you can forward the existing call data, for example, for external call charge
calculation. The call data is forwarding in an ASCII file.
Proceed as follows to set the parameters for call data export:
1.
Start the GetAccount Administration program.
The following dialog appears.
6-54
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
GetAccount
2.
3.
Enter the following data:
Field name
Meaning
Mode
Select the call data forwarding mode in this list field. The
following modes are available:
●
None save call charge data
The call data is not written to the transfer file. Select
this option.
●
Save call charge data
The call data is written to the transfer file.
The modes Export calls with calculation and Export and
save calls with calculation are intended for a future expansion.
Transfer file
Confirm the default file name (gcallserve) or enter a
different file name.
Transfer file folder
Confirm the default folder name (C:\coldir) or enter a
different folder name.
The transfer file is stored in the folder set here.
Click Save to save your inputs.
The changes you made only become effective after the GetAccount service is restarted.
The ASCII transfer file is automatically saved in the specified folder and extended to include the new call data. The file is extended by one line for each call data record. Each call
data record (line) is ended with CR+LF.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-55
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
GetAccount
Data record structure
Table 6-8
No.
GetAccount - Data Record Structure
Pos.
Lengt
h
Description
1
1-8
8 Date of call end
Format DD.MM.YY, for example "13.09.00"
2
9 - 16
8 Time of call end
Format hh:mm:ss, for example "14:14:00"
3
17 - 19
3 Trunk number
right-aligned with leading blanks, for example " 1"
4
20 - 22
3 Node ID for HiPath 3000 (matches the configuration in HiPath 3000
Manager E)
right-aligned with leading blanks
5
23 - 28
6 Internal extension number
right-aligned with leading blanks
6
29 - 33
5 Call duration in seconds
7
34 - 41
8 Call duration
Format hh:mm:ss, for example "00:04:34
8
42 - 66
25
For incoming calls: external caller number
For outgoing calls: external call number dialed including the callby-call number
left-aligned with succeeding blanks
●
●
9
67 - 77
10
78
11
79 - 89
12 90 - 100
11 Number of tariff units
right-aligned with leading blanks
1 Call type
●
1: incoming
●
2: outgoing (default)
11 Account code ACCT
left-aligned with succeeding blanks
11 MSN used
13
101 105
5 Trunk
right-aligned with leading blanks
14
106 109
4 LCR Selected Route (corresponds to configuration in HiPath 3000
Manager E)
right-aligned with leading blanks
15
110
6-56
1 CR
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
GetAccount
Table 6-8
GetAccount - Data Record Structure
No.
Lengt
h
16
Pos.
111
Description
1 LF
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-57
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
GetAccount
Copying/renaming the transfer files
Proceed as follows if you want to use the call information in the transfer file for external processing:
●
Switch to the folder containing the transfer file (default:
C:\coldir).
●
Rename the transfer file (default: gcallserve). The renamed file is now available for external processing.
●
The transfer file is automatically recreated in the specified folder with the file name saved
in the parameters and can be renamed again at a later point.
>
6-58
To avoid uncontrolled folder growth with the transfer file, an option is available for deleting the renamed transfer file after forwarding it for external use in this folder.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000
6.13
Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000
Online’s P 500 uninterruptible power supply (UPS) was certified for use with HiPath 5000.
The P 500 UPS is fed through the AC power cord to the HiPath 5000 server. The device bridges
power failures lasting 5 - 10 minutes by means of an integrated battery.
7
Caution
For safety reasons and for protection against guarantee claims, changes to the UPS
settings may only be performed by specially trained technicians.
The manufacturer’s safety and operating instructions must be observed.
P 500 UPS - Front and Rear Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 6-4
P 500 UPS - Front and Rear Panel
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
6-59
start_h5.fm
HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration
Connecting an Uninterruptible Power Supply to HiPath 5000
P 500 UPS - Meaning of Displays, Switches and Jacks
Table 6-9
P 500 UPS - Meaning of Displays, Switches and Jacks
No.
Description
1
LED displays the status of the P 500 UPS.
●
green = input voltage (line voltage) is functioning
●
red = UPS is suppling voltage or fault has been detected
2
Display shows UPS operating status
●
NORMAL
●
CHARG‘G
●
BATTERY
and reports the charging status of the battery (25, 50, 75 or 100%).
3
On/off switch
4
Input (jack for input voltage (line voltage))
There is a cavity under the jack for the input fuse (with spare fuse enclosed).
5
3-pin DIP-FIX switch:
●
1: reduces the response voltage (minimum line voltage value before UPS activation)
– 10 V with 220/240-V systems
– 5 V with 110/120-V systems.
●
2: increases the response voltage by 5%
●
3: reduces the response voltage by 5%
Switch positions normally: DIP FIX 1 = off, DIP FIX 2 and 3 = on
6
Reset key
●
deactivates the acoustic alarm if the input voltage fails, that is, when using the UPS.
This alarm cannot be deactivated if the battery voltage falls under a certain value.
●
activates the UPS cold start.
To protect the battery from deep discharging, the UPS can only be activated when
the line voltage is connected. By activating the “on” switch (1) and then pressing the
reset key, the P 500 UPS can also be activated without a network connection (cold
start).
The connected server must be disconnected before a cold start.
The P 500 UPS needs between 5 and 20 s to reach the set output voltage. To avoid
malfunctions the connected server should not be connected immediately.
7
9-pin jack for connection to the communication server
NOT USED IN HiPath 3000/5000.
Special monitoring software can shut down the specified server via this jack, for example, in the case of extended power failures.
8
Jacks for power supply to the communication server to be monitored.
6-60
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Overview
7
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
7.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
Starting HiPath 3800 as a Gateway, page 7-2
Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway, page 7-4
Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway, page 7-6
Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway, page 7-8
7.2
Introduction
So-called gateways provide the HiPath 5000 with interfaces for trunk and tie trunk connections
to the telecommunications network. In V5.0, the HiPath 3800, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, and
HiPath 3300 systems can be used as gateways.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
7-1
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3800 as a Gateway
7.3
Starting HiPath 3800 as a Gateway
7.3.1
Prerequisites
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.
Refer to Section 4.2.1 for information on the tools and resources needed to install the HiPath
3800 system.
7.3.2
>
Table 7-1
Step
Procedure for Installation and Startup
To ensure that IP addresses are not assigned more than once in the customer network, you must ping each new IP address to be configured before each IP address
is assigned. If an IP address responds, then this address cannot be used again.
HiPath 3800 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Activity (Remarks)
Installing HiPath 3800 (19-Inch Cabinet)
7-2
1.
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-21 (generally determined by the existing 19inch cabinet)
2.
Unpacking the Components, page 4-24
3.
Mounting System Cabinets in the 19-Inch Cabinet, page 4-25
4.
Grounding the System, page 4-28
Checking the Grounding, page 4-30
5.
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane, page 4-49
6.
If required: Inserting the External Patch Panel, Page 4-64
7.
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBSAP, page 4-79
8.
Installing Boards (Configuration Notes), page 4-31 (cabinet(s) are already
equipped with the boards)
We recommend that you check the board population using the configuration notes.
9.
Making trunk connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
STMD3 - for S0 trunk connection
●
DIUN2 - for S2M trunk connection
●
DIU2U (For U.S. Only) - for T1 PRI trunk
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3800 as a Gateway
Table 7-1
HiPath 3800 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Step
Activity (Remarks)
10.
Making IP connections
Perform the IP connection over the HG 1500 board STMI2.
For information on startup and configuration, refer to the HG 1500 Administration
Manual.
11.
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-81
Startup of HiPath 3800 (Section 5.2)
1.
Supplying the System with Power, page 5-3
(Plugging in the system cabinet(s) -> starting system boot)
2.
Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-6
3.
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 5-7
4.
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number, page 5-9
5.
Conducting customer-specific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
6.
Performing a system check
●
The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to
the gateway:
– Check the telephones
Check the time and date display on each telephone. If a display does not
appear, either the telephone or the link is defective. Replace the terminal
or fix the link.
Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12.3.1.8 on all telephones.
– Check for proper system booting
Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.
●
Test IP configuration
Ping the HG 1500 IP address in the gateway.
Set up external calls at random (from optiPoints or optiClients on HiPath 5000).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
7-3
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway
7.4
Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway
7.4.1
Prerequisites
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.
Refer to Section 4.3.1 for information on the tools and resources needed to install the HiPath
3700 system.
7.4.2
>
Table 7-2
Step
Procedure for Installation and Startup
To ensure that IP addresses are not assigned more than once in the customer network, you must ping each new IP address to be configured before each IP address
is assigned. If an IP address responds, then this address cannot be used again.
HiPath 3700 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Activity (Remarks)
Installing HiPath 3700 (19-Inch Cabinet)
7-4
1.
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-128 (generally determined by the existing 19inch cabinet)
2.
Unpacking the Components, page 4-128
3.
Mounting the System Cabinet in the 19-Inch Cabinet, page 4-129
4.
Mounting the Patch Panel in the 19-Inch Cabinet, page 4-133
5.
Grounding the System, page 4-134
Checking the Grounding, page 4-136
6.
Connecting the Cable to the Backplane, page 4-137
7.
Connecting the Line Network to the Patch Panel, page 4-150
8.
Loading the System Software and Installing Subboards on the CBCPR, page 4-151
9.
Configuration notes, page 4-152 (cabinet(s) are already equipped with the boards)
We recommend that you check the board population using the configuration notes.
10.
Making trunk connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
STMD8 - for S0 trunk connection
●
TMS2 (Not for U.S.) - for S2M trunk connection
●
TMST1 (for U.S. only) - for T1 PRI trunk
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3700 as a Gateway
Table 7-2
HiPath 3700 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Step
Activity (Remarks)
11.
Making IP connections
Perform the IP connection over the HG 1500 board HXGM3.
For information on startup and configuration, refer to the HG 1500 Administration
Manual.
12.
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-162
Startup of HiPath 3700 (Section 5.3)
1.
Supplying the System with Power, page 5-12
(Plugging in the power supply unit -> starting system boot)
2.
Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-15
3.
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 5-15
4.
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number, page 5-17
5.
Conducting customer-specific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
6.
Performing a system check
●
The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to
the gateway:
– Check the telephones
Check the time and date display on each telephone. If a display does not
appear, either the telephone or the link is defective. Replace the terminal
or fix the link.
Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12.3.1.8 on all telephones.
– Check for proper system booting
Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.
●
Test IP configuration
Ping the HG 1500 IP address in the gateway.
Set up external calls at random (from optiPoints or optiClients on HiPath 5000).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
7-5
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway
7.5
Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway
7.5.1
Prerequisites
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.
Refer to Section 4.4.1 for information on the tools and resources needed to install the HiPath
3500 system.
7.5.2
>
Table 7-3
Step
Procedure for Installation and Startup
To ensure that IP addresses are not assigned more than once in the customer network, you must ping each new IP address to be configured before each IP address
is assigned. If an IP address responds, then this address cannot be used again.
HiPath 3500 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath 3500 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet) (Section 4.4)
1.
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-187 (usually predetermined)
2.
Unpacking the Components, page 4-188
3.
Not for U.S.: Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall, page 4-189
4.
Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet, page 4-190
5.
Grounding the System, page 4-192
6.
Connecting Cables and the Line Network, page 4-194
7.
Configuration notes, page 4-195
8.
Making trunk connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
STLS4R - for S0 trunk connection
●
TS2R - for the S2M trunk connection
●
TST1 (for U.S. only) - for T1 PRI trunk
Note: Analog workpoint clients can be connected to the CBRC’s T/R ports in emergencies. This ensures telephone operation via the telecommunications network in
the event of IP network failure.
7-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3500 as a Gateway
Table 7-3
HiPath 3500 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Step
Activity (Remarks)
9.
Making IP connections
Perform the IP connection over the HG 1500 board HXGR3.
For information on startup and configuration, refer to the HG 1500 Administration
Manual.
10.
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-198
Startup of HiPath 3500 (Section 5.4)
1.
Supplying the System With Power, page 5-20 (starting system boot).
2.
Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-23
3.
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 5-23
4.
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number, page 5-25
5.
Conducting customer-specific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
6.
Performing a system check
●
The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to
the gateway:
– Check the telephones
Check the time and date display on each telephone. If a display does not
appear, either the telephone or the link is defective. Replace the terminal
or fix the link.
Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12.3.1.8 on all telephones.
– Check for proper system booting
Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.
●
Test IP configuration
Ping the HG 1500 IP address in the gateway.
Set up external calls at random (from optiPoints or optiClients on HiPath 5000).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
7-7
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway
7.6
Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway
7.6.1
Prerequisites
7
Warning
Only authorized service personnel should install and start up the system.
Refer to Section 4.4.1 for information on the tools and resources needed to install the HiPath
3300 system.
7.6.2
>
Table 7-4
Step
Procedure for Installation and Startup
To ensure that IP addresses are not assigned more than once in the customer network, you must ping each new IP address to be configured before each IP address
is assigned. If an IP address responds, then this address cannot be used again.
HiPath 3300 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath 3300 Installation (19-Inch Cabinet) (Section 4.4)
1.
Selecting the Installation Site, page 4-187 (usually predetermined)
2.
Unpacking the Components, page 4-188
3.
Not for U.S.: Attaching a HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 to the Wall, page 4-189
4.
Installing a HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 in a Cabinet, page 4-190
5.
Grounding the System, page 4-192
6.
Connecting Cables and the Line Network, page 4-194
7.
Configuration notes, page 4-195
8.
Making trunk connections
Refer to the following board descriptions for information:
●
STLS4R - for S0 trunk connection
Note: Analog workpoint clients can be connected to the CBRC’s T/R ports in emergencies. This ensures telephone operation via the telecommunications network in
the event of IP network failure.
9.
7-8
Making IP connections
Perform the IP connection over the HG 1500 board HXGR3.
For information on startup and configuration, refer to the HG 1500 Administration
Manual.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway
Table 7-4
HiPath 3300 as a Gateway - Procedure for System Installation and Startup
Step
10.
Activity (Remarks)
Performing a Visual Inspection, page 4-198
Startup of HiPath 3300 (Section 5.4)
1.
Supplying the System With Power, page 5-20 (starting system boot).
2.
Carrying Out a System Reload, page 5-23
3.
Carrying Out the Country Initialization and Selecting the Password Type, page 5-23
4.
Not for U.S.: Entering the System Number, page 5-25
5.
Conducting customer-specific programming with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Refer to the HiPath 3000 Manager E Help for information on programming individual features.
6.
Performing a system check
●
The following tests must be performed if telephones are directly connected to
the gateway:
– Check the telephones
Check the time and date display on each telephone. If a display does not
appear, either the telephone or the link is defective. Replace the terminal
or fix the link.
Perform random terminal tests as described in Section 12.3.1.8 on all telephones.
– Check for proper system booting
Set up internal and external calls at random to check if the system is functioning properly.
●
Test IP configuration
Ping the HG 1500 IP address in the gateway.
Set up external calls at random (from optiPoints or optiClients on HiPath 5000).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
7-9
start_3g.fm
Starting HiPath 3000 as a Gateway
Starting HiPath 3300 as a Gateway
7-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Overview
8
Licensing
8.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
Introduction, page 8-2
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, page 8-4
●
Products and Components subject to Mandatory Licensing, page 8-4
●
Grace Period, page 8-6
●
License Failure Period, page 8-6
●
Performing Licensing, page 8-7
Licensing Scenarios, page 8-12
●
HiPath 3000 as a Standalone System, page 8-12
●
Networked HiPath 3000 Systems without HiPath 5000, page 8-13
●
Networked HiPath 3000 Systems with HiPath 5000, page 8-14
●
Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, page 8-17
●
Combining Standalone Systems (HiPath 3000) to Form a Network with HiPath 5000,
page 8-20
●
Removing a Standalone System from a Network with HiPath 5000, page 8-22
●
Replacing License-sensitive Hardware (Changing the MAC Address), page 8-23
Licensing optiClient Attendant, page 8-26
●
optiClient Attendant V7.0 Connected to HiPath 3000 V5.0, page 8-26
●
optiClient Attendant V7.0 Connected to HiPath 3000 < V5.0, page 8-28
●
Upgrading optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 As Part of an Upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5.0.,
page 8-30
●
Upgrade optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 on HiPath 3000 < V5.0, page 8-32
●
Changing Licenses on an optiClient Attendant V7.0 As Part of an Upgrade to HiPath 3000
V5.0, page 8-34
Protection Against License Manipulation, page 8-36
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-1
licensing.fm
Licensing
Introduction
8.2
Introduction
Versions 5.0 and later of HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 use a new, centralized licensing procedure known as HiPath License Management. The procedure is used in all HiPath products, for
example communication systems, workpoint clients, and applications.
To license a product you must first establish a connection with the Central License Server (CLS)
via the Customer License Manager (CLM). The customer-specific data entered is used to
uniquely identify the product configuration for which the relevant license file is to be supplied in
encrypted format. The license file contains the licenses for all products which are subject to
mandatory licensing.
The CLM is responsible for activating the license file and allocating it to the Customer License
Agent (CLA). This is where the license data is validated. Distribution of the licenses to the individual products using HiPath 3000 Manager E can then begin.
8-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Introduction
1. License file is requested
using customer-specific
data
License Management System
Central License Server CLS
https://www.central-license-server.com/
2. License file (*.xml) is
downloaded using CLM
Customer License
Manager (CLM)
2. License file (*.xml) is
downloaded without
CLM (license file is
stored manually in the
import directory)
or
3. License file is activated
Customer License
Agent (CLA)
Customer License Client
(CLC)
4. License file is validated
Example: HiPath 3000
Manager E
6. Individual licenses are
distributed to all products
which are subject to mandatory licensing
5. License file is analyzed
Figure 8-1
Licensing Process with Central License Server (CLS)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-3
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
8.3
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
8.3.1
Products and Components subject to Mandatory Licensing
The following products used with HiPath 3000 and HiPath 5000 V5.0 must be licensed (i.e. are
subject to mandatory licensing). The required licenses are combined in a license file and must
be distributed to the relevant products using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Table 8-1
Feature
subject
to mandatory
licensing
Features subject to mandatory licensing
Details in license file
Default values in
unlicensed state
Distribution of Licenses with
HiPath 3000 Manager E
Net- Per board
wor
kwide
Per boards
per
port/
per system
device
Feature
name
Maximum
number
Minimum
number
During
grace
period
After
grace
period
HG1500B_Channels
2000
0
2000
2
–
58 per
HG 1500
board
–
–
HiPath Com- HiPath ComScendo LiScendo licenses
censes
(e.g.optiClient 130 V5.0,
optiPoint 410,
NetMeeting)
2000
0
2000
0
–
HiPath
3000: 500
per Gatekeeper
HiPath
5000:
1000 per
Gatekeeper
–
–
IP security
2000
0
2000
0
–
1 per
HG 1500
board
–
–
CA functional- CA functionity (Certifica- ality
tion Authority)
1
0
1
0
–
Only on
one
HG 1500
board
–
–
Feature Serv- DBFS
er
1
0
1
0
X
–
–
X
0
6240
2 B channels per
BS4
–
–
0 - 10
licenses
per
port
–
HG 1500 B
channels
IPSec
6240
BS4 base sta- BS4B_Channels One lition (HiPath
cense =
Cordless Ofone regisfice)
tration
8-4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
Table 8-1
Feature
subject
to mandatory
licensing
Features subject to mandatory licensing
Details in license file
Distribution of Licenses with
HiPath 3000 Manager E
Net- Per board
wor
kwide
Per boards
per
port/
per system
device
Maximum
number
Minimum
number
During
grace
period
After
grace
period
TS2 (S30810- S2MQ2913-X300), B_Channels
TS2R
(S30810K2913-Z300)
8960
0
8960
2 per
TS2/
TS2R
–
0 - 28 licenses per
port
–
–
DIUN2
(S30810Q2196-X)
S2MB_Channels
8960
0
8960
2 licenses for
port 1
0 licenses for
port 2
–
0 - 28 licenses for
port 1
0 - 30 licenses for
port 2
–
–
IVM anIVM Announcements nouncement
1024
0
1024
0
–
Max. 16
per IVM
board
–
–
64
0
64
0
–
–
–
Max.
64 on a
central
board
optiClient Attendant V7.0
Feature
name
Default values in
unlicensed state
optiClient Attendant V7.0
The following features which are subject to mandatory licensing are licensed using separate
license files:
●
VPN Workpoint Clients
●
CSTA Service Provider (CSP)
●
TAPI Service Provider (TSP)
●
HiPath Fault Management
Information on the licensing procedure can be found in the appropriate product documentation.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-5
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
8.3.2
Grace Period
A product-specific Grace Period Configuration File (<file name>.gpcf) is installed with HiPath 3000 Manager E. If there is no valid license file (Real License File RLF) for the Customer
License Agent CLA when the HiPath 3000 Manager E-license dialog is opened, the CLA automatically generates a grace period license file using the .gpcf file. The grace period licenses
can be distributed in exactly the same way as RLF licenses. The only difference is that the validity period of the grace period license is limited to 30 days.
The .gpcf file ensures that the maximum expansion of all features that are subject to mandatory
licensing is possible within the 30-day grace period. The system or systems are not licensed.
The.gpcf file must be stored in the HiPath 3000 Manager E installation directory.
The 30-day grace period begins with the licensing of a standalone system or networked systems using the .gpcf file. The licensing of all features, interfaces, and products that are subject
to mandatory licensing must take place during this period.
The system falls into licensing default if licensing is not performed within the 30-day grace period. This means that features which subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced
functionality.
The activation of a grace period is recorded by the Customer License Agent (CLA) and in the
system CDB. This ensures that the 30-day period cannot be extended and that a second grace
period cannot be started.
8.3.3
License Failure Period
If a licensing error occurs, there is a period of 30 days (License Failure Period), within which
the error must be rectified.
If the error has not been rectified by the time the 30-day license failure period has expired, the
systems enter system default mode. This means that features which subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced functionality.
8-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
8.3.4
>
Performing Licensing
The details specified below are based on the assumption that valid license files are
available to the user.
During installation of the Customer License Agent CLA on the service PC or on the HiPath 5000
server (see Figure 8-2), an import subdirectory is created in the installation directory.
If the user has received a valid license file (<license>.xml), there are two options:
●
The license file can be stored manually in the specified subdirectory import.
●
The Customer License Manager CLM can be activated and used to make the license file
automatically available for the CLA. Information about this can be found in the Customer
License Manager online help.
The license file in XML format contains information about all products that are subject to mandatory licensing and the MAC address with which these licenses are linked. Feature IDs define
the number of licenses available and the length of time for which they are valid. A signature ensures that subsequent manipulation of the license file content is always detected. Invalid
changes to the license file are therefore not possible.
Distribution of the licenses to the relevant features, interfaces, and products is performed using
HiPath 3000 Manager E.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-7
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
Standalone HiPath 3000 system
Networked HiPath 3000 systems
with HiPath 5000 Server
License file (*.xml)
Validation, decryption, and
analysis of the license file
Service PC
with
– HiPath 3000 Manager E
– Customer License Agent
(CLA)
– Customer License Client
(CLC)
Customer database
CDB with licenses
HiPath 5000
with
– HiPath 3000 Manager E
– Customer License Agent
(CLA)
– Customer License Client
(CLC)
Customer database CDB with licenses
HiPath 3750
In the case of networked HiPath 3000 systems without HiPath 5000, a separate license file must be requested for each system.
Networked HiPath 3000 systems
Figure 8-2
8-8
Distribution of Licenses with HiPath 3000 Manager E
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
Procedure for distributing licenses
The license distribution procedure described below requires successful installation (see
Chapter 4, “Installing HiPath 3000”) and startup (see Chapter 5, “Starting Up HiPath
3000”) of the HiPath 3000 systems (nodes) and, if available, of the HiPath 5000 server (see
Chapter 6, “HiPath 5000 Startup and Administration”).
Step
Activity (Remarks)
Standalone or networked HiPath 3000
systems without HiPath 5000
Networked HiPath 3000 systems with
HiPath 5000
1.
Download and save the available CDB for Download and save the available CDB for
the HiPath 3000 to be licensed using Hi- the HiPath 5000 server to be licensed usPath 3000 Manager E.
ing HiPath 3000 Manager E.
2.
Open the "Licensing..." dialog in the "Settings" menu.
The Customer License Agent (CLA) installed on the PC opens the license file that
corresponds to the MAC address.
●
Licenses: The content of the license
file is displayed.
In a configuration without HiPath
5000, these are the licenses for the
open CDB and the corresponding
node (HiPath 3000).
–
–
–
–
Licenses: The content of the license
file is displayed.
In a network with HiPath 5000, these
are the licenses for the server CDB
and all of the nodes (HiPath 3000)
belonging to the network.
Note: When a single CDB is downloaded
from a HiPath 3000/5000 network, only
the license-sensitive CDB content is displayed. It is not possible to make any
changes.
●
Feature: All features, interfaces, and products which are subject to mandatory licensing are displayed.
Available: The number of licenses purchased for the feature in question is
specified.
Used: The number of licenses already assigned for the feature in question is
specified. The number of available licenses not yet assigned is the difference
between this number and the number specified under “Number”.
Expiration date: If licenses are only available for a specific time, the date on
which they expire is specified here.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-9
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
Step
Activity (Remarks)
Standalone or networked HiPath 3000
systems without HiPath 5000
Networked HiPath 3000 systems with
HiPath 5000
CDB: The license-sensitive data for the open CDB is displayed. You can specify
which data you want to display in the tabs "HXG" (HG 1500 boards HXGM3,
HXGS3, HXGR3, STMI2), "S2M" (S2M boards TS2, TS2R, DIUN2), "IVM" (HiPath Xpressions Compact boards IVML8, IVML24, IVMN8, IVMNL, IVMP8,
IVMP8R, IVMS8, IVMS8R), "Base station" (HiPath Cordless Office base station
BS4), and "System-wide" (the licenses assigned for the system-wide feature
"DBFS" are displayed; no changes can be made.
– Type - Slot: The board type and the slot in which the board is inserted are
displayed.
– Port: The board port used is displayed.
– Feature: The features, interfaces, and products which are subject to mandatory licensing are displayed.
– Assigned: The number of licenses assigned for this feature is specified.
– Base: The default value for each feature is displayed.
– Expiration date: The date displayed here specifies when the validity of the
licenses assigned for this feature is due to expire.
For “Base station” tab only:
– Type - Slot - Port: The board type, the slot in which the board is inserted, and
the board port used are displayed.
– BS Type: The base station type is displayed.
– Name: The name of the base station is displayed.
Note: If the right license is not available, only the license-sensitive CDB content is displayed. It is not possible to make any changes.
●
3.
8-10
Distribute licenses.
You can select the features to be licensed (features, interfaces, and products) in the
“HXG”, “S2M”, “IVM” and “Base station” tabs.
Distribute the licenses defined in the license file to the individual features.
Note that in a network with HiPath 5000, these are the licenses for all of the nodes
(HiPath 3000) belonging to the network.
Note: The DBFS network-wide feature that may be included is automatically transferred to the CDB when the licensing dialog is started.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing for HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
Step
Activity (Remarks)
Standalone or networked HiPath 3000
systems without HiPath 5000
4.
>
Save CDB and transfer to HiPath 3000.
Networked HiPath 3000 systems with
HiPath 5000
Save CDB and transfer to HiPath 5000
server. The server transfers the CDB files
to the networked systems autonomously.
The HG 1500 boards are then registered
automatically.
Note: Unlike previous versions, this version does not require a reset of the
HG 1500 boards. A reset should therefore
not be carried out. as it may disrupt data
transfer.
Note on licensing the Feature Server
The Feature Server can be started without a license. In this case a message indicating that licensing needs to be performed is displayed.
Given that the Feature Server receives its license from the CDB of the first node, the
licensing dialog for this node must be opened first and, as a minimum requirement,
licensing must be performed using a .gcpf file. The first node must then be added to
the HiPath 3000/5000 network. The Feature Server now has its (grace period) license.
If the Feature Server is not licensed through the first node within one hour, the server
automatically stops operating after an hour has elapsed. When the server is restarted there is a new one-hour period in which to perform licensing.
Preconfiguration can be performed in preparation for installation of a HiPath 3000/
5000 network for a customer. Licensing is required for the network at the preconfiguration stage. If there is no valid license file available, licensing can also be performed using a GPCF file.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-11
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
8.4
>
Licensing Scenarios
During production, the HiPath 3000 control boards are assigned a board-specific
number with a MAC address that is unique worldwide. To guarantee unique licensing, the license file is linked to the MAC address of a HiPath 3000 control board. The
various licensing scenarios are described below.
8.4.1
HiPath 3000 as a Standalone System
The components for this system which require licensing are licensed using one license file. This
file is linked with the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
Procedure
Step
1.
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath 3000 Manager E (In cases where the MAC address is not already available):
Determine the MAC address of the control board of the HiPath 3000 system requiring
licensing.
2.
HiPath License Management:
Invoke the Central License Server (CLS) via https://www.central-licenseserver.com/
Select the language version for the License Management Center.
Log on by entering the user name and password.
3.
Activate the "Generate and Download License Key" function under "Management of
Available Licenses".
Various search criteria is displayed for activating the available licenses.
4.
In the "LAC" input field, enter the part number and the packing slip number (separated
by a dash).
Click Search to display a list of the features which are subject to mandatory licensing
and for which licenses are available.
5.
From this list, select the features which are subject to mandatory licensing and which
you want to generate a license.
Activate the Generate Key button.
In the subsequent dialog, define the number of licenses to be generated and specify
the MAC address to which the license should be linked.
8-12
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
Activity (Remarks)
6.
In the "MAC Address" input field, enter the MAC address for the HiPath 3000 control
board as specified in step 1.
In the "Number" field, define the number of licenses to be generated for each feature.
Click Next.
7.
The customer and the user (contact partner) specified for this transaction are displayed.
If there are still no entries available, these can be selected using the search mask for
companies and the search mask for users.
Click Next.
8.
Before generating a license key, the following content of the displayed dialog must be
observed:
●
Legal notice: The licensing conditions must be accepted.
●
Notes: Notes on the generation procedure can be entered here. A distinction is
made here between internal notes (only accessible to users authorized to create
licenses) and customer notes (generally accessible).
●
Registered company and user: Company and user-specific data is displayed.
●
Technical specifications: MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
●
Licenses to be used: The outcome of the generation procedure is displayed.
Click the Execute button. A new license key is generated.
9.
After successful execution, the message "License Key Generation Complete" appears The generation information and license key data is displayed.
Click License Key.
10.
Details on the selected license key are displayed:
●
“View” tab: Type and number of licensed features, customer-specific information.
●
“Transactions” tab: Actions performed for each feature
11.
Click the Save License Key button.
In the subsequent dialog, specify the storage location for the license key you want to
download.
Section 8.3.4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
8.4.2
Networked HiPath 3000 Systems without HiPath 5000
Licensing of the components which are subject to mandatory licensing is performed on a system-wide basis. This means that a separate license file must be requested for each system.
This file is linked with the MAC address of the control board belonging to the relevant system.
The procedure for generating the various license keys is the same as that in Section 8.4.1.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-13
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
8.4.3
Networked HiPath 3000 Systems with HiPath 5000
Licensing of the components which are subject to mandatory licensing is performed on a network-wide basis. This means that a single license file is required for the entire HiPath 3000/
5000 network. This file is linked with the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board with
the lowest node number (node ID).
>
When a single CDB is downloaded from a HiPath 3000/5000 network, only the license-sensitive CDB content is displayed. It is not possible to make any changes.
A cyclic check carried out every 24 hours guarantees continuous protection against manipulation. Each node belonging to the network sends a request to the Feature Server to verify whether the license is still valid. The time at which the daily check takes place depends on the time
at which licensing takes place. The time of the daily check is redefined with each system reset.
Example: Licensing takes place at 5:00 p.m. Based on the 24-hour cycle, this means that the
licensing check begins at 5:00 p.m. every day.
A system reset is performed at 10:00 p.m. The time of the daily check is redefined as a result.
The licensing check begins at 10:00 p.m. every day with immediate effect.
Each additional reset results in the time of the daily check being redefined.
The system distinguishes between the following two types of error:
●
The Feature Server is unable to reach the first node needed for licensing. The 30-day License Failure Period begins.
●
A standalone HiPath 3000 system (node) is unable to reach the Feature Server. The 30day License Failure Period begins.
If the error is rectified within 30 days, the system(s) revert(s) to the licensed state. If the error
has not been rectified by the time the 30-day license failure period has expired, the systems
enter system default mode. This means that features which subject to mandatory licensing will
suffer from reduced functionality.
Procedure
Step
1.
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath 3000 Manager E (In cases where the MAC address is not already available):
The MAC address of the HiPath 3000 system control board with the lowest node number (node ID) should be determined.
8-14
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
2.
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath License Management:
Invoke the Central License Server (CLS) via https://www.central-licenseserver.com/
Select the language version for the License Management Center.
Log on by entering the user name and password.
3.
Activate the "Generate and Download License Key" function under "Management of
Available Licenses".
Various search criteria is displayed for activating the available licenses.
4.
In the "LAC" input field, enter the part number and the packing slip number (separated
by a dash).
Click Search to display a list of the features which are subject to mandatory licensing
and for which licenses are available.
5.
From this list, select the features which are subject to mandatory licensing and which
you want to generate a license.
Activate the Generate Key button.
In the subsequent dialog, define the number of licenses to be generated and specify
the MAC address to which the license should be linked.
6.
In the "MAC Address" input field, enter the MAC address for the HiPath 3000 control
board as specified in step 1.
In the "Number" field, define the number of licenses to be generated for each feature.
Click Next.
7.
The customer and the user (contact partner) specified for this transaction are displayed.
If there are still no entries available, these can be selected using the search mask for
companies and the search mask for users.
Click Next.
8.
Before generating a license key, the following content of the displayed dialog must be
observed:
●
Legal notice: The licensing conditions must be accepted.
●
Notes: Notes on the generation procedure can be entered here. A distinction is
made here between internal notes (only accessible to users authorized to create
licenses) and customer notes (generally accessible).
●
Registered company and user: Company and user-specific data is displayed.
●
Technical specifications: MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
●
Licenses to be used: The outcome of the generation procedure is displayed.
Click the Execute button. A new license key is generated.
9.
After successful execution, the message "License Key Generation Complete" appears The generation information and license key data is displayed.
Click License Key.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-15
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
Activity (Remarks)
10.
Details on the selected license key are displayed:
●
“View” tab: Type and number of licensed features, customer-specific information.
●
“Transactions” tab: Actions performed for each feature
11.
Click the Save License Key button.
In the subsequent dialog, specify the storage location for the license key you want to
download.
Section 8.3.4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
8-16
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
8.4.4
Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0
To upgrade from a version earlier than 5.0 to HiPath 3000 V5.0 or HiPath 5000 V5.0, you must
request a new license file and repeat the licensing procedure.
The Central License Server (CLS) enables the old licenses (< V5.0) to be converted into new
licenses that are valid for version 5.0.
The following features that are subject to mandatory licensing are converted:
●
HG 1500 B channels (previous designation: max. no. of B channels)
●
HiPath ComScendo licenses (previous designation: max. no. of workpoint clients)
●
IP Sec
●
CA functionality
●
Feature Server (previous designation: HiPath 5000 RSM)
Features that were not previously subject to mandatory licensing cannot be migrated. The base
station BS4 is a new product. DIUN2 (S30810-Q2196-X), TS2 (S30810-Q2913-X300) and
TS2R (S30810-K2913-Z300) are new boards. Up to now, no license was required for the IVM
announcement feature. These features are released with the maximum configuration following
an upgrade.
●
BS4 (number of B channels per BS4)
●
DIUN2, TS2, TS2R (number of B channels per port)
●
IVM announcements (IVM boards, number of B channels per port)
Procedure
Step
1.
Activity (Remarks)
Web-based Management (WBM) (in the event that the MAC addresses are not
already available):
Determine the MAC addresses (locking IDs) of all HG 1500 boards belonging to the
HiPath 3000 system to be upgraded.
If this involves the networking of several HiPath 3000 systems, then the MAC addresses (locking IDs) of all available HG 1500 boards are to be determined.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-17
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
2.
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath 3000 Manager E (In cases where the MAC addresses are not already
available.):
A single HiPath 3000 system or several
networked HiPath 3000 systems must be
upgraded without HiPath 5000:
The MAC address of the associated control board should be determined for every
system.
3.
Upgrading involves several networked HiPath 3000 systems with HiPath 5000:
The MAC address of the control board is
to be determined solely for the HiPath
3000 system with the lowest node number
(node ID).
HiPath License Management:
Invoke the Central License Server (CLS) via https://www.central-licenseserver.com/
Select the language version for the License Management Center.
Log on by entering the user name and password.
4.
Activate the "View Used Licenses and Certificates and License Key" function under
"Management of Used Licenses".
Different search criteria are displayed in order to invoke the licenses to be converted
(B channels of HG 1500 boards.
5.
The MAC address (locking ID) of a HG 1500 board determined under step 1 should
be entered in the Locking ID input field.
Click the Search button to display a list of the licenses belonging to the MAC address
(locking ID).
6.
Click the Show Details button.
Details on the selected license key are displayed:
●
“View” tab: Type and number of licensed features, customer-specific information.
●
“Transactions” tab: Actions performed for each feature
7.
Click the Upgrade button.
In the subsequent dialog, define the MAC address to which the new license should
be linked.
8.
The MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board to which the HG 1500 board
specified under step 5 belongs should be entered in the MAC Address input field.
Click Next.
8-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
Activity (Remarks)
9.
Before upgrading a license key, the following content of the displayed dialog must be
observed:
●
Legal notice: The licensing conditions must be accepted.
●
Notes: Notes on this procedure can be entered here. A distinction is made here
between internal notes (only accessible to users authorized to create licenses)
and customer notes (generally accessible).
●
Registered company and user: Company and user-specific data is displayed.
●
Upgrade details: MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
●
Licenses to be used: The outcome of this procedure is displayed.
Example:
HiPath HG 1500 V2 & V3:
– 6 features (Licenses) will be upgraded as a result of this transaction.
– 6 features (Licenses) will be disabled as a result of this transaction.
This means that all six available licenses have been linked with the new MAC address. The old link with the HG 1500 board MAC address (Locking ID) was disabled for all six licenses.
Click the Execute button. The license key is upgraded.
10.
After successful execution, the message "License Key Generation Complete" appears The upgrade information and the information about the license key will be displayed.
Note: The number of pre-installed HG 1500-B channels is no longer displayed, nut
only the effective total for the released licenses.
11.
Upgrading involves either a single HiPath
3000 system or several networked systems without HiPath 5000:
Steps 4 to 10 must be repeated for all
available HG 1500 boards.
Note: The new licensing applies on a system-by-system basis. A separate license
key is generated for each HiPath 3000
system.
12.
Invoke the License Management Center homepage.
13.
Activate the "View Used Licenses and Certificates and License Key" function under
"Management of Used Licenses".
Various search criteria are displayed for calling the recently upgraded license key.
14.
In the "Locking ID" input field, enter the control board MAC address to which the license key is linked (see step 6).
Click the Search button to display a list of the license keys belonging to the MAC address.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
Upgrading involves several networked HiPath 3000 systems with HiPath 5000:
Steps to 4 must be repeated for all available HG101500 boards.
Note: New licenses apply to the entire
network. In other words, a single license
key is generated for the entire HiPath
3000/5000 network. This file is linked with
the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board with the lowest node number
(node ID).
8-19
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
Activity (Remarks)
15.
Select the relevant license key and click the Display Details button.
Details on the selected license key are displayed:
●
“View” tab: Type and number of licensed features, customer-specific information.
●
“Transactions” tab: Actions performed for each feature
16.
Click the Save License Key button.
In the subsequent dialog, specify the storage location for the license key you want to
download.
Section 8.3.4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
8.4.5
Combining Standalone Systems (HiPath 3000) to Form a Network
with HiPath 5000
Only one license file is required if combining multiple standalone systems to create a network
with HiPath 5000.
The "Rehost" function of the Central License Servers (CLS) enables the various license files to
be converted into a new, network-wide overall license file. This file is linked with the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board with the lowest node number (node ID).
Procedure
Step
1.
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath 3000 Manager E (In cases where the MAC addresses are not already
available.):
The MAC address of the associated control board should be determined for every HiPath 3000 system.
The new network-wide overall license file is linked to the MAC address of the HiPath
3000 system with the lowest node number (node ID).
2.
HiPath License Management:
Invoke the Central License Server (CLS) via https://www.central-licenseserver.com/
Select the language version for the License Management Center.
Log on by entering the user name and password.
3.
8-20
Call the "Rehost Licenses" function under "Management of Used Licenses".
Different search criteria are displayed in order to call up the licenses to be converted.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
Activity (Remarks)
4.
The MAC address of a HiPath 3000 control board determined under step 1 should be
entered in the Locking ID input field.
After the Find button is selected, the licenses belonging to the MAC address are displayed.
5.
Activate the Rehost button.
In the subsequent dialog, define the MAC address to which the new license should
be linked.
6.
The MAC address of the control board whose HiPath 3000 system has the lowest
node number (node ID) should be entered in the MAC address input field.
Click Next.
7.
Before you start to generate a new license key, note the following content of the mask
displayed:
●
Legal notice: The licensing conditions must be accepted.
●
Notes: Notes on this procedure can be entered here. A distinction is made here
between internal notes (only accessible to users authorized to create licenses)
and customer notes (generally accessible).
●
Registered company and user: Company and user-specific data is displayed.
●
Rehost details: MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
●
Licenses to be used: The outcome of this procedure is displayed.
Example:
HG 1500 V2 & V3:
– 6 features (Licenses) will be upgraded as a result of this transaction.
– 6 features (Licenses) will be disabled as a result of this transaction.
This means that all six available licenses have been linked with the new MAC address. The old link with the HG 1500 board MAC address (Locking ID) was disabled for all six licenses.
Click the Execute button. A new license key is generated.
8.
After successful execution, the message "License Key Generation Complete" appears The generation information and license key data is displayed.
9.
Steps 4 to 8 should be repeated for all HiPath 3000 systems.
Note: New licenses apply to the entire network. In other words, a single license key
is generated for the entire HiPath 3000/5000 network. This file is linked with the MAC
address of the HiPath 3000 control board with the lowest node number (node ID).
10.
Invoke the License Management Center homepage.
11.
Activate the "View Used Licenses and Certificates and License Key" function under
"Management of Used Licenses".
Various search criteria are displayed for invoking the generated license key.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-21
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
Activity (Remarks)
12.
In the "Locking ID" input field, enter the control board MAC address to which the license key is linked (see step 6).
Click the Search button to display a list of the license keys belonging to the MAC address.
13.
Select the relevant license key and click the Display Details button.
Details on the selected license key are displayed:
●
“View” tab: Type and number of licensed features, customer-specific information.
●
“Transactions” tab: Actions performed for each feature
14.
Click the Save License Key button.
In the subsequent dialog, specify the storage location for the license key you want to
download.
Section 8.3.4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
8.4.6
Removing a Standalone System from a Network with HiPath 5000
If a standalone node (HiPath 3000) is to be removed from a network with HiPath 5000, a new
license file is required for the standalone system. A new, network-wide general license file must
also be requested for the rest of the network.
The "Rehost" function of the Central License Server (CLS) enables the old general license file
to be converted into a new single license file (for the standalone system) and a new general
license file (for the remaining network).
8-22
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
8.4.7
Replacing License-sensitive Hardware (Changing the MAC
Address)
A new license file is always required if you replace a license-sensitive HiPath 3000 control
board due to a hardware defect. In this case, the MAC address changes and the license becomes invalid.
The "Rehost" function of the Central License Server (CLS) enables the licenses to be moved
from the old MAC address (the old HiPath 3000 control board to be replaced) to a new MAC
address (a new HiPath 3000 control board).
Procedure
Step
1.
Activity (Remarks)
HiPath License Management:
Invoke the Central License Server (CLS) via https://www.central-licenseserver.com/
Select the language version for the License Management Center.
Log on by entering the user name and password.
2.
Call the "Rehost Licenses" function under "Management of Used Licenses".
Different search criteria are displayed in order to call up the licenses to be converted.
3.
Enter the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board to be replaced (defective)
in the Locking ID input field.
After the Find button is selected, the licenses belonging to the MAC address are displayed.
4.
Activate the Rehost button.
In the subsequent dialog, define the MAC address to which the new license should
be linked.
5.
In the "MAC Address" input field, enter the MAC address for the new control board.
Click Next.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-23
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
Step
Activity (Remarks)
6.
Before you start to generate a new license key, note the following content of the mask
displayed:
●
Legal notice: The licensing conditions must be accepted.
●
Notes: Notes on this procedure can be entered here. A distinction is made here
between internal notes (only accessible to users authorized to create licenses)
and customer notes (generally accessible).
●
Registered company and user: Company and user-specific data is displayed.
●
Rehost details: MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
●
Licenses to be used: The outcome of this procedure is displayed.
Example:
HG 1500 V2 & V3:
– 6 features (Licenses) will be upgraded as a result of this transaction.
– 6 features (Licenses) will be disabled as a result of this transaction.
This means that all six available licenses have been linked with the new MAC address. The old link to the MAC address of the defective HiPath 3000 control board
has been deactivated for all six licenses.
Click the Execute button. A new license key is generated.
7.
After successful execution, the message "License Key Generation Complete" appears The generation information and license key data is displayed.
8.
Invoke the License Management Center homepage.
9.
Activate the "View Used Licenses and Certificates and License Key" function under
"Management of Used Licenses".
Various search criteria are displayed for invoking the generated license key.
10.
In the "Locking ID" input field, enter the control board MAC address to which the license key is linked (see step 5).
Click the Search button to display a list of the license keys belonging to the MAC address.
11.
Select the relevant license key and click the Display Details button.
Details on the selected license key are displayed:
●
“View” tab: Type and number of licensed features, customer-specific information.
●
“Transactions” tab: Actions performed for each feature
12.
Click the Save License Key button.
In the subsequent dialog, specify the storage location for the license key you want to
download.
Section 8.3.4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
8-24
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing Scenarios
>
Note on Replacing the HiPath 3000 Control Board:
When the control board has been successfully replaced, the CDB must be transferred to HiPath 3000. A warning will appear that the MAC address is invalid. All licenses become invalid if the CDB is installed. The system goes into default and features that are subject to mandatory licensing will suffer from reduced functionality.
The new license key (see step 12) must be used to achieve valid licensing.
Section 8.3.4 describes the procedure for distributing licenses with HiPath 3000
Manager E.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-25
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
8.5
Licensing optiClient Attendant
In optiClient Attendant V7.0 or later, licensing is performed via HiPath License Management. In
the case of versions < 7.0, licensing is performed on the optiClient Attendant as before.
optiClient Attendant V7.0 licensing is performed both for new installations and upgrades.
If you order an upgrade, a valid optiClient Attendant V6.0 CD key is a strict licensing requirement.
Upgrades are not available for versions previous to optiClient Attendant V6.0.
8.5.1
optiClient Attendant V7.0 Connected to HiPath 3000 V5.0
Licensing is performed on the associated HiPath 3000 system. In order to ensure unique licensing, the license file is linked with the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
Procedure
1
6
optiClient
Attendant 1
HiPath 3000
Manager E
V.24,
USB or
TCP/IP
optiClient
Attendant 6
2
HiPath 3000
V5.0
3
5
CLC
CLA
(CLS)
4
CLM
Figure 8-3
Step
Procedure for Licensing optiClient Attendant V7.0 on HiPath 3000 V5.0
Activity (Remarks)
1.
Read the customer data record of the HiPath 3000 V5.0.
2.
Read out the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
8-26
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
Step
Activity (Remarks)
3.
Enter the LAC and MAC address at the CLS in order to generate the license key either
●
a) via CLM/CLS communication,
or
●
b) via direct communication with the CLS via a web browser.
4.
Transfer the license key from the CLS via the CLM to the CLA (CLC - HiPath 3000
Manager E).
●
a) via CLM/CLS communication,
or
●
b) manually on the CLM (license key is already available, offline activation).
5.
Write the CDR to HiPath 3000 V5.0. (Once the license data has been transferred to
HiPath 3000, the CLA is no longer required.).
6.
Install optiClient Attendant(s).
“Any” number of optiClient Attendants can be installed. However, HiPath 3000 monitors the number of licensedoptiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure.
Depending on the model, up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system.
When the HiPath 3000 is started for the first time, a 30-day grace period begins. During this time, all HiPath 3000 features that require licensing (including optiClient Attendant) can be operated without a license. All features that require a license (including optiClient Attendants that have been subsequently installed) must be licensed
before the grace period of the HiPath 3000 expires. The 30-day limit cannot be extended and a second grace period will not be granted.
In this case, the CLS generates a license key for HiPath 3000 V5.0.
Note: For CLS, an optiClient Attendant V7.0 is generally specified as a “HiPath 3000/
5000 V5.0 product” and “HiPath 3000 optiClient Attendant V7.0 feature”.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-27
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
8.5.2
optiClient Attendant V7.0 Connected to HiPath 3000 < V5.0
Licensing is performed on the optiClient Attendant. In order to ensure unique licensing, the license file is linked with the MAC address of the CLA PC.
Procedure
1
optiClient Attendant 1
HiPath 3000
< V5.0
V.24,
USB or
TCP/IP
2
CLA
3
CLC
5
optiClient Attendant 6
4
CLM
(CLS)
CLC
Figure 8-4
Step
Procedure for Licensing optiClient Attendant V7.0 on HiPath 3000 < V5.0
Activity (Remarks)
1.
Install optiClient Attendant and CLA (if not yet available).
Enter the IP address and port number of the CLA in the optiClient Attendant configuration manager.
2.
Read out the MAC address of the CLA PC (via the CLM).
3.
Enter the LAC and MAC address at the CLS in order to generate the license key either
●
a) via CLM/CLS communication,
or
●
b) via direct communication with the CLS via a web browser.
4.
Transfer the license key from the CLS via the CLM to the CLA either
●
a) via CLM/CLS communication,
or
●
b) manually on the CLM (license key is already available, offline activation).
8-28
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
Step
5.
Activity (Remarks)
Once the license data has been transferred to the CLA, the optiClient Attendant can
start.
Licensing is controlled by the CLA. For this reason, communication between the optiClient Attendant and CLA must be ensured during active operation. If the connection
to the CLA is lost or the CLA breaks down, an error message is output at the optiClient Attendant. At this point, the optiClient Attendant is still operational.
If the optiClient Attendant cannot locate a CLA at startup, the optiClient Attendant will
not boot.
“Any” number of optiClient Attendants can be installed. However, the CLA monitors
the number of licensed optiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure and during operation.
Depending on the model, up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system.
When the optiClient Attendant is started for the first time, a 30-day grace period begins. During this time, a optiClient Attendant can be operated without a license. All
optiClient Attendants (including those that have been subsequently installed) must be
licensed before the grace period expires for the first optiClient Attendant installed.
The 30-day limit cannot be extended and a second grace period will not be granted.
In this case, the CLS generates a license key for the CLA PC, and not for HiPath
3000.
Note: For CLS, an optiClient Attendant V7.0 is generally specified as a “HiPath 3000/
5000 V5.0 product” and “HiPath 3000 optiClient Attendant V7.0 feature”.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-29
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
8.5.3
Upgrading optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 As Part of an
Upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5.0.
As part of the upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5.0, the licensing procedure for optiClient Attendant
changes:
HiPath 3000 < V5.0
Licensing is performed on the optiClient At- –>
tendant.
HiPath 3000 V5.0
Licensing is performed on the associated
HiPath 3000 system.
In order to ensure unique licensing, the new license file is linked with the MAC address of the
HiPath 3000 control board.
Procedure
>
The procedure described below assumes that the HiPath 3000 upgrade to V5.0 has
already been completed.
1
6
optiClient
Attendant 1
HiPath 3000
Manager E
V.24,
USB or
TCP/IP
optiClient
Attendant 6
2
HiPath 3000
V5.0
3
5
CLC
CLA
(CLS)
4
CLM
Figure 8-5
Step
Licensing procedure when upgrading optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 on HiPath 3000 V5.0
Activity (Remarks)
1.
Read the customer data record of the HiPath 3000 V5.0.
2.
Read out the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
8-30
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
Step
Activity (Remarks)
3.
Enter the LAC and MAC address and the CD key of the optiClient Attendant V6.0 at
the CLS in order to generate the license key.
Input is only possible directly via the CLS (direct communication with the CLS via web
browser).
4.
Transfer the license key or save it to the buffer memory.
This is completed by manually entering the license to the CLA (performed on the
CLM, offline activation).
5.
Write the customer data record to HiPath 3000 V5.0.
6.
optiClient AttendantInstall (s).
“Any” number of optiClient Attendants can be installed. However, HiPath 3000 monitors the number of licensedoptiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure.
Depending on the model, up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system.
When the HiPath 3000 is started for the first time, a 30-day grace period begins. During this time, all HiPath 3000 features that require licensing (including optiClient Attendant) can be operated without a license. All features that require a license (including HiPath 3000s that have been subsequently installed) must be licensed before the
grace period of the optiClient Attendant expires. The 30-day limit cannot be extended
and a second grace period will not be granted.
In this case, the CLS generates a license key for HiPath 3000 V5.0.
Note: For CLS, an optiClient Attendant V7.0 is generally specified as a “HiPath 3000/
5000 V5.0 product” and “HiPath 3000 optiClient Attendant V7.0 feature”.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-31
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
8.5.4
Upgrade optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 on HiPath 3000 < V5.0
As part of the optiClient Attendant upgrade, licensing is also upgraded from V6.0 to V7.0. In
order to ensure unique licensing, the new license file is linked with the MAC address of the CLA
PC.
Procedure
1
optiClient Attendant 1
HiPath 3000
< V5.0
V.24,
USB or
TCP/IP
2
CLA
3
CLC
5
optiClient Attendant 6
4
CLM
(CLS)
CLC
Figure 8-6
Step
Procedure for Licensing when Upgrading optiClient Attendant V6.0 –> V7.0 on
HiPath 3000 < V5.0
Activity (Remarks)
1.
Install optiClient Attendant and CLA (if not yet available).
Enter the IP address and port number of the CLA in the optiClient Attendant configuration manager.
2.
Read out the MAC address of the CLA PC (via the CLM).
3.
Enter the LAC and MAC address and the CD key of the optiClient Attendant V6.0 at
the CLS in order to generate the license key.
Input is only possible directly via the CLS (direct communication with the CLS via web
browser).
8-32
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
Step
Activity (Remarks)
4.
Transfer the license key from the CLS via the CLM to the CLA either
●
a) via CLM/CLS communication,
or
●
b) manually on the CLM (license key is already available, offline activation).
5.
Once the license data has been transferred to the CLA, the optiClient Attendant can
start.
Licensing is controlled by the CLA. For this reason, communication between the optiClient Attendant and CLA must be ensured during active operation. If the connection
to the CLA is lost or the CLA breaks down, an error message is output at the optiClient Attendant. At this point, the optiClient Attendant is still operational.
If the optiClient Attendant cannot locate a CLA at startup, the optiClient Attendant will
not boot.
“Any” number of optiClient Attendants can be installed. However, the CLA monitors
the number of licensed optiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure and during operation.
Depending on the model, up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system.
When the optiClient Attendant is started for the first time, a 30-day grace period begins. During this time, a optiClient Attendant can be operated without a license. All
optiClient Attendants (including those that have been subsequently installed) must be
licensed before the grace period expires for the first optiClient Attendant installed.
The 30-day limit cannot be extended and a second grace period will not be granted.
In this case, the CLS generates a license key for the CLA PC, and not for HiPath
3000.
Note: For CLS, an optiClient Attendant V7.0 is generally specified as a “HiPath 3000/
5000 V5.0 product” and “HiPath 3000 optiClient Attendant V7.0 feature”.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-33
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
8.5.5
Changing Licenses on an optiClient Attendant V7.0 As Part of an
Upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5.0
As part of the upgrade to HiPath 3000 V5.0, the licensing procedure for optiClient Attendant
changes:
HiPath 3000 < V5.0
Licensing is performed on the optiClient At- –>
tendant.
HiPath 3000 V5.0
Licensing is performed on the associated
HiPath 3000 system.
In order to ensure unique licensing, the new license file is linked with the MAC address of the
HiPath 3000 control board.
Procedure
HiPath 3000
< V5.0
V.24, USB or TCP/IP
optiClient Attendant
CLC
2
1
5
V.24, USB or TCP/IP
optiClient Attendant
HiPath 3000
V5.0
3
(CLS)
4
HiPath 3000
Manager E
7
CLC
6
CLA
CLM
Figure 8-7
8-34
Changing Licenses on an optiClient Attendant V7.0 As Part of an Upgrade to
HiPath 3000 V5.0
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
licensing.fm
Licensing
Licensing optiClient Attendant
Step
Activity (Remarks)
1.
Upgrade HiPath 3000 to V5.0.
2.
At this point no steps are required. On startup, the optiClient Attendant identifies the
HiPath 3000 software version and waits for a boot signal from HiPath 3000 V5.0.
The IP address and port number of the CLA (configuration parameters) are not required when connecting a HiPath 3000 V5.0.
3.
Read the customer data record of the HiPath 3000 V5.0.
4.
Read out the MAC address of the HiPath 3000 control board.
5.
Perform a rehost on the CLS (change license to a new MAC address).
This procedure can only be performed directly via the CLS (direct communication
with the CLS via web browser).
6.
Transfer the license key or save it to the buffer memory.
This is completed by manually entering the license to the CLA (performed on the
CLM, offline activation).
7.
Write the customer data record to HiPath 3000 V5.0.
8.
Install optiClient Attendant(s).
“Any” number of optiClient Attendants can be installed. However, HiPath 3000 monitors the number of licensed optiClient Attendants as part of the logon procedure.
Depending on the model, up to six optiClient Attendants can be started per system.
When the HiPath 3000 is started for the first time, a 30-day grace period begins. During this time, all HiPath 3000 features that require licensing (including optiClient Attendant) can be operated without a license. All features that require a license (including HiPath 3000s that have been subsequently installed) must be licensed before the
grace period of the optiClient Attendant expires. The 30-day limit cannot be extended
and a second grace period will not be granted.
In this case, the CLS generates a license key for HiPath 3000 V5.0.
Note: For CLS, an optiClient Attendant V7.0 is generally specified as a “HiPath 3000/
5000 V5.0 product” and “HiPath 3000 optiClient Attendant V7.0 feature”.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
8-35
licensing.fm
Licensing
Protection Against License Manipulation
8.6
Protection Against License Manipulation
HiPath License Management guarantees protection against any manipulation of the licenses.
This includes, for example
●
editing a license file
●
changing the system time
●
multiple read-in of licenses
●
extension of the grace period
When a Grace Period Configuration File (GPCF) is created, a flag is set in the system CDB
and the Customer License Agent (CLA) to indicate that a GPCF file was created. This ensures that the 30-day period cannot be extended and the GPCF file cannot be regenerated.
>
8-36
To guarantee the security and consistency of the product licenses generated, changes to the system time on the PC of an installed Customer License Agent (CLA) must
not exceed one day.
If the system clock is reset by more than one day, the Customer License Agent stops
functioning and cannot be reactivated. The full functionality of the CLA on this PC
can only be restored by means of a repair or a reinstallation (see the License Agent
Installation Manual).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Overview
9
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
9.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
Expanding HiPath 3000, page 9-2:
●
Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3800, page 9-2
●
Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, page 9-4
●
Connecting a printer, page 9-6
●
ECR with HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 (not for U.S. and Canada), page 9-8
●
Connecting Special Equipment, page 9-24
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0, page 9-29
●
Hardware Upgrade, page 9-29
●
Software Upgrade, page 9-31
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-1
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2
Expanding HiPath 3000
The following section provides information on supplementary equipment or extensions that are
not described in Chapter 4, “Installing HiPath 3000”.
9.2.1
7
Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3800
Caution
Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially when
handling boards).
HiPath 3800 lets you remove and insert peripheral boards during operation (hot plugging). The
following startup rules apply.
Rules for removing and inserting boards
7
Caution
To ensure that the system operates without blocking, you must follow the rules in
Section 4.2.5 concerning board configuration.
Table 9-1
Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards
If
Then
Inserting new board Board is integrated into the system according to the rules for initial
in free slot
startup (Section 4.2.5.5).
●
System with default numbering plan
The station numbers from the new board are appended (consecutively and in ascending order) to the numbers already assigned.
●
System with modified numbering plan
The station numbers on the new board can be in any order.
Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T, you can assign a specific station to a port. If the number is already assigned to a different
object, you can switch both numbers.
Replacing board with Board is activated. The same station range is used.
same or under
equipped board type
9-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Table 9-1
Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards
If
Then
Replacing board with Board is activated. The old station range is activated and the ports asover-equipped board sociated with the new board are inserted at the end. The ports are split
of same type
if there is no contiguous station range available.
In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or
you can delete it and reset the default state. Copying is not possible
for trunk boards.
Replacing with a dif- The system does not automatically activate the board.
ferent board type
After removing the old board, you can delete it from the database using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T.
After you have inserted the new board, the system activates it as if it
had been inserted into a free slot. However, the CDB area used by the
old board is left as a gap.
In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or
you can delete it and reset the default state. Copying is not possible
for trunk boards.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-3
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.2
7
Replacing Peripheral Boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
Caution
Always wear an antistatic wristband when working on the system (especially when
handling boards).
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 let you remove and insert peripheral boards during operation (hot
plugging). The following startup rules apply.
Rules for removing and inserting boards
7
Caution
To ensure that the system operates without blocking, you must follow the rules in
Section 4.3.6 concerning board configuration.
Table 9-2
Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards
If
Then
Inserting new board Board is integrated into the system according to the rules for initial
in free slot
startup (Page 4-154).
●
System with default numbering plan
The station numbers from the new board are appended (consecutively and in ascending order) to the numbers already assigned.
●
System with modified numbering plan
The station numbers on the new board can be in any order.
Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T, you can assign a specific station to a port. If the number is already assigned to a different
object, you can switch both numbers.
Replacing board with Board is activated. The same station range is used.
same or under
equipped board type
Replacing board with Board is activated. The old station range is activated and the ports asover-equipped board sociated with the new board are inserted at the end. The ports are split
of same type
if there is no contiguous station range available.
In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or
you can delete it and reset the default state. Copying is not possible
for trunk boards.
9-4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Table 9-2
Startup Rules for Inserting and Removing Boards
If
Then
Replacing with a dif- The system does not automatically activate the board.
ferent board type
After removing the old board, you can delete it from the database using HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T.
After you have inserted the new board, the system activates it as if it
had been inserted into a free slot. However, the CDB area used by the
old board is left as a gap.
In the case of subscriber line modules, you can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to retain the old station data by copying it to the new board, or
you can delete it and reset the default state. Copying is not possible
for trunk boards.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-5
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.3
7
Connecting a printer
Caution
Follow the safety and operating instructions provided by the printer manufacturer.
Introduction
You can use a printer as a CDR printer (serial data transmission) or as a call charge computer
output device (parallel data transmission).
Connecting a CDR printer
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3700
Backplane
X7 (“8-slot” cabinets)
Connection cables:
S30267-Z23-A100 = 10m
S30267-Z23-A500 = 50m
HiPath 3750/
HiPath 3700
25-pin
connector
CDR printer
GND 1
1 GND 1)
TXD 2
2 TXD
RXD 3
3 RXD
RTS 4
4 RTS
CTS 5
5 CTS
DSR 6
6 DSR
DCD 8
8 DCD
DTR 20
20 DTR
GND 7
7 GND 2)
printer
25-pin
connector
1) Frame ground
2) Signal ground
Figure 9-1
Sample Connection of a CDR Printer to HiPath 3000
Information on assigning V.24 interfaces from other systems is provided in the board descriptions in Chapter 3.
9-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Output formats
For information about the output formats (compressed or uncompressed) for call detail recording central, see HiPath 3000/5000 Feature Description.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-7
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.4
7
ECR with HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 (not for U.S. and
Canada)
Danger
An expansion cabinet rack (ECR) equipped with an external power supply unit
(EPSU2-R) may only be operated if the housing is closed.
Before opening the housing, disconnect the ECR from the power supply by
●
setting the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel
to "Off".
●
removing the battery fuse on the ECR front panel and
●
unplugging all power and connection cables.
Introduction
When installing the system, an ECR in the 19’’ cabinet is required if
●
emergency battery operation is necessary during a power failure or if the system requires
uninterruptible power.
The necessary batteries are installed in the ECR.
●
the internal system power supply unit for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 is not sufficient
enough to provide power to the overall telephone configuration (corded or cordless telephones).
In this case, the EPSU2-R external power supply unit should be installed in the ECR.
9-8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.4.1
ECR Control, Display, and Connecting Elements
Front panel (Figure 9-2)
●
Top switch for disconnecting battery power
●
Bottom switch for disconnecting line power
●
6.3 A/T battery fuse (warning: do not confuse with EPSU2-R fuse)
Necessary height units for 19-inch cabinet assembly: 4
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7’’=43 mm)
Figure 9-2
ECR Front Panel (155 x 440 x 380 mm)
Rear panel (Figure 9-3)
●
Line voltage connections [1]
–
Top: Line output to UPSC-DR connection jack for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300
–
Below: Line input
●
Batteries/EPSU2-R [2] output voltage to UPSC-DR for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300
or
Batteries output voltage [2] to UPSM for HiPath 3700
●
Clip [3]
Attach the braided screen of the connection cable (to the jack [2]) here.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-9
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
If an EPSU2-R external power supply unit is installed in the ECR, the following additional display and control elements are also included:
●
EPSU2-R 2.5 A/T [4] battery fuse (warning: do not confuse with battery fuse on the ECR
front panel)
●
LED [5] for the -48-V output voltage (DC output) in the EPSU2-R (see Table 9-3)
●
LED [6] for the line input voltage (AC input) in the EPSU2-R (see Table 9-3)
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[1]
Figure 9-3
9-10
[3]
ECR Rear Panel With Connecting Elements
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Table 9-3
EPSU2-R - Explanation of Display and Connecting Elements
LED [6]
LED [7]
(DC output)
(AC input)
Description
On
On
DC output and AC input voltages are OK.
Off
On
No DC voltage at output
(for example DC load short-circuited).
On
Off
No AC voltage at input
(power failure or system powered by batteries, including additional power).
Off
Off
No AC input voltage (power outage) and batteries are empty, or
the EPSU2-R fuse is defective or was removed (by turning to the
left).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-11
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.4.2
Components
●
Expansion cabinet rack (ECR): S30777-U711-E901
The scope of delivery includes:
– A mounting set for installing the ECR in a 19-inch cabinet: C39165-A7027-D1
– A mounting clamp: D72571-A80-S3
– A toothed lock washer: D6797-A43-S657
●
Mounting set for ECR wall installation or ECR table setup: C39165-A7027-D2
●
EPSU2-R: S30122-K7221-X900
A cable for making the ECR – HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 electrical connection is included
in the delivery: C39195-Z7001-C14
●
4 batteries, 12 V/7 Ah: 4 x V39113-W5123-E891
●
Connection cable, ECR (batteries) – HiPath 3700 (UPSM + power failure signaling (lampwire connector): a relay connected in series can be used for signaling purposes, for example.): C39195-A7002-B11
●
Connection cable, ECR – HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300: S30267-Z361-A10
7
9.2.4.3
>
Caution
Both of the above-mentioned connection cables are system-specific.
●
C39195-A7002-B11 is exclusively designed for HiPath 3700.
●
S30267-Z361-A10 is exclusively designed for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300.
Failure to observe the above may damage the power supply unit.
Installation Options
Use the power cable to ground the ECR. Fixed, separate grounding is not required.
The expansion cabinet rack ECR can be
●
installed in a 19-inch cabinet (see Section 4.4.4.5).
●
mounted on a wall (see Section 4.4.4.4).
●
set up on a table using four adhesive mounting feet.
9-12
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.4.4
7
Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries
Danger
Before opening the housing, disconnect the ECR from the power supply by
●
setting the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel
to "Off".
●
removing the battery fuse on the ECR front panel and
●
unplugging all power and connection cables.
When using the UPSM or the UPSC-DR as the uninterruptible power supply unit, you need to
install additional batteries in the ECR.
The ECR and batteries are packaged separately and included in the delivery. The batteries
should be installed as described in Section 9.2.4.4.1. Only use batteries approved for HiPath
3000.
Figure 9-5 shows the position of the four batteries inside the ECR.
The circuit diagram below illustrates the cable run between the batteries in the ECR and the
power supply unit of the system (UPSM for HiPath 3700, UPSC-DR for HiPath 3500 and HiPath
3300). The connection cable between the expansion cabinet rack ECR and the system cabinet
is also provided.
S1
X1
1
2
3
L1
N
PE
L1
N
PE
PE
Housing
4 batteries
12 V/7 Ah
F1 T6.3 A
X2
1
2
3
X3
3
4
1
2
+48 V
–48 V UP2
–48 V BatB
S2
+48 V
Figure 9-4
HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 - ECR With Batteries
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-13
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
7
Caution
When storing an ECR equipped with batteries or if the ECR is inactive for a long period of time, remove the battery fuse (6.3 A/T) in the front panel of the ECR.
When shipping an ECR with built-in batteries, the batteries must be removed beforehand.
1
Figure 9-5
9-14
2
3
4
ECR With Built-In Batteries
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.4.4.1
7
Installing Batteries
Danger
Only V39113-W5123-E891 (12 V/7 Ah) batteries are released for connection to the
UPSC-DR/UPSM and installation in the ECR.
The use of other battery types is prohibited.
ECR is supplied with four batteries in a separate package. Proceed as follows to install the batteries in the ECR:
Step
Activity
1.
Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to
"Off" (see Section 9.2.4.1).
2.
Remove the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 9.2.4.1).
3.
Unplug all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.
4.
Remove the ECR housing cover: To do this, remove the three screws at the rear
and slide the housing cover back.
5.
Remove the mounting screw [A] on the battery retainer [B].
[A]
6.
[B]
Remove the battery retainer and set aside.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-15
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Step
7.
Activity
Insert the batteries carefully in the recesses provided [C].
[C]
8.
9-16
Replace the battery retainer and secure the mounting screw.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Step
Activity
9.
Connect the batteries: To do this, slide the eight cable connector lugs [D] carefully
onto the two connection contacts on each of the four batteries.
[D]
10.
Replace the ECR’s housing cover and secure the three mounting screws at the
rear.
11.
Connect all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.
12.
Insert the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 9.2.4.1).
13.
Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to
"On" (see Section 9.2.4.1).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-17
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.4.5
7
Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR With Batteries and EPSU2-R
Danger
An expansion cabinet rack (ECR) equipped with an external power supply unit
(EPSU2-R) may only be operated if the housing is closed.
Before opening the housing, disconnect the ECR from the power supply by
●
setting the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel
to "Off".
●
removing the battery fuse on the ECR front panel and
●
unplugging all power and connection cables.
If the internal system power supply unit for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 does not provide
enough power for the overall telephone configuration (corded and cordless telephones), an additional power supply is necessary. In this case, the EPSU2-R external power supply unit
should be installed in the ECR.
Figure 9-7 shows the position of the EPSU2-R inside the ECR.
The block diagram below illustrates the cable run between the EPSU2-R and the batteries inside the ECR and the power supply unit of the system (UPSC-DR). The connection cable between the expansion cabinet rack ECR and the system cabinet is also provided.
9-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
S1
X1
1
2
3
L1
N
PE
L1
N
PE
X2
1
2
3
PE
Housing
Input
EPSU2-R
–48 V BatE
X3
3
4
+48 V
1
–48 V UP 2
–48 V CD
Batt
+48 V
Out
+48 V
F1
T6.3 A
4 batteries
12 V/7 Ah
–48 V BatB
S2
Fan
+48 V
Figure 9-6
7
(not available with all
systems)
HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300 - ECR With Batteries and EPSU2-R
Caution
When storing an ECR equipped with batteries or if the ECR is inactive for a long period of time, remove the battery fuse (6.3 A/T) in the front panel of the ECR.
When shipping an ECR with built-in batteries, the batteries must be removed beforehand.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-19
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
EPSU2-R
Figure 9-7
9-20
ECR with Built-In EPSU2-R
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.4.5.1
Connecting a Fan (if needed)
The ECR delivery usually includes a fan that is built in but not connected.
To connect the fan, proceed as follows:
Step
Activity
1.
Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to
"Off" (see Section 9.2.4.1).
2.
Remove the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 9.2.4.1).
3.
Unplug all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.
4.
Remove the ECR housing cover: To do this, remove the three screws at the rear
and slide the housing cover back.
5.
Cut off the plug on the fan connection line if there is one.
Strip both wire ends and attach wire end sleeves.
6.
Connect both connection wires to the EPSU2-R terminal [A] as shown in
Figure 9-8. Connect the red wire (fan) to the white wire (EPSU2-R) and the black
wire (fan) to the black wire (EPSU2-R).
Figure 9-6 shows the cable run between EPSU2-R and the fan.
7.
Replace the ECR’s housing cover and secure the three mounting screws at the
rear.
8.
Connect all of the ECR’s power and connection cables.
9.
Insert the battery fuse (ECR front panel) (see Section 9.2.4.1).
10.
Set the switches for battery voltage and line voltage on the ECR’s front panel to
"On" (see Section 9.2.4.1).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-21
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
[A]
Figure 9-8
9-22
Connecting the Fan to the EPSU2-R
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
If you install the fan at a later time, you must make sure that the identification ([B] in Figure 99) is in the upper right corner when viewed from outside.
[B]
Figure 9-9
Placement of the Fan in the ECR
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-23
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.5
Connecting Special Equipment
9.2.5.1
Entrance Telephones
Connection options
Connection via ET (entrance telephone) adapter and amplifier
HiPath 3000
ET adapter
Amplifier
Door
Connection over ET/V adapter
HiPath 3000
Figure 9-10
>
ET/V–
adapter
Door
Connection Options for Entrance Telephones
The new central control boards CBCC (S30810-Q2935-A301) and CBRC (S30810Q2935-Z301) only support TFE-S-Adapter S30122-K7696-T313.
You can also make a direct connection if needed. In this case, only voice connections to the
entrance telephone are possible, without the support of the opener and signal functions.
if necessary, loop in a capacitor
1 µF/250 V for each
a
to the T/R analog port
Amplifier
b
Figure 9-11
9-24
Direct Connection of Entrance Telephones
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.5.1.1
Information on Third-Party Entrance Telephones
DoorCom Analog
General information
The plus product DoorCom® Analog is a universal entrance telephone adapter box for Siedle
entrance telephones (such as the Vario TLM 612). It is released for use with all HiPath 3000
systems, V1.2 and later.
It is connected to an analog port in the system. DoorCom Analog behaves like an analog telephone (DTMF tone dialing, detection, and control). It can be operated with DTMF signals.
DoorCom Analog can function only in combination with the following components:
●
DoorCom Analog DCA 612-0
●
Siedle-Vario TLM 612 entrance telephone
●
Switching remote control interface DCSF 600
For the voice connection of an internal user to the entrance telephone: Without this module,
it is not possible to call back to the entrance telephone, for example, if a call was unintentionally cleared down by the entrance telephone.)
●
Power supply NG 602-0
Connection
Power supply
NG 602-0
HiPath 3000
Siedle-Vario
TLM 612
T/R
DoorCom Analog
DCA 612-0
Figure 9-12
Connecting DoorCom Analog to HiPath 3000
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-25
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Configuration Notes for HiPath 3000 Manager E
DoorCom Analog
Set up station: Stations: Parameters:
Extension Type = Standard
Flags = Call waiting rejection on
System parameters:
Flags = DTMF automatic
Remote station (telephone)
Set up station: Stations: Parameters:
Flags = Call waiting rejection off
Flags = Missed Calls List
Device control features (open doors, select entrance telephone, etc.) can be programmed on
procedure keys. The stored DTMF signal sequence is sent to the application.
9-26
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
9.2.5.2
Connecting Speakers
You have the following options:
●
Connection to an analog station port (the amplifier may require level adaptation)
●
Connection to an analog station port over an ET adapter
●
Connection to an analog trunk circuit
Connecting speakers to an analog station port
HiPath 3000
SLA/SLAS
T/R
Amplifier
Starting contact
REAL/STRBR/
STRBR
HiPath 3000
SLA/SLAS
T/R
Active speakers only
ET
HiPath 3000
SLA/SLAS
T/R
ET
T/R
Amplifier
Starting contact
Figure 9-13
Connecting Speakers to an Analog Station Port
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-27
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Expanding HiPath 3000
Connecting speakers to an analog trunk port
HiPath 3000
TML/TLA
T/R
HiPath 3000
TML/TLA
T/R
REAL/STRB
Figure 9-14
9-28
Active speakers
only
Amplifier
Starting contact
Connecting Speakers to an Analog Trunk Port
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
9.3
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
The following information describes the measures that are needed to upgrade the hardware
and software.
>
It is not possible to upgrade HiPath 3550 to HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3350 to HiPath
3300. This would require replacing the complete system.
9.3.1
Hardware Upgrade
The following hardware requirements apply to HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and higher.
Contol Boards
If the control board necessary for operating HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and higher is not available,
a replacement must be performed.
System
Control board necessary for HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and higher
HiPath 3800
CBSAP, S30810-Q2314-X and higher
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
CBCPR, S30810-Q2936-X-J2 and higher
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3350
CBCC, S30810-Q2935-A301 and higher
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3300
CBRC, S30810-Q2935-Z301 and higher
>
Note for upgrading from hardware < version 1.2:
If the following subboards are present, they must be replaced: IMODN (replaces the
IMOD), MMC (replaces the FMC), CMA/CMS (replaces the CGM/CGMC).
For Deutsche Telekom AG only: The CBCP board S30810-Q2935-B201 must be replaced by
a CBCC board S30810-Q2935-A301.
Multimedia card MMC
An MMC with 64 MB is required to run HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and higher.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-29
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
HG 1500 boards
The HG 1500 boards listed in the following table are necessary for using the HG 1500 functionality with HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and higher. Unnamed HG 1500 boards must be replaced.
System
HG 1500 board required for HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 and higher
HiPath 3800
STMI2, S30810-Q2316-X100 and higher
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HXGM3, S30810-Q2942-X and higher
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3350
HXGS3, S30810-Q2943-X and higher
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3300
HXGR3, S30810-K2943-Z and higher
9-30
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
9.3.2
Software Upgrade
If the software is a version earlier than V3.0, it must first be upgraded to V3.0. Only then is it
possible to upgrade the software to V5.0.
CDB conversion is also necessary.
Procedure: Customer database (CDB) conversion
>
Please note the following:
S0 stations can be configured as both HFA clients and vCAPI clients in V4.0. In addition, V4.0 does not have a selected gatekeeper board. This configuration will have
to be re-defined when upgrading to V5.0 (see Figure 9-15).
The flowchart on Page 9-32 describes the procedure for converting the CDB from
V4.0 to V5.0. First, you must edit the V4.0 CDB. Then you must convert the CDB and
finally, edit the V5.0 CDB.
No other changes are necessary apart from modifications for IP workpoint clients
and IP lines. Only the gatekeeper and gateway data has to be edited. Telephone
numbers and other properties of the IP workpoint clients are retained. The protocol
has to be modified for the IP lines.
V4.0 configuration
HG 1500 board
slot 4
HG 1500 board
slot 6
V5.0 configuration
System clients
System clients
S0 station:
HFA clients
H.323 clients
S0 station:
vCAPI clients
Lines
System clients
S0 station
S0 station:
HFA clients
HG 1500 board
slot 4
HG 1500 gatekeeper
HG 1500 board
slot 6
HG 1500 gateway
Lines
Figure 9-15
Differences Between V4.0 and V5.0 Configurations
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-31
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
CDB Conversion (V4.0 –> V5.0)
Define which HG 1500 board becomes the HG 1500 gatekeeper
and which becomes the HG 1500
gateway.
Make a note of the S0 station
numbers.
More than one HG 1500 board installed?
No
Yes
Define gatekeeper HG 1500.
Open V4.0 CDB using HiPath
3000 Manager E.
Figure 9-16
9-32
Open V4.0 CDB using HiPath
3000 Manager E.
Flowchart for CDB Conversion from V4.0 –> V5.0 (Part 1 of 4)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
Open “HXG Configuration” dialog.
For all HG 1500 boards installed:
Open “HXG Configuration” dialog.
Delete all S0 stations.
Delete all lines.
Convert CDB from V4.0 –> V5.0
using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Delete all system clients.
Delete all HFA clients in the S0
station.
Delete all vCAPI clients in the S0
station.
Check whether the number of all
configured stations and lines is 0.
Figure 9-17
Set “Release gateway resources”
flag.
Configure S0 stations.
V5.0 conversion complete.
Save CDB.
Flowchart for CDB Conversion from V4.0 –> V5.0 (Part 2 of 4)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-33
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
Save the CDB under new name.
Convert CDB from V4.0 –> V5.0
using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Define the slot for the HG 1500
gatekeeper.
Enter the number of lines required.
Configure all V4.0 HFA clients as
H.323 clients.
Figure 9-18
9-34
Flowchart for CDB Conversion from V4.0 –> V5.0 (Part 3 of 4)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
Configure all V4.0 system clients
as system clients (V4.0 call number and name are retained).
Define the slot(s) for the HG 1500
gateway.
Configure S0 stations.
V5.0 conversion complete.
Save CDB.
Figure 9-19
Flowchart for CDB Conversion from V4.0 –> V5.0 (Part 4 of 4)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
9-35
exup.fm
Expanding and Upgrading HiPath 3000
Upgrading HiPath 3000 to V5.0
9-36
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Overview
10
Workpoint Clients
10.1
Overview
Chapter contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the following table.
Topic
optiPoint 500, page 10-3
●
optiPoint 500 Telephones, page 10-5
– optiPoint 500 entry
– optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.)
– optiPoint 500 basic
– optiPoint 500 standard, optiPoint 500 standard SL (For U.S. Only)
– optiPoint 500 advance
– Connection Requirements for HiPath 3000
– Connection
– Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone
– USB 1.1 Interface
●
optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices, page 10-16
– optiPoint Key Module
– optiPoint BLF
– Programming Add-On Devices
– Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices
●
optiPoint 500 Adapters, page 10-20
– optiPoint Analog Adapter
– optiPoint ISDN Adapter
– optiPoint Phone Adapter
– optiPoint Acoustic Adapter
– optiPoint Recorder Adapter
– Possible optiPoint Adapter Configurations
– Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters
●
Maximum Configuration for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices and Adapters,
page 10-31
optiPoint 600 office, page 10-33
optiLog 4me, page 10-36
optiset E Privacy Module, page 10-37
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-1
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Overview
Topic
IP Telephony (Voice over IP), page 10-38
●
optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420, page 10-40
– optiPoint 410 Telephones
– optiPoint 420 Telephones
– optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 Add-On Devices
– Use of optiPoint 500 Adapters
●
optiClient 130 V5.0, page 10-64
●
HiPath AP 1120, page 10-65
●
HG 1500: Determining the Number of HG 1500 Boards Required, page 10-66
– Static Configuration Rules
– Dynamic Configuration Rules
– Determining the Number of HG 1500 Boards Required
– Sample Calculation
– Notes on the Maintenance of Gateway Channels HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 or later
optiPoint Accessories, page 10-87
●
External AC Adapters, page 10-87
●
Headsets, page 10-90
Attendant console versions, page 10-92
●
optiPoint Attendant, page 10-92
●
optiClient Attendant, page 10-93
Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office, page 10-98
●
Gigaset S1 professional, page 10-98
●
Gigaset SL1 professional, page 10-99
●
Gigaset M1 professional, page 10-100
●
Gigaset active M, page 10-101
●
Gigaset active EX, page 10-102
●
Logging Mobile Telephones On To the System, page 10-104
Analog Telephones for HiPath 3000, page 10-107
ISDN Terminals for HiPath 3000, page 10-108
10-2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2
>
optiPoint 500
The optiPoint 500 telephones described in this section are compatible with the optiset E telephones. It is possible to operate both telephone families on one UP0/E
board. You can also use telephones from the two families in mixed host-client configurations (earlier called the master-slave or primary-secondary configuration).
You can find information on optiset E telephones, adapters, and add-on devices in
the Hicom 150 H V1.0/Hicom 150 E Office Rel.2.0-3.0 Service Manual (refer to
Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”): Electronic Documentation on Com ESY
Products).
Introduction
optiPoint 500 telephones handle the digital communication of voice and data (voice communication only for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy). The three dialog keys and the
display guarantee convenient and interactive operation. Furthermore, the key lamp principle visualizes the activated functions.
With the exception of optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy, the optiPoint 500 telephones have a USB 1.1 interface. This allows for PC-supported telephoning and Internet access over the USB interface of a PC.
The optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF add-on devices increase the number of function
keys available.
The different optiPoint 500 adapters allow flexible expansion of the telephone workstation. Additional devices (such as personal computers, fax equipment, telephones, headsets) can be
connected quickly because it is easy to build them on to the bottom of the telephones (not
optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) and because the adapters are plug "n" play".
You can find information not contained in this chapter in the optiPoint 500 Service Manual.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-3
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
Key programming
>
Double key assignment
The programmable function keys of the optiPoint 500 telephones and the optiPoint
key modules can have double assignments if only call numbers without LED support
are saved on the first level. It is also possible to program call numbers without LED
support on the second level. These can be internal station numbers, DID call numbers and call numbers from a HiPath network.
When the Shift function is pressed, the LED associated with the Shift key lights up.
This signals that the phone numbers on the second key level are available. The Shift
function is deactivated after 5 s or after you press a phone number or if you press
the Shift key again.
The optiPoint BLF function keys cannot have double assignments.
You can label the keys in one of the following ways:
●
by hand (in writing); label sheets come with each telephone.
●
using a PC:
–
with the "Key Labeling Tool" (requires MS Word©) that is on the CD "Electronic Operating Instructions" (refer to Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).
–
with the “Online Key Labeling Tool” that can be downloaded from http://www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads).
10-4
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1
optiPoint 500 Telephones
10.2.1.1
optiPoint 500 entry
Main features
●
8 function keys (can be modified with HiPath 3000 Manager E) with LEDs (see Page 10-4)
●
Open listening
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus) and pitch
●
Suitable for wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices), no display
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 500 entry
Consultation hold
Number redial
Message
Callback
Speed dialing
Microphone on/off
Loudspeaker
Disconnect
Figure 10-1
optiPoint 500 entry - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.2.1.6 for connection requirements.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-5
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1.2
optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.)
Main features
●
12 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 freely programmable)
with LEDs (see Page 10-4)
●
Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Open listening
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch and display contrast
●
Suitable for wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 500 economy
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-2
optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.) - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.2.1.6 for connection requirements.
10-6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1.3
optiPoint 500 basic
Main features
●
12 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 freely programmable)
with LEDs (see Page 10-4)
●
Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Open listening
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch and display contrast
●
Interfaces and slots:
●
–
1 USB 1.1 interface
–
1 option bay
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
Suitable for wall mounting
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 500 basic
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-3
optiPoint 500 basic - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.2.1.6 for connection requirements.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-7
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1.4
optiPoint 500 standard, optiPoint 500 standard SL (For U.S. Only)
Note: optiPoint 500 standard and optiPoint 500 standard SL (for U.S. only) function exactly the
same on HiPath 3000 systems.
Main features
●
12 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 freely programmable)
with LEDs (see Page 10-4)
●
Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch, speaker quality and display contrast
●
Interfaces and slots:
●
–
1 integrated USB 1.1 interface
–
1 option bay
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
Suitable for wall mounting
10-8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 500 standard
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-4
optiPoint 500 standard - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.2.1.6 for connection requirements.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-9
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1.5
optiPoint 500 advance
Main features
●
19 function keys (4 can be changed using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 15 freely programmable) with LEDs (see Page 10-4)
●
Alphanumeric LCD display (swivel) with 2 lines, 24 characters each. Background lighting
that stays lit for approximately 5 s.
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch, speaker quality and display contrast
●
Interfaces and slots:
●
–
1 integrated USB 1.1 interface
–
2 option bays
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
–
1 headset port (121 TR9-5)
Suitable for wall mounting
10-10
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 500 advance
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-5
optiPoint 500 advance - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.2.1.6 for connection requirements.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-11
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1.6
Connection Requirements for HiPath 3000
Hardware requirements
System
HiPath 3800
Hardware requirements free UP0/E port
on
SLMO2/8
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
free UP0/E port
on
SLMO8/24
free UP0/E port
on
CBCC
CBRC
SLU8
SLU8R
SLMO24
free UP0/E port
on
CBCC
CBRC
SLU8
SLU8R
Refer to Section 9.2.2 for information on upgrading peripheral boards for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
Connecting as a client telephone
>
10-12
The device can also be connected to an existing optiPoint 500 telephone (except for
optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) as a client telephone (using an optiPoint Phone Adapter).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1.7
Connection
Procedure: Connecting an optiPoint 500 Telephone
Step
Activity
1.
Locate a free interface on the main distribution frame or internal distributor for connecting the telephone.
2.
Connect the cable from the main distribution frame or internal distributor to the
wall outlet.
>
3.
4.
The maximum range for a standalone or host telephone without additional local power supply is approximately 1000 m (3280 feet) (for J-Y (ST) 2x2x0.6, ∅ 0.6 mm).
Perform the terminal test in Section 12.3.1.8 to determine whether a local power
supply is needed for additional power (for example, in host-client configurations or
for larger ranges).
Label the keys. You have the following options:
●
by hand (in writing); label sheets come with each telephone.
●
using a PC:
– with the “Key Labeling Tool” (requires MS Word©) which is contained on
the “Electronic Operating Instructions” CD.
– with the “Online Key Labeling Tool” which can be downloaded from http:/
/www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads).
Prepare the telephone for connection:
Connect the handset cord to the telephone (marked with symbol) and to the
handset.
●
Do you plan to connect an add-on device? Refer to Section 10.2.2 on
page 10-16 for more information.
●
Do you plan to connect an optiPoint adapter? Refer to Section 10.2.3 on
page 10-20 for more information.
●
5.
Connect the line cord (marked on the telephone by a symbol).
optiPoint 500 telephones are shipped with a 6 m (20 ft.) line cord and an MW6
(RJ11) plug for connection to a modular telephone jack.
The first time the telephone is switched on,
●
all LEDs light up briefly
●
all LEDs on the add-on devices (AODs), if connected, light up briefly (AOD LEDs do not
necessarily flash at the same time as the LEDs on the telephone)
●
all pixels on the display activate briefly.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-13
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
These indications show that the telephone is starting up and performing a self-test. Downloading has finished and the telephone is ready for operation when you see the date and time on
the display.
10.2.1.8
Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone
USB interface
MW8 (RJ45) connection
jack for optiPoint key module, optiPoint BLF
MW8 (RJ45) connection
jack for HiPath 3000
MW4 (RJ8) connection
jacks:
Upper = headset equipment
Lower = handset
Option bays
(see Figure 10-10)
Figure 10-6
10-14
optiPoint 500 Connection Options
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.1.9
USB 1.1 Interface
With the exception of optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy, the optiPoint 500 telephones have a USB 1.1 interface. This forms the basis for:
●
PC-supported telephoning (TAPI)
●
Data transmission over CAPI (for example, direct Internet access, fax capability, e-mail,
etc.). If the CAPI software is installed, PCs have direct Internet access over the USB interface without any additional adapter. There is a charge for this software.
TAPI and CAPI can be used simultaneously (for example, to receive a large e-mail or download
data while calls are being set up over a CTI application).
>
optiClient Attendant - the professional PC attendant console is connected over the
USB 1.1 interface of the optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500 standard or
optiPoint 500 advance.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-15
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.2
optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices
The optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF add-on devices increase the number of function
keys available.
The user usually installs the add-on devices. The installation instructions are on the “Electronic
Operating Instructions” CD.
7
Caution
Always disconnect the line cord before connecting add-on devices to the telephone.
Refer to the HiPath 3000/5000 Feature Description for model-specific data for the optiPoint key
module and the optiPoint BLF.
10.2.2.1
optiPoint Key Module
The optiPoint key module is an add-on device that should be mounted on the side of the telephone; it provides an additional 16 keys, LEDs and labelling areas for all purposes. Figure 109 shows the possible configurations.
Double assignment can be performed for the keys if only call numbers without LED support are
saved on the first level. It is also possible to program call numbers without LED support on the
second level. These can be internal station numbers, DID call numbers and call numbers from
a HiPath network (see also Page 10-4).
Figure 10-7
10-16
optiPoint Key Module
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.2.2
optiPoint BLF
This is an add-on device that provides 90 additional keys, LEDs and labeling areas for all purposes.
The device is connected to the telephone or to an optiPoint key module over an interface cable
with the following connectors: input MW6, output MW8. Figure 10-9 shows the possible configurations.
Power is supplied using a power supply unit (see Section 10.7.1.1) that can supply power to up
to two optiPoint BLFs. The power supply unit must be plugged directly into the designated optiPoint BLF port.
Figure 10-8
optiPoint BLF
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-17
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.2.3
Programming Add-On Devices
An inserted add-on device automatically registers with the system and is then ready for operation. Keys can be programmed via HiPath 3000 Manager E or the respective telephone set. If
you replace the device, the information programmed under the keys is maintained (stored in the
customer database).
If a configuration other than the one shown in Figure 10-9 is used, the LEDs and keys may not
function correctly. You must update the database with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Example: You replace configuration E by configuration B. You must use HiPath 3000 Manager
E to remove the optiPoint key module 2 from the database so that the LEDs and keys function
correctly.
You can also use optiPoint BLF to delete Assistant Ts and optiPoint key modules.
The first optiPoint BLF that is initially connected to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, or
HiPath 3500 automatically receives standard key assignments (default) for the first 90 system
ports. No standard assignment is made if you already configured an optiPoint BLF with HiPath
3000 Manager E or if other optiPoint BLFs are connected.
Replacing an optiPoint key module with an optiPoint BLF
Procedure:
Step
Activity
1.
Unplug the connection cable between the optiPoint key module and the telephone
(or other optiPoint key module). Remove optiPoint key module.
2.
Remove optiPoint key module from the database using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
3.
Plug in the optiPoint BLF. HiPath 3000 Manager E automatically detects the BLF
and enters it in the database.
10-18
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.2.4
Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices
A
optiPoint
BLF
B
optiPoint
key module
C
optiPoint
BLF
optiPoint
BLF
D
optiPoint
key module
optiPoint
BLF
E
optiPoint
key module
optiPoint
key module
HiPath 3750 and
HiPath 3700 only
optiPoint 500 basic,
optiPoint 500 standard or
optiPoint 500 advance
Figure 10-9
optiPoint 500 Possible Configurations for Key Modules
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-19
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3
optiPoint 500 Adapters
The different optiPoint 500 adapters (not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) allow
flexible expansion of the telephone workstation by providing additional device connections
(such as personal computers, fax equipment, telephones, headsets).
The adapters, which are connected on the bottom of the telephone, are plug "n" play". When a
new telephone adapter configuration is plugged in, it generates a reset; a setup message notifies the system of the new configuration.
The user usually installs the adapter. The installation instructions are on the “Electronic Operating Instructions” CD.
7
Caution
Always disconnect the line cord before connecting adapters to the telephone or removing them from the telephone.
Option bays
Option bays:
●
2 x for optiPoint 500
advance (shown
here)
●
1 x for optiPoint 500
basic and optiPoint
500 standard
Figure 10-10
10-20
optiPoint 500 Option Bays
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3.1
optiPoint Analog Adapter
The optiPoint analog adapter allows an analog device (such as, telephone (DTMF only),
group 3 fax, modem, cordless telephone) to be connected to an optiPoint 500 telephone.
The connected analog device can send and receive calls on the interface to the system regardless of the connection status of the optiPoint telephone, as long as a B channel is available.
The adapter must always have a local power supply for operating the connected analog device.
MW6 (RJ11) socket assignments:
Figure 10-11
Pin
Signal
1
Free
2
Free
3
T (Tip)
4
R (Ring)
5
Free
6
Free
6
1
optiPoint Analog Adapter
T/R interface properties
●
Supply current: 30 mA
●
Busy signal when both B channels are busy
●
Ring sequence: 2.2
●
Supports only DTMF with Flash
●
No ground signaling allowed
●
Does not support: VoiceMail server with T/R interface, message waiting lamp, dictating
equipment, speaker, announcement device (such as start/stop).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-21
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3.2
optiPoint ISDN Adapter
The optiPoint ISDN adapter provides the basic ISDN access for S0 devices (max. 2), such as
S0 PC card, group 4 fax equipment, or video communication devices (such as videoset or
videokit, etc. ).
S0 telephones must have their own power supply for connection.
MW8 (RJ45) socket assignments:
Figure 10-12
Pin
Signal
1
Free
2
Free
3
SR1
4
SX1
5
SX2
6
SR2
7
Free
8
Free
8
1
optiPoint ISDN Adapter
S0 interface properties
●
Supports point-to-point and passive bus connections
●
Wired for short passive bus configurations
●
Cable lengths
●
–
Maximum 100 m (328 feet) with a cable impedance of 75 ohms
–
Maximum 200 m (656 feet) with a cable impedance of 150 ohms (complies with
CCITT recommendation I.430)
The NT terminating resistors are integrated into the ISDN adapter.
10-22
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3.3
optiPoint Phone Adapter
The optiPoint phone adapter is used for connecting a second optiPoint 500 telephone (client
telephone) with its own power supply.
The system treats the client telephone as an independent telephone with a separate phone
number and its own B channel. The client telephone can send and receive calls regardless of
the connection status of the host telephone.
The maximum range between the host and client telephones is approximately 100 m (328 feet)
(for J-Y (ST) 2x2x0.6, ∅ 0.6 mm).
MW6 (RJ11) socket assignments:
Figure 10-13
Pin
Signal
1
Free
2
AUX – (a)
3
UP0/E –
4
UP0/E +
5
AUX + (b)
6
Free
6
1
optiPoint Phone Adapter
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-23
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
Example of a host-client configuration
UP0/E to the system,
2-wire, up to 1000 m (3280 feet)
2
UP0/E, 4-wire, up to 100 m (328 feet)
4
MW wall outlet
MW wall outlets
Local power supply (optional)
Local power supply
(optional)
Client
Host
optiPoint 500 telephone with optiPoint
phone adapter
Figure 10-14
10-24
optiPoint 500 telephone
Example of a Host-Client Configuration
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3.4
optiPoint Acoustic Adapter
The optiPoint acoustic adapter is used for connecting
●
a headset (121 TR 9-5) (see Section 10.7.2)
●
an active loudspeaker box and a desk microphone via the Y cable
●
busy display/door opener and secondary bell/light paging, etc. (each with its own power
supply) via floating contacts (not supported when using the adapter on optiPoint 410 and
optiPoint 420).
Assignment of the three connection jacks:
1
2
3
1 Connecting a headset with the following electrical
values (121 TR 9-5):
●
Microphone (electret interface):
– max. power: 400 µA,
– supply voltage: 5 V ± 10%
– series resistor: 5 kΩ ± 10%
●
Acoustic transformer:
– Impedance: 150 Ω ± 10%
– EBD: 13 dB ± 2.5 dB
2 Connecting a loudspeaker and microphone using Y
cable (see Figure 10-16)
3 Floating contacts (see Table 10-1), load capacity of
max. 5 W at 24 Vac or 60 Vdc
Figure 10-15
optiPoint Acoustic Adapter
Notes on the optiPoint acoustic adapter
●
The internal components of the optiPoint terminal are deactivated in speakerphone mode
if an external microphone and an external loudspeaker are used (sense lead).
●
optiPoint 500 basic does not support the connection of an external microphone to the optiPoint acoustic adapter.
●
The speakerphone mode selection is independent of whether the internal or an external
speakerphone is used. External speakerphones have precedence over internal speakerphones with the exception of manual intercom and signaling procedures.
●
The internal microphone, the transmitter inset and any microphone connected to the optiPoint acoustic adapter are muted in the “Mute” audio state.
●
Ring, alarm and key tones are transferred to the internal loudspeaker and not to an external
loudspeaker connected to the optiPoint acoustic adapter.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-25
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
The volume keys on the optiPoint terminal are used to adjust the volume level of the internal loudspeaker and any connected external loudspeaker. The volume of the external loudspeaker can also be adjusted using the external amplifier.
●
Assignment of the MW4 connection sockets:
Y cable
loudspeaker
Pin
Signal
1
sense lead
2
NF+
3
Free
4
GND
Internal resistance: 0 Ω; 10 µF
Level (for PCM -20 dBm): -4.8 dBm (at volume level 8; 0.775
V = 0 dBm)
Sense lead to GND: int. loudspeaker deactivated; only active
for tone ringing.
acoustic adapter
4
microphone
1
Pin
Signal
1
+5V
2
GND
3
Free
4
sense lead
Input level -50 dBm: -12 dBm PCM signal
Input resistance: 150 kΩ parallel to 220 nF in series with 36
kΩ
Sense lead to GND: internal microphone deactivated.
Figure 10-16
Y Cable for optiPoint acoustic adapter
Table 10-1
Floating contacts on the optiPoint acoustic adapter
Pin
Assignment
Notes
1
Free
2
"Busy" con- Signals active telephone states:
●
handset lifted
tact
●
Loudspeaker activated or headset active
These states can be displayed, for example, on external signaling equipment (LED, relay, etc.) The signaling equipment must have its own power
supply.
The contact can be loaded with up to 5 W at 24 Vac or 60 Vdc.
3
10-26
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
Table 10-1
Pin
4
Floating contacts on the optiPoint acoustic adapter
Assignment
Notes
5
"Call" contact
Signals the call receipt state.
This can be used, for example, to control a secondary bell.
The contact can be loaded with up to 5 W at 24 Vac or 60 Vdc.
6
Free
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-27
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3.5
optiPoint Recorder Adapter
The optiPoint recorder adapter allows an external recorder or a second headset to be connected. The called party must be informed that the call is being recorded.
Assignment of both connection jacks:
1
1
2
2
MW4 port for second headset
Pin
Signal
1
Tx–
2
Rx
3
Rx
4
Tx+
4
1
MW6 port for recorder
Pin
Signal
1
Free
2
NF
3
NF
4
NF
5
NF
6
Free
6
1
Contacts 2+3 and 4+5 are bridged
internally.
Recorders to be connected must meet the following electrical requirements:
Input impedance: >10 kΩ
Frequency progression: 300 to 3000 Hz ± 3 dB
Beep tone level: -26 dBm to -18 dBm at a 600 Ω load
Max. input level: 650 mVeff from a 600 Ω source
Figure 10-17
10-28
optiPoint Recorder Adapter
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3.6
Possible optiPoint Adapter Configurations
Adapter categories
Each UP0/E port in the system provides two B channels. This means that you can connect two
telephones, each with a separate phone number, to one UP0/E port.
Category 1 optiPoint 500 adapters
The following adapters each require a B channel and, therefore, can only be used once on a
host terminal (host terminal requires the second B channel of the UP0/Eport).
●
optiPoint Analog Adapter
●
optiPoint ISDN Adapter
●
optiPoint Phone Adapter
If one of these adapters is used in the optiPoint 500 advance, only a category 2 adapter can be
operated in the second slot.
Category 2 optiPoint 500 adapters
The following adapters can be used on the host and client telephones. This is also true if a category 1 optiPoint 500 adapter is already connected.
●
optiPoint Acoustic Adapter
●
optiPoint Recorder Adapter
Configuration restrictions
>
The voltage feed test can be used to check whether a local power supply is also necessary for an adapter configuration. To avoid any doubts, the test should always be
implemented when installing large configurations.
Number of usable adapters and add-on devices
Section 10.2.4 shows the maximum number of adapters and add-on devices that can be connected to HiPath 3000/5000. The limits also include the client telephones connected over optiPoint phone adapters and the analog telephones connected over optiPoint analog adapters.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-29
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.3.7
Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters
Table 10-2
Comparison of optiset E and optiPoint 500 adapters
optiset E
optiPoint 500
analog adapter
analog adapter
phone adapter
phone adapter
data adapter
integrated USB interface
control adapter
ISDN adapter
ISDN adapter
acoustic adapter
acoustic adapter
contact adapter
headset adapter
headset plus adapter
10-30
recorder adapter
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
10.2.4
Table 10-3
Maximum Configuration for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On
Devices and Adapters
System-Specific Maximum Configuration for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On
Devices, and Adapters
Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices, Adapters
SYSTEM
HiPath
38001
HiPath
3750
HiPath
3700
HiPath HiPath HiPath HiPath
3550
3500
3350
3300
optiPoint 500 telephones
●
Number per system
384
250/3842
723
484
245
246
●
Number per box (the value in
brackets applies to operation using a PSUI)
192
144
(120)
–
–
–
–
89
89
optiPoint acoustic adapters
Number per system
No restriction
optiPoint analog adapters
Number per system
116
1167
248
248
optiPoint recorder adapters
Number per system
No restriction
optiPoint ISDN adapters
Number per system
116
1167
488
488
89
89
116
1167
488
488
249
249
100
100
100
100
30
30
12
12
6
6
–
–
optiPoint phone adapters
Number per system
optiPoint key modules
Number per system
optiPoint BLF:
Number per system
optiset E telephones
●
Number per system
384
250/3842
723
484
245
246
●
Number per box (the value in
brackets applies to operation using a PSUI)
192
144
(120)
–
–
–
–
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-31
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 500
Table 10-3
System-Specific Maximum Configuration for UP0/E Workpoint Clients, Add-On
Devices, and Adapters
Workpoint Clients, Add-On Devices, Adapters
SYSTEM
HiPath
38001
HiPath
3750
HiPath
3700
116
1167
HiPath HiPath HiPath HiPath
3550
3500
3350
3300
optiset E analog adapters
Number per system
248
248
89
89
16
16
optiset E control adapters
Number per system
No restriction
optiset E data adapters
Number per system
50
50
48
48
optiset E speech adapters
Number per system
No restriction
optiset E privacy modules
Number per system
No restriction
optiset E ISDN adapters
Number per system
116
1167
488
488
89
89
116
1167
488
488
249
249
100
100
100
100
30
30
12
12
6
6
–
–
optiset E phone adapters
Number per system
optiset E key modules
Number per system
optiset E BLFs
Number per system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Testing is not required on stations and lines up to the maximum configuration. Configurations that contain UCD/ACD or
more than one SLCN or groups with more than 10 stations should always be checked using the project planning tool (intranet: http://intranet.mch4.siemens.de/syseng/perfeng/tools/hpt/index.htm).
Depending on the system configuration and performance, the specified capacity limits may not always be achieved. To
ensure that the dynamic capacity limit of HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 is not exceeded, the configuration can be tested
using the project planning tool (intranet: http://intranet.mch4.siemens.de/syseng/perfeng/tools/hpt/index.htm). Testing is
not required for configurations of up to 250 stations and 90 lines. Configurations that contain UCD/ACD or more than one
SLC16/SLC16N or groups with more than ten stations should always be checked using the project planning tool.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8 + 1xSLMO24.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 5xSLU8R.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8.
8xUP0/E at the central board + 2xSLU8R.
The total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is limited to 384.
If the total number of UP0/E stations, analog stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than
72, an external EPSU2 power supply unit must be used.
If the total number of UP0/E stations and additional stations connected using an adapter is greater than 24, a UPSC-D/
UPSC-DR must be used.
10-32
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 600 office
10.3
optiPoint 600 office
optiPoint 600 office is the first convergence telephone with UP0/E and IP interfaces (CorNet IP).
In UP0/E mode, it represents a high-end product that completes the optiPoint 500 family and
supersedes optiset E memory.
In CorNet IP mode, it functions as a high-end IP phone in the optiPoint 400 family.
Main features
●
19 function keys (4 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 15 user-programmable)
with LEDs
●
Graphic LCD display (swivel) with 8 lines, each with 24 characters, touchscreen. Background lighting with approximately 5 s ghosting.
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch, speaker quality and display contrast
●
Interfaces and slots:
–
1 integrated USB 1.1 interface
–
1 option bay
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
–
1 headset port (121 TR9-5)
●
Suitable for wall mounting
●
In UP0/E mode (UP0/E interface): SW download via PPP
●
In CorNet IP mode (IP interface, 10/100BaseT): WAP access
Supported standards: H.323, Hicom Feature Access, G.711, G.723.1, QoS, SNMP, HTTP,
DHCP, FTP, LDAP (database access I/F)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-33
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 600 office
Default key assignment for optiPoint 600 office
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-18
optiPoint 600 office - Default Key Assignment
Comparison of optiPoint 600 office and optiset E memory
Table 10-4
Comparison of optiPoint 600 office and optiset E memory
optiPoint 600 office
optiset E memory
Convergence product
optiPoint IP adapter needed for use in IP environments
19 function keys, no integrated keypad:
external keypad possible over USB interface
12 function keys and integrated alphanumeric
keypad
Full-duplex speakerphone mode
Half-duplex speakerphone mode
Integrated USB 1.1 interface
optiset E data adapter needed for data communication with a PC
Headset port
optiset E headset adapter needed for headset
connection
Graphic LCD display with background lighting, LCD display without background lighting, no
touchscreen
touchscreen
Supports card reader/writer
10-34
Supports card reader
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint 600 office
Table 10-4
Comparison of optiPoint 600 office and optiset E memory
optiPoint 600 office
optiset E memory
Supports cordless adapter
–
Wide scope of functions with few adapters
1 option bay
Many adapters necessary for using functions
2 option bays
Connection and configuration
●
Connection of optiPoint 600 office over the UP0/E interface: Refer to Page 10-13 for more
information.
●
Connection of optiPoint 600 office over the IP interface: You can obtain further information
in the installation and startup instructions (http://www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads)).
Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure a workpoint client.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-35
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiLog 4me
10.4
optiLog 4me
optiLog 4me is a digital, single-channel speech recording device designed for operation with
the HiPath 3000/5000. It can record up to 2900 hours of telephone calls.
Figure 10-19
optiLog 4me
You can set the optiLog 4me to the following modes in both digital and analog telephones:
●
Start Recorder
Recording begins when you press the Start key.
●
Trader Recorder
Records and stores all calls.
●
Malicious Call Recorder
Stores calls in their entirety when you press any button during the call.
●
Third Party Monitoring (not currently available with HiPath 3000/5000)
optiLog 4me should be installed at the central station of the system. Recording starts when
you press the Monitor key on the telephone.
Furthermore, you can use the recorder to record conference calls using an external microphone.
The optiLog 4me can be connected between the optiPoint 500 telephone and the handset. The
privacy module is supplied complete with a local power supply.
For additional information on this, please refer to the installation and administration instructions
included with the adapter.
10-36
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiset E Privacy Module
10.5
optiset E Privacy Module
The optiset E privacy module protects telephone calls from unauthorized monitoring. Both partners need a device like this. The privacy module is connected between the telephone and handset; you simply need to plug in the handset cord. The privacy module is supplied complete with
a local power supply.
>
The optiset E privacy module may be subject to import and export regulations.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-37
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Introduction
Voice over IP (VoIP) allows voice data to be transferred over IP networks. To guarantee communication between the IP telephones, they must have compatible IP communication stacks.
H.323 is the universal standard that defines the framework for Voice over IP communication
and, consequently, for the IP communication stack. Additional standards are implemented as
well.
Gateways are required for communication between IP-supported networks (LAN, Intranet, Internet) and circuit-switched networks (ISDN, PSTN). A gateway is not required for “straightforward” Voice over IP communication.
The tasks performed by a gatekeeper include:
●
registration of IP workpoint clients:
–
system clients, such as, optiClient 130 V5.0, optiPoint 400, optiPoint 410, optiPoint
420, optiPoint 600 (CorNet IP mode)
–
H.323 clients, such as Microsoft Windows NetMeeting
●
setup of a connection
●
access control
Main features of version 5.0
Voice over IP (VoIP), that is, the transfer of voice data over IP networks, is enabled via the
HG 1500 boards in HiPath 3000.
Version 5.0 incorporates H.323 gatekeeper functions in the HiPath 3000 communication system and in the HiPath ComScendo Service (on HiPath 5000). This means that each HiPath
3000 system with at least one HG 1500 card and each HiPath ComScendo Service forms a
separate gatekeeper zone, to which the registered IP workpoint clients also belong.
H.323 communication between networked HiPath 3000 systems (nodes) is viewed as gatekeeper-gatekeeper communication. There is no registration between HG 1500 boards of networked systems. The CorNet NQ protocol, tunneled in H.323 via Annex M1, is used.
10-38
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
The division of HG 1500 resources into signaling and payload resources is a key feature in
version 5.0.
●
Signaling Resources
These include all of the node-specific signaling data required for Voice over IP for IP-supported (LAN, Intranet, Internet) and circuit-switched networks (ISDN, PSTN). These resources are provided centrally by a single HG 1500 board, the signaling gateway (= gatekeeper HG 1500). The number of HG 1500 boards of the node is irrelevant. A HG 1500
board is defined as HG 1500 gatekeeper using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
●
Payload Resources
The node resources required for the gateway transfer (between IP-supported and circuitswitched networks) of VoIP voice data (payload) are provided by the media gateways (=
gateway HG 1500). This can be one or more HG 1500 board(s).
No payload resources are required for direct transfer between IP-supported networks. A
HiPath 5000 with HiPath ComScendo Service can function as the VoIP system.
In systems with just one HG 1500 board, this board functions both as a signaling gateway and
a media gateway. A "Release gateway resources" flag must be activated for this in HiPath 3000
Manager E. Otherwise no resources can be assigned.
In systems with multiple HG 1500 boards, the payload resources are controlled by the central
node Resource Manager. This is a self-configuring service. The signaling resources are provided centrally by the first HG 1500 board. This signaling gateway also accesses other media
gateway resources (CODECs, B channels) and signaling data (for example RTP, RTCP). This
gives IP workpoint clients and other gateways access to central payload resources of all
HG 1500 boards in a node.
Resources for functions which are not based on H.323 (for example, routing channels, vCAPI
channels), are provided as before by each HG 1500 board. In systems with multiple HG 1500
boards, the resources are provided solely by the media gateways for performance reasons.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-39
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1
optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420
Introduction
The IP telephones in the optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 families allow users to conduct telephone calls in the simple, familiar way over a data network.
All HiPath 3000/5000 features that are offered interactively on the display, in the service menu,
and on function keys are available (except for Relocate).
The three dialog keys and the display guarantee convenient and interactive operation (not available for optiPoint 410 entry). Furthermore, the key lamp principle visualizes the activated functions.
The difference between the optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 families lies in the design of the
function key panels:
●
optiPoint 410 family: the function keys have panels with labeling strips on which the function or call number currently saved can be entered.
●
optiPoint 420 family: the function keys are self-labeling keys. Self-labeling means that each
key is assigned a display (1 line with 12 characters) in which the function or call number
currently saved is shown.
The optiPoint SLK add-on device allows you to increase the number of function keys available
(not applicable for optiPoint 410 entry, optiPoint 410 economy, optiPoint 420 economy and optiPoint 420 economy plus). The add-on devices optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF can be
used with the optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 families.
The optiPoint 410 display module is used as an add-on device for optiPoint 410 standard, optiPoint 410 advance, optiPoint 420 standard and optiPoint 420 advance. Its graphical LCD display (320 x 240 dots), the touchscreen and the navigation keys mean that many functions can
be used intuitively and therefore more effectively.
The use of different optiPoint 500 adapters guarantees flexibility for the expansion of the telephone workstation (not optiPoint 410 entry, optiPoint 410 economy, optiPoint 420 economy and
optiPoint 420 economy plus).
10-40
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.1
optiPoint 410 Telephones
10.6.1.1.1
optiPoint 410 entry
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 3rd party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
8 function keys (can be modified with HiPath 3000 Manager E) with LEDs
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus) and pitch
●
Suitable for wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices), no display
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-41
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 410 entry
Consultation hold
Number redial
Message
Callback
Speed dialing
Microphone on/off
Loudspeaker
Disconnect
Figure 10-20
optiPoint 410 entry - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-42
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.1.2
optiPoint 410 economy
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 3rd party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
12 function keys (4 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 user-programmable) with
LEDs
●
Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Open listening
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch and display contrast
●
Suitable for wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-43
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 410 economy
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-21
optiPoint 410 economy - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-44
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.1.3
optiPoint 410 standard
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP, SIP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 1st Party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the PC connection
●
12 function keys (4 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 8 user-programmable) with
LEDs
●
Alphanumeric LCD swivel display with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation
●
Port for headset (121 TR 9-5)
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch, speaker quality and display contrast
●
Modularity:
●
–
2 option bays
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
Suitable for wall mounting
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-45
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 410 standard
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-22
optiPoint 410 standard - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-46
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.1.4
optiPoint 410 advance
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP, SIP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 1st Party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the PC connection
●
1 integrated USB 1.1 interface
●
19 function keys (4 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 15 user-programmable)
with LEDs
●
Graphic display (swivel) with 4 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation
●
Port for headset (121 TR 9-5)
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch, speaker quality and display contrast
●
Modularity:
●
–
1 option bay
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
Suitable for wall mounting
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-47
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 410 advance
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-23
optiPoint 410 advance - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-48
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.2
optiPoint 420 Telephones
The IP telephones in the optiPoint 420 family have self-labeling keys. Self-labeling means that
each key is assigned a display (1 line with 12 characters) in which the currently saved function
or call number is shown.
10.6.1.2.1
optiPoint 420 economy
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP, SIP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 1st Party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
12 function keys (5 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 7 user-programmable) with
LEDs and self-labeling keys
●
Graphic display (swivel) with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Open listening
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch and display contrast
●
Suitable for wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-49
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 420 economy
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Mailbox
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-24
optiPoint 420 economy - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-50
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.2.2
optiPoint 420 economy plus
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP, SIP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 1st Party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the PC connection
●
12 function keys (5 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 7 user-programmable) with
LEDs and self-labeling keys
●
Graphic display (swivel) with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Open listening
●
Port for headset (121 TR 9-5)
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch and display contrast
●
Suitable for wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capability for adapters or add-on devices)
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-51
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 420 economy plus
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Mailbox
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-25
optiPoint 420 economy - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-52
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.2.3
optiPoint 420 standard
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP, SIP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 1st Party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the PC connection
●
12 function keys (5 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 7 user-programmable) with
LEDs and self-labeling keys
●
Graphic display (swivel) with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation
●
Port for headset (121 TR 9-5)
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch, speaker quality and display contrast
●
Modularity:
●
–
2 option bays
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
Suitable for wall mounting
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-53
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 420 standard
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Mailbox
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-26
optiPoint 420 standard - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-54
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.2.4
optiPoint 420 advance
Main features
●
Protocols
–
H.323, HFA/V3 + V4, CorNet IP, SIP
–
HTTP, DHCP, SNMP, FTP
–
H.235 (security)
–
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1 p/Q
●
Voice compression G.711, G.722, G.723 and G.729 A/B
●
Power over LAN (in accordance with Cisco and standard pre802.3af)
●
CTI (for example, via TAPI 1st Party)
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for LAN connection
●
1 Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the PC connection
●
1 integrated USB 1.1 interface
●
18 function keys (5 changeable using HiPath 3000 Manager E, 13 user-programmable)
with LEDs and self-labeling keys
●
Graphic display (swivel) with 4 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full-duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for room adaptation
●
Port for headset (121 TR 9-5)
●
2 volume adjustment keys (plus/minus), pitch, speaker quality and display contrast
●
Modularity:
●
–
1 option bay
–
1 interface for up to 2 add-on devices
Suitable for wall mounting
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-55
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint 420 advance
Service
Programmable
Number redial
Programmable
Mailbox
Programmable
Microphone on/off
Programmable
Loudspeaker
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Disconnect
Figure 10-27
optiPoint 420 advance - Standard Key Assignment (Default)
Refer to Section 10.6.1.3 for information on connection and startup.
10-56
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.3
Connection and Startup
The optiPoint 410/420 Administrator Manual contains information on how to connect and start
up optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 telephones.
Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure an optiPoint IP telephone for HiPath 3000/5000.
The optiPoint IP telephone software can be upgraded using:
●
the Deployment Tool.
Refer to the Deployment Tool Administrator Guide for IP Telephones for information on the
tool.
●
WBM access to the respective optiPoint IP telephone.
The optiPoint 410/420 Administrator Manual contains information on this procedure.
Download
The manuals and tools referred to in this document are available for download at http://www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-57
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.3.1
Connections on the Bottom of the Telephone
optiPoint 410 entry
optiPoint 410/420 standard
optiPoint 410/420 advance
Figure 10-28
10-58
optiPoint 410/optiPoint 420 - Connection Options
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Table 10-5
optiPoint 410/optiPoint 420 - Description of Connections
No.
1
Connection
1
Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the LAN
2
Handset
3
Local power supply (optional)1
4
Add-on device
5
Ethernet (10/100BaseT) interface (self-configuring) for the PC
6
Headset (121 TR 9-5)
7
Adapter 1
8
Adapter 2
9
USB interface
No local power supply is required if power is provided via the Ethernet cable (Power over LAN).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-59
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.4
7
optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 Add-On Devices
Caution
Always disconnect the line cord before connecting add-on devices to the telephone.
The user usually installs the add-on devices. The installation instructions are on the “Electronic
Operating Instructions” CD.
>
A maximum of two add-on devices may be installed on an optiPoint 410 or optiPoint
420 telephone (not optiPoint 410 entry, optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 420 economy and optiPoint 420 economy plus).
optiPoint Key Module and optiPoint BLF can be used in addition to the two add-on
devices described below. Table 10-6 shows the possible add-on device configurations.
10.6.1.4.1
optiPoint SLK Module
The optiPoint SLK module is an add-on device that should be mounted on the side of the telephone; it provides an additional 13 keys, LEDs, and displays for all purposes. SLK (self-labeling
key) means that each key is assigned a display (1 line with 12 characters) in which the function
or call number currently saved is shown.
Figure 10-29
optiPoint SLK Module
Double assignment can be performed for the keys if only call numbers without LED support are
saved on the first level. It is also possible to program call numbers without LED support on the
second level. These can be internal station numbers, DID call numbers and call numbers from
a HiPath network.
10-60
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
The bottom key of the first key module installed on the telephone (optiPoint SLK module or optiPoint key module) is automatically defined as “Shift key” (default). A Shift key must not already
be programmed.
10.6.1.4.2
optiPoint 410 Display Module
This is an add-on device with a graphic swivel display (240 x 320 pixels) with touchscreen functionality, background illumination, and navigation keys.
Figure 10-30
optiPoint 410 Display Module
Main features
●
Graphical user interface
●
Local personal telephone directory
●
Access to company-wide telephone directory via LDAP
●
WAP browser
●
Voice-controlled dialing
●
Call list containing all incoming and outgoing calls
●
Speed-dialing list
●
Online help
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-61
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Connection
The optiPoint 410 display module must always be installed as the first add-on device, in other
words, connected directly to the telephone.
The connection to the telephone is made over an interface cable with the following connectors:
input MW6, output MW8. The power supply is ensured via the connected telephone.
10-62
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.1.4.3
Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices
The following table shows the possible configurations for add-on devices on telephones from
the optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 families (not optiPoint 410 entry, optiPoint 410 economy,
optiPoint 420 economy and optiPoint 420 economy plus).
Table 10-6
Add-On Device Configuration at an optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420 Telephone
optiPoint 410 telephone
optiPoint 420 telephone
1st add-on device
2nd add-on device
optiPoint key module
–
optiPoint key module
optiPoint key module
optiPoint key module
optiPoint BLF
optiPoint 410 standard
optiPoint 410 display module
–
optiPoint 410 advance
optiPoint 410 display module
optiPoint key module
optiPoint 410 display module
optiPoint BLF
optiPoint 420 standard
optiPoint 410 display module
optiPoint SLK module
optiPoint 420 advance
optiPoint BLF
–
optiPoint BLF
optiPoint BLF1
optiPoint SLK module
–
optiPoint SLK module
optiPoint SLK module
1
Configuration with two optiPoint BLFs only with HiPath 3800, HiPath 3750, and HiPath 3700
10.6.1.5
Use of optiPoint 500 Adapters
The following optiPoint 500 adapters are available for use on telephones from the optiPoint 410
and optiPoint 420 families (not optiPoint 410 entry, optiPoint 410 economy optiPoint 420 economy and optiPoint 420 economy plus):
●
optiPoint Acoustic Adapter
Note: Floating contacts are not supported when using the adapter on optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420.
●
optiPoint Recorder Adapter
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-63
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.2
optiClient 130 V5.0
Definition
The optiClient 130 V5.0 is a PC-based multimedia application that offers connection services
for different communication media over a LAN (network). Voice, video, or chat connections can
be managed and controlled using the optiClient 130 V5.0. For voice connections, this means
that the optiClient 130 V5.0 can be used on a PC like a telephone.
Modular structure
The optiClient 130 V5.0 has a modular structure for the functional elements which can be extended or replaced to change the scope of functions available.
●
The basic module of the optiClient 130 V5.0 is the main bar. The main bar does not provide
any communication functions itself, but instead serves as a central component that works
together with the various modules to define the communication functions and display of the
optiClient 130 V5.0.
●
Interface modules are the modules that allow the available functions to be operated in windows and dialogs. Examples of interface modules are: telephone windows, directories, call
list management, etc.
●
Provider modules determine which communication systems or communication service providers the optiClient 130 V5.0 can be connected to.
●
Manager modules run in the background and are not visible. They assume general communication control functions. Examples of manager modules include the Keyboard Manager and ScreenSaver Manager.
PC Prerequisites
●
Operating system Windows®2000 (SP 4 or later) or Windows®XP (SP 1 or later)
●
Processor: 1 GHz or higher recommended
●
RAM memory: At least 512 MB
Installation and Configuration
Information on installation can be found in the readme file on the optiClient 130 V5.0 product
software CD.
Use HiPath 3000 Manager E to configure a workpoint client for HiPath 3000/5000.
optiClient 130 V5.0 software can be upgraded automatically. This can be started on a user-specific basis during login, cyclically or can be skipped.
10-64
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.3
HiPath AP 1120
The terminal adapter HiPath AP 1120 connects up to two analog telephones and/or fax machines with a corporate network or a network provided by a carrier.
The device is capable of dynamically recognizing the most common IP telephony codecs and
fax protocols, including T.38.
Figure 10-31
HiPath AP 1120
Connections
●
●
Ethernet connections:
–
1 x RJ45: 10/100 BaseT Ethernet access
–
1 x RJ45: 10/100 BaseT Ethernet access/power supply over MDI, IEEE 802.3af (Power over LAN)
Analog connections:
–
●
2 x RJ11: analog telephone, fax
Power supply:
–
External 24 Vdc/12 W local power supply
No local power supply is required if power is provided via Ethernet access (Power over
LAN).
Connection and configuration
Information on connecting and configuring the HiPath AP 1120 terminal adapter can be obtained from the Installation Manual (Configuration Tools and Documentation) and the Administration Manual (http://www.siemens.com/hipath (–> Downloads)).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-65
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4
>
HG 1500: Determining the Number of HG 1500 Boards Required
For information on the configuration of HG 1500 boards, refer to the HG 1500 Administration Manual.
10.6.4.1
Static Configuration Rules
In HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0, HG 1500 provides the resources named in Table 10-7 via the
HG 1500 boards defined as media gateways (= gateway HG 1500, see Page 10-39).
Table 10-8 shows the board-specific capacity limits (maximum configuration) for the corresponding functions.
Table 10-7
Technical Data (Resources) of the HG 1500 Boards Defined as Media Gateways
Resource
HXGM3
HXGS3
HXGR3
with- with 1 with 2 with- with 1
out
x
x
out
x
PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1
Routing channels
A routing channel is required, for example, for making connections between two IP networks via ISDN (ISDN routing).
16
16
STMI2
without
PDMX1
16
Gateway channels (DSP channels)
A gateway channel is required, for
example, for connection between an
IP workpoint client and a TDM workpoint client (for example, optiPoint
500).
16
24
32
8
16
32
Fax/modem channels (G.711)
16
24
32
8
16
32
Fax channels (T.38)
These are special hardware resources which facilitate fax via vCAPI and fax via IP functionality with
the T.38 protocol.
3
2
3
Teleworker with AES encryption and
codec G.711/G.7292 (Sampling
rate) 20 msec)
10
8
10
10-66
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Table 10-7
Technical Data (Resources) of the HG 1500 Boards Defined as Media Gateways
Resource
HXGM3
HXGS3
HXGR3
with- with 1 with 2 with- with 1
out
x
x
out
x
PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1
Teleworker with AES encryption and
codec G.723 (sample rate
30 msec)
DMC channels
These are the gateway channels for
Direct Media Connections DMC with
HiPath 4000 (DMC interworking feature is active.3).
16
12
18
STMI2
without
PDMX1
12
24
6
16
12
24
MOH Channels (G.711, G.723,
G.729)
The number of MoH channels used
depends on the configuration (HiPath 3000 Manager E).
5
5
5
LAN connections
Number of LAN connections that
can be used as DSL connections.
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
3
PDMX is not currently released.
G.729 is not currently supported by optiClient 130 V4.0.
The number of gateway channels available (DSP channels) is reduced as soon as the DMC interworking feature is activated with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Table 10-8
HG 1500 - Board-Specific Capacity Limits (Maximum Configuration)
Function
Function
HXGM3
HXGS3
HXGR3
with- with 1 with 2 with- with 1
out
x
x
out
x
PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1
STMI2
without
PDMX1
PPP Routing Partner
70
70
70
vCAPI clients
IP workpoint clients that support
vCAPI.
100
100
100
MOH data streams
10
10
10
1
PDMX is not currently released.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-67
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.2
Dynamic Configuration Rules
10.6.4.2.1
Gateway channels (DSP channels)
Gateway connections are required for connections to TDM workpoint clients and lines. A gateway channel is required on the HiPath HG 1500 board for each gateway connection. TDM workpoint clients and trunks include, for example
●
UP0/E stations (optiset E, optiPoint 500)
●
CMI stations
●
analog stations
●
ISDN stations
●
trunk and tie lines (MSI, S0, S2M)
Examples: a consultation call to an optiPoint 500 telephone is set up during an existing connection between two IP workpoint clients. A HG 1500 board gateway channel is necessary for the
consultation call.
An IP workpoint client seizes a trunk. A HG 1500 board is required for this trunk.
In the case of conferences, the number of gateway channels seized corresponds to the number
of stations and IP workpoint clients involved.
Channels required for gateway connections
The following table shows the number of gateway channels (HG 1500 boards) necessary
based on the existing IP workpoint clients.
The calculation of the values is based on the following assumptions:
●
A station spends 10 % of its working time in call status.
●
The average time per call is three minutes.
●
The availability loss is limited to 1.2 %.
Provisions should be made for more gateway channels (HG 1500 boards) in high-traffic volume
environments (for example, call centers).
Table 10-9
Number of Required Gateway Channels (HG 1500 Boards)
IP workpoint clients in the system
Required number of gateway channels
0–3
2
4 – 12
4
13 – 16
6
17 – 38
8
10-68
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Table 10-9
Number of Required Gateway Channels (HG 1500 Boards)
IP workpoint clients in the system
Required number of gateway channels
39 – 54
10
55 – 70
12
71 – 86
14
87 – 96
15
97 – 101
16
102 – 136
20
137 – 172
24
173 – 210
28
211 – 247
32
248 – 324
40
325 – 402
48
403 – 481
56
482 – 562
64
563 – 726
80
727 – 890
96
891 – 1000
112
In a straightforward IP network, the number of gateway channels must be greater than or equal
to the number of TDM lines.
The required number of HG 1500 boards for VoIP is determined by the sum of the gateway
channels, MOH channels and conference channels
10.6.4.2.2
MOH Channels (G.711, G.723, G.729)
A DSP channel is used to provide MOH for IP workpoint clients. Depending on the configuration
(HiPath 3000 Manager E), up to five DSP channels can be used for MOH.
A maximum of 10 MOH data streams per HG 1500 board are possible. This means that up to
10 IP workpoint clients can simultaneously hear MOH.
A DSP channel is required for each codec (G.711, G.723, G.729), irrespective of the number
of MOH data streams. If more than 10 MOH data streams are required, additional HG 1500
boards must be used.
A B channel license is not required for MOH.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-69
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.2.3
IP Networking Channels (PBX Networking Channels)
IP networking channels are used for connections between communication systems. In this
case, a distinction must be made between connections that use a gateway channel and direct
payload connections. Depending on the connection, the following resources are required for
successful connection setup.
Connection type
Line
Gateway channel
Direct payload connection
Required
Not required
Gateway connection
Required
Required
A connection request is rejected if a required resource is unavailable.
HiPath 3000 Manager E is used to define how many of the maximum number of lines are to be
configured as IP networking channels (IP network trunks). The maximum number of IP network
trunks can be found in Table 2-7.
10.6.4.2.4
DMC (Direct Media Connection) Channels
When the DMC interworking feature is active in an IP network between HiPath 3000 and HiPath
4000, gateway connections are set up over DMC channels. From the user’s perspective, a DMC
channel is a gateway channel that provides a gateway connection between HiPath 3000 and
HiPath 4000. The fact that a DMC channel must serve both a master and slave connection results in a DSP channel reduction.
Note: The number of gateway channels available (DSP channels) is reduced as soon as the
DMC interworking feature is activated with HiPath 3000 Manager E. In this case, a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) can only provide up to 80% of all possible channels (for example: 6 instead of 8 DSP channels, 12 instead of 16 DSP channels, etc.).
10-70
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.2.5
ISDN Routing/PPP Channels
HG 1500 boards can also be used as ISDN routers. The ISDN router can connect two physically separate IP networks together via an ISDN line. Channel bundling can be used to adjust
the required bandwidth.
The system reserves the B channels required for ISDN routing and thus restricts the available
gateway channels.
Table 10-10
HG 1500 - Board-Specific Sum of PPP Channels and Gateway Channels
(Maximum Numbers)
HXGM3
HXGS3
HXGR3
with- with 1 with 2 with- with 1
out
x
x
out
x
PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1 PDM1
Sum of PPP channels (for ISDN
routing) and gateway channels
1
16
24
32
8
16
STMI2
without
PDMX1
32
PDMX is not currently released.
If a large number of IP workpoint clients is required, the HG 1500 board may not also be used
as an ISDN router. In this case, ISDN routing functionality must be assigned to an individual
HG 1500 board.
10.6.4.2.6
Fax / Modem Channels
Fax and modem transmissions can be sent both over transparent G.711 gateway channels and
T.38 channels (fax only).
Although T.38 offers the more reliable method of fax transmission, it can only be used to a maximum of 14 Kbps. The number of T.38 channels available is limited by the higher processor
speed required for T.38. Alternatively, G.711 gateway channels can be used for fax transmission.
Note: The number of G.711 gateway channels available is reduced as soon as the DMC interworking feature is activated with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-71
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.3
Determining the Number of HG 1500 Boards Required
The intensity with which gateway connections and ISDN routing are used determines the number of HG 1500 boards necessary.
HG 1500 resources sufficient?
Using the following calculations you can determine if the available HG 1500 boards are sufficient or if additional resources are required in the form of other HG 1500 boards.
Following tests, the performance level required by each HG 1500 function was determined, and
assigned a value in points. This is the performance level that must be supported by the board.
This calculation is based on the assumption that the following performance point totals are
available for each HG 1500 board:
HG 1500 board
Total performance points per
board
HXGM3
980
HXGS3, HXGR3
780
STMI2
980
Note: Any available extension modules (PDM1, PDMX, etc.) are included in the additional performance requirement in Table 10-11.
Table 10-11
Required Performance Level for Voice over IP
Function
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Available extension
modules
Per PDM1
10
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
IP workpoint clients: system client, HFA client, H.323 client (8 calls per hour)
0.51
IP networking channel (25 calls per hour)
3.2
Signaling with activat- IP workpoint clients: system client, HFA clied H.235 security (in- ent, H.323 client (8 calls per hour)
dependent of the
IP networking channel (25 calls per hour)
WBM setting "Enhanced B Channels")
10-72
0.82
3.8
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Table 10-11
Required Performance Level for Voice over IP
Function
Payload (additional
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1:
feature: "Enhanced B G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
Channels" Enabled
G.729 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
over WBM.)
G.723 (received: 30 msec/sent: 30 msec)
Resource requirement
(credit point)
11
11
7.5
Payload (additional
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1 without encryption:
feature: "Enhanced B G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
39
Channels" disabled
G.729 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
39
over WBM.)
G.723 (received: 30 msec/sent: 30 msec)
26
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 without encryption:
G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
73
G.729 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
73
G.723 (received: 30 msec/sent: 30 msec)
49
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 with encryption:
G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
with AES encryption
89
G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
with 3DES encryption
104
G.729 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
with AES encryption
89
G.729 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
with 3DES encryption
104
G.723 (received: 30 msec/sent: 30 msec)
with AES encryption
60
G.723 (received: 30 msec/sent: 30 msec)
with 3DES encryption
70
Voice gateway channel routing over PPP:
G.729 with packetizing of 3 (60 msec)
54
G.729 with packetizing of 1 (20 msec)
150
G.723 with packetizing of 3 (60 msec)
57
G.723 with packetizing of 1 (30 msec)
100
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-73
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Table 10-12
Performance Requirements for Routing and vCAPI
Function
Data transfer (additional feature: "Enhanced B Channels"
disabled over WBM)
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Data routing:
Data routing over PPP
55 per B channel
IP routing between LAN interface 1 and LAN interface 2:
Without encryption with 1400-byte packet
length
96 for 100 packets/
sec.
With AES encryption and 1400-byte packet
length
198 for 100 packets/
sec.
With 3DES encryption and 1400-byte packet
length
329 for 100 packets/
sec.
Without encryption with 500-byte packet
length
79 for 100 packets/
sec.
With AES encryption and 500-byte packet
length
119 for 100 packets/
sec.
With 3DES encryption and 500-byte packet
length
166 for 100 packets/
sec.
Without encryption with 100-byte packet
length
72 for 100 packets/
sec.
With AES encryption and 100-byte packet
length
84 for 100 packets/
sec.
With 3DES encryption and 100-byte packet
length
93 for 100 packets/
sec.
VCAPI services:
10-74
Fax channel
11
Data channel
34
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.4
Sample Calculation
10.6.4.4.1 Calculation Example 1: 32 IP Networking Connections to HiPath 3750,
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 are connected to another system via an IP networking path with
32 B channels. Codec G.711 is used with a sample rate of 20 msec without encryption for the
IP networking path. The customer only has TDM workpoint clients.
An HXGM3 board with two PDM1 modules is necessary for this configuration:
2 DSPs per HXGM3 and 2 x 1 DSP per PDM1 = 4 DSPs, together supporting up to 32 channels.
Correspondingly, the total performance available is 980 points.
Performance requirement
32 gateway channels via LAN interface 1 should be included in the calculation. The setting “Enhanced B Channels” must be activated for this via the WBM. The Virtual Private Network VPN
and Firewall functions are automatically deactivated when this setting is activated.
The signaling load has to be taken into account when calculating performance.
Function
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Available extension
modules
2 x PDM1
2 x 10 = 20.0
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
32 x IP networking channel (25 calls per hour)
32 x 3.2 = 102.4
Payload (additional
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1:
feature: "Enhanced B 32 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent:
Channels" enabled
20 msec)
over WBM.)
32 x 11.0 = 352.0
Total =
474.4
The specified performance requirement of 474.4 points is below the 980 total performance
points that the HXGM3 board can provide. The configuration is feasible.
Note: The configuration is not feasible for HXGS3 and HXGR3 because the static configuration
rules only permit up to 16 channels per board.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-75
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.4.2 Calculation Example 2: 96 IP workpoint clients and 16 IP networking
connections to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 with 96 IP workpoint clients (system clients) and additional TDM
workpoint clients are connected to another system via an IP networking path with 16 B channels. As described in Table 10-9, 15 gateway channels are needed for 96 IP workpoint clients
(at 0.1 erlangs/workpoint client). Codec G.711 with a sample rate of 20 ms without encoding is
required for the IP networking paths and the IP network clients.
An HXGM3 board with two PDM1 modules is necessary for this configuration:
2 DSPs per HXGM3 and 2 x 1 DSP per PDM1 = 4 DSPs, together supporting up to 32 channels.
Correspondingly, the total performance available is 980 points.
Performance requirement
Thirty-one gateway channels via LAN interface 1 should be included in the calculation. The setting “Enhanced B Channels” must be activated for this via the WBM. The Virtual Private Network VPN and Firewall functions are automatically deactivated when this setting is activated.
The signaling load has to be taken into account when calculating performance.
Function
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Available extension
modules
2 x PDM1
2 x 10 = 20.0
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
96 x IP workpoint client: System client, HFA
client, H.323 client (eight calls an hour)
96 x 0.51 = 48.96
16 x IP networking channel (25 calls per hour)
16 x 3.2 = 51.2
Payload (additional
feature: Enhanced B
Channels disabled
over WBM.)
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1:
31 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent:
20 msec)
31 x 11.0 = 341.0
Total =
461.16
The specified performance requirement of 461.16 points is below the 980 total performance
points that the HXGM3 board can provide. The configuration is feasible.
10-76
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.4.3 Calculation Example 3: 200 IP Workpoint Clients and Internet Access to
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
200 IP workpoint clients should be connected to HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700. As described in
Table 10-9, 28 gateway channels are required for 200 IP workpoint clients (0.1 erlangs/workpoint client). In addition, a DSL connection with 192 Kbps upstream (from HG 1500 –> Internet) and 2048 Kbps downstream (Internet –> HG 1500) should be configured. The firewall
should be activated here but not encryption.
Two HXGM3 boards are required for this configuration:
2 DSPs per HXGM3 = 2 x 2 DSPs = 4 DSPs, which together support up to 32 channels.
Performance requirement for the Signaling Gateway (= Gatekeeper HG 1500)
G.711 is required for IP workpoint client connections. The firewall must be activated for the DSL
connection. For this reason the calculation method with the WBM setting "Enhanced B Channels" deactivated should be used for the 14 gateway channels on each HXGM3.
The signaling load has to be taken into account when calculating performance.
Function
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
200 x IP workpoint client: System client, HFA
client, H.323 client (eight calls an hour)
Payload (additional
feature: Enhanced B
Channels disabled
over WBM.)
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1 without encryption:
14 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent:
20 msec)
200 x 0.51 = 102.0
14 x 39.0 = 546.0
Total =
648.0
The specified performance requirement of 648.0 points is below the 980 total performance
points that the HXGM3 board can provide. The configuration is feasible.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-77
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Performance requirement for the Media Gateway (= Gateway HG 1500)
Calculation of the dynamic performance requirement for the DSL connection on the basis of the
highest throughput rates (upstream = 192 Kbps = (192 x 1000) / 8 bps = 24000 bps, Downstream = 2048 Kbps = (2048 x 1000) / 8 bps = 256000 bps). The following formulae apply for
1400 byte packet length:
Upstream:
Downstream:
24000 bps
256000 bps
= 17 packets/sec
1400 bytes/packet
= 183 packets/sec
1400 bytes/packet
Function
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Data transfer (additional feature: Enhanced B Channels
disabled over WBM.)
DSL connection (without encryption with 1400 bytes packet length,
performance requirement (score) = 96 for 100 packets/sec):
Payload (additional
feature: Enhanced B
Channels disabled
over WBM.)
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1 without encryption:
17 packets/sec upstream (192 kbps)
17 x (96 / 100) = 16.32
183 packets/sec downstream (2048 kbps)
14 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent:
20 msec)
183 x (96 / 100) =
175.68
14 x 39.0 = 546.0
Total =
738.0
The specified performance requirement of 738.0 points is below the 980 total performance
points that the HXGM3 board can provide. The configuration is feasible.
10-78
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.4.4 Calculation Example 4: IP Networking Connections and Voice over PPP
(ISDN Routing) to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 (central systems) are connected to a second system (branch office
1) via ISDN routing with two PPP channels (S0) and to a third system (branch office 2) via a
direct LAN connection (IP networking channels).
Voice over PPP with Codec G.729 and a sample rate of 60 ms without encoding is used for the
ISDN routing connection to branch office 1. This means that six voice channels are supported
by the two PPP channels (S0). Eight IP networking channels are sufficient for the IP networking
connection to branch office 2. Codec G.729 with a sample rate of 20 msec without encryption
is used for this connection.
(6 + 8 =) 14 channels must be configured in the central offices, six channels in branch office 1
and eight channels in branch office 2.
An HXGM3 board without PDM module is sufficient for this configuration:
2 DSPs per HXGM3 = 2 DSPs, together supporting up to 16 channels.
Correspondingly, the total performance available is 980 points.
Performance requirement
The payload and the signaling load have to be taken into account when calculating performance.
Function
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
Resource requirement
(credit point)
14 x IP networking channel (25 calls per hour)
14 x 3.2 = 44.8
Payload (additional
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1 without encryption:
feature: "Enhanced B 8 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
8 x 39.0 = 312.0
Channels" disabled
Voice gateway channel routing over PPP:
over WBM.)
6 x G.729 with packetizing of 3 (60 msec)
6 x 54.0 = 324.0
Total =
680.8
The specified performance requirement of 680.8 points is below the 980 total performance
points that the HXGM3 board can provide. The configuration is feasible.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-79
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.4.5
Calculation Example 5: Virtual Private Network VPN
Two branch systems (HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3500) should be connected to a central system
(HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700) via VPN. The central system only has TDM workpoint clients.
Eight IP networking channels are available via LAN interface 2 for the connection to the branches. Both branches have 30 IP workpoint clients and eight gateway channels for the connection
to the ISDN trunk. Additionally, four IP networking channels are available for connection to the
central office.
G.711 with a sample rate of 20 msec is used for the VPN networking. The connection between
the central and branch offices should be set up over the Internet using an AES-encrypted VPN
tunnel.
The following boards are necessary for this configuration:
●
Central office: An HXGM3 (2 DSPs per HXGM3 together supporting up to 16 channels)
●
Branch office: One HXGR3 each (1 DSP per HXGR3, supporting up to 8 channels)
Correspondingly, the total performance available in the central office is 980 points, and 780
points in each of the branches.
Central office requirements
Eight gateway channels via LAN interface 2 with AES encryption should be included in the calculation. Since VPN functionality is required, the WBM setting "Enhanced B Channels" is deactivated.
Function
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
Resource requirement
(credit point)
8 x IP networking channel (25 calls per hour)
8 x 3.2 = 25.6
Payload (additional
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 with encryption:
feature: "Enhanced B 8 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
8 x 89.0 = 712.0
Channels" disabled
with AES encryption
over WBM.)
Total =
737.6
The specified performance requirement of 737.6 points is below the 980 total performance
points that the HXGM3 board can provide. This configuration is feasible for the central office.
10-80
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Branch performance requirements
Four gateway channels via LAN interface 2 with AES encryption should be included in the calculation. As described in Table 10-9, eight gateway channels are required for 30 IP workpoint
clients (at 0.1 erlangs/workpoint client). Since VPN functionality is required, the WBM setting
"Enhanced B Channels" is deactivated.
Function
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
30 x IP workpoint client: System Client, HFA
client, H.323 client (eight calls an hour)
30 x 0,51 = 15.3
4 x IP networking channel (25 calls per hour)
4 x 3.2 = 12.8
Payload (additional
feature: Enhanced B
Channels Disabled
over WBM.)
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 with encryption:
4 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
with AES encryption
4 x 89.0 = 356.0
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 1 without encryption:
8 x G.711 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
Total =
8 x 39.0 = 312.0
696.1
The determined resource requirement of 696.1 points is less than the overall performance of
780 points which the HXGR3 board can provide. The branch configuration is feasible.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-81
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.4.6
Calculation Example 6: Connecting teleworkers via VPN
Eight teleworkers should be connected to HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700. G.723 with a sample
rate of 30 msec is required. In addition duplex data transmission with 512 Kbps is also to be
enabled via the 2 Mbps SDSL port connected to LAN interface 2. The average packet size is
500 bytes. VPN should be used with AES encryption.
HXGM3 board is required for this configuration:
2 DSPs per HXGM3 = 2 DSPs, which together support up to 16 channels.
Correspondingly, the total performance available is 980 points.
Performance requirement
Calculation of the dynamic performance requirement for the SDSL connection based on the required data exchange rate (512 kbps = (512 X 1000)/8 bps = 64000 bps per route). The following formula applies for 500 byte packet length:
64000 bps
= 128 packets/route = 256 packets/s for both routes
500 bytes/packet
Since VPN functionality is required, the WBM setting "Enhanced B Channels" is deactivated.
Function
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Data transfer (additional feature: Enhanced B Channels
Disabled over WBM.)
SDSL connection (with AES encryption and 500 bytes packet length,
performance requirement (score) = 119 for 100 packets/sec):
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
8 x IP workpoint client: System Client, HFA
client, H.323 client (eight calls an hour)
Payload (additional
feature: Enhanced B
Channels Disabled
over WBM.)
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 with encryption:
256 packets/sec
256 x (119 / 100) =
304.64
8 x G.723 (received: 30 msec/sent: 30 msec)
with AES encryption
Total =
8 x 0.51 = 4.08
8 x 60.0 = 480.0
788.72
The specified performance requirement of 788.72 points is below the 980 total performance
points that the HXGM3 board can provide. The configuration is feasible.
10-82
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Bandwidth requirement
For information on bandwidths, refer to the System Description HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0
Bandwidth calculation
Bandwidth
Totals
8 channels with AES encryption,
G.723 with a sample rate of 30 msec
8 x 44.3 Kbps
354.4 Kbps
Data transfer
512.0 Kbps
Total =
866.4 Kbps
A 1 Mbps connection would be sufficient for this configuration.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-83
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.4.7 Calculation Example 7: Virtual Private Network VPN with Customer
Specifications: 1000 Kbps Bandwidth for Data Transfer, Remaining Bandwidth for Voice
Transmission
The 2 Mbps SDSL connection of an HXGM3 board (HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700) is to enable
duplex data transmission at 1000 Kbps. The average packet size is 500 bytes. In addition, the
SDSL connection for IP Networking connections with G.729 and a sample rate of 20ms should
be used.
Performance Requirements for SDSL Connection
Calculation of the dynamic performance requirement for the SDSL connection based on the required data exchange rate ( 1000kbps = (1000 x 1000)/8 bps = 125000 bps per route). The following formula applies for 500 byte packet length:
125000 bps
= 250 packets/route = 500 packets/s for both routes
500 bytes/packet
Function
Data transfer (additional feature: Enhanced B Channels
Disabled over WBM.)
Resource requirement
(credit point)
SDSL connection (with AES encryption and 500 bytes packet length,
resource requirement (score) = 119 for 100 packets/sec):
500 packets/sec
500 x (119 / 100) =
595.0
Total =
595.0
Number of possible simultaneous IP networking connections
A performance requirement of 595 points is specified for the SDSL connection. Since the
HXGM3 board can provide total performance of 980 points, 385 performance points are available for IP networking connections.
Function
Signaling without
H.235 security (independent of the WBM
setting "Enhanced B
Channels")
10-84
Resource requirement
(credit point)
IP Networking Channel (25 calls per hour)
3.2
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
Function
Payload (additional
feature: Enhanced B
Channels Disabled
over WBM.)
Resource requirement
(credit point)
Voice gateway channel over LAN interface 2 with encryption:
G.729 (received: 20 msec/sent: 20 msec)
with AES encryption
Total =
89.0
92.2
Each IP networking connection requires 92.2 performance points.
Up to four simultaneous connections are possible with the 385 performance points available for
networking connections (385 / 92.2 = 4.18).
Bandwidth requirement
For information on bandwidths, refer to the System Description HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0.
Bandwidth calculation
Bandwidth
Totals
4 channels with AES encryption,
G.729 with a sample rate of 20 msec
4 x 60 Kbps
240 Kbps
Data transfer
1024 Kbps
Total =
1264 Kbps
A 2 Mbps connection would be sufficient for this configuration.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-85
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
IP Telephony (Voice over IP)
10.6.4.5
>
Notes on the Maintenance of Gateway Channels HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 or
later
In V5.0 and later, when a number of trunks is configured for IP networking with HiPath 3000 Manager E(IP networking channels), this no longer results in the reservation of B channels. This means that the available B channels can be used as gateway channels.
These resources are administered centrally via a single HG 1500 board, i.e. the ’Signaling Gateway’ (= Gatekeeper HG 1500), regardless of how many HG 1500 boards
are available in a system.
Sample Connection Scenarios:
●
Internal node connections between IP workpoint clients are direct payload connections. No
gateway channel is necessary. The number of possible concurrent connections depends
on the number of licensed IP workpoint clients.
●
Node-to-node connections (IP networking) between IP workpoint clients are direct payload
connections. No gateway channel is necessary. The number of possible concurrent connections depends on the number of IP networking channels available.
●
Node-to-node connections (IP networking) between TDM workpoint clients require one IP
networking channel per connection and one gateway channel per node.
Example: B Channel Distribution in IP Networking
Number of licensed B channels =
8
This means that 8 channels to the
switching network are permitted.
–
Number of routing channels =
2
Configuration with WBM
=
Number of remaining B channels for gateway channels =
6
Note on Music On Hold (MOH): A license is not required for the MOH channel. If 8 B channels
are licensed, this means that the MOH channel can be used as a 9th channel. The number of
MOH Channels can be configured.
If 16 B channels are licensed and used exclusively for IP workpoint clients, the 16th B channel
must be used as the MOH channel.
10-86
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint Accessories
10.7
optiPoint Accessories
The following data is valid for the telephone families optiset E, optiPoint 410, optiPoint 420, optiPoint 500 and for the telephone optiPoint 600 office. Restrictions are indicated in the relevant
places.
10.7.1
External AC Adapters
You may need an external AC adapter if you are using large configurations or if you need to
extend the range.
10.7.1.1
Local Power Supply for optiset E, optiPoint 500 and optiPoint 600 office
You can connect a local power supply to the line cords of a host or client telephone using two
MW6 jacks and the connection cable supplied (see Figure 10-32).
Variants
●
Local power supply, Euro: AUL:06D1284 (C39280-Z4-C71 = number entered on unit)
●
Local power supply, UK: AUL:06D1287 (C39280-Z4-C72 = number entered on unit)
●
Local power supply, 110 V USA: AUL:51A4827 (C39280-Z4-C73 = number entered on
unit)
Data for local power supply AUL:06D1284 (Euro)
●
Line voltage: 220 (230) Vac
●
AC line frequency: 47 ... 53 Hz
●
Output voltage: Max. 50 Vdc, min. 30 Vdc
●
Output current: Max. 250 mA
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-87
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint Accessories
Table 10-13
Pin Assignments of the Local Power Supply AUL:06D1284 (Euro)
Pin
Assignment
1
Not used
2
–
3
a-Wire (Tip)
4
b-Wire (Ring)
5
+
6
Not used
Example: External AC Adapter Connection
AC Adapter
Analog
telephone or
device
jack
“MW”
"digital"
jack
HiPath 3750
optiPoint 500
Telephone
Figure 10-32
10-88
From optiPoint 500 adapter
(for example, here the
optiPoint analog adapter)
Example of an External AC Adapter Connection
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint Accessories
10.7.1.2
AC Adapter for optiPoint 410 and optiPoint 420
The AC adapter features two MW6 connectors. Power is supplied to a telephone via the left
board marked "Digital".
Variants
●
AC adapter, Euro: C39280-Z4-C510
●
AC adapter, UK: C39280-Z4-C512
●
AC adapter, 110 V USA: C39280-Z4-C511
Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
AC adapter, Euro:
C39280-Z4-C510
AC adapter, UK:
C39280-Z4-C512
AC adapter, 110 V
USA:
C39280-Z4-C511
230 VAC
230 VAC
120 VAC
Line frequency
50 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
Output voltage
max. 43 VDC,
min. 30 VDC
max. 43 VDC,
min. 30 VDC
max. 43 VDC,
min. 30 VDC
Output current
480 mA
480 mA
480 mA
Line voltage
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-89
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint Accessories
10.7.2
Headsets
A headset replaces the telephone handset, which means that the user’s hands are free when
telephoning. The use of a cordless headset (121 TR 9-5) is also possible.
Note: A headset key can be configured for optiPoint or optiset E telephones. This allows the
user to take calls and to toggle between the handset and the headset.
Figure 10-33
10-90
Example of a Corded and a Cordless Headset
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
optiPoint Accessories
Connection options
optiPoint and optiset E telephones not included in the table below do not support headset connection.
Table 10-14
Connection Options for Corded and Cordless Headsets
Telephone
Connection Options for Corded and Cordless Headsets
Direct
Using an opti- Using an optiset Using an optiset
E
E
Point
1
acoustic adapter headset adapter control adapter
headset plus
adapter
optiPoint 500 basic
X
optiPoint 500 standard,
optiPoint 500 standard
SL (For U.S. Only)
X
optiPoint 500 advance
X
X
optiPoint 600 office
X
X
optiPoint 410 standard
X
X
optiPoint 410 advance
X
X
optiPoint 420 economy
plus
X
optiPoint 420 standard
X
X
optiPoint 420 advance
X
X
optiset E basic
X
optiset E advance plus/
comfort
X
X
optiset E advance conference/conference
X
X
optiset E memory
X
X
1
Accepting and ending calls using the headset keys is only supported if the connection is established using an optiPoint
acoustic adapter.
Information on connecting the headset is provided in the relevant installation instructions.
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-91
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Attendant console versions
10.8
Attendant console versions
10.8.1
optiPoint Attendant
A specially equipped optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500 standard, optiPoint 500 advance or optiPoint 600 office can perform switching services for HiPath 3000/5000. This optiPoint Attendant
simultaneously serves as the intercept position. It is the destination for all incoming non-DID
calls and calls which the call-allocation algorithms are unable to route to users (intercept calls).
The attendant routes these calls to the correct destination.
Standard key assignment (default) for optiPoint Attendant
Service
Night service
Number redial
Internal Phonebook
Microphone on/off
Queued calls
Loudspeaker
Override
Hold
External 1
External 2
Disconnect
Figure 10-34
optiPoint 500 standard - Standard Key Assignment (Default) for optiPoint Attendant
Additional information can be found in the operating manual optiPoint Attendant for HiPath
3000/5000 which is contained on the “Electronic Operating Instructions” CD (see Section 1.6,
“Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com ESY Products).
10-92
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Attendant console versions
10.8.2
optiClient Attendant
Introduction
optiClient Attendant is a PC-based attendant console for HiPath 3000/5000, which can be used
up to six times per system.
The optiClient Attendant can also be operated as a central attendant console in a HiPath 3000/
5000 network.
The new version 7.0 replaces the previous optiClient Attendant V6.0 for all connection types
((V.24, USB and TCP/IP).
HiPath 3000/5000 V5.0 supports optiClient Attendant Version 7.0 or later. It is not possible to
use earlier versions of optiClient Attendant.
Changes in comparison to version 6.0
●
In the optiClient Attendant V7.0 installation package, all software components for TCP/IPbased operation are already included. In addition, only a HiPath ComScendo license is required to start up IP workpoint clients. This means that there is no need to market the optiClient†130 as a basis for an optiClient Attendant-based LAN.
●
optiClient Attendant V7.0 is licensed centrally via HiPath License Management.
●
The functional scope of Version 7.0 is the same as the last edition of optiClient
AttendantV6.0. (Version 6.0.11).
●
The operating systems Windows 98 and NT4.0 are no longer supported.
●
Increased demand is placed on PC system properties (see below).
Main functions
●
Display of queued calls with type, name and telephone number
●
Acoustic message signaling with volume control
●
Display of the switching state of source and target
●
Answering of pending calls
●
Selection of telephone directories:
–
Outlook Contacts
–
HiPath telephone directory
–
Internal Attendant telephone directory, based on Microsoft Access
–
LDAP on Microsoft Active Directory Server
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-93
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Attendant console versions
–
Access to telephone directory CD
●
Notebook function for saving and dialing call numbers
●
Call statistics for incoming calls with sort function according to various criteria
●
Convenient caller list with an almost unlimited number of entries, sorted according to date
and time
●
Additional functions such as hold keys, override, callback, conference, paging, speaker announcements, alarm signaling, view call charges, redial (last 10 dialed destinations)
●
Online help under Windows
●
Convenient configuration of individual features
●
Service tools for diagnosis and protocols
●
Simple installation routine
●
User interface currently available in German, English, Dutch, Portuguese, Italian, French
and Spanish
●
Connection with charges for single calls with automatic display in the notebook (printable)
●
Connection of a blind attendant console
●
Use of busy lamp fields:
–
140 names with 16 characters or 240 call numbers with 6 characters per busy lamp
field
–
Up to three busy lamp fields can be displayed Optional connection of second monitor
–
Configuration of busy lamp fields to suit individual user requirements
–
BLF zoom with automatic font adjustment
–
Speed dialing via busy lamp field
–
Color display of station status: idle, calling, busy internal, busy external, diverted and
do not disturb
–
Memo function for each BLF station for individual user information
–
Configuration of up to two representatives for each BLF station with dialing function
–
Sorting of the busy lamp field or parts of the busy lamp field according to call number
or alphabetically
–
Name definition for BLFs
–
Definition of titles for groups of busy lamp field stations
10-94
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Attendant console versions
optiClient Attendant V7.0 as central attendant console
optiClient Attendant can be used as a central attendant console in an IP network (max. 6 optiClient Attendant per network). To enable network-wide BLF functionality, all attendant consoles
must be connected to one of the network’s HiPath 3000 nodes and registered. This functionality
is independent of the optiClient Attendant connection type (V.24, USB or TCP/IP). For the network-wide Busy Lamp Field function all decentralized systems send their station states (e.g.
free or busy) to the central system, to which the optiClient Attendants are connected. Signaling
takes place in the CorNet-IP protocol (CorNet-NQ protocol tunneled in H.323 via annex M1).
In an IP network, a maximum of 100 stations per node can be defined that send their status
information to the central optiClient Attendant for display on the busy lamp field. The stations
of the central system in the network (to which the optiClient Attendants are connected) can all
be displayed on the busy lamp field of the central attendant console.
Note: The control of the network-wide busy signal via the optiClient Attendant is independent
of the network-wide busy signal to the workpoints clients via HiPath 5000 Presence Manager.
Model-specific data
Topic
HiPath
3800
HiPath
3750
HiPath
3700
HiPath
3550
HiPath
3500
HiPath
3350
HiPath
3300
HiPath
ComScendo
service
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
Maximum number of connectable
optiClient Attendants
6
6
4
4
6
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-95
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Attendant console versions
Connection variants for Microsoft operating systems
Windows®2000 Windows®XP
Connection variant
optiset E control adapters
Yes
Yes
Integrated USB interface (optiPoint 500 and optiPoint 600
office)
Yes
Yes
TCP/IP via HG 1500
Yes
Yes
Additional Microsoft operating systems are not supported.
System requirements
>
If the licensing components - Customer License Agent (CLA) and Customer License
Manager (CLM) - are to be installed on the same PC, their system requirements are
also to be taken into account.
●
Pentium III 750 MHz or higher
●
Min. 128 MB RAM (memory)
●
Graphics resolution min. 1024 x 768 pixels
●
Sound card with speaker for ringer signaling
In the case of Windows®2000, the following configuration must be carried out for signaling
via the sound card: SelectStart/Settings/Control Panel/Sounds and Multimedia/Sounds and activate "Only use preferred devices".
●
Microsoft-compatible mouse
●
CD-ROM or DVD drive
●
Min. 40 MB free hard disk memory
●
Windows®2000 or Windows®XP operating system
●
For operation with a TCP/IP connection: Functional operating system with network and
sound card configured
●
For operation on USB: optiPoint 500 telephone or optiPoint 600 office with free USB interface, USB cable (part number S30267-Z360-A30-1), USB driver (Call-Bridge TU software)
and a free USB port on the PC.
●
For operation using optiset E control adapters: optiset E telephone with free adapter slot
and a free port on the PC (COM port 1-4).
10-96
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Attendant console versions
Licensing
A license is required for optiClient Attendant V7.0. The product is licensed centrally via HiPath
License Management.
Information on the licensing procedure can be found in Section 8.5.
Configuration and operation
Information on installation can be found in the Readme file on the optiClient Attendant product
software CD.
The optiClient Attendant operating instructions are described in detail in the optiClient Attendant Operating Manual for HiPath 3000/5000 which is on the "Electronic Operating Instructions" CD (see Section 1.6, “Information on the Intranet”: Electronic Documentation on Com
ESY Products).
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
10-97
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office
10.9
Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office
The following are examples of the mobile telephones approved for HiPath Cordless Office. For
further information, refer to the appropriate operating instructions and the HiPath Cordless Office service manual.
10.9.1
Gigaset S1 professional
Gigaset S1 professional is a cordless telephone based on the digital DECT/GAP standard.
Figure 10-35
Gigaset S1 professional
Technical Specifications
●
●
Ranges:
–
Outdoors: up to 300 m
–
Indoors: up to 50 m
Operating times:
–
Standby: up to 170 hours
–
Talk time: up to 13 hours
●
Dimensions (L × W × D in mm): 147 × 54 × 26
●
Weight (including battery cells): approx. 130 g
10-98
P31003-H3550-S403-4-7620, 02/05
HiPath 3000 V5.0, HiPath 5000 V5.0, Service Manual
wclient.fm
Workpoint Clients
Mobile Telephones for HiPath Cordless Office
●
Operating temperature (mobile telephone): +5 °C to +45 °C (41 °F to 113 °F)
10.9.2
Gigaset SL1 professional
Gigaset SL1 professional is a very handy and light (only 100 g) mobile telephone based on the
digital DECT/GAP standard.
Figure 10-36
Gigaset SL1 professional
Technical Specifications
●
●
Ranges:
–
Outdoors: up to 300 m
–
Indoors: up to 50 m
Operating times:
–
Standby: up to 250 hours
–
Talk time: up to 15 hours
●
Dimensions (L × W ×